Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 1 - Drawing List

May 2018
PUNE METRO RAIL PROJECT

DRAWING LIST
Drawing Number Drawing Title Remark

GENERAL DRAWINGS
PML1-IC-GA-UGC-0001 Layout of Contract UGC01 & UGC02
PML1-IC-GA-UGC-0001 Typical Details Of Temporary Barricading
WORKS AREA
PML1-IC-WA-CCR-0111 Work Area Drawing For Cut & Cover and Open Ramp at Agriculture College
PML1-IC-WA-SJN-0112 Work Area Drawing For Shivaji Nagar Station
PML1-IC-WA-CVC-0113 Work Area Drawing For Civil Court Station
ALIGNMENT
PML1-IC-AL-UGC-0121 Alignment Drawing - Arrangement of Plan & Longitudinal Section
PML1-IC-AL-UGC-0122 Alignment Drawing - Arrangement of Plan & Longitudinal Section
PML1-IC-AL-UGC-0123 Alignment Drawing - Arrangement of Plan & Longitudinal Section
PML1-IC-AL-UGC-0124 Alignment Drawing - Arrangement of Plan & Longitudinal Section
PML1-IC-AL-UGC-0125 Alignment Drawing - Arrangement of Plan & Longitudinal Section
PML1-IC-AL-UGC-0126 Alignment Drawing - Arrangement of Plan & Longitudinal Section
GEOTECHNICAL
PML1-IC-GP-UGC-0131 Geology and Geotechnical Plan View and Longitudinal Section
PML1-IC-GP-UGC-0132 Geology and Geotechnical Plan View and Longitudinal Section
PML1-IC-GP-UGC-0133 Geology and Geotechnical Plan View and Longitudinal Section
PML1-IC-GP-UGC-0134 Geology and Geotechnical Plan View and Longitudinal Section
PML1-IC-GP-UGC-0135 Geology and Geotechnical Plan View and Longitudinal Section
PML1-IC-GP-UGC-0136 Geology and Geotechnical Plan View and Longitudinal Section
ARCHITECTURAL
PUNE METRO RAIL PROJECT

DRAWING LIST
Drawing Number Drawing Title Remark

PML1-IC-SJN-ARC-0141 Shivaji Nagar Station Street Level Plan

PML1-IC-SJN-ARC-0142 Shivaji Nagar Station Concourse Level Plan
PML1-IC-SJN-ARC-0143 Shivaji Nagar Station Platform Level Plan
PML1-IC-SJN-ARC-0144 Shivaji Nagar Station Sections
PML1-IC-SJN-ARC-0145 Shivaji Nagar Entrance 1 Niranjan Plot
PML1-IC-SJN-ARC-0146 Shivaji Nagar Entrance 3 Aakashwani Side
PML1-IC-SJN-ARC-0147 Shivaji Nagar Railway Interchange
PML1-IC-SJN-ARC-0148 Shivaji Nagar Two Wheeler Parking
PML1-IC-CVC-ARC-0151 Civil Court Station Street Level Plan
PML1-IC-CVC-ARC-0152 Civil Court Station Concourse Level Plan
PML1-IC-CVC-ARC-0153 Civil Court Station Mezzanine Level Plan
PML1-IC-CVC-ARC-0154 Civil Court Station Mezzanine & Platform Level Plan
PML1-IC-CVC-ARC-0155 Civil Court Station Sections
PML1-IC-STN-ARC-0161 Design Intent Public Areas
PML1-IC-STN-ARC-0162 Design Intent Architectural Elements
PML1-IC-STN-ARC-0163 Design Intent Architectural Elements
ELECTRICAL SERVICES
PML1-IC-GA-EL-0005 General Electrical Symbols
PML1-IC-GA-EL-0006 General Electrical Symbols
PML1-IC-GA-EL-0007 Electrical Typical Details
PML1-IC-GA-EL-0008 Electrical Typical Details
PUNE METRO RAIL PROJECT

DRAWING LIST
Drawing Number Drawing Title Remark

PML1-IC-GA-EL-0009 Electrical Typical Details

PML1-IC-GA-EL-0010 Electrical Typical Details
PML1-IC-GA-EL-0011 Typical Earth Mat Schematic
PML1-IC-GA-EL-0012 Typical Earth Mat Schematic
PML1-IC-GA-EL-0013 Lighting Control Schematic
PML1-IC-GA-EL-0014 PWR Distribution Schematic
PML1-IC-GA-EL-0015 Typical LV Schematic
PLUMBING
PML1-IC-GA-PL-0021 Plumbing - General Notes and Legends
PML1-IC-GA-PL-0022 Water Supply Schematic
PML1-IC-GA-PL-0023 Plumbing Typical Details
PML1-IC-GA-PL-0024 Plumbing Typical Details
PML1-IC-GA-PL-0025 Plumbing Typical Details
PML1-IC-GA-PL-0026 Typical Station Drainage Schematic
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PML1-IC-GA-FA-0031 Fire Alarm System - General Notes and Legends
PML1-IC-GA-FA-0032 Fire Alarm Schematic
PML1-IC-GA-FA-0033 Fire Alarm System - Typical Details
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
PML1-IC-GA-FF-0041 Fire Fighting System - General Notes and Legends
PML1-IC-GA-FF-0042 Fire Fighting System - Fire Fighting Schematic
PUNE METRO RAIL PROJECT

DRAWING LIST
Drawing Number Drawing Title Remark

PML1-IC-GA-FF-0043 Fire Fighting System - Typical Layout

PML1-IC-GA-FF-0044 Fire Fighting System - Fire Plant Room - G.A Plan
PML1-IC-GA-FF-0045 Fire Fighting System - Typical Details
TUNNEL AND CROSS-PASSAGES
PML1-IC-RT-CP-0051 Arrangement of Cross Passage Without Sump
PML1-IC-RT-CP-0052 Arrangement of Cross Passage With Sump
PML1-IC-RT-CS-0053 Arrangement of Running Twin Bored Tunnel
PML1-IC-RT-CS-0054 Arrangement of Running Tunnel Segment And Geometry
PML1-IC-RT-CS-0056 Arrangement of Running Tunnel Steel Walkway and ladder details
PML1-IC-RT-CS-0057 Arrangement of NATM Cross Over Section at Civil Court
STRUCTURAL ARRANGEMENT
PML1-IC-ST-CCR-0171 Cut & CoverTunnel & Open Ramp at Agriculture College Typical Cross Section
INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING DRAWINGS
PML1-IC-GA-IM-0061 Instrumentation and Monitoring Drawing - General Notes
PML1-IC-GA-IM-0062 Instrumentation and Monitoring Drawing - General Notes
PML1-IC-GA-IM-0063 Instrumentation and Monitoring Drawing - Typical Details
PML1-IC-GA-IM-0064 Instrumentation and Monitoring Drawing - Typical Details
PML1-IC-GA-IM-0065 Typical Section For TBM Tunnel and Cross Passages
PML1-IC-GA-IM-0066 Details For Arrays For Cut & Cover Structure, Launch Shaft
INTERFACE DRAWINGS
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0071 Services in Bored Tunnel
PUNE METRO RAIL PROJECT

DRAWING LIST
Drawing Number Drawing Title Remark

PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0072 Trench Details for Gates

PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0073 Ticket Office Counter
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0074 M&E Scada Architecture
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0075 Interface B/W Fire FF & ESC
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0076 Typical Earth Mat Layout
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0077 Drainage for VAC
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0078 Control Philosophy
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0079 Division of Scope
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0080 Wall Ceiling Detail for VAC
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0081 Wall Ceiling Detail for TVS
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0082 Details for TES & UPS
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0083 Pedestal Details-TVS
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0084 Pedestal Details-ECS
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0085 TVS Electrical Arrangement
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0086 Scope Demarcation in ASS Rooms
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0087 Jet Fan Locations - 1
PML1-IC-GA-IRF-0088 Jet Fan Locations - 2
UTILITY DRAWINGS
PML1-IC-SSN-ULT-0191 Utility Drawing for Shivaji Nagar Station
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 2A – Works Area

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2A – Works Area

WORKS AREA
(1) The Site and works Areas will be made available to the Contractor at different times and
for various durations as shown on the Schedule of Access Dates in this Appendix. These
Site and works Areas are illustrated in the Employer’s Drawings. Should there be any
discrepancies in the definition of the extent of these Sites and Works Areas between the
descriptions in this Appendix and the Employer’s Drawings, the Employer’s Drawings
shall prevail.
(2) The Employer may, however, give to the Contractor access to portions of the Site and
Works Areas earlier than the time stated and the Contractor shall accept them. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment for early access of any
portion of the Site or works Areas.
(3) The descriptions of the Site and Works Areas given below are indicative and the
Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the exact nature of the various Site and works
Areas and the extent of works to be carried out prior to the execution of the Permanent
Works or making use of the area as working space and/or for temporary site facilities.
(4) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for a notice of no objection, a written
proposal for the use and occupation of these Site and works Areas at least 6 week prior
to the programmed use of the requested areas. The availability of Site and works Areas
will only be permitted for the actual duration of the permanent and temporary works
within the particular Site and works Areas. The Contractor shall comply with the
Employer’s Requirements as stated in Appendix 8 of this Section VI regarding the use of
the Site and works Areas.
(5) The Contractor is deemed to have acquainted himself with the actual location and
conditions of the Site and allow for any contingency with regard to the means of access
and any special Site restrictions including making good all works disturbed or damaged
to match with the existing.
(7) The Contractor shall propose controlled access points to the Site and works Areas from
the existing roads in different periods for a notice from the Engineer. The Contractor
shall not construct any temporary roadways which may be necessary to afford access to
his Site and working Areas without a prior notice from the Engineer.
(8) The Contractor shall ensure that all approved accesses shall not impose any constraints
and hazard to existing establishments or to other works by Interfacing Contractors. If
such accesses are required to be relocated, deleted or closed as may be directed by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall do so at his own costs and time.
(9) The Contractor shall maintain at all times all existing roads, road traffic, road accesses,
traffic junctions, pedestrian routes and access to existing buildings within the Site and
works Areas during all stages of the traffic diversion schemes he may propose for the
execution of the Works. The Contractor shall submit his proposal, for a notice from the
Engineer, after having received approval from all Relevant Authorities, for the provision
of temporary accesses required at any existing building(s) to ensure continuation of
access for the public and to facilitate construction of the Works.
(10) Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor shall protect all existing buildings and
structures, either located within or adjacent to, the Site and works Areas to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
(11) If any land and/or right of way, other than the Site and works Areas shown on the
Employer’s Drawings, is required by the Contractor for the purpose of the execution of

Pag e |1
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2A – Works Area

the Works, such as for temporary diversion, ground treatment, storage, site offices for
the Contractor or the Engineer, etc... the same shall be arranged by the Contractor at
his own risk and cost. The Employer where feasible may at his discretion assist the
Contractor in this respect.
(12) Schedule of Site Access Dates:
The land parcels as shown in Works Area Tender Drawings will be shared in piece and
parcels based on the Contractor’s construction programme and upon receipt of
request from Contractor.
At Agriculture College, the advanced Contract Package for construction of temporary
shaft walling will be working alongside the Package 1 Contractor. The Works area
sharing dates shall be coordinated and confirmed with advanced Contract Package
and submitted for Engineer’s Notice.
(12) Provision of Facilities and Access for Interfacing Contractors.
a) The Contractor is obliged to coordinate with the Interfacing Contractors and
provide storage (a fenced off area in accordance with the agreed schedule,
including water, electricity connections and access to the road and track),
staging and unloading areas for them, as required in the Contract. The
Interfacing Contractors shall be required to maintain the fenced off area and
access thereto, from when the Contractor has completed his Works and after
the handover of the balance Site Areas from the Contractor to the Employer.
The Interfacing Contractor will be responsible for security, clearing and
reinstating this Site Area in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor
shall be responsible for clearing and reinstating the remaining site areas not
used by the Interfacing Contractor.
b) All Site Areas shall be handed back to the Employer, with the exception of the
fenced area and access for the Interfacing Contractor, within 28 days from the
date of issue of the Taking Over Certificate. Prior to returning any Site Areas
to the Employer, the Contractor shall carry out the following works:
(i) Construct all Permanent Works within the area in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract;
(ii) Reinstate the area to its original condition, or better, when it was taken
over, except where the Contract requires construction of Permanent
Works;
(iii) Propose final modifications / changes to the area, at locations where it is
not possible or desirable to reinstate the area to its original condition, to
the satisfaction of the Engineer, and form the area to the agreed lines and
levels, and carry out such other works as may be required by the Engineer;
(iv) Removal of all rubbish, debris and other materials
(13) Interface Coordination for TBM Operations at Budhwar Peth Station
(i) The Design and Construction of Underground Stations at Budhawar Peth,
Mandai and Swargate and Tunnels from Budhwar Peth Station to Swargate
Station shall be done by the adjacent contractor (contract package UGC-02).
The Contractor will have Civil and MEP works interface with the adjacent
Civil Contractor at Budhwar Peth station. At the contract boundary with
UGC-02 at Budhwar Peth Station, the Contractor shall co-ordinate to UGC-02
to carry out any ground treatment/improvement works, if required, for his
TBM retrieval operations. The area required for the TBM operations etc and

Pag e |2
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2A – Works Area

its duration shall be coordinated and agreed between the two Contractors
depending upon the construction methodology and the Works Programme of
the two Contractors, and it will be subject to the Notice of No Objection of
the Engineer.
(ii) The Contractor (UGC-01) shall retrieve the Tunnel Boring Machines from
Budhwar Peth station by dragging them back from the contract boundary to
suitable point of retrieval as per his convenience. For this purpose the
Contractor-UGC-01 shall interface with the UGC-02 Civil Contractor for the
design and construction of the facilities that may be required in Budhwar
Peth station’s temporary and permanent works for enabling UGC-01
contractor ( the Contractor) to break- through , such that all the enabling
works and the designs & construction of Budhwar peth station are fully
coordinated for ensuring compatibility and meeting construction
programmes of the two contractors and as approved by the Engineer. The
UGC-02 Contractor shall give UGC-01 Contractor the required access through
the station at Budhwar Peth, if required as per the methodology. This access
will be required for all the works associated with the UGC-01 Contractor’s
TBM retrieval and removal of TBM equipment. The Contractor UGC-02 shall
allow for a reasonable duration for the handover period of the work area and
access to the station for the Contractor in order for UGC-01 to complete his
TBM dismantling and removal, as per the mutually consented methodology of
retrieval. This duration shall be coordinated and agreed between the two
Contractors, and it will be subject to the Notice of No Objection by the
Engineer.
(iii) If the Budhwar Peth station NATM portion is not ready in order to drag TBM
(of Package 1) as mentioned above, following shall apply. Costing for this shall
be included in Contractor’s final proposal and shall be shown separately.
a) UGC01 Contractor shall bored through the TBM from NATM portion at
Budhwar Peth station and retrieve the same from the cut & cover
portion of Budhwar Peth station.
OR
UGC-01 shall dismantle and take the TBM parts from the tunnel; back to
Civil Court station. The TBM shield shall be considered as sacrificial
shield and lining shall be designed considering the requirements. The
cutter heads shall be cut in part and again taken out from Civil Court
station. No additional cost for cutter head, TBM shield or any other
parts not suitable to use in further work or the cost incurred in
operation will be paid extra by Employer, and same is supposed to be
deemed in Contractors proposal to be submitted and shown separately.
(iv) At all times, both UGC-01 and UGC-02 Contractors shall ensure that suitable
measures are taken to prevent any risks from flooding or water run-off to the
adjacent Contractor’s works. The measures shall be to the acceptance of the
Engineer. Both UGC-01 and UGC-02 Contractors shall be fully responsible for
their own temporary drainage systems to keep their respective work areas
dry and free from flooding. Each Contractor shall provide their bulkhead
where necessary.
(v) The UGC-01 Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all costs,
charges and expenses resulting from his failure to properly co-ordinate the
Works and the interfaces with UGC-02 Contractor. The UGC-01 Contractor

Pag e |3
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2A – Works Area

shall allow in his programme the coordination and period of access from
UGC-02 Contractor to carry out the works in Budhwar Peth Station duly
interfacing the requirements.
(14) Interface Coordination for Sharing Works area and completed works by Advanced
Contract for Agriculture College Temporary Shaft (UGC-04) :
(i) Construction of temporary launching shaft at agriculture college UGC-04 is
under progress. UGC-01 Contractor shall coordinate with DDC for UGC-04
Contract and give UGC-04 Contract DDC the inputs related the TBM forces
and requirements for mobilization of construction equipment’s for him to
take in to account the surcharge in him temporary construction scheme
OR
if UGC-04 contract has already progressed in his design and construction in
such case UGC-01 shall respect the loading condition assumption given by
UGC-04 Contract DDC.
(ii) UGC-01 shall share his TBM launching programme with UGC-04 Contractor.
(iii) UGC-01 Contract shall agree on sharing of work area along with the site
access road with UGC-04 Contract
(iv) The UGC-01 Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all costs,
charges and expenses resulting from his failure to properly co-ordinate the
Works and the interfaces with UGC-04 Contractor.
(v) Both UGC-01 and UGC-04 Contractors shall be fully responsible for their own
temporary drainage systems to keep their respective work areas dry and free
from flooding.
(vi) The UGC-01 Contractor shall allow in his programme the coordination and
period of access from UGC-04 Contractor to carry out the works in Agriculture
College Temporary Shaft duly interfacing the requirements.

Pag e |4
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion Dates

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

CONTRACT KEY DATES

Key Date for Employer/Engineer Site Office’s:
Contractor shall establish a site office for Employer/Engineer at designated location within 45 days of
from contract commencement date.
In case Contractor failed to do so a penalty of 0.0005 % of fixed lump sum quoted in Price centre B
per day of delay for the work will be incurred from Contractor.

Key Dates : Shivaji Nagar Station

Key Dates Description Number of days Delay Damages for

from non-achieving the
Commencement Key Dates

KD-1 Design Co-ordination and site investigations 140 0.025% of the fixed
submission lump sum quoted in
Price Centre “B” per
day of delay for the
Key date
KD-2 Preliminary Design Submission 182 0.025% of the fixed
lump sum quoted in
Price Centre “B” per
day of delay for the
Key date
KD-3 Completion Excavation for station box 336 0.025% of the fixed
lump sum quoted in
Price Centre “B” per
day of delay for the
Key date
KD-4A Definitive Design Submission for Permanent 334 0.005% of the fixed
Structures including Architectural and lump sum quoted in
Structural for base slab Price Centre “B” per
day of delay for the
Key date
KD-4B Definitive Design Submission for Permanent 518 0.005% of the fixed
Structures including Architectural and lump sum quoted in
Structural for complete station Price Centre “B” per
day of delay for the
Key date
KD-5 Base slab construction for the station 399 0.025% of the fixed
including installation of waterproofing lump sum quoted in
membrane, toe in of slab (if any) and Price Centre “B” per
installation of tension piles (if any) day of delay for the
Key date
KD-6 Achieve substantial completion of the 672 0.01% of the fixed
following station rooms/areas lump sum quoted in
 To Provide access to all Interfacing Price Centre “B” per

Pag e |1
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Key Dates Description Number of days Delay Damages for

from non-achieving the
Commencement Key Dates

Contractors of Group 1 station rooms day of delay for the

finished to Degree 3 completion Key date
 To provide access to Lift & Escalator
Contractor on Station entrance and
structure on Concourse and
Mezzanine (wherever applicable)
Level finished to Degree 2
completion
 All tunnel ventilation shafts
KD-7 Achieve substantial completion of 735 0.01% of the fixed
station public Concourse/Mezzanine lump sum quoted in
(wherever applicable) Level areas Price Centre “B” per
including entrances finished to Degree 2 day of delay for the
completion and provide access to all Key date
Interfacing Contractors
KD-8 Achieve substantial completion of 819 0.01% of the fixed
station track areas finished to Degree 1 lump sum quoted in
completion and provide access to Price Centre “B” per
interfacing contractors day of delay for the
Key date
KD-9 Achieve substantial completion of 847 0.01% of the fixed
station structures on Platform Level lump sum quoted in
finished to Degree 2 completion and Price Centre “B” per
provide access to Lift & Escalator day of delay for the
Contractor Key date
KD-10 Achieve substantial completion of the 903 0.01% of the fixed
following station rooms / areas and lump sum quoted in
provide access to all Interfacing Price Centre “B” per
Contractors day of delay for the
 Group 1 station rooms in the Key date
ancillary buildings on Street Level
to finished Degree 3 completion
Platform screen door work zones
to finished Degree 2 completion
KD-11 Achieve substantial completion of 945 0.01% of the fixed
station Platform Level areas finished to lump sum quoted in
Degree 2 completion and provide Price Centre “B” per
access to all Interfacing contractors day of delay for the
Key date
KD-12 Achieve substantial completion of the 945 0.01% of the fixed
following station rooms after removal lump sum quoted in
of TBM working shaft (wherever Price Centre “B” per
provided in station areas) and provide day of delay for the
access to all Interfacing Contractors Key date
Group 1 station rooms on

Pag e |2
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Key Dates Description Number of days Delay Damages for

from non-achieving the
Commencement Key Dates

Concourse/Mezzanine (wherever
applicable) Level finished to Degree 3
completion
KD-13 Achieve substantial completion of the 1008 0.01% of the fixed
following station rooms and public lump sum quoted in
Concourse/Mezzanine (wherever Price Centre “B” per
applicable) Level areas and provide day of delay for the
access to AFC Contractor Key date
Groups 2a and 2b station rooms and
areas on Concourse/Mezzanine
(wherever applicable) Level finished to
Degree 3 completion
KD-14 Achieve substantial completion of all 1183 0.05% of the fixed
E&M works (including DG set and UPS) lump sum quoted in
to permit permanent power on to all Price Centre “B” per
stations and Complete all architectural day of delay for the
finishing and signage works in all Key date
respects
KD-15 Achieve issuance of Taking Over 1270 0.05% of the fixed
Certificate (all completed to degree 4 lump sum quoted in
completion) Price Centre “B” per
day of delay for the
Key date

Pag e |3
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Key Dates: Civil Court Station

Key Description Number of days Delay Damages for non-
Dates from achieving the Key Dates
Commencement
KD-1 Design Co-ordination and site 140 0.025% of the fixed lump
investigations submission sum quoted in Price
Centre “B” per day of
delay for the Key date
KD-2 Preliminary Design Submission 182 0.025% of the fixed lump
sum quoted in Price
Centre “B” per day of
delay for the Key date
KD-3 Completion Excavation for All station box 364 0.025% of the fixed lump
sum quoted in Price
Centre “C” per day of
delay for the Key date
KD-4A Definitive Design Submission for 334 0.005% of the fixed lump
Permanent Structures including sum quoted in Price
Architectural and Structural for base slab Centre “C” per day of
delay for the Key date
KD-4B Definitive Design Submission for 546 0.005% of the fixed lump
Permanent Structures including sum quoted in Price
Architectural and Structural for complete Centre “C” per day of
station delay for the Key date
KD-5 Base slab construction for the station 434 0.025% of the fixed lump
including installation of waterproofing sum quoted in Price
membrane, toe in of slab (if any) and Centre “C” per day of
installation of tension piles (if any) delay for the Key date
KD-6 Achieve substantial completion of the 772 0.025% of the fixed lump
following station rooms/areas sum quoted in Price
 To Provide access to all Interfacing Centre “C” per day of
Contractors of Group 1 station rooms delay for the Key date
finished to Degree 3 completion
 To provide access to Lift &
Escalator Contractor on Station
entrance and structure on
Concourse and Mezzanine
(wherever applicable) Level
finished to Degree 2 completion
 All tunnel ventilation shafts
KD-7 Achieve substantial completion of 735 0.01% of the fixed lump
station public Concourse/Mezzanine sum quoted in Price
(wherever applicable) Level areas Centre “C” per day of
including elevated station structure delay for the Key date
and all entrances finished to Degree 2
completion and provide access to all
Interfacing Contractors
KD-8 Achieve substantial completion of 819 0.01% of the fixed lump
station track areas finished to Degree sum quoted in Price
1 completion and provide access to

Pag e |4
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Key Description Number of days Delay Damages for non-

Dates from achieving the Key Dates
Commencement
interfacing contractors Centre “C” per day of
delay for the Key date
KD-9 Achieve substantial completion of 847 0.01% of the fixed lump
station structures on Platform Level sum quoted in Price
finished to Degree 2 completion and Centre “C” per day of
provide access to Lift & Escalator delay for the Key date
Contractor
KD-10 Achieve substantial completion of the 903 0.01% of the fixed lump
following station rooms / areas and sum quoted in Price
provide access to all Interfacing Centre “C” per day of
Contractors delay for the Key date
 Group 1 station rooms in the
ancillary buildings on Street Level
to finished Degree 3 completion
Platform screen door work zones
to finished Degree 2 completion
KD-11 Achieve substantial completion of 945 0.01% of the fixed lump
station Platform Level areas finished sum quoted in Price
to Degree 2 completion and provide Centre “C” per day of
access to all Interfacing contractors delay for the Key date
KD-12 Achieve substantial completion of the 1092 0.01% of the fixed lump
following station rooms after removal sum quoted in Price
of TBM working shaft (wherever Centre “C” per day of
provided in station areas) and provide delay for the Key date
access to all Interfacing Contractors
Group 1 station rooms on
Concourse/Mezzanine (wherever
applicable) Level finished to Degree 3
completion
KD-13 Achieve substantial completion of the 1008 0.01% of the fixed lump
following station rooms and public sum quoted in Price
Concourse/Mezzanine (wherever Centre “C” per day of
applicable) Level areas and provide delay for the Key date
access to AFC Contractor
Groups 2a and 2b station rooms and
areas on Concourse/Mezzanine
(wherever applicable) Level finished
to Degree 3 completion
KD-14 Achieve substantial completion of all 1183 0.01% of the fixed lump
E&M works (including DG set and UPS) sum quoted in Price
to permit permanent power on to all Centre “C” per day of
stations and Complete all delay for the Key date
architectural finishing and signage
works in all respects
KD-15 Achieve issuance of Taking Over 1270 0.05% of the fixed lump
Certificate (all completed to degree 4 sum quoted in Price
completion) Centre “C” per day of
delay for the Key date

Pag e |5
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Tunnel Key Dates

Key Description Number of days Delay Damages for non-achieving

Dates from the Key Dates
Commencement
KD-1 Preliminary Design Submission 63 0.025% of the fixed lump sum
and Finalization of TBM design quoted in Price Centre “D,E & F”
and proceed for manufacturing per day of delay for the Key date
KD-2 Design Co-ordination and site 140 0.025% of the fixed lump sum
investigations submission quoted in Price Centre “D,E & F”
per day of delay for the Key date
KD-3 Submission of Definitive Design 181 0.025% of the fixed lump sum
quoted in Price Centre “D,E & F”
per day of delay for the Key date
KD-4 Completion of casting yard and 224 0.025% of the fixed lump sum
first segment quoted in Price Centre “B,C,D,E & F”
per day of delay for the Key date
KD-5 Assembling and Start of Initial 364 0.025% of the fixed lump sum
drive for TBM-1 quoted in Price Centre “D & F” per
day of delay for the Key date
KD-6 Assembling and Start of Initial 392 0.025 % of the fixed lump sum
drive for TBM-2 quoted in Price Centre “D & F” per
day of delay for the Key date
KD-7A TBM 1 Arrival at Shivaji Nagar 553 0.005 % of the fixed lump sum
Station (Drive Agriculture quoted in Price Centre “D” per day
College to Shivaji Nagar Station ) of delay for the Key date
KD-7B TBM 2 Arrival at Shivaji Nagar 581 0.005 % of the fixed lump sum
Station (Drive Agriculture quoted in Price Centre “D” per day
College to Shivaji Nagar Station ) of delay for the Key date
KD-8A TBM 1 Arrival at Civil Court 700 0.005 % of the fixed lump sum
Station (Drive Shivaji Nagar to quoted in Price Centre “D & E” per
Civil Court Station) day of delay for the Key date
KD-8B TBM 2 Arrival at Civil Court 735 0.005 % of the fixed lump sum
Station (Drive Shivaji Nagar to quoted in Price Centre “D & E” per
Civil Court Station) day of delay for the Key date
KD-9A TBM 1 Arrival at Budhwar Peth 1001 0.05 % of the fixed lump sum
Station (Drive Civil Court Station quoted in Price Centre “D” per day
to Budhwar Peth Station) of delay for the Key date
KD-9B TBM 2 Arrival at Budhwar Peth 1036 0.05 % of the fixed lump sum
Station (Drive Civil Court Station quoted in Price Centre “D” per day
to Budhwar Peth Station) of delay for the Key date
KD-10A Achieve substantial completion 819 0.025 % of the fixed lump sum
of all bored tunnels (including quoted in Price Centre “D, E & F”
cross passages and cut & cover per day of delay for the Key date
tunnel) finished to Degree 1
completion and provide access
to Track work and other
Interfacing Contractors on

Pag e |6
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Key Description Number of days Delay Damages for non-achieving

Dates from the Key Dates
Commencement
bored tunnels stretch from
Agriculture College to Civil Court
Station
KD-10B Achieve substantial completion 1120 0.025 % of the fixed lump sum
of all bored tunnels (including quoted in Price Centre “D, E & F”
cross passages and cut & cover per day of delay for the Key date
tunnel) finished to Degree 1
completion and provide access
to Track work and other
Interfacing Contractors on
bored tunnels stretch from Civil
Court Station to Budhwar Peth
Station
KD- 11 Achieve substantial completion 1183 0.025 % of the fixed lump sum
of cross passages and provide quoted in Price Centre “D, E & F”
access to Interfacing per day of delay for the Key date
Contractors
KD-12 Achieve substantial completion 973 0.025 % of the fixed lump sum
of track areas (in turn- out areas) quoted in Price Centre “D & E” per
finished to Degree 1 completion day of delay for the Key date
and provide access to Track
work and other Interfacing
Contractors
KD-13 Achieve substantial completion 1183 0.05 % of the fixed lump sum
of all E&M works (including DG quoted in Price Centre “D, E & F”
set & UPS) to permit permanent per day of delay for the Key date
power on to all tunnels and
complete all works in all
respects
KD-14 Achieve issuance of taking over 0.05 % of the fixed lump sum
certificate(all completed to 1270 quoted in Price Centre “D, E & F”
degree 4 completion) per day of delay for the Key date

Notes to Key Dates:

1. The achievement of Key Date shall be subject to the issuing of a notice of no objection from the
Engineer.
2. The achievement of a Degree of Completion shall require the completion of works for that
particular Degree of Completion and all preceding ones.
3. The Degree of Completion shall be read in conjunction with the Interface Specifications (interface
related Contract requirements and Stipulations) to establish access requirements for Interfacing
Contractors.
4. The access and order for completion of the work specified within each Key Date and within each
Degree of Completion shall be coordinated among the Interfacing Contractors in the
development of the Coordinated Installation Programme (CIP) and Track Related Installation
Programme (TRIP).

Pag e |7
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Degree of Completion for Station Rooms (Including those on Platform, tunnel (s) and cross-
passages in NATM Stations)

Degree 1 Degree 2 Degree 3 Degree 4

 Structure complete,  Complete  Complete wall  Complete all
clean, dry and all fixing brackets painting electrical and
works area to be for pedestal  Complete all cable light fittings
watertight and for raised containment leading  Complete all fire
weatherproof floor to, and inside the protection and
 Cast-in and concealed  Earthing and equipment rooms detectors
components complete bonding  Complete all cable  Louvres and
 Movement and complete riser / shafts grilles installed
expansion joints  Contractor’s  Complete all E & M  All finishes
installed Equipment services except final including
 Partition walls removed fittings signage
complete with  Temporary  Complete wall, raised complete
penetrations and plant power and floor and false flooring  Permanent LV
delivery openings lighting in SER/CER and SCR including UPS
formed available / floor finishes, and supply available
 Plant plinths complete  Suitable work ceiling / false ceiling,  Permanent
and survey accepted and storage except for locations doors and
 Complete floor screed areas where these works ironmongery
 Complete permanent available for have to be completed installed
framing for doors, Interfacing after completion of  Complete all
hatches, and other Contractors works by the works including
openings  Lifting Interfacing Contractors testing and
 Complete wall facilities  Complete all commissioning
plastering and all installed and internal glazing
finishing works for certified  Temporary doors
wall prior to painting  Clear route with locks installed
 Drainage system and available for  Temporary air-
discharge connection plant access conditioning /
complete and ventilation available
 Complete sealant for equipment  Openings and service
ceiling and floor delivery penetrations
 Complete air and  Survey temporarily blanked
services ducts reference lines off
available
 Complete TVS
shafts

Pag e |8
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Group 1
Signal Equipment Room (SER) Signaling Control Panel Room

Communication Equipment Rooms (CER) Telecommunication Closet

33kV MV Switchgear Room 33/0.415kV Transformer Room (ASS)

Any Power Supply or Traction related rooms/

facilities
Platform Screen Door related rooms Station Control Room (SCR)
(if required)

Tunnel Ventilation Machine Rooms Ventilation and Air Conditioning Mechanical Rooms

Chiller Plant Room

Group 2a
Ticket Office (TO)

Excess Fare Office Other Rooms

Note: Interfacing Contractors installation and access requirements shall be agreed during
interface coordination meetings and in accordance with Appendix 19 of this Section VI, Part 2.

Pag e |9
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Degree of Completion for Tunnels (Other than Tunnel (s) in NATM Stations)

Degree 1 Degree 2 Degree 3 Degree 4

 Tunnel structure complete, clean,  Not  Permanent  Complete all
dry and watertight applica cross- passage works including
 Trackbed concrete (including shear ble doors testing and
connectors), walkway, cable trough ironmongery commissioning
/ duct complete and surveyed. As- installed
built records on track centre line  All graphics and
level and alignment available signage
 Complete all trackside cable complete
containment, cable supports, and  Permanent
all mounting facilities for Power system
Interfacing Contractors including
 Earthing and bonding Uninterruptible
connections complete Power Supply
 Drainage system and discharge (UPS) system
connection complete with complete
temporary pumps  Permanent
 Temporary tunnel ventilation, Tunnel Lighting
background lighting, power, and system
water, available for Interfacing complete
Contractors  Permanent
 Clear routes available for plant E&M system
access complete
 Lifting facilities installed and  Energisation
certified of main LV
 Permanent cross-passage and switchboards
door installed complete and
 Contractor's Equipment permanent LV
removed supply
 All provisions stipulated in the available
Interface Specification (interface  Permanent
related Contract requirements and pumps installed
Stipulations) required for access and
by Trackworks Contractor commissioned
available

P a g e | 10
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Degree of Completion for Station Track Area

Degree 1 Degree 2 Degree 3 Degree 4

 Complete station structures for  Not  All cabling and  All works
the track, including all ductings, applicable wiring complete including
ventilation shafts, plenums,  Graphics, testing and
nozzles, and other fixtures above, advertising commissioning
under and adjacent to the track panels and complete
 Complete waterproofing for signages installed
the station track structure  Permanent Lighting
 Joint sealants complete systems
commissioned
 Track bed, walkway, derailment
curb complete and survey accepted  Permanent E
& M systems
 Complete all trackside cable
complete
containments and mounting
facilities for Interfacing  Permanent
Contractors pumps
commissioned
 Earthing and bonding connections
complete and test results  Complete all
accepted permanent fixtures

 Advertising panel brackets installed  All openings and

service penetrations
 Drainage system and discharge
sealed
connection complete and
operational with temporary
pumps
 Temporary ventilation, background
lighting, power, and water,
available for Interfacing
Contractors
 Clear routes available for
plant access, equipment and
track concrete delivery
 Lifting facilities installed
and certified
 Contractor’s equipment removed

 Cast-in and concealed components

complete

P a g e | 11
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Degree of Completion for Platform Screen Door Work Zone (area within 3m from platform
edge)

Degree 1 Degree 2 Degree 3 Degree 4

 Structure  Earthing and  Complete  Complete all
complete, clean, bonding complete installation wall, ceiling /
dry and all and tested and testing of false ceiling and
works area to be accepted insulation floor finishes
weatherproof  Contractor’s membrane  Complete all E &
 Cast-in and Equipment M services
concealed removed  Complete all
component  Temporary power fire protection
s complete and lighting and detectors
 Movement and available  Louvres and
expansion  Suitable work and grilles
joints installed storage areas installed
 Partition walls available for  All finishes
complete with Interfacing including signage
penetrations Contractors complete
and plant  Header I-beam and  Permanent LV
delivery works on threshold supply available
openings complete with  All openings and
formed survey accepted service
 Clear plant access penetrations
and delivery routes sealed
available  Complete all
works
including
testing and
commissioning

P a g e | 12
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Degree of Completion for Station Concourse/Mezzanine (wherever applicable) and

Platform Areas, including Entrances (excluding PSD Work Zones)

Degree 1 Degree 2 Degree 3 Degree 4

 Structure  Complete all cable  Complete all  Complete all
complete, clean, containment in wall, ceiling / electrical and
dry and all works concourse and false ceiling and light fittings
area to be platform area for floor finishes,  Complete all fire
watertight and Interfacing Contractors except for protection and
weatherproof including connection to locations where detectors
 Cast-in and trackside the works have  Louvres and
concealed  Earthing and to be carried out grilles installed
component bonding complete after the  All finishes
s complete  Contractor’s completion of including signage
 Movement and Equipment removed works by complete
expansion  Temporary power Interfacing  Permanent LV
joints installed and lighting Contractors supply including
 Partition walls available  Joinery/framing/ UPS available
complete with  Suitable work and counter for  All openings and
penetrations storage areas supporting AFC service
and plant available for Contractor’s penetrations
delivery Interfacing equipment sealed
openings Contractors available  Complete all
formed  Clear route available for works including
 Complete plant access and testing and
floor screed delivery commissioning
 Drainage system  Survey reference
and discharge lines available
connection  Complete mounting
complete bracket, primary
 Complete ceiling support frame,
permanent power and data points
framing for doors, for Interfacing
hatches, and other Contractors
openings

Group 2b

Ticket Hall (paid and unpaid areas)

P a g e | 13
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Degree of Completion for Lifts & Escalators

(a) Lift Shafts

Degree 1 Degree 2 Degree 3 Degree 4

 Structure complete,  Earthing and bonding  Not  Complete all
clean, dry and all complete applicable wall, ceiling and
works area to be  Contractor’s floor finishes
watertight and Equipment removed including
weatherproof  Temporary power and signages
 Cast-in and lighting available  Complete all
concealed  Suitable work and electrical and
components storage areas light fittings
complete available for  Complete all
 Openings to lift Interfacing fire protection
machine room and Contractors and detectors
lift shaft available  Lifting facilities  All finishes
 Partition walls installed and certified including
complete with  Clear routes signage
penetrations and available for plant complete
plant delivery access and delivery  All openings
openings formed  Survey reference and service
 Plant plinths lines available penetrations
complete and  Shaft alignment, sealed
survey accepted location of  Complete all
 Drainage system penetrations and works including
and discharge openings surveyed testing and
connection and accepted commissioning
complete  Complete builder’s
 Complete floor works provisions for
screeding buffers area
 Complete structural
frames and
associated fixtures
for lift shafts
 Provide temporary
safety barrier at
landing, lift shaft and
other openings

P a g e | 14
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 2B – Contract Key Dates & Completion dates

Escalator Zones

Degree 1 Degree 2 Degree 3 Degree 4

 Escalator pits  Earthing and  Complete cable  Complete all
complete, clean, bonding complete containment and wall, ceiling and
dry and  Contractor’s fire protection floor finishes
watertight Equipment within the  Complete all
 Cast-in and removed escalator electrical and light
concealed  Temporary power structure fittings
components and lighting  Complete  Complete all
complete available installation of fire protection
 Plant plinths  Suitable work and isolators / and detectors
complete and storage areas distribution  Louvres and
survey accepted available for boards grilles installed
 Drainage system Interfacing  All finishes
and discharge Contractors including signage
connection  Lifting facilities for complete
complete escalator installed  Permanent LV
 Complete and certified supply available
permanent  Clear routes  All openings and
framings for doors, available for plant service
hatches and other access and delivery penetrations
openings  Survey reference sealed
lines available  Complete floor
 Alignment (vertical finishes at
and horizontal) and landings
recess supports,  Complete balustrade
including and barrier around
intermediate the escalator voids
supports surveyed  Complete all works
and accepted including testing
 Provide temporary and commissioning
safety barrier at
landing and other
openings

Group – Lifts and Escalators

Escalator Zone Lift Shaft

P a g e | 15
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 3 – Project Calendar

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 3 – Project Calendar

PROJECT CALENDAR
(1) The Project Week shall commence on a Monday. A day shall be deemed to
commence at 0001 hour on the morning of the day in question. Where reference is
made to the completion of an activity or Milestone by a particular week, this shall
mean by midnight on the Sunday of that week.
(2) Requirements for the computation of Key Dates are given in Appendix 2B to the
Employer's Requirements.
(3) A 7 day week calendar shall be adopted for various (Work) programme schedules
for scheduling purposes. Any non-work restriction shall be deemed to have been
taken into account in the calendar to plan and programme the Works.
(4) For Project purposes, the presentation shall be in ‘Week”’ units.

Pag e |1
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 4 – Programme Requirements

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 4 – Programme Requirements

PROGRAMME REQUIREMENTS
1. GENERAL
(1) Purpose of Programme
There are two primary purposes for the requirement of Programme (Scheduling)
information described in this document:
a. Evaluation of Tender
b. Progress Status Reports during Construction
To provide the Engineer with progress status reports for managing,
monitoring and coordinating the awarded contracts during their execution
within the overall multi-contract project schedule.
The requirements are organized in two stages. The first stage is a
requirement for all Tenderers and shall be submitted as part of Tender. The
second stage is a requirement of the Employer and describes a series of
reports to be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer during the
execution of the contract, following the award of Contract.
(2) The Tenderer/ Contractor shall programme his work at all times to meet the Key
Dates and the Works Areas Access Dates stated in Appendices 2A and 2B to the
Employer's Requirements, and the specified interface periods for the design and
installation of the Works with those of the Interfacing Contractors. The Tenderer/
Contractor shall during the progress of the Works constantly monitor his progress
against the programmes described below.
(3) The Tenderer/ Contractor shall include in all programmes his work obligations
towards shared access, shared site areas and other coincident or adjacent work
areas with regard to all interfacing parties.
(4) The Works Programme, and all more detailed or revised versions, shall be
submitted to the Engineer for his Notice in accordance with the provisions of the
Conditions of Contract.
2. METHODOLOGY
(1) The computerized Critical Path Method (CPM) network using the Precedence
Diagramming Method (PDM), has been selected by the Employer as the
technique for contract management system and in co-ordinating the multi-
contract project. This technique shall also be employed by the Tenderer in
preparing their Tender submissions and by the Contractor in their Construction
Stage submissions.
(2) Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, all programmes submitted by the
Contractor shall be produced using computerized Critical Path Method (CPM)
Networks developed implementing the Precedence Diagramming Method (PDM)
with Cost Loaded Charts and Tables, using the required software stated in Clause
3 below.
(3) The Contractor shall implement and use throughout the duration of the Contract,
a computerized system to plan, execute, maintain and manage the planning,
design, pre-construction, construction, and sub-contracts in executing the CPM
scheduling by PDM. The reports, documents and data provided shall be an
accurate representation of the current status of the Works and of the work

Pag e |1
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 4 – Programme Requirements

remaining to be accomplished; shall provide a sound basis for identifying

problems, deviations from the planned works, and for making decisions; and shall
enable timely preparation of the same for presentation to the Engineer.
3. PROGRAMME MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
CPM programming software used shall be Primavera Project Planning (P7)
Program or latest version. Scheduling software and relevant instruction manuals,
licensed for use in connection with the contract, shall be provided by the
Contractor according to the Employer’s Requirements, Contract Outline Design
and Construction Specifications and other contract stipulations. The Contractor
shall supply the Engineer with an original licensed copy, including manuals and
approved training of the software and any subsequent versions thereof at no
extra cost.
4. POST CONTRACT AWARD
4.1 The Contractor shall develop his Tender Programme into the Initial Works
Programme including an outline Narrative Statement and submit within 4 weeks
of the date of commencement and a more detailed version within 7 weeks of
receiving the Engineer’s notice of no objection to the proposed Initial Works
Programme. Refer Clause 6.0.
4.2 The first Three Month Rolling Programme shall be submitted within 4 weeks of
the date of Commencement and all subsequent editions shall accompany the
Monthly Progress Report. The Monthly Progress Reports shall also include a
Programme Update as described below. These programmes shall subsequently
be updated as described below. Refer Clause 8.0 & 9.0.
4.3 Following the Contractor's Initial Works Programme submission but in any case no
later than 21 weeks from the date of commencement of the Contract, the
Contractor shall submit a detailed Works Programme suitably amended to take into
account the programmes of Interfacing Contractors. It is the Contractor's
responsibility to ensure timely co-ordination with the Interfacing Contractors to
review, revise and finalise his Initial Works Programme so as not to affect the
progress of the Works and/or the works of the Interfacing Contractors. The
resubmitted Works Programme when given a Notice by the Engineer shall form the
Baseline Programme which shall solely be used for monitoring and evaluating all
facets of the Contractor’s performance including, but not limited to, actual progress
and the effects of variations and delays. The Contractor shall monitor his own
performance against the Baseline Programme on a weekly basis and shall prepare
and submit to the Engineer written and computerised monthly reports including all
supporting data. As the work progresses, it may be necessary to update/ revise
the Baseline programme, but such updating shall only be carried out with the prior
consent of the Engineer or when directed by them.
4.4 For the Initial & Detailed Works Programme submission, one (1) original and six
(6) colour copies, with a softcopy on a CD, each of the following programmes and
reports shall be submitted to the Engineer:
a) Programme: Baseline CPM Network
b) Programme: Baseline Milestone based Cost Activity Schedule
c) Baseline Schedule Report
d) Narrative Statement
Pag e |2
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 4 – Programme Requirements

e) Baseline Physical Progress 'S' curve

f) Baseline Resource Charts
4.5 The Engineer shall review and comment on the Contractor’s programmes and
information submitted under this Clause. The Engineer will issue his notice or
otherwise of the submissions within 4 weeks.
4.6 The Engineer shall require the Contractor to re-submit within 2 weeks if he is of the
opinion that the programmes and information submitted by the Contractor is
unlikely to meet the Contract key dates.
4.7 If in the opinion of the Engineer, any of the Contractor's revised programmes and
information submitted under the Works Programme is not acceptable, it shall be
construed as a failure of the Contractor to meet a Milestone.
4.8 Notwithstanding the above, the Engineer may at any time during the course of the
Contract require the Contractor to reproduce the computer-generated Baseline
Schedule Report described above to reflect actual activity dates and generate
schedules based upon "what if" statements. The initial computer-generated report
after receiving the Engineer’s notice will serve as the base against which the
contract progress will be measured. Any changes to the Report reflected in
subsequent Baseline Schedule Reports shall also require the Engineer’s consent.
4.9 Failure to include any element of work required for performance of the Contract
shall not relieve the Contractor from completing all works required under the
Contract to achieve the original or any extended key completion date.
5. WORKS PROGRAMME
(1) The Works Programme shall detail the full scope of the works taking into
account the complex nature and different phases of the contract, and shall be
accompanied by detailed supporting information to demonstrate through the
sequence and duration of the activities that the plans are achievable and
realistic and that the works to be undertaken can meet the requirements of
the contract.
(2) The Works Programme shall be a computerised Critical Path Method (CPM)
network developed using the Precedence Diagramming Method (PDM) and
shall be present in bar chart and time-scaled network diagram format to a
weekly or monthly time scale.
(3) Tasks in the Works Programme shall be sufficiently detailed to describe
activities and events that include, but are not limited to, the following:
(a) Key Dates, Works Areas Access Dates, any interface and handover dates
(b) All physical work to be undertaken in the performance of the Contract
obligations, including Temporary Works
(c) The requested date for issue of any drawings or information by the
Engineer
(d) Incorporation of principal aspects of the Design Programme and Design
Submission Programme, including achievement of Preliminary Design,
Definitive design and Construction Reference Drawings.
(e) Due time allowance for review by the Engineer of the Contractor’s
submissions, as well as the subsequent amendment and re-submission by
the Contractor in the design review and comment process,

Pag e |3
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 4 – Programme Requirements

(e) Due time allowance for complying with requirements of all Government
Departments and all others whose consent, permissions, authority or
licence is required prior to the execution of any work.
(f) Order, procurement, manufacture, delivery, testing and installation of
major materials and the delivery and/or partial delivery date on-Site of
principal items of Contractor's Equipment.
(g) Any off-site work such as production or pre-fabrication of components
(h) Installation of temporary construction facilities
(i) Interface periods with the Interfacing Contractors or utility undertakings
(j) Design, supply and/or construction activities of sub-contractors
(k) Testing, commissioning and integrated testing of the Works.
(l) Any outside influence which will or may affect the Project.
(m) Mobilization and demobilization
(n) Weather allowance
(o) Completion of core areas / rooms for access by interfacing parties.
(4) The Works Programme shall show achievement of all Key Dates. The
programme shall also show Milestones, but the Milestones shall not be taken
as imposing any constraints that in any way affect the logic or limit any other
dates in the programme.
(5) Activity descriptions shall be unique, describing discrete elements of work.
Any activity creating an imposed time or other constraint shall be fully
defined by the Contractor.
(6) The Works Programme shall be organised in a logical work-breakdown-
structure including work stages and phases, and shall clearly indicate the
critical path(s). Each activity in the Works Programme shall be coded to
indicate:
(a) Activity ID and Activity Code, the structure of which should be agreed
with the Engineer.
(b) The Engineer may request additional activity coding to the extent available
without restraint to the Contractor’s utilisation of the programme software.
When requested, the Contractor shall add the required additional coding to
the Programme. The Contractor shall use additional code fields as
requested to comply with the requirements and for the use of the
Contractor.
(7) Activity duration shall not exceed two (2) weeks, unless otherwise consented
to by the Engineer, except non-construction activities such as submittals,
submittal reviews, procurement and delivery of materials or equipment and
concrete curing. The Contractor shall submit a Programme/Project Calendar
cross reference clearly indicating the allowance for holidays.
(8) The Works Programme, in each submission, shall be accompanied by an
Activity Report and a Narrative Statement as described below in both
electronic and hard copy format (time scale logic diagrams in A1 size, reports
in A4 size).
(9) Activity Report

Pag e |4
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 4 – Programme Requirements

Shall list all activities, and events in the Works Programme, sorted by activity
identification number.
The Activity Report shall include the following for each activity and event:
(a) Activity identification number and description,
(b) Duration expressed in Days,
(c) Early and late start & early and late finish dates. Planned start and finish
dates,
(d) Calculated total float and free float,
(e) Predecessor and successor(s), accompanying relationships and lead/lag
duration,
(f) Imposed time or date constraints,
(g) Calendar.
(10) Narrative
The Narrative shall be a comprehensive statement of the Contractor’s plan and
approach for the execution of the Works and the achievement of key dates,
handover dates, submission dates and any intermediate dates. It shall
incorporate outline method statements in respect of major items of work
including construction sequences and primary items of plant, Construction
Equipment, Temporary Works and the like. It shall fully explain the reasons for
the main logic links in the Programme and include particulars of how activity
durations are established. This shall include estimated quantities, production
rates, hours per shift, work days per week and a listing of the major items of
Construction Equipment planned for use on the project. Activities, which may be
expedited by use of overtime or additional shifts, shall be identified and
explained. A listing of holidays, and other special non-work days being used for
the computer reports shall be included.
Supporting information and an accompanying narrative for the Programme
that details the basis and assumptions upon which the programme has been
drawn shall be prepared and submitted as detailed (but not limited to) below:
i. A narrative description of the sequence of all sections of the Works and in
particular a detailed identification and description of the critical path
activities. The narrative shall be supported by sketches illustrating the
planning sequences of construction phase of works;
ii. Marked up plans detailing the concreting and concrete pour dates for
major section of each part of the structure;
iii. An overall manpower forecast detailing individual trades and other sub-
contract / indirect labour, commissioning teams in terms of the daily
number of workers planned to be engaged. The formats for these
forecasts shall be in accordance with the Engineer’s requirements;
iv. Typical cycle time analysis;
v. Planned production outputs for all major activities and areas of Works;
vi. List of major items of plant and equipment that are required to be
procured identifying the required lead times;
vii. Accumulative curves and histograms showing the planned weekly figures
for each principal quantity, major item of equipment and major power

Pag e |5
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 4 – Programme Requirements

trades;
viii. Any programme constraints, giving details of the constraints and
substantiation thereto;
ix. Total float listing in order of total float;
x. Daily and weekly working hours, holidays and shift patterns;
xi. Other information that the Engineer may request;
(11) Physical Progress 'S' Curve
The Contractor shall also submit at the end of every month, for inclusion in the
Monthly Progress Report as stated in Appendix 5, a forecast Cumulative
Physical Progress 'S' curve based on the time-phased distribution of cost in the
CPM Network Logic Diagram, expressed in percentage terms and plotted with
the early and late dates. This ‘S’ curve shall be generated from the
computerised CPM Network Logic Diagram.
(12) Resources
The Contractor shall provide on the submission of the Baseline programme full
resource details for major activities including but not limited to the
substructure, superstructure, architectural and building services fit out stages of
the works. These shall include
 Major manpower trades
 Number of items of major plant and equipment
 Principal quantities (i.e., volume of excavation, volume of concrete, tonnage of
steel work / reinforcement, area of formwork, length of pipe work, area of
internal partition walls of finishes / cladding for floor walls, ceiling and roof
etc.)
 Other details as appropriate or required by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall also Resource Charts, generated from the Contractor’s
CPM Network Diagram, showing the anticipated manpower and main
Construction Equipment usage during the execution of the Project.
As an additional monitoring facility, indicator resources shall be assigned to
relevant activities for the major items of work. Indicator resources shall be
directly allocated for excavation (cu.m.), piling (no.), diaphragm walling (m.),
concrete (cu.m.), tunnel lining (m), etc. Resource indicators may be input as a
daily rate, expected required rate, or as an activity total in the relevant units.
These are purely indicative quantities and do not form part of contract.
(13) All submissions of proposed Works Programmes subsequently, after approval
of the Initial Works Programme, shall include the actual physical progress of
work and forecast of the remaining work. Actual progress shall be stated in
percent complete, remaining duration, and actual start and finish dates for
each activity in the Works Programme.
6. INITIAL WORKS PROGRAMME
(1) The Initial Works Programme submitted as under Clause 4.1 need not include
the full details given under Clause 5 above. It should be a condensed version
with combined activities of longer duration but must show clearly how the
requirements of the Contract are to be achieved. The outline Narrative
Statement shall be in sufficient detail to clearly show the Contractor's
Pag e |6
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 4 – Programme Requirements

intention.
(2) Within 7 weeks of the Engineer’s consent to the Initial Works Programme, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer an expanded and more detailed
version of the Initial Works Programme containing all of the information and
detail required under Clause 5 above.
(3) Such submission shall make use of the Tender Programme submitted earlier
but refined to include the best estimates of dates for the work of Interfacing
Contracts which has impact on the Contractor's programme. Such
programmes shall be amended subsequently to incorporate the actual dates/
schedule of the affecting contracts. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
ensure timely co-ordination with the Interfacing Contractors to finalise the
Initial Programme, without affecting progress of the work.
7. WORKS PROGRAMME REVISIONS
(1) The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing of the need
for any changes in the Works Programme, whether due to a change of
intention or of circumstances or for any other reason. Where such proposed
change affects timely completion of the Works or any other Key Date the
Contractor shall within fourteen (14) days of the date of notifying the
Engineer submit for the Engineer's notice its proposed revised Works
Programme and accompanying Narrative Statement. The proposed revised
Works Programme shall show the sequence of operations of any and all works
related to the change and the impact of changed work or changed conditions.
(2) If at any time the Engineer considers the actual or anticipated progress of the
work reflects a significant deviation from the Works Programme, he may
request the Contractor to submit a proposed revised Programme which
together with an accompanying Activity Report and Narrative Statement,
shall be submitted by the Contractor within fourteen (14) days after the
Engineer's instruction. The proposed revised Works Programme shall show
the sequence of operations of any and all work related to the change and the
impact of changed work or changed conditions.
(3) All activities that have negative float must be analysed by the Contractor to
identify the impact on the timely completion of the Works or on the
achievement of Key Dates.
8. THREE MONTH ROLLING PROGRAMME
(1) The Three Month Rolling Programme shall be an expansion of the current
Works Programme showing the activities completed in the last month and the
activities that are in progress or will start within the next three (3) months.
The Three Month Rolling Programme shall provide more detail of the
Contractor's plan, organisation and execution of the work within these
periods. The Contractor shall expand each activity planned to occur during the
next three (3) month period, if necessary, to a daily level of detail.
(2) The Three Month Rolling Programme shall be developed as a Critical Path
Method (CPM) network, and shall be presented in bar chart and time-scaled
network diagram format. Bar charts shall be presented on A4 sheets and
time-scaled networks diagrams A1 size. Tasks in the programme shall be
derivatives of and directly related to tasks in the approved Works
Pag e |7
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 4 – Programme Requirements

Programme. One (1) original and six (6) colour copies, with a softcopy on a
CD, of the schedule shall be submitted
(3) The Contractor shall describe the discrete work elements and work element
inter-relationships necessary to complete all works and any separable parts
thereof including work assigned to sub-contractors.
(4) Activity duration shall not exceed two (2) weeks unless otherwise consented
to by the Engineer.
(5) Each activity in the Three Month Rolling Programme shall be coded, or
described so as clearly to indicate the corresponding activity in the Works
Programme.
The three months Rolling Programme shall require the Engineer notice for
payment purposes.
9. THREE MONTH ROLLING PROGRAMME REVISIONS AND UPDATE
(1) The Three Month Rolling Programme shall be a progress update of the
accepted Baseline Programme. The Three Month Rolling Programme shall be
extended forward each month as described under Clause 8 above. Each
submission of the Three Month Rolling Programme shall be accompanied by
a Programme Analysis Report, describing actual progress to date, and the
forecast for activities occurring over the next three-month period.
(2) If the Three Month Rolling Programme is at variance with the Works
Programme, the Programme Analysis Report shall be accompanied by a
supporting Narrative Statement describing the Contractor's plan for the
execution of the activities to be undertaken over the three month period,
including programme assumptions and methods to be employed in
achieving timely completion.
The Contractor shall revise the Three Month Rolling Programme or propose
revisions of the Works Programme in accordance with Clause 7, or both, from
time to time as may be appropriate to ensure consistency between them.
10. THREE WEEK ROLLING SCHEDULE
(1) Once a week, on a day mutually agreed to by the Engineer and the
Contractor, a meeting will be held to assess progress by the Contractor
during the previous work week. The Contractor shall submit a construction
schedule listing activities completed and in-progress within the previous
week and the activities scheduled for the succeeding three weeks based on
the detailed Works Programme. One (1) original and six (6) colour copies,
with a softcopy on a CD, of the schedule shall be submitted on A3 sized
paper.
(2) The 3-week rolling programme shall be in bar chart programme format. The
activities shown shall be a complete amplification of the activities in the 3-
month rolling programme and shall show breakdown of work in sufficient
detail and on a room by room / area by area and day to day basis. The 3-
week rolling programme shall be a working programme with sufficient data
for reporting, monitoring, measuring, and evaluating the Contractor’s
progress of the Works and manpower deployment to site. All activities shall
be referenced back to the 3-month rolling programme through the Activity
ID. Activities that were scheduled to be completed but remain uncompleted
Pag e |8
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 4 – Programme Requirements

shall be captured by the 3-week rolling programme notwithstanding that it

may have fallen outside of the 4-week cycle. However, activity bars need not
be shown for such activities to retain the 4-week cycle in the activity bar
area. The 3-week rolling programme shall be submitted every Monday
morning on a weekly basis. The percentage completion shall be agreed by
the Engineer.
(3) The first 3-week rolling programme shall be submitted within 2 weeks of the
contract commencement date, in colour on A3 paper.
11. PROJECT CALENDAR
For the Project, the Contractor shall adopt 7 days a week calendar, identical
calendar for the purpose of programming and execution of Works. Official
documents shall be transacted during 5 days week - Monday through Friday,
except for National (Govt. of India) Holidays. For Project purposes, a week begins
at 0001 hours on a Monday and ends at 2359 hours on a Sunday. The completion
of an activity or the achievement of an event when given a week number shall be
taken to mean midnight on the Sunday at the end of the numbered week. An
access date or activity start date when given as a week number shall be taken to
mean 0001 hours on a Monday of the Numbered week.
12. PROGRAMMING PERSONNEL
The Contractor shall submit, as part of its Staff Organisation Plan, the names and
experience and any required information for the staff to be employed on Works
Programming. The Project Programmer shall be a Professional Engineer with
at least ten (10) years’ relevant experience in programming of civil works
(comprising underground stations and tunnels) of similar scope. The Project
Programmer shall be knowledgeable of, and have experience in, preparing
programmes (scheduling) with computerized Critical Path Method (CPM)
networks using the Precedence Diagramming Method (PDM) with Primavera
Project Planning software. Also there shall be. Others in the group shall have at
least three (3) years experience in such work. The programmers shall be
employed by the Contractor full time on the Contract until the completion or
such earlier time the Engineer may give his consent.
13. PROGRAMME AND REPORT SUBMISSION FORMAT
The Contractor shall submit one (1) original and six (6) copies in color, and a
softcopy on a CD, of all submissions to the Engineer. All submissions shall be in A0,
A1, A3 or A4 size, as appropriate, except as may otherwise be agreed by the
Engineer.
14. FAILURE TO SUBMIT PROGRAMME
Failure of the Contractor to submit any programme, or any required revisions
thereto within the time limits stated for notice of no objection by the Engineer,
shall be sufficient reason for not making the relevant milestone on account
payment by the Engineer

Pag e |9
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 5 – Monthly Progress Report

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 5 – Monthly Progress Report

MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORTS

1. GENERAL
(1) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) coloured copies and a soft
copy on CD of the Monthly Progress Report. This Report shall be submitted by
the last day of each calendar month and shall account for all work actually
performed from 26th day of the last month and up to and including the twenty-
fifth (25th) day of the month of the submission.
(2) The Report shall be typed, printed and bound. It shall be supported by graphics
and photographs as specified in Clause 9 of this Appendix. It shall be submitted
in a format to which the Engineer shall have given his consent. Unless the
Engineer directs otherwise, the Contractor's Monthly Report shall contain
sections/sub-sections for, but not limited to, the topics described in this
Appendix.
(3) The Contractor shall include in the Monthly Progress Report a record of monthly
progress of various major Works on Site in the form of colour photographs with
appropriate annotations and dates stated.
(4) The Contractor shall deliver daily to the Engineer, a report as to the number of
workmen, plant and equipment employed on the works in each trade, etc. and
a log of delivery notes for all goods and materials delivered to the Site. This
information shall be summarised as a monthly return for the monthly progress
report

2. FINANCIAL STATUS
(1) A narrative review of all significant financial matters, and actions proposed or
taken in respect to any outstanding matters.
(2) A spread sheet summarising each activity, the budget, costs incurred during the
period, costs to date, costs to go (including potential variations), cost forecast
(total of costs to date and costs to go) and cost variance (difference between
cost forecast and budget).
(3) A spread sheet indicating the status of all payments due and made.
(4) A report on the status of any outstanding claims. The report shall in particular
provide interim updated accounts of continuing claims.

3. PHYSICAL PROGRESS
(1) The introduction shall briefly summarise the progress that has been made
during the past month and how the actual progress relates to the planned
progress in accordance with the Works Programme.
(2) It shall describe the status of work performed, significant accomplishments,
including critical items and problem areas, corrective actions taken or planned
and other pertinent activities, and shall, in particular, address interface issues,
problems and resolutions.
(3) It shall include a simplified representation of progress measured in percentage
terms compared with percentage planned as derived from the Works
Programme.
(4) Physical Progress S-Curve

Pag e |1
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 5 – Monthly Progress Report

The Physical Progress S-Curve shall be in the form of a graph which compares
the actual progress with the planned progress in terms of percentage to show
the project performance.
The value of the physical progress achieved shall be assessed as the aggregate
of the values of those activities which are separately identified on the Works
Programme and which are:
1. in the opinion of the Engineer, wholly completed;
2. in progress, provided that the value attached to each such activity shall be
agreed with the Engineer. Notwithstanding any value agreed with the
Engineer shown on the S-Curve, the S-Curve shall not be used for the
purpose of Progress Payment Claim.

4. PROGRAMME UPDATE
Programme updating shall include:
(a) the monthly Programme Update which shall be prepared by recording actual
activity completion dates and percentage of activities completed up to the
twenty- fifth (25th ) of the month together with estimates of remaining
duration and expected activity completion based on current progress. The
Programme Update shall be accompanied by an Activity Report and a Narrative
Statement. The Narrative Statement shall explain the basis of the Contractor’s
submittal:
(i) Early Work and Baseline Submittals – explains determination of activity
duration and describes the Contractor’s approach for meeting required Key
Dates as specified in the Contract.
(ii) Updated Detail Programme Submittals – state in narrative the Works
actually completed and reflected along Critical Path in terms of days ahead
or behind allowable dates. Specific requirements of narrative are:
If the Updated Detailed Works Programme indicates an actual or potential
delay to Contract Completion date or Key Dates, identify causes of delays
and provide explanation of Work affected and proposed corrective action to
meet Key Dates or mitigate potential delays. Identify deviation from
previous month’s critical path.
Identify by activity number and description, activities in progress and
activities scheduled to be completed.
Discuss Variation Order Work Items, if any.
(b) the Programme Status which shall :
(i) show Works Programme status up to and including the current report
period, display Cumulative progress to date and a forecast of remaining
work.
(ii) be presented as a bar-chart size A3 and as a time-related logic network
diagram on an A1 media, including activity listings;
(iii) schedules of all significant activities tabulated in order of earliest starting
date showing the following:
3. the actual start dates for activities which have commenced together with the
scheduled start date for each activity and the time lapse;
4. the actual completion dates for activities which have finished together with the
Pag e |2
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 5 – Monthly Progress Report

scheduled finish date for each activity and the time lapse;
5. the forecast and scheduled start dates for activities scheduled;
6. the forecast and scheduled completion dates for activities which have
commenced;
7. the percentage completion of each activity started but not completed;
8. the total float of each activity not completed;
9. Any known delays to activities.
c) The Activity Variance Analysis which shall analyse activities planned to start
prior to or during the report period but not started at the end of the report
period as well as activities started and/or completed in advance of the Works
Programme.
d) The Resource Chart to show the actual resources mobilized for the works
against the baseline figures in the Baseline Resource Charts.

5. KEY DATES STATUS

A report on the status of all Key Dates due to have been achieved during the month
and forecasts of achievement of any missed Key dates, and those due in the next
month.

6. THREE MONTH ROLLING PROGRAMME

Include a copy of the 3-month Rolling Programme for that reporting period.

7. PLANNING AND CO-ORDINATION

(1) Details of co-ordination of interface activities started or completed during the
month and shall include for internal co-ordination within the Contractor's own
multi-disciplinary team as well as external co-ordination with the Engineer,
other Interfacing Contractors, authorities and the like;
(3) A schedule of all submissions and consents/approvals obtained/outstanding;
(4) Details of design and drawing progress, including design interface coordination,
started or completed during the month as related to the Temporary Works,
Permanent Works and Shop drawings;
(5) Updated Drawing Register;
(6) Details of the progress of off-site activities such as design, production and/or
fabrication of any components or materials;
(7) Corrective actions either taken by or to be taken by the Contractor to maintain
completion dates, including details of any changes made or to be made to the
Works Programme to achieve this objective;
(7) Contractor’s organisation and resources;
(8) Details of any other items which the Engineer or the Contractor shall consider to
be necessary or desirable from time to time.

8. PROCUREMENT REPORT
(2) A summary of all significant procurement activities during the month,
including action taken to overcome problems, and details of any
outstanding actions.

Pag e |3
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 5 – Monthly Progress Report

(3) A report listing major items of plant and materials which will be incorporated
into the Works. The items shall be segregated by type as listed in the
Specifications and the report should show as a minimum the following
activities:
(a) Purchase order date - scheduled/actual;
(b) Manufacturer/supplier and origin;
(c) Letter of credit Issued date;
(d) Manufacturer/supplier shipment date - scheduled/actual;
(e) Method of shipment;
(f) Arrival date in India- scheduled/actual;
(g) Analysis of any delay happening/anticipated with proposal for
corrective measures.

9. PHOTOGRAPHS
Two sets of photographs shall be provided with the Monthly Progress Report in
colour and shall be submitted in the following manner and format.
Digital colour photographs shall be 10cm x 15cm (4-inch x 6-inch), glossy
prints, mounted in protective clear plastic folders and contained in a lever-arch
binder. The electronic files shall also be provided in “.jpg” format on CD-ROM. The
photographs and electronic files shall be identified by a brief narrative indicating:
(a) Contract number
(b) A unique sequential number based on an agreed drawing numbering system
(c) Specific location and subject of photograph
(d) Date and time of photograph
Each month the Contractor shall propose and the Engineer will confirm the number
of photographs to be supplied so as to accurately record progress on all parts of the
works. The number of photographs shall not be less than 30 per set unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer.

10. SAFETY
A review of all safety aspects during the month including reports on all accidents,
actions proposed to prevent further occurrence and safety performance to-date,
including results of all audits undertaken during the reporting period.

11. ENVIRONMENTAL
A review of all the environmental issues during the past month to include all
monitoring reports, mitigation measures undertaken and activities to control
environmental impacts, including results of all audits undertaken during the
reporting period.

Pag e |4
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents

UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT

SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

QUALITY ASSURANCE
Quality System Definitions
The following Quality Management System terms are used in these requirements. The
definitions given are derived from ISO 9000: 2005, clause 6.
Audit Systematic, independent and documented process for obtaining
audit evidence and evaluating it objectively to determine the
extent to which audit criteria are fulfilled
Clause under the Conditions of Contract
Conformity Fulfilment of a requirement
Design and Development Set of processes that transform requirements into specified
characteristics or into the specification of a product, process or
system. These are prepared to support the Quality Plan for a
particular element of the Works
Hold Point (H) A point in time when a notice of permission, consent or No
Objection by the Contractor Quality Assurance Team (or that the
Employer/Engineer may elect to witness), is required before the
Contractor can proceed with an activity
Inspection and Test Plan Plans specifying the activities required to establish whether
conformity is achieved. They identify the responsibilities for
executing the activities, the documents controlling them and
details requirements for the production of records
Method Statements Documented procedures, concerning particular aspects of the
process, developed to define the manner of production,
installation and servicing
Nonconformity Non-fulfilment of a requirement
Observation Point (O) A stage identified on an Inspection and Test Plan where the
Employer/Engineer or authorised third parties may observe
activities and any associated verification
Procedure Specified way to carry out an activity or a process
Quality Degree to which a set of inherent characteristics fulfils
requirements
Quality Management Management system to direct and control an organization with
System regard to quality as formally expressed by top management

Quality Plan Document specifying the procedures and associated resources

shall be applied by whom and when to a specific project, product,
process or contract
Quality Plan shall specify the quality management system of an
organization
Requirement Need or expectation that is stated, generally implied or obligatory

Record Document stating results achieved or providing evidence of

activities performed
Witness Point (W) A stage in the pre-construction or construction activities in which a
party is invited to witness

Pag e |1
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 The Contractor shall maintain and implement a Quality Management System that
shall remain in effect during the execution of the Works. Contractor’s organisation is
required to operate a Quality Management System based on International Standard
ISO 9001: 2015 for its scope of Works and in compliance with the requirements of
the Contract. The Contractor shall submit his Quality Management System
documentation for review and Notice to Proceed by the Employer/Engineer as
specified in this Section.
1.2 ISO 9001: 2015 Certification of the Contractor's organisation is required for this
Project. The Employer/ Engineer may consider the alternative use of ISO 9001: 2015
Certification at his discretion. ISO Certification is a requirement of this Project for
the Contractor’s subcontractors, consultants, sub-consultants, suppliers and
Designers. The Contractor however cannot delegate or subcontract the Employer’s
Quality Assurance Requirements to subcontractors, consultants, sub-consultants or
suppliers without the Employer/Engineer written approval.
1.3 The Contractor shall implement a Quality Plan that shall incorporate a
comprehensive and documented approach to achieve the Project quality
requirements that is capable of ensuring that all aspects of the Works, including but
not limited to, design, procurement, fabrication, installation, inspection,
construction and modifications will comply with the requirements of the Contract.
1.4 The Contractor’s Quality Plan shall ensure that all goods and materials, whether on-
shore in India or off-shore before shipping, workmanship, plant and equipment
procured and supplied, inspecting, handling, assembling, testing, storing,
fabrication, suppliers and vendors are in compliance with the Contract
requirements. Plan(s) and/or Procedures to be prepared by others (suppliers,
subcontractors, sub-consultants) and their incorporation in the overall Quality Plan
of the Contractor, shall be identified.
1.5 The Capitalized terms used and to the extent not defined herein shall have the
meaning ascribed to them respectively, in the Conditions of Contract and the
Employer’s Requirements.
1.6 Construction / Installation shall be deemed to include manufacturing, fabrication,
assembling, testing & commissioning, integrated testing and commissioning and trial
runs wherever necessary.
1.7 The Contractor shall assist in the independent audit review, checking, sampling
testing and examination of the Works by the Employer/Engineer. The Contractor
shall provide full and timely access for such work by the Employer/Engineer,
including inspection of records and documentation. Such access shall include direct
access to the Site, work areas, storage facilities, fabrication sites, Contractor’s
offices, laboratories, manufacturers/suppliers facilities and similar areas and
facilities where any work is being conducted.
1.8 For design and/or activities occurring outside of India which require the
Employer/Engineer to inspect, the Contractor shall provide:
(a) Right to inspect;
(b) Facilities to carry out their work; and
(c) Assistance in travel and accommodation arrangements.

Pag e |2
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

2. QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

2.1 Contractor’s Quality Management System shall be capable of demonstrating by self-
certification that all relevant standards, regulations, testing requirements etc are
being met. Self-certification is the process whereby the Contractor can demonstrate
that all requirements of the Contract have been fulfilled.
2.2 The Contractor shall designate a Quality Assurance Manager (QA Manager) who
shall be classified as one of the Key Personnel and shall be responsible for
overseeing the implementation of the overall Quality Plan for the Contractor. The
Quality Assurance Manager shall not report to the Contractor’s Project Manager,
but shall be directly responsible to and report to a joint venture board, senior
management or similar level of the Contractor’s organization that is not directly
responsible for design or construction.
2.2.1 Refer to Part II – Section A, Clause A15 Key Staff Requirements.
2.3 The Contractor shall be required to provide the Quality Assurance Manager with
adequate resources and authority to enable the quality of the work on the Contract
to be managed effectively. Those resources shall be required to fulfil the
requirements for quality assurance, inspection and testing and self-certification as
detailed in these requirements.
2.4 The Contractor shall be required to provide appropriate training to all personnel in
the operation of the Quality Management System and maintain records to
demonstrate competence in its application.
2.5 The Contractor shall submit his Quality Management System documentation for
review and approval by the Employer/Engineer as specified in this Section.
2.6 It is anticipated that the Contractor’s Quality Management System documentation
shall include, but not limited to, the following:
(a) Quality Plan, identifying its Quality Procedures;
(b) Manufacturing Quality Plan;
(c) Design Quality Plan;
(d) Method Statements;
(d) Inspection and Test Plans; and
2.7 The Contractor shall plan, perform and record all quality control activities to ensure
that all work is performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract and
of his Quality Management System. Documentation which have been reviewed and
noticed/approved by the Employer/Engineer, such activities shall include, without
limitation, the inspections and/or tests implied or expressly required by the
Contract.
2.8 The Employer/Engineer shall designate, if necessary, Quality ‘Hold Points’ into the
Contractor’s Inspection and Test Plans for the Contractor’s Quality Department to
adhere to, or for the Employer/Engineer to attend, on a case-by-case basis at his
discretion.
2.9 The Contractor shall coordinate the Inspection and Testing necessary to
demonstrate that all specified requirements have been met. All non-conformances

Pag e |3
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

are to be documented and resolved, before final acceptance of the Works or any
section of it.
2.10 The Employer, Stake holders, Engineer and third parties including the Ministry of
Railways and statutory authorities, reserve the right to and shall conduct periodic
audits and inspections on the Works and services provided either on its own or
through third party, and will sample, test and measure material used within the
Works completed by the Contractor or its subcontractors of all tiers and
suppliers/vendors and to observe the execution of these activities.
2.11 The Contractor, his consultant, subcontractors of all tiers and suppliers thereof shall
make available for audit all records necessary to demonstrate that the Works have
been executed in accordance with the Contract. They shall also provide the
Employer/Engineer with documents that demonstrate that the Works are
progressing in accordance with the specified requirements. These shall be provided
in a timely manner to enable non-conformities to be rectified satisfactorily.

3. QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

3.1 The organization of the Contractor’s Project Plan shall comply with ISO 10005
(2005): Quality Management-Guidelines for Quality Assurance Plan.
3.2 All on-Site and off-Site testing sampling in India is to be carried out by laboratories
accredited by NABL (National Accreditation Board of Testing and Calibration
Laboratories) or internationally accredited laboratory to ISO 17025: 2005.
3.3 A fully equipped concrete laboratory shall be installed at Site along with laboratory
technicians and support staff. Testing machines shall be periodically calibrated in
accordance with NABL requirements. Details included in clause 14.9.
3.4 The Employer/Engineer may require the Contractor to stop using a particular
laboratory and find an alternative if the Employer/Engineer has reasonable grounds
to be dissatisfied with its performance.
3.5 All testing of systems, software, plant and materials must be carried out by persons
accredited to meet the requirements and Standards.
3.6 Within thirty (30) days of the Commencement Date, Contractor shall submit to the
Employer/Engineer for his review, comment and Notice to Proceed the following, as
appropriate:
(a) Quality Plan;
(b) Design Quality Plan and Delivery Schedule; and
(c) Manufacturing Quality Plan and Delivery Schedule.
3.7 The Contractor shall promptly supply the Employer/Engineer with six (6) controlled
copies of his Quality Plans, Inspection and Test Plan(s), related procedures /
instructions / forms upon such documents being reviewed and noticed/approved by
the Employer/Engineer. The Contractor shall maintain such controlled
documentation throughout the duration of the Contract. For any amendment to the
quality system documentation, the Contractor shall as soon as practicable prepare
and submit the proposed amendment for review by the Employer/Engineer. In
addition, the Employer/Engineer may request further copies of the quality system
documents and these documents shall reach the Employer/Engineer’s office within

Pag e |4
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

fourteen (14) days of notification, at no additional cost to the Contract.

3.8 The Contractor shall maintain and make available for inspection by the
Employer/Engineer at its site, a complete, up-to-date, organized file of all submittals
(plans, procedures, Method Statements etc), including an index and locator system
which identifies the status of each submittal.
3.9 Pursuant to sub-clause 3.8, a ‘controlled copy’ means a document prepared and
issued in accordance with the provisions regarding document control contained in
the relevant ISO standard.

4. TYPES OF QUALITY PLANS

4.1 No design, procurement, construction, installation, commissioning or maintenance
activity shall commence without a suitable Quality Plan that has been submitted to
Employer/Engineer for review and comment, consent, approval of Notice to
Proceed.
4.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Employer/Engineer the following Quality Plans
for his review and approval:
(a) A Quality Plan for the control of all management related activities;
(b) Design Quality Plan(s) for the control of all design related activities for the
Permanent Works or Plant and/or Temporary Works;
(c) Manufacturing and construction Quality Plan(s), for the control of activities
within each category of work or discrete element of construction, manufacture,
installation, commissioning, maintenance or servicing of the Permanent Works
or Plant and/or Temporary Works or for the control of outstanding work during
the Contracts Period, as the same may be required by the Contract and/or
directed by the Employer/ Engineer; and
(d) Method Statements and Inspection and Test Plans, for the control of all
inspection and test related activities as per clause 10 and clause 11.

5 FORMAT OF QUALITY PLANS

5.1 The Quality Plan(s) shall define all measures necessary to meet the objectives
and requirements of the Contract at all appropriate phases of the work.
5.2 The Quality Plan(s) shall have a standardised format and show clearly on each
page:
(a) The quality plan number or, in the case of attached documents, a reference
to the quality plan number;
(b) Whether the document is a draft or is approved by the authorised
representative of the Contractor; and
(c) The date of such approval.
6 QUALITY PLAN
6.1 The Contractor shall prepare construction Quality Plan(s) for the construction,
installation, testing and commissioning activities. Separate construction quality
plan(s) shall be prepared for other Contractor’s or subcontractor’s off Site activities.
Each construction quality plan shall identify the scope of work to be controlled.

Pag e |5
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

6.2 The Quality Plan shall include a directory and organizational chart showing all of the
Contractor’s Key Personnel. The directory shall be kept updated throughout the
Contract as changes occur and submitted to the Employer/Engineer for his
approval/notice. The directory shall include the names, titles, areas of responsibility,
office address and location, office phone and fax numbers, cellular phone
number(s). The Contractor shall provide information sufficient for the
Employer/Engineer to contact any of the Key Personnel on a twenty-four (24-hour)
basis for the duration of the Contract.
6.3 The Employer/Engineer will also provide a similar directory to the Contractor.
6.4 The Quality Plan shall define the Contractor's management structure for the
execution of the Works and for the control of the quality of the Works and shall,
without limitation, define:
(a) The organisation of the Contractor's managerial staff with particular reference to
any Joint Venture partners and main subcontractors. An organisation chart is to
be produced to illustrate the subdivision of the work into elements for effective
technical and managerial control, the reporting structure and the interface
relationship between all parties involved;
(b) The specific allocations of responsibility and authority given to identified
personnel for the day to day management of the work with particular reference
to the supervision, inspection and testing of the work;
(c) The interfacing or co-ordination required with the Contractor's other related
Quality Plans;
(d) The specific methods of construction to identify any relevant Method
Statements and develop those Method Statements to a degree of detail
sufficient to permit the Employer/Engineer to understand. Refer to clause 10;
(e) The appointment of a Quality Assurance Manager and Quality Control Manager
in accordance with clause 12;
(f) The audit procedure, audit schedule for each type of quality plans and list of
proposed auditors including details of their authority, qualifications and
experience in accordance with clause 9;
(g) The procedures for the control of receipt and issue of all correspondence, so as
to ensure traceability, shall be defined. Correspondence shall include letters,
internal memoranda, facsimiles and electronic transmittals (i.e. CompuServe,
Internet, SharePoint, Expedition etc);
(h) The procedures for recording Project related oral communications shall be
defined, i.e. records of telephone conversations, notes of informal discussions
and minutes of meetings;
(i) The procedures for the selection, indexing, filing, disposition and maintenance of
Project records for storage in the archives shall be defined. A list of items to be
archived shall be submitted for review by the Employer/Engineer on periods of
retention. In addition, the Contractor’s and subcontractor’s filing systems shall
be compatible as far as is necessary;

Pag e |6
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

(j) The procedures for the identification, production, verification, approval,

distribution, implementation and recording of changes to all drawings, reports
and specifications shall be defined;
(k) The procedures for the evaluation, selection, engagement and monitoring of
subcontractors / suppliers shall be defined together with the means of
application of quality assurance to their work including audit and acceptance;
(l) The procedure for the regular review and revision of each type of quality plan
and its supplemental individual specific quality plans, to ensure their continuing
suitability and effectiveness shall be defined. In addition, the method to be used
for revision and issue of revised documentation shall be defined;
(m) The procedures for the control, calibration and maintenance of inspection,
testing and measuring equipment shall be defined;
(n) The procedures for identifying training needs and for the provision of training of
all personnel performing activities affecting quality shall be defined; and
(o) The quality control procedures to be implemented to verify conformance with
the Contract specifications. Verification is accomplished by examinations, tests,
measurement and inspection and by verifying records including those of his
consultant, subcontractors and suppliers by uses of forms to be applied to
manage and control the following:
(i) The purchasing of materials and ensuring they comply with the
requirements of the specification, including purchasing documentation and
specific verification arrangements for Contractor/ Employer/Engineer
inspection of material or manufactured product prior to release for
use/installation;
(ii) The construction process including Temporary Works so as to ensure
compliance with drawings and specifications;
(iii) The construction and installation process so as to ensure clear
identification and traceability of material and manufactured parts;
(iv) The inspection and testing activities of incoming materials, in process and
final product;
(v) The identification of the inspection and test status of all material and
manufactured products during all stages of the construction and
installation process to ensure that only products that have passed the
required inspections and tests are dispatched for use and/or installation;
(vi) Record of non-conformities and the disposition of non-conforming material
or product, supported by applicable documentation, agreed remedial
action instituted prior to the initiation so as to avoid unintended
use/installation. Contractors Non-conformity system provides for the
monitoring and tracking of all Non-conformities that occur within his scope
of Contract, regardless of who identifies the Non-conformance;
(vii) The assessment and disposition of nonconforming material(s) and
product(s) and approval for reworking or rejection as scrap;
(viii) The identification of preventive action so as to prevent recurrence of
similar non-conformance; and

Pag e |7
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

(ix) The handling, storage, packaging, preservation and delivery of products.

(p) The list of Inspection and Test Plans and Method Statements to manage and
control any test and inspection activities;
(q) All particulars of materials submitted for review by the Employer/Engineer;
(r) Where required by the Contract, the quality control requirements for major
components in accordance with clause 16; and
(s) Lists of forms and formats to be used to record the activities under the
construction Quality Plan(s) shall be attached at the end of each section or
reference included to existing standard procedures.
6.5 The Quality Plan(s) shall ensure that conditions adverse to quality such as failures,
malfunctions, deficiencies and defects in materials and equipment shall be promptly
identified and recorded as Non-Conforming Product and specific procedures to
rectify non-conformities raised. This includes systems non-conformities raised as a
result of both internal audit by the Contractor and external audits by the
Employer/Engineer.
6.6 The Quality Plan(s) shall address the controls to be applied by its organisation to its
subcontractors, suppliers and lower tier contractors thereof, both directly and by
identifying the quality system documentation that subcontractors, suppliers and
lower tiers thereof are required to produce. The Contractor shall ensure that
subcontractors, suppliers and lower tiers thereof agree to and implement the
applicable controls specified in the Contractor Quality Plan and the identified
Quality Management System documentation.
7 DESIGN QUALITY PLAN
7.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the management of the design of the Works.
While not being responsible to do any design for any Interfacing Party, the
Contractor shall use his best endeavours to manage and resolve the interface,
including those with designers of track-work and system elements such as E&M,
signalling and telecommunications, PSD and power system & LV.
7.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with and obtaining necessary
approvals from cognizant authorities for temporary and permanent road diversions,
including overpasses and underpasses. The Contractor shall copy the
Employer/Engineer on all correspondence with the cognizant authorities and shall
note any problems in the Progress Narrative, submitted with the Monthly Progress
Report.
7.3 The Contractor shall ensure that the designs of the Works are properly checked and
dealt with by a Design Checker whom shall be identified within the organisation of
the Contractor. The Lead Design Checker shall be independent in-house responsible
for the detailed Checking of Deliverables prior to submission and ensure that the
design can meet all its obligations under the Contract and for the Contractor to do
likewise. The Lead Design Checker shall issue a certificate of the same to the
Employer/Engineer.
7.3.1 Refer to Part II - Section C, Attachment C1.
7.4 The Contractor shall identify the Design Checker for each discipline. The Lead Design
Checker shall have not less than the competence and experience required of the

Pag e |8
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

Contractor’s Designer in the same discipline as the discipline of the design to be

checked.
The Lead Design Checker shall not be associated with or be involved in the actual
design, producing design documents or conducting construction site supervision for
the Contractor.
7.4.1 Refer to Part II - Section C, Attachment C1.
7.5 In the event that the Employer/Engineer identifies significant errors or
inconsistencies in the Deliverables, then the Employer/Engineer shall request for the
applicable Design Checker to be immediately removed from the Design Team and be
replaced with a competent Checker.
7.6 The procedures for the checking of design of Permanent Works shall also apply to
design of Temporary Works and construction sequences that affect the Permanent
Works or Safety during construction / installation.
7.7 The procedures for the control of design changes shall be defined in order that
design changes are reviewed, verified, validated and approved before
implementation.
7.8 All design documents (drawings, plans, specifications, calculations and reports)
produced by the Contractor’s organization shall be checked by the Designer, whom
shall issue a certificate of the same to the Employer/Engineer.
7.8.1 Refer to Part II - Section C, Attachment C1.
7.9 The Contractor shall maintain records showing design calculation and data
supporting design review activities.
7.10 The Employer/Engineer reserves the right to inspect and audit these documents at
any time to verify the effectiveness of design reviews.
7.11 The Design Quality Plan(s) shall define the Contractor's policy for the design of the
Permanent Works or Plant and/or Temporary Works and shall, without limitation,
define:
(a) The organisation of the Contractor's design staff;
(b) The specific allocations of responsibility and authority given to identified design
staff with particular reference to the review and verification of design drawings
and calculations by the Contractor;
(c) The specific methods of design to identify any relevant Method Statements and
develop those Method Statements to a degree of detail sufficient to permit the
Employer/Engineer to understand;
(d) The procedures to be applied to manage and control the quality of the design
work, with particular reference to the following:
(i) The design and performance requirements which shall be defined in terms of
basic data and design assumptions made; relevant codes, standards and
regulatory requirements; safety, security and environmental requirements;
and commissioning requirements;
(ii) The design methods. Software applications to be used in the design, both
proprietary and public domain, shall be identified and any requirements for
physical and mathematical model testing;

Pag e |9
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

(iii) The preparation, checking, issue, distribution, indexing and filing reports,
calculations, drawings and specifications along with the means of their
revisions;
(iv) The formal design review, authorisation and approval of design
documentation;
(v) The design verification and validation;
(vi) The design checks by the Design Checker; and
(vii) List of examples of the forms and formats to be used to record the activities
under the Design Quality Plan shall be attached at the end of each section or
a reference included to existing standard procedures.
(e) For the following, the Employer/Engineers review and Notice to Proceed is
required before proceeding with the next stage of the works or design;
(i) The design of temporary traffic arrangements shall be reviewed and
noticed by the Employer/Engineer before submitting the same to the
relevant authorities;
(ii) The design of excavation and lateral support systems for
underground excavations shall be reviewed and noticed by the
Employer/Engineer before the excavation commences;
(iii) The design of formwork and false work for cast insitu and precast
concrete works shall be reviewed and noticed by the
Employer/Engineer before the erection of the same commences;
(iv) The implementation of temporary traffic arrangements shall be
reviewed and noticed by the Employer/Engineer before the
associated works proceed.
(V) Utility structure support scheme (if any) shall be reviewed and
noticed by the Employer/Employers Representative before the
associated work proceed.

8 MANUFACTURING QUALITY PLAN

8.1 Each Manufacturing Quality Plan shall identify the scope of work to be controlled. In
relation to such scope of work, it shall, without limitation, define:
(a) The organisation of the Contractor's staff directly responsible for the day to day
management of the work on or off the Site;
(b) The specific allocations of responsibility and authority given to identified
personnel for the day-to-day management of the work with particular reference
to the supervision, inspection and testing of the work;
(c) The interfacing or co-ordination required with the Contractor's other related
Quality Plan(s);
(d) The specific methods of manufacture to identify any relevant Method
Statements and develop those Method Statements to a degree of detail
sufficient to permit the Employer/Engineer to understand;
(e) The procedures, instructions and forms to be applied to manage and control the
following:

P a g e | 10
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

(i) The purchasing of materials and ensuring they comply with the
requirements of the specification, including purchasing documentation and
specific verification arrangements for Contractor/ Employer/Engineer
inspection of material or manufactured product prior to release for
use/installation;
(ii) The manufacturing process so as to ensure compliance with drawings and
specifications;
(iii) The manufacturing process so as to ensure clear identification and
traceability of material and manufactured parts;
(iv) The inspection and testing activities of incoming materials, in process and
final product;
(v) The identification of the inspection and test status of all material and
manufactured products during all stages of the manufacturing process to
ensure that only products that have passed the required inspections and
tests are dispatched for use and/or installation;
(vi) The review and disposition of non-conforming material or product so as to
avoid unintended use/installation;
(vii) The assessment and disposition of nonconforming material and
manufactured product and approval for reworking or rejection as scrap;
(viii) The identification of preventive action so as to prevent recurrence of similar
non-conformance; and
(ix) The handling, storage, packaging, preservation and delivery of
manufactured product.
(f) The Inspection and Test Plans to manage and control any test and inspection
activities;
(g) All particulars of materials submitted for review by the Employer/Engineer;
(h) Where required by the Contract, the quality control requirements for major
components in accordance with clause 14; and
(i) List of forms and formats to be used to record the activities under the
Manufacturing Quality Plans shall be attached at the end of each section or
reference included to existing standard procedures.

9 QUALITY AUDIT, REVIEWS AND UPDATES

9.1 Contractor shall submit with his Quality Plan a schedule of internal, consultant,
subcontractor and supplier audits that are to be conducted by his personnel at least
every six (6) months. The schedule, scope and method of the audits shall be
sufficient enough, such that the Contractor can verify that all aspects of the Works
are being conducted in accordance with the contractual requirements. The schedule
and any amendments are subject to the acceptance by the Employer/Engineer. The
schedule shall be reviewed every four(4) weeks by the Employer/Engineer.
9.2 The Contractor shall ensure that audits of all the activities in each quality plan are
carried out to ensure the continuing suitability and effectiveness of the Quality
Management System. Reports of each such audit shall be submitted promptly to the
Employer/Engineer for his information.

P a g e | 11
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

9.3 The Contractor shall audit his consultants, subcontractors, sub-consultants and
suppliers.
9.4 The Contractor shall allow the Employer/Engineer to observe/participate in these
audits and to conduct additional independent audits, as they consider appropriate
to provide assurance that the Works are being conducted in accordance with
contractual requirements. The Contractor shall provide the facilities and access
necessary for these audits to be carried out effectively.
9.5 All audits as described in this section are to be carried out in compliance with
established ISO 9001 auditing principles and in accordance with ISO 19011.
9.6 Plan reviews and updates:
(a) The Contractor shall conduct Management Reviews of its quality system, at least
annually. As work progresses, the Contractor shall update the Quality Plan to
reflect current conditions. The need for revisions to the Quality Plan may be
identified by the Contractor and/or the Employer/Engineer. The Contractor shall
submit any revisions or updates to the Quality Plan to the Employer/Engineer for
his Notice to proceed within thirty (30) days of the identification of the need for
a revision.
(b) In addition, the Contractor shall submit its Quality Plan for review by the
Employer/Engineer annually even if no revisions have occurred during the
preceding twelve (12) months. The Contractor shall submit a certified copy of
the updated Quality Plan with revisions highlighted.

10 METHOD STATEMENTS
10.1 Contractor shall prepare Method Statements for each area and/or type of activity
conducted, and submitted to the Employer/Engineer for his review, comment and
Notice to Proceed prior to commencing construction on any Temporary or
Permanent Works. Methods Statements shall be prepared for all Temporary and
Permanent Works and shall be specific to the work being constructed and to the
location of work.
10.2 All Methods Statements shall be consistent with Design Drawings and Works
Specifications that have been subjected to checks and reviews as specified.
10.3 Any deviations from the requirements of the Design Drawings or Works
Specifications shall require written agreement of the Designer, certified by the
Design Checker and shall be submitted to the Employer/Engineer for his review and
Notice to Proceed.
10.4 Approved Methods Statements shall be available for examination by the
Employer/Engineer upon request at site.
10.5 Method Statements shall address the following items:
(a) Scope of work covered by the Method Statement;
(b) Relevant drawings and Works Specifications;
(c) Hazard analysis and the precautions to be taken to eliminate or mitigate
identified hazards;
(e) Methods to be used and programme for the work;
(f) Resources (plant and labour);

P a g e | 12
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

(g) Supervision to be provided (by name);

(h) Safety provisions;
(i) Environmental provisions;
(j) Traffic control and temporary diversions to be implemented; and
(j) Inspection and Test Plan.
10.6 The Contractor shall reference applicable portions of previously prepared plans,
such as the Safety Plan or Quality Plan, in its Method Statements.

11 INSPECTION AND TEST PLANS

11.1 The Contractor, and through him, his consultants, subcontractors and suppliers
engaged in supplying, manufacturing, construction, installation, commissioning and
testing or any other service connected with the Works, shall maintain Inspection and
Test Plans (ITP) appropriate for the services they provide that are accepted by the
Employer/Engineer. These accepted ITP’s will stipulate the necessary level and
frequency of tests and inspections for each aspect of the Works, and also stipulate,
without limitation:
(a) The personnel responsible and/or involvement of various parties for undertaking
and certifying the inspection and/or testing;
(b) The procedure or instructions for the inspection and/or testing;
(c) The test method or a reference to the relevant standard of testing;
(d) The inspection and/or testing required prior to commencement of an activity;
(e) The inspection and/or testing during an activity and its frequency;
(f) The inspection and/or testing required for the completion of an activity;
(g) All Quality ‘Hold Points’ (H), ‘Witness Points’ (W) and ‘Observation Points’ (O)
shall be identified by the Contractor for his Quality Department to inspect and
verify its acceptance;
(h) The Employer/Engineer can place additional Quality ‘Hold Points’ (H), ‘Witness
Points’ (W) and ‘Observation Points’ (O) for the Contractor’s Quality Department
on a case-by-case basis; and
(i) Employer/Engineer may designate additional Quality ‘Hold Points’ for his
inspection on a case-by-case basis.
11.2 The Contractor shall conduct inspections and tests in accordance with his detailed
plans as stipulated in the ITP. Records shall be kept of the completion of the
inspections and tests that identify the record of the results which shall be made
available for review during Employer/Engineer audit.

12 QUALITY PERSONNEL
12.1 The Contractor shall appoint a suitably qualified and experienced person(s) as the
‘Quality Assurance Manager’ to be responsible for the task of ensuring that the
requirements of the Quality Management System are implemented and maintained.
The Contractor shall, at the time of submission of the proposed management Key
Personnel, shall submit for review by the Employer/Engineer details of the
qualifications, experience, authority and responsibility of the proposed Quality

P a g e | 13
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

Assurance Manager.
12.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the Quality Assurance Manager is able to discharge
his duties without hindrance or constraint. In addition, the Contractor shall make
available any such resources that are necessary to ensure the effective
implementation of the quality system and all quality plans.
12.3 The Contractor shall appoint a suitably qualified and experienced person as the
‘Quality Control Manager’ to lead teams of Quality Control Engineers for carrying
out, independent from other teams, inspections of the Works as identified as the
Quality ‘Hold Point’, ‘Witness Point (W), ‘Observation Point (O). The Contractor
shall, at the time of submission of the proposed management Key Personnel, submit
for review by the Employer/Engineer details of the qualifications, experience,
authority and responsibility of the proposed Quality Control Manager.
12.3.1 Refer to Clause 15 Section A, of this Part II for the qualification requirements for Key
Staff.
12.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the Quality Control Manager is able to discharge his
duties without hindrance or constraint, including but not limited to the authority to
suspend works as considered necessary. In addition, the Contractor shall make
available any such resources that are necessary to ensure the effective
implementation of the quality system and all quality plans.
12.5 Quality Control Engineers:
The Contractor shall assign Quality Control Engineers for each shift for each
location/activities where work is being performed. Each lead inspector shall be
qualified by training and experience in all the construction activities being
conducted at the Site.
Quality Control Engineers shall have a minimum of ten (10) years construction /
installation experience with at least five (5) years’ experience in the inspection,
sampling and testing of works of the type being constructed. If required on the
request of Employer/Engineer additional inspectors shall be appointed, at no
additional cost to the Contract.
12.6 Materials Technicians:
The Contractor shall assign qualified materials technicians to conduct the sampling
and testing of materials, goods and supplies for the Contract.
12.7 Staffing Levels:

P a g e | 14
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

The actual size of the Site staff shall reflect the complexity, needs, shifts and
composition of Quality Control activities consistent with work in progress. The
staffing levels shall be consistent with the Contractor’s Quality Plan and the Project
Baseline Programme, the relative locations of work in progress and the nature of the
work.
The Quality Plan shall identify administrative/clerical support for the maintenance
and management of records/documents pertinent to Quality Control activities.

13 MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORT

13.1 The Contractor shall continuously monitor the performance of his Quality
Management System, which shall be included in each Monthly Progress Report
(MPR) in accordance with Part II – Appendix 5.
13.2 Quality Certifications:
The Contractor shall submit a written certification by the Quality Assurance
Manager certifying that:
(a) The Quality Plan and all of the measures and procedures provided therein are
functioning properly and are being fully complied with, except as specifically
noted in the certification.
(b) All work, including that of the Designer, and all other designers, subcontractors
at all tiers, suppliers and fabricators, has been checked and/or inspected by the
Contractor’s Designer Checker, except as specifically noted in the certification,
conforms to the requirements of the Contract.
Refer to Part II - Section C, Attachment C1.
13.3 Weekly
Weekly records shall be prepared and maintained that provide factual evidence that
required activities and/or tests have been performed, including the following:
(a) Type, number and results of quality assurance and quality control activities,
including but not limited to reviews, inspections, tests, audits, monitoring of
work performance and materials analysis;
(b) Qualifications of personnel, procedures and equipment used;
(c) The identity of the Quality Control Engineer or data recorder, the type of test or
observation employed, the results and the acceptability of the work and action
taken in connection with any deficiencies noted;
(d) Nature of nonconforming work causes for rejection, with photographs etc;
(e) Preventive actions;
(f) Proposed corrective actions;
(g) Corrective actions taken and with whose authority; and
(h) Results of corrective actions.
13.4 The Employer/Engineer reserves the right to inspect and audit these documents at
any time.

14 QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

P a g e | 15
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

14.1 The Contractor shall, in accordance with the quality control requirements of the
Specification and other documents included in the Contract, prepare and maintain
quality item lists which establish the criteria for control of each major component or
activity during design, construction and/or manufacture and installation,
commissioning and servicing in accordance with the need to ensure the desired
quality requirements of the Works.
14.2 All inspection and testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, at
Contractor's cost. In all cases, the cost of materials for such tests shall be borne by
the Contractor.
14.3 The work shall conform to high standards of material, design and workmanship. The
Contractor shall conform to the Quality standards prescribed in the Contract
document(s).
14.4 At Site, the Contractor shall arrange the materials, their stacking/storage in
appropriate manner to ensure that the quality of the materials is not compromised.
The Contractor shall provide all the necessary equipment and qualified manpower
to test the quality of materials, assemblies etc. The tests shall be conducted at
specified intervals and the results of tests properly documented.
14.5 The Employer/Engineer shall be free to carry out such additional tests as may be
decided by him at his sole discretion, from time to time, in addition to those
specified in this document. The Employer/Engineer shall also be free to appoint any
third party for inspection and testing of important items like stay cables and steel
work including welding etc, at his own cost. The Contractor shall provide the
samples and labour for collecting the samples. No extra payment shall be payable to
the Contractor for samples or for the collection of the samples. The results of such
additional tests and third party inspection shall be binding on the Contractor.
14.6 The test(s) shall be conducted at the Contractor’s Site laboratory which shall be
established by the Contractor or at any other standard external laboratory selected
by the Employer/Engineer. The Contractor shall transport the samples to the
laboratory for which nothing extra shall be payable. In the event of the Contractor
failing to arrange transportation of the samples in proper time, the
Employer/Engineer shall have them transported and recover two times the actual
cost from the Contractor. All sampling and testing shall be performed in the
presence of assigned Contractor Quality Personnel. Testing may be witnessed by the
Contractor or his authorised representative if permitted by the Standard External
Laboratory. Whether witnessed by the Contractor or not, the test results shall be
binding on the Contractor.
14.7 The Employer/Engineer shall have the right at all times to inspect all operations
including the source of materials, procurement, layout and storage of materials, all
equipment including the concrete batching and mixing equipment, and the quality
control system. Such an inspection shall be arranged and the Employer/Engineer's
approval obtained prior to starting of the particular item of work. This shall
however, not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities.
14.8 All materials which do not conform to the Specifications shall be rejected and shall
be removed from the Site immediately. The Employer/Engineer shall have the
power to cause the Contractors to purchase and use materials from any particular
source, as may, in the Employer/Engineer's opinion, be necessary for the proper

P a g e | 16
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

execution of Works.
14.9 Field/Site Laboratory
14.9.1 All the materials to be used in the work and tested in the laboratory shall comply
with the Employer’s Requirements or such recognised specifications as acceptable
to Employer/Engineer as detailed in clause 3.2 and 3.3 respectively.
14.9.2 The testing machines shall be recalibrated periodically as per Contractor Quality
Plan and applicable regulatory Standards. The calibration shall be from an
authorized laboratory in accordance with clause 3.2 and approved
Employer/Engineer.
14.9.3 The Contractor or his authorised representative shall assist in the collection,
preparation, forwarding and testing of such samples. The cost of such samples and
tests shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall give not less than seven
(7) days’ notice for all tests in order that the Employer/Engineer may attend and
witness testing at the external laboratory. Two (2) copies of all test certificates shall
be supplied by the Contractor to the Employer/Engineer for approval immediately
after the completion of the tests. Test certificates must be supplied to the
Employer/Engineer before the materials or components are used in the works,
unless the Employer/Engineer directs otherwise.
14.10 Frequency of Testing
All materials shall be tested as per the requirements specified in the Contractor’s
Quality Plan and Annexure I. All test reports shall be documented in hard copy as
well as soft copy.
14.11 Unsuitable Materials
If at any stage of execution of work, Employer/Engineer finds that the particular
material is not suitable to be used in any component of the work, the
Employer/Engineer may order retesting of the material from any approved
laboratory at the cost of the Contractor. The rejected material either after the initial
test or after re-testing, as the case may be, shall be immediately removed from the
Site by the Contractor at his own cost. In case of default on the part of the
Contractor in removing rejected materials and any work executed with such
unaccepted materials, the Employer/Engineer shall be at liberty to have them
removed and/or dismantled by other means at the risk and cost of the Contractor.

15 NOTIFICATION OF NONCONFORMITES
15.1 If the Contractor has used or proposes to use or repair any item of the Works which
does not conform to the requirements of the Contract, he shall immediately submit
for review by the Employer/Engineer a proposal for rectification, and supply full
particulars of the nonconformity and, if appropriate, of the proposed means of
repair.
15.2 If the Employer/Engineer issues nonconformity reports, either product based as a
Non-Conformance Report (NCR) or procedural through quality audit as a Corrective
Action Request (CAR) or similar documents to notify the Contractor of any item of
the Works which does not conform to the requirements of the Contract, the
Contractor shall promptly investigate the matter and submit for review within
fourteen (14) days of notification by the Employer/Engineer of the remedial

P a g e | 17
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

measures to be taken and stating the reasons for the measures and the corrective
and preventive action.
15.3 The Contractor shall maintain a Non Conformity Register to indicate the status of all
nonconformities which have been identified by the Employer/Engineer and the
Contractor.
15.4 The Employer/Engineer reserves the right to inspect and audit these documents at
any time.

16 NOTICE OF PLACE OF MANUFACTURE AND/OR SOURCE OF SUPPLY

The Contractor shall notify the Employer/Engineer of the places of manufacture
and/or the source of supply of all goods and materials to be incorporated into the
Works and shall give reasonable notice (which shall not in any event be less than
fifty-six (56) days) to the Employer/Engineer before the start of any manufacturing
and/or the supply of goods and materials.

17 NOTICE OF INSPECTION, TEST, TRIALS BY THE CONTRACTOR

In relation to all Quality Control points and Quality ‘Hold Points’ involving inspection
and/or witness testing by the Employer/Engineer, the Contractor shall give the
Employer/Engineer notice of when the relevant work will be inspected and/or
tested. The period of notice shall be as follows; unless otherwise agreed by the
Employer/Engineer:
(a) In the case of on-Site work, such notice shall be given not less than forty-eight
(48) hours of normal working time before the work is to be inspected and/or
tested;
(b) In the case of work carried out off-Site in Pune, such notice shall be given not
less than fourteen (14) days before the work is to be inspected and/or tested;
and
(c) In the case of work carried out offshore outside of India, such notice shall be
given not less than twenty-eight (28) days before the work is to be inspected
and/or tested

18 WITNESS BY THE EMPLOYER/ENGINEER

In relation to all Quality Control Points involving inspection and/or testing by the
Contractor, the Employer/Engineer may elect to witness such inspections and/or
tests but, on expiration of the period of notice pursuant to clause 17, the Contractor
may proceed with the inspections and/or tests notwithstanding the absence of the
Employer/Engineer or of any response to the said notice. Witness by the
Employer/Engineer shall not discharge the Contractor of the responsibility to
provide acceptable product, nor shall it preclude subsequent rejection by the
Employer/Engineer.

19 CERTIFICATE OF MANUFACTURED GOODS OR MATERIALS

P a g e | 18
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

19.1 The Contractor shall obtain certificates for each batch of manufactured goods and
documentary evidence that goods, supplies and materials and Contractor’s
Equipment conform to the Contract requirements for incorporation in the Works.
Each certificate and/or proofing document shall include all reports of inspections
and/or tests carried out at the place of manufacture.
19.2 The Contractor shall make available at the Site no less than twenty-four (24) hours
prior to installation or use of such goods, supplies or materials and Contractor’s
Equipment all certificates and/or proofing document(s).
19.3 The Employer/Engineer reserves the right to inspect and audit these documents at
any time.
19.4 Materials Certificate of Compliance:
Within seven (7) days of the issue of a Completion Certificate for a Section or for all
the Works, the Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Compliance signed by the
Project Manager and the Quality Assurance Manager indicating that all materials,
goods and supplies incorporated in the Works conform to the requirements of the
Contract.

20 REPORTS OF INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND TRIALS

20.1 The Contractor shall compile reports of each inspection and/or test. Such reports
shall show the results of all the inspections and/or tests carried out and shall certify
that the work has been inspected and/or tested in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract and that the work complies with the requirements of
the Contract. Any analysis of the results required to confirm that the work complies
with the requirements of the Contract shall be compiled in accordance with clause
21 and reported to the Employer/Engineer in accordance with clause 23.
20.2 Each report of inspection and/or test shall be signed by a representative of the
Contractor who has been allocated the requisite authority under the relevant
Inspection and Test Plan and signed by the Contractor’s Quality Assurance Manager.
20.3 The Employer/Engineer reserves the right to inspect and audit these documents at
any time.

21 TIME LIMIT FOR FILING OF REPORTS FOR INSPECTIONS AND/OR TESTS

The Contractor shall ensure that a signed copy report of each in-situ and each off-
site inspection / test is filed in his Records Office within 3 (three) working days and
within seven (7) working days of the date of completion of the test process
respectively.

22 QUALITY CONTROL REGISTER

22.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all stages of the work a quality control
register or registers to identify the status of inspections, sampling and testing of the
work and all certificates. Each register shall:
(a) List the certificates received for each batch of manufactured goods or materials
incorporated in the Works and compares this against the certification required
by the Contract and the Contractor's Quality Plan(s);

P a g e | 19
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

(b) List the inspection, sampling and testing activities undertaken by the Contractor
on each element of the Works and compare these activities against the amount
of inspection, sampling and testing required by the Contract and the
Contractor's Quality Plan(s);
(c) Show the results of each report of inspection and/or test and any required
analysis of these results and compare these results against the acceptance
criteria, including:
(i) Standard deviation and coefficient of variation for each grade of concrete;
(ii) Summary of trail mix for each grade of concrete;
(iii) Summary of sample type and quantity that has been sent for third party
testing;
(iv) Summary of third party testing reports;
(v) Summary of calibration status of monitoring and measurement equipment,
batching plant/s; and
(vi) Summary of in-process testing for routine dynamic pile load test, static pile
load test, lateral load test (if required) and pile integrity test etc that have
been conducted that month.
(d) Cumulative quantity of each grade of concrete produced from RMC and/or
dedicated batching plant/s;
(e) Summary of Non Conformance Reports (NCR), raised internally by Contractor in
its Quality Management System and as directed by Employer/Engineer.
22.2 The Employer/Engineer reserves the right to inspect and audit these documents at
any time.

23 SUMMARIES OF INSPECTION AND/OR TEST

23.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Employer/Engineer for his information
summaries based on each quality control register showing the type and amount of
certification received and the sampling, inspection, and/or testing undertaken on
each element of the Works during the previous week as part of the Weekly Report,
in accordance with clause 13.3. The summaries shall identify and demonstrate the
compliance of such certification, sampling, inspection and/or testing with the
requirements of the Contract and shall identify any item which does not conform to
the requirements of the Contract.

24 SAMPLES
24.1 The Contractor shall ensure those concrete compression test specimens are
controlled as followed:
(a) each sample is identified in accordance with clause 24.3;
(b) all samples are protected, temporarily stored, handled and transported to the
laboratory under the direct supervision of a suitably qualified representative of
the Contractor’s laboratory;
(c) no samples are mislaid, damaged, or contaminated, and
(d) the properties of the sampled material are at no time adversely affected.

P a g e | 20
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

24.2 All samples for testing shall be fully prepared for transportation and testing by the
Contractor and shall be delivered by the Contractor to the place of testing.
24.3 The Contractor shall ensure that concrete test specimens are identified by a unique
reference which, at a minimum, shall contain at least four fields of reference. The
sample reference shall be in the form of ‘LLNN / LNN / NNNN / LLNN’ where:
(a) ‘LLNN’ is the alpha-numeric Contract number;
(b) ‘LNN’ is the alpha-numeric concrete design mix, for example M25 (‘M’ refers mix
and the number ‘25’ represents the characteristic compressive strength of 15cm
cube at 28-days in MPa);
(c) ‘NNNN’ represents the date of sample with ‘day-month’; and
(d) ‘LLNN’ is the alpha-numeric Transit Mixer, for example ‘TM01’
24.4 For all test samples, the Contractor shall ensure that all samples are identified by a
unique number in accordance with its quality control procedure for inspection and
test status of materials and manufactures products and shall contain the required
identification for traceability. At a minimum, the identification reference shall
consist of:
(a) Contract number;
(b) Test identification code assigned by the Contractor;
(c) Date of sample with ‘day-month’; and
(d) Unique sequential number of the sample under the particular test identification
Code.
24.5 Additional fields may be added by the Contractor with the consent of the
Employer/Engineer for the control of the laboratory activities and analysis of test
results.

25 ADDITIONAL SAMPLES
The Contractor shall provide additional samples for testing if in the opinion of the
Employer/Engineer:
(a) The material previously tested no longer complies with the specified
requirements; or
(b) The material has been handled or stored in such a manner that it is no longer
represented by the previously tested samples.

26 TRIALS
26.1 Trials shall be carried out as stated in the Contract to demonstrate that the
proposed materials, equipment or methods of construction comply with the
Contract.
26.2 Trials shall be carried out before commencement of construction or manufacture of
the relevant work in order to ensure that proposed methods and materials comply
with the specified requirements.
26.3 Trials shall be carried out using types of materials and methods of manufacture,
construction and/or installation which have been reviewed and approved by the
Employer/Engineer.

P a g e | 21
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

26.4 Unless permitted by the Employer/Engineer, the materials and methods of

manufacture, construction and/or installation used in the trial to produce work
complying with the requirements of the Contract shall not be changed unless
further trials have been carried out to demonstrate that the proposed changes are
satisfactory.
26.5 All references to ‘tests’ and ‘testing’ in the Contract shall, where the context so
permits, include trials and commissioning.

27 TIMING FOR INSPECTION BY THE EMPLOYER/ENGINEER

27.1 The Contractor shall allow the Employer/Engineer a reasonable time to carry out
any inspection and/or witness testing and to assess the result of any inspection
and/or test before proceeding with the Works.
27.2 Unless the Employer/Engineer’s prior consent has been obtained, all inspections
and/or tests to be witnessed by the Employer/Engineer shall be carried out between
0800 and 1800 hours, Monday to Saturday.

28 FAILURE OF CONTRACTOR TO INSPECT THE WORKS

The Employer/Engineer may reject the work in question, or require it to be
uncovered, in the event of any failure by the Contractor to inspect and/or test at a
Quality ‘Hold Point’ by Contractor’s Quality Department.

29 FAILURE OF THE CONTRACT TO TEST THE WORKS

If the Contractor fails to test, either type test or routine test or qualification test, for each
batch of goods or elements of the Works, then the Employer/Engineer shall arrange for
third party inspection. The Employer/Engineer shall recover two times the actual cost
associated with testing, including the services of any specialised personnel or independent
assessors, and will deduct such cost from the Contract.

ANNEXURE I

REQUEST FOR INSPECTION (RFI) FOR

(Details area to be inspected)

Client : Contractor :

RFI No. Date :

Contract Item No : (Specific area and details are requested to

be inspected)
Specification Clause No :
ITP/Hold Point Details :

P a g e | 22
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 6 – Quality Assurance

Chainage/location : (Specific area and details are requested to

be inspected)
Brief description of Works :

Requested by :
Name : Position :
Date & Time : Signature :

Enclosure : ( attached QA/QC forms/checklist etc. appropriate to inspection)

Comments/Recommendations of Employer/Engineer

Employer/Engineer : OBJECTION /NOTICE TO PROCEED

(Provide details if OBJECTION)

Received copy by Contractor’s Representative

Name : Position :
Date & Time : Signature :

Note : R.F.I. to be submitted at least 24 Hrs prior to inspection.

P a g e | 23
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 7 – Drafting and CAD Standard

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 7 – Drafting and CAD Standard

1. INTRODUCTION
(1) The purpose of this document is to define the minimum Drafting and CAD standard
to be achieved by the Contractor for all drawings produced by the Contractor for the
purpose of the Works. The Contractor shall produce and obtain the Engineer’s Notice
of No Objection to a CAD Manual which defines the standards and procedures for
producing drawings. This will be co-ordinated with the CAD Manuals produced by
the Interfacing Contractors.
(2) By defining a common format for the presentations of drawings and CAD files, the
exchange of drawn information is improved and will maximise the use of CAD in the
co-ordination process.
(3) All submissions shall be made to the Engineer in a format reviewed without
objection by the Engineer and in accordance with the Contract requirements.
(4) Paper and drawing sizes shall be “A” series sheets as specified in BS 3429.
(5) The latest available versions of the following software, compatible for use with Intel-
Windows based computers shall be used, unless otherwise stated, for the various
electronic submissions required:
Document Type Electronic Document Format
Text Documents MS Word, Ver. 2016
Spread Sheets MS Excel, Ver. 2016
Data Base Files MS Access, Ver. 2016
Presentation Files MS PowerPoint, Ver. 2013
Programmes Primavera P7
AutoCAD Graphics CorelDraw, Ver. X6/ AutoCAD Ver.21.0
Photographic Adobe Photoshop [Link] (CS6)
Desktop Publishing Page Maker 7.0.2
CADD Drawings AutoCAD Ver. 21.0
(6) Media for Electronic File Submission
Two copies shall be submitted on separate DVDs, unless otherwise stated.
(7) Internet File Formats/Standards
(a) The following guidelines shall be followed when the Contractor uses the
Internet browser as the communication media to share information with
the Employer / Engineer.
(b) All the data formats or standards must be supported by Microsoft Internet
Explorer version 2016 or above running on Windows XP, Vista or Windows
8.1 or Window 10
(c) The following lists the file types and the corresponding data formats to be
used on Internet. The Contractor shall comply with them unless prior
Notice is obtained from the Engineer for a different Data format:
File Type Data Format
Photo Image Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG)
Image other than Photo GIF or JPEG
Computer Aid Design files (CAD) Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)
Video Window video (.avi)

Pag e |1
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 7 – Drafting and CAD Standard

Sound Wave file (.wav)

(8) The following states the standards to be used on the Internet when connecting to
database(s). The Contractor shall comply with them unless prior Notice is obtained
from the Engineer for a different standard:

Function to be Implemented Standard to be Complied With

Database connectivity Open Database Connectivity(ODBC)
Publishing hypertext language on Hypertext Markup Language (HTML)
the World Wide Web
The hard copy of all documents shall be the contractual copy.
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 General
(1) The Engineer shall provide a title block similar to that used in the Employer’s
Drawings.
(2) Each drawing shall be uniquely referenced by a drawing number, that shall define
both the current status and revision of the drawing. The current status of each
drawing shall be clearly defined by the use of a single letter code as follows:
P - Preliminary Design Drawing
D- Definitive Design Drawing
C- Construction Reference Drawing
W- Working Drawing
B- As-Built Drawing
M- As Manufactured Drawing
E- Employer's Drawing
2.2 Types of drawings
(1) "As-Built Drawings": means those drawings produced by the Contractor and
endorsed by him as true records of construction of the Permanent Works and
which have been given a notice from the Engineer..
(2) "Construction Reference Drawings": means those drawings referred to in Clause
2(8) of the Employer's Requirements - Design in respect of which a Notice has
been issued.
(3) “Design drawings” means all drawings except shop drawings and as-built
drawings.
(4) “Site drawings and sketches” means the drawings, often in sketch form, prepared
on site to describe modifications of the Working drawings where site conditions
warrant changes that do not invalidate the design.
(5) “Shop drawings” means special drawings prepared by the manufacturer or
fabricator of various items within the Works to facilitate manufacture or
fabrication.
"Working Drawings" means the Construction Reference Drawings and such other

Pag e |2
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 7 – Drafting and CAD Standard

drawings and documents, such as bar bending schedules and manufacturing

drawings, as are necessary to amplify the Construction Reference Drawings for
construction purposes, some of which may be endorsed by the Engineer.
2. COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN & DRAFTING (CAD) STANDARDS
3.1 Introduction
Scope of Use; Data input procedures between the Engineer and Contractors must be
co-ordinated, and the key parameters used to form CAD data files must be
standardised. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the Engineer
and Interfacing Contractors to prepare, and obtain the Engineers Notice of No Objection
to a CAD Manual setting out the production standards and procedures for CAD data
files. The production of all CAD data files shall comply with the following requirements.
3.2 Objectives
The main objectives of the CAD standards are as follows:
(a) To ensure that the CAD data files produced for the Project are co-ordinated and
referenced in a consistent manner.
(b) To provide the information and procedures necessary for a CAD user from one
discipline or external organisation to access (and use as background reference),
information from a CAD data file prepared by another discipline or external
organisation.
(c) To standardise the information contained within CAD data files which may be
common to more than one discipline such as drawing borders, title boxes, grid lines
etc.
(d) To establish procedures necessary for the management of CAD data files.
(e) To ensure all Contractors use ‘Model space’ and ‘Paper space’ in the production of
their CAD files’.
3.3 General
(1) To facilitate co-ordination between Contractors, it is a requirement that all
drawings issued by Contractors for co-ordination or record purposes shall be
produced using CAD methods. Drawings shall be issued in digital format in
addition to the paper copies.
(2) The intent of the issue of digital information is to aid the related design by others.
The definitive version of all drawings shall always be the paper or polyester film
copies which have been issued by the Contractor or organisation originating the
drawing.
(3) Drawings and drawing packages issued for co-ordination, record purposes or for
acceptance shall be accompanied by a complete set of the corresponding CAD
data files.
(4) Any Contractor or organisation making use of the CAD data from others shall be
responsible for satisfying himself that such data is producing an accurate
representation of the information on the corresponding paper drawing which is
satisfactory for the purpose for which he is using it. Provided the general
principles of this section have been achieved by the originator of the CAD data,
Contractors making use of the CAD data from others shall not be entitled to
require alterations in the manner in which such CAD data is being presented to

Pag e |3
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 7 – Drafting and CAD Standard

them.
(5) In particular, automatic determination of physical dimensions from the data file
shall always be verified against the actual figured dimensions on the paper or
polyester drawings. Figured dimensions shall always be taken as correct where
discrepancies occur.
3.4 Terminology & Associated Standards / Guidelines
Any terminology used within this section that is ambiguous to the user shall be clarified
with the Engineer. British Standard BS1192 is used in principle as a guide for drawing
practice, convention, CAD data structure and translation.]

3.5 Paper Drawings

(1) Hard copies of the drawings, i.e. paper, are considered to be the main vehicle for the
receipt and transmittal of design and production information, typically plans, elevation
and sections.
(2) The Project wide accepted media for the receipt and transmittal of “Paper”
drawings will be paper and polyester film of various standard ISO ‘A’ sizes. The
composition of this information shall be derived from a CAD “Model”, as noticed
by the Engineer.
(3) The CAD derived “Paper” drawing composition will reflect a window of
information contained within a CAD “Model Space” file together with a selection
of information contained within the associated CAD “Paper Space” file.
3.6 CAD Data Creation, Content & Presentation
A consistent method of CAD data creation, together with content and presentation is
essential. The method of CAD “Model Space and Paper Space” creation is as follows:
(1) Model Space Files
(a) Typically CAD “Model Space” files are required for general arrangement and
location plans and will consist of a series of other “Model Space” referenced
CAD files covering the total design extents at a defined building level (the
number of referenced files should be kept to an absolute minimum). Data
contained within a CAD “Model Space” files is drawn at full size (1:1) and located
at the correct global position and orientation on the Project Grid (as noticed by
the Engineer) / or defined reference points.
(b) Each CAD “Model Space” file will relate to an individual discipline. Drawing
border / text, match / section lines or detailed notation shall NOT be included
within a CAD “Model Space” file. Dimensions shall be included within a CAD
“Model Space” but located on a dedicated layer. Elevations, Long Sections and
Cross Sections shall also be presented in CAD “Model Space” as defined above,
but do not need to be positioned and orientated on the Project Grid.
(2) Paper Space CAD Files
(a) Paper Space” CAD files are utilised to aid the process of plotting “Paper”
drawings and are primarily a window of the CAD “Model Space” file. A “Paper
Space” CAD file will typically contain drawing borders, text, match or section
lines & detailed notation. Once these files are initially set up and positioned the
majority of “Paper Drawing” plots at various approved scales are efficiently and
consistently generated by displaying different combinations of element layers

Pag e |4
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 7 – Drafting and CAD Standard

and symbology contained within the “Paper Space” file and the referenced
“Model Space” files.
(b) The purpose is to ensure that total co-ordination is achieved between the CAD
“Model Space” file and the “Paper Drawing” output during the revision cycle of
the design and production process. Duplicated data in “Model and Paper Space”
files will not be acceptable unless an automatic update link exists between the
two data sets. “Paper Space” files are not typically required as part of the CAD
Media Receipt from Contractors, unless specifically requested by the Engineer.
3.7 CAD Quality Control Checks
(1) Random CAD Quality Control Audits will be carried out by Engineer on all CAD
media received and transmitted.
(2) These checks DO NOT verify the technical content of the CAD data received or
transmitted, as this is the responsibility of the originating organisation, however
compliance with all CAD and Draughting Standards shall be checked.
(3) In addition, all Contractors who transmit and receive CAD data relating to the
Project shall have CAD quality control procedures in place. A typical quality control
procedure shall contain CAD data quality checking routines coupled with standards
for CAD data transmittal and archiving.
3.8 CAD Data Transfer Media and Format
When CAD data is received & transmittal between the Employer, the Engineer, the
Contractor and Interfacing Contractors, the media shall be as follows:
(a) Data Exchange Format - AutoCAD Release 21.0 or latest version .DWG
(b) Operating System - Windows NT, Windows Vista or Windows 8.1 or Window 10
(c) Data Transfer Media shall be submitted on DVD-RW Discs, of at least 4.0 GB.
(d) All DVDs must be labelled with a stick-on circular data sheet with the following
details:
(i) Name of Contractor and/or Company
(ii) Project Title
(iii) Drawing Filenames
(vi) DVD Reference No. & Total No. of DVDs
(e) All media shall be submitted with a completed Transmittal Form, refer to
Attachment A2 of Section- A of this Section VI.
(f) The Contractor must ensure the supplied media is free from all virus’s, spam,
shareware, etc...
(g) Sub-directories on DVDs are not permitted. If CAD Data is created using UNIX,
archive commands must be unrooted.
3.9 CAD Media Receipt & Transmittal
(1) CAD Media Transmittal forms from the Contractor to the Engineer will consist of
the following:
(a) CAD Digital Media DVDs shall typically contain CAD “Model Space” and
“Paper Space” files.
(b) CAD data sheet
(c) CAD issue / revision sheet

Pag e |5
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 7 – Drafting and CAD Standard

(d) CAD Quality Checklist confirming compliance.

(e) Plot of each “Model Space” file issued on an A1 drawing sheet (to best fit).
(2) The above CAD media will be collectively known as “CAD Media Transmittal Set”.
The CAD data file transmittal format required by the Engineer from all contractors
shall be AutoCAD Version 21 or latest version.
(3) All CAD media received from Contractors will be retained by the Engineer, as an
audit trail / archive of a specific Contractor’s design evolution.
(4) CAD Media Receipt, issued by the Engineer to the Contractor.
(a) CAD media should normally be obtained from the respective Interfacing
Contractor(s), but should the Engineer issue CAD media it will consist of the
following :
(i) CAD Digital Media DVDs typically contain only CAD “Model Space” files.
(ii) CAD data sheet.
(iii) CAD issue / revision sheet
(b) The above CAD media will be collectively known as the “CAD Media Receipt
Set”. The CAD data file transmittal format used by the Engineer to all
Contractors will be in AutoCAD (version 21)
(c) Each CAD transmittal disk / tape will be labelled with proper disk label as
approved by the Engineer. Any CAD data transmitted without this label is
assumed to be provisional information not to have been quality checked and
therefore not formally issued.
3.10 Revisions
(1) All ‘Revisions’, ‘In Abeyance’ and ‘Deletions’ shall be located on a common layer.
This layer can be turned on or off for plotting purposes.
(2) The following example text indicates the current CAD file revision, i.e. ‘Revision
[A]’. This shall be allocated to a defined layer on all CAD “Model Space” files, in
text of a size that will be readable when the CAD “Model Space” file is fitted to the
screen, with all levels on.
3.11 Block Libraries, Blocks, & Block Names
(1) All Construction Industry symbols produced as CAD Cells shall typically conform to
British Standard BS1192 - part 3.
(2) All Blocks created shall be Primitive (i.e. NOT Complex) and shall be placed
Absolute (i.e. NOT Relative).
(3) The Contractor's specific block libraries shall be transmitted to Engineer together
with an associated block library list containing the filename (max. 6 characters)
and block description. The Contractor shall ensure that the library is regularly
updated and circulated to all other users, together with the associated library
listing.
(4) All Blocks of a common type, symbols or details should initially be created within
a CAD “Model Space File” specifically utilised for that purpose. These files will be
made available on request by the Engineer.
(5) All Blocks created will typically be 2D unless 3D is specifically requested. In both
instances they shall have an origin at a logical point located within the extents of

Pag e |6
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 7 – Drafting and CAD Standard

each Block’s masked area or volume.

3.12 CAD Dimensioning
Automatic CAD Dimensioning will be used at all times. Any dimensional change must
involve the necessary revision to the model space file. If the CAD Quality Control Checks
find that the revisions have not been correctly carried out, the rejection of the entire
CAD submission will result.
3.13 CAD Layering
All CAD elements shall be placed on the layers allocated for each different discipline.
The layer naming convention to be adopted by the Contractor shall be submitted for
acceptance and inclusion within these standards.
3.14 Global origin, Location & Orientation on the Alignment Drawing.
(1) Location or Plan information in “Model Space” files shall coincide with the correct
location and orientation on the Project grid (as noticed by the Engineer) for each
specific Contract.
(2) Location plans shall have at least three setting out points shown on each CAD
“Model Space” file. Each setting out point shall be indicated by a simple cross- hair
together with related Eastings and Northings co-ordinates.
3.15 Line Thickness and Colour
To assist plotting by other users, the following colour codes will be assigned to the
following line thickness / pen sizes.

Colour Code No Line Thickness

Red 10 0.18
White 7 0.25
Yellow 2 0.35
Brown 34 0.5
Blue 130 0.7
Orange 30 1.0
Green 3 1.4
Grey 253 2.0
3.16 CAD Utilisation of 2D & 3D Files
Although the project standard is 2D CAD files, certain disciplines and contractors may
use 3D CAD files for specific applications or where the isolated use of 3D aids the design
and visualisation process, i.e. Architecture, Survey and Utilities. In these specific
instances 3D CAD data will only be transmitted if all other users can use this data. If this
is not the case, a 3D to 2D translation shall be processed by the creator prior to issue.
3.17 CAD File Numbering
(1) Contractors CAD File Numbering shall be as described in 2.1 above.
(2) The Employer will not be required to produce numerous CAD files, but if they issue
any, the drawings shall follow the required Contract numbering system, except that
the status of the drawing in clause 2.1(2) shall be "E".
3.18 CAD File Naming Convention – General

Pag e |7
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 7 – Drafting and CAD Standard

CAD “Model Space” files shall be named in accordance with general drawing
conventions.

Pag e |8
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI - Employer’s Requirement

Appendix 8 - Works Areas & Temporary Power Supply

May 2018
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 8 – Works Areas & Temporary Power Supply

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................... 3
2. STANDARD ENGINEERING CONDITIONS........................................................................................... 3
3. ELECTRICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS .................................................................................................... 4
3.1. Work on Site ............................................................................................................................ 4
3.2. Electrical General..................................................................................................................... 5
3.3. Materials, Appliances and Components ................................................................................... 5
3.4. Design Considerations ............................................................................................................. 5
3.5. Mains Voltage.......................................................................................................................... 5
3.6. Earthing ................................................................................................................................... 6
3.7. Plugs, Socket Outlets and Couplers .......................................................................................... 6
3.8. Cables...................................................................................................................................... 7
3.9. Lighting Installation ................................................................................................................. 7
3.10. Electrical Motors.................................................................................................................. 8
3.11. Inspection and Testing ......................................................................................................... 8
3.12. Identification ....................................................................................................................... 8
3.13. Maintenance: ...................................................................................................................... 8

Page |2
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 8 – Works Areas & Temporary Power Supply

WORKS AREAS & TEMPORARY POWER SUPPLY

1. INTRODUCTION
(1) The Contractor shall provide within the designated principal Works Areas, at
locations agreed with the Engineer, the compounds and facilities for the
Employer, the Engineer, the Contractor and Project Contractors of the
Employer as described elsewhere in this Contract and to the engineering
conditions defined under Clause 2 of this Appendix 8.
(2) The standard conditions applying to the use of any Works Area by the
Contractor for its site facilities are given under Clause 2 of this Appendix.
(3) The Conditions for supply of electricity by the Contractor to Interfacing
Contractors are given under Clause 3 of this Appendix.
(4) Other aspects of design, supply and construction within works areas,
including structures within works areas shall be covered by the relevant parts
of the Specification.
2. STANDARD ENGINEERING CONDITIONS
The following standard engineering conditions apply to all Works Areas:
(1) Formation
(a) The Works Areas shall be formed to the levels that the Engineer has
issued a notice for. No such levels shall be amended without a notice
from the Engineer.
(b) The Works Areas shall be surfaced in a manner agreed with the Engineer,
compatible with their intended use, and, in particular, footpaths and
roadways connecting facilities shall be clearly defined. Measures shall be
taken to the satisfaction of the Engineer to ensure all areas are properly
drained and kept free of standing water.
(c) The removal, diversion or reinstatement elsewhere as may be required
of any existing works or installation whatsoever within the Works Areas
shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(2) Roads & Parking
(a) Space shall be provided within the Works Areas for parking,
loading/unloading and maneuvering of motor vehicles.
(b) Any damage done to the adjoining public roads and fixtures and
properties (public or private) shall be made good to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
(3) Drainage & Sewerage
(a) All storm or rainwater from the Works Areas including any access roads
thereto shall be conveyed to the nearest stream course, catch-pit, channel
or storm water drain as required by the Engineer. All temporary and
permanent works shall be carried out in such a manner that no damage or
nuisance are caused by storm water or rain water to the adjacent
property.
(b) No drain or watercourse shall be used without a notice issued from the
Engineer.
(c) Damages or obstructions caused to any watercourse, drain, water-main

Page |3
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 8 – Works Areas & Temporary Power Supply

or other installations within or adjoining the Works Areas shall be made

good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(d) Treatment and disposal of sewage and wastewater from the Works
Areas shall be provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(e) The clearance of Environmental Dept of Govt. of Maharashtra and other
statutory authorities as applicable shall be obtained.

(4) Buildings
(a) No permanent structures other than those required for the Permanent
Works shall be temporarily permitted on the Works Areas.
(b) Electricity, water, telephone and sewerage shall be provided by the
Contractor, as required, for all temporary buildings.
(c) No public supply potable water shall be used for heating, cooling and
humidification purposes, or vehicle washing without a notice from the
Engineer.
(d) The clearance certificate from Electrical Inspector and other relevant
statutory authorities as applicable shall be obtained.
(e) The Fire clearance certificate from Fire authorities and other statutory
authorities as applicable shall be obtained.

(5) Pedestrian Access

Every existing pedestrian access throughout the Works Areas shall be
maintained in a usable condition at all times to the satisfaction of the
Engineer including lighting, signing and guarding.
(6) Fencing
The Works Areas shall be secured against unauthorized access at all times. In
particular fencing or the like shall be maintained, removed and re-erected in
the new location wherever and whenever a Works Area is relinquished in
stages.
3. ELECTRICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS

3.1. Work on Site

(a) The Contractor shall nominate a representative whose name and qualifications
shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for review not later than 4 weeks
before the appointment and who shall be solely responsible for ensuring the
safety of all temporary electrical equipment on Site. The Contractor shall not
install or operate any temporary Site electrical systems until this
representative is appointed and has commenced duties.
(b) The name and contact telephone number of the representative having been
reviewed with a notice of no objection by the Engineer shall be displayed at
the main distribution board for the temporary electrical supply so that he can
be contacted in case of an emergency.
(c) Schematic diagrams and the details of the equipment for all temporary
electrical installations shall be submitted by the Contractor, and these

Page |4
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 8 – Works Areas & Temporary Power Supply

diagrams together with the temporary electrical equipment shall be submitted

to the Engineer for a notice.
(d) All electrical installation work on Site shall be carried out in accordance with
the requirements laid down in BS 7375 and the Specification. All work shall be
supervised or executed by qualified and suitably categorised electricians, who
are registered as such under the Electricity Ordinance 1990 / Electricity
(Registration) Regulations 1990.

3.2. Electrical General

Temporary electrical Site installations and distribution systems shall be in
accordance with:-
(1) Indian Electricity Rules
(2) The Power Companies’ Supply Rules;
(3) Electricity and its subsidiary Regulations;
(4) IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition);
(5) BS 7375 Distribution of Electricity on Construction and Building Sites;
(6) BS 4363 Distribution Assemblies for Electricity Supplies for Construction and
Building Sites; and
(7) Any other applicable national standards

3.3. Materials, Appliances and Components

All materials, appliances and components used within the distribution system shall
comply with BS 4363 and BS 7375 Appendix A and shall be inspected and approved
by the Engineer before being used or operationalised at site.

3.4. Design Considerations

1. Distribution equipment utilised within the temporary electrical distribution
system shall incorporate the following features:-
(a) flexibility in application for repeated use;
(b) suitability for transport and storage;
(c) robust construction to resist moisture, dust and damage; and
(d) safety in use.
2. All cabling shall be run at high level whenever possible and be firmly secured
to ensure they do not present a hazard or obstruction to people and
equipment.
3. The installation on Site shall allow convenient access to authorised and
competent operators to work on the apparatus contained within.

3.5. Mains Voltage

1. The Site mains voltage shall be as per the Electricity Authority, 415V / 3 phase
4 wire system.
(a) Single phase voltage shall be as per the Electricity Authority, 240V supply.
(b) Reduced voltages shall conform to BS 7375.

Page |5
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 8 – Works Areas & Temporary Power Supply

2. Types of Distribution Supply

The following voltages shall be adhered to for typical applications throughout
the distribution systems:
a) fixed plant - 415V/ 3 phase, 50 Hz;
b) movable plant fed by trailing cable - 415V / 3 phase,50 Hz;
c) installations in Site buildings - 240V/1 phase,50 Hz;
d) fixed flood lighting - 240V/ 1 phase,50 Hz;
e) portable and hand held tools - 240V/1 phase, 50 Hz;
f) Site lighting (other than flood lighting) - 240V/1 phase; and
g) portable hand-lamps (general use) - 240V/1 phase.
3. The required permissions from local Environmental Authorities/Pollution
Control Board or any other relevant Authority shall be obtained by the
Contractor for using DG sets for power supply.
4. Protection of Circuits
a) Protection shall be provided for all main and sub-circuits against excess
current, under and over voltage, residual current and earth faults. The
protective devices shall be capable of interrupting (without damage to any
equipment or the mains or sub-circuits) any short circuit current that may
occur.
b) Distribution and sub distribution electrical panels shall have a degree of
protection not less than IP 65.
c) Discrimination between circuit breakers, and fuses shall be in accordance
with:-
i) BS 88;
ii) BS EN 60898; and
iii) BS 7375;
iv) Any other appropriate Indian Standards

3.6. Earthing
1. Earthing and bonding shall be provided for all electrical installations and
equipment to prevent the possibility of dangerous voltage rises and to ensure
that faults are rapidly cleared by installed circuit protection.
2. Earthing systems shall conform to the following standards:-
(a) IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition);
(b) BS 7430;
(c) BS 7375; and
(d) IEEE Standard 80 Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding.
(e) IS:3043

3.7. Plugs, Socket Outlets and Couplers

Low voltage plugs, sockets and couplers shall be colour coded in accordance with
BS 7375, and constructed to conform to BS EN 60309. High voltage couplers and 'T'

Page |6
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 8 – Works Areas & Temporary Power Supply

connections shall be in accordance with BS 3905.

3.8. Cables
1. Cables shall be selected after full consideration of the conditions to which
they will be exposed and the duties for which they are required. Supply
cables up to 3.3KV shall be in accordance with BS 6346.
2. For supplies to mobile or transportable equipment where operation of the
equipment subjects the cable to flexing, the cable shall conform to one of the
following specifications appropriate to the duties imposed on it:
(a) BS 6708 flexible cables for use at mines and quarries;
(b) BS 6007 rubber insulated cables for electric power and lighting; and
(c) BS 6500 insulated flexible cords and cables.
3. Where low voltage cables are to be used, reference shall be made to BS 7375.
The following specifications shall also be referred to particularly for
underground cables:-
(a) BS 6346 for armoured PVC insulated cables; and
(b) BS 6708 Flexible cables for use at mines and quarries.
4. All cables which have a voltage to earth exceeding 65V (except for supplies
from welding transformers to welding electrodes) shall be of a type having a
metal sheath and/or armour which shall be continuous and effectively
earthed. In the case of flexible or trailing cables, such earthed metal sheath
and/or armour shall be in addition to the earth core in the cable and shall not
be used as the sole earth conductor.
5. Armoured cables having an over sheath of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or an oil
resisting and flame retardant compound shall be used whenever there is a risk
of mechanical damage occurring.
6. For resistance to the effects of sunlight, overall non-metallic covering of cables
shall be black in colour.
7. Cables which have applied to them a voltage to earth exceeding 12V but not
normally exceeding 65V shall be of a type insulated and sheathed with a
general purpose or heat resisting elastomer.
8. All cables which are likely to be frequently moved in normal use shall be
flexible cables.
9. The cables used shall be joint free. If a joint is unavoidable at certain location,
the same shall be formed by skilled/certified person only and the material
used for this purpose shall be subject to approval of the Engineer .
Flexible cables shall be in accordance with BS 6500 and BS 7375.

3.9. Lighting Installation

1. Where Site inspection of the Works is required during the nights, the Lighting
circuits shall be run separate from other sub-circuits and shall be in
accordance with BS 7375 and BS 4363.
2. Voltage shall not exceed 55V to earth except when the supply is to a fixed
point and where the lighting fixture is fixed in position.

Page |7
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 8 – Works Areas & Temporary Power Supply

3. Luminaries shall have a degree of protection not less than IP 54. In particularly
bad environments where the luminaries are exposed to excesses of dust and
water, a degree of protection to IP 65 shall be employed.
4. The Contractor shall upgrade the lighting level to a minimum of 200 lux by
localised lighting in all areas where required by the Engineer.
5. Mechanical protection of luminaries against damage by impact shall be
provided by use of wire guards or other such devices whenever risk of damage
occurs.
6. All light fixtures shall be fixed on appropriate pedestals when not fixed with
mounting base on the structures.
7. The luminaries used shall be of LED type.

3.10. Electrical Motors

1. Totally enclosed fan cooled motors to BS 4999: Part 105 shall be used.
2. Motor control and protection circuits shall be as stipulated in BS 6164.
Emergency stops for machinery shall be provided.

3.11. Inspection and Testing

Electrical installations on Site shall be inspected and tested in accordance with the
requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition).

3.12. Identification
Identification labels of a type reviewed with a notice of no objection by the
Engineer shall be affixed to all electrical switches, circuit breakers and motors to
specify their purpose.

3.13. Maintenance:
1. Strict maintenance and regular checks of control apparatus and wiring
distribution systems shall be carried out by an electrician (duly qualified to
carry out the said checks) to ensure safe and efficient operation of the systems.
The Contractor shall submit for a notice by the Engineer details of his
maintenance schedule and maintenance works record.
2. All portable electrical appliances shall be permanently numbered (scarf tag
labels or similar) and a record kept of the date of issue, date of the last
inspection carried out and the recommended inspection period.

Page |8
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 9 – Railway Envelope Access and Control

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 9 – Railway Envelope Access and Control

RAILWAY ENVELOPE ACCESS AND CONTROL

(1) The Railway Envelope is defined in the Employer's Requirements - General.

(2) The conditions pertaining to access to the Railway Envelope and its control are
as follows:
(a) The Contractor shall complete the Works on the Key Dates defined in
Appendix 2A of this Section VI – Employer’s Requirements and allow the
Employer/Engineer to Control the Access Over the Railway Envelope.
From the date the Employer/Engineer starts exercising the control over
the access to the Railway Envelope, any access to the Railway Envelope by
the Contractor shall be in accordance with any procedures, requirements
and conditions laid down by the Employer as defined under Clause 1(3) of
this appendix.
(b) Before the Employer/Engineer starts exercising control over the access to
the Railway Envelope, the Contractor shall have executed all necessary
works on the structure and all other work within the Railway Envelope,
including the installation of all equipment fixings defined within the
Contract, and shall ensure that the Envelope is complete, secure, safe for
the operation of trains, and has the Employer's and Engineer’s notice of
no objection for the same .
(c) From the date the Employer/Engineer starts exercising the control over
the access to the Railway Envelope, any access to the Railway Envelope by
the Contractor shall be in accordance with the conditions contained
within clause 3 (below) of this Appendix.
(3) The conditions for access to the Railway Envelope after the Employer/Engineer
starts exercising control over the access to the Railway Envelope are as
follows:
(a) Access to the Railway Envelope will be controlled by the
Employer/Engineer and priority will be given to the testing and trial running
of rolling stock and other operating components associated with the
railway. Access will be given to the Contractor and to other Contractors by
the Employer/Engineer for inspecting, maintaining, adjusting and repairing,
by prior arrangement and for limited periods.
(b) Before the Employer/Engineer starts exercising control over the access to
the Railway Envelope, the Contractor shall provide the Employer/Engineer
with the name of an individual charged with liaising with the
Employer/Engineer on a twenty-four (24) hour contact procedure. The
Contractor shall give two weeks’ notice of his desired track possessions, and
this appointed liaison officer shall attend, when requested, the appropriate
meetings where track possession allocations will be made by the
Employer/Engineer. It may be necessary for the Contractor's work to be
carried out intermittently or at night if suitable possessions cannot be given
during its preferred hours. During all such operations the Contractor will be
fully responsible for safety of men, equipment and works.
(c) After the access control over the Railway Envelope begins , and prior to the
Pag e |1
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 9 – Railway Envelope Access and Control

completion of the Project, the Interfacing Contractors may be undertaking,

but not limited to, the following activities:
a. laying of tracks and other connected equipment .
b. testing traction and signalling equipment together with other
equipment and facilities required for operation of the railway. During
this period the Employer and/or his contractors will be running works
trains through the Railway Envelope
c. undertaking acceptance tests, Integrated System Tests and test
running: During this period the Employer and/or his contractors will be
running trains through the Railway Envelope on a regular basis.
d. undertaking trial running. During this period the Employer will be
operating trains and equipment on a trial basis, the frequency of which
will increase as the trials proceed until full operating frequencies are
reached.
The Contractor shall take into account the Interfacing Contractors’ activities
and train operations in planning and programming his Works.
(4) Prior to the issue of the Taking over Certificate for the Project, the Contractor
will be given extended possessions of the Railway Envelope for the purposes of
final adjustment, tightening, touching up or cleaning up prior to the final
inspection of the Works. Such possessions shall be agreed with the
Employer/Engineer in accordance with the procedure set out under Clause
1(3)(b) of this Appendix

2. RAILWAY EQUIPMENT
(1) Non structural items.
Maintenance walkways within the Railway Envelope and any flooring,
screens, handrails and exit doors forming the boundary of the Railway
Envelope required in the terms of the Contract shall be supplied and installed
by the Contractor before the Employer/Engineer intends to control the
access to the Railway Envelope .
(2) Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Fixings.
(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for all co-ordination with the
Employer/Engineer and Project Contractors for determining the
detailed requirements for equipment fixing provisions in accordance
with the Contractor’s Works Programme.
(b) No additional holes or welding to structural members beyond those
shown on the Working Drawings, nor changes to hole or weld locations
shall be permitted without the notice of the Engineer.

Pag e |2
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 10 – Approved Manufacturers/Vendors

May 2018
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 11 – Curve and Gradient Details

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 11 – Curve and Gradient Details

CURVES AND GRADIENT DETAILS

Horizontal and Vertical Alignment

All details with regard to the Horizontal and Vertical Alignment are shown on the plan and
profile sheets of the Employer’s Drawings provided in Section IX of the Contract.
The amendments to the alignment shall be made only in accordance with and under the
circumstances as stipulated in the Contract documents. No amendment shall be made to
the alignment without a Notice of No Objection from the Engineer.

Pag e |1
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents

UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT

SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 12 – Utilities

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 12 – Utilities

UTILITIES
DEFINITIONS
Utilities-
Utilities are defined as public utilities above or below ground and include all live water mains,
water wells, power cables, street lights, transformers, telephone posts, telecommunication
cables, sewers, storm water drains and the like shown on the Employer’s Drawings OR are
uncharted and are therefore not shown on the Employer’s Drawings.
Charted Utilities-
Charted Utilities are the utilities (as defined above) which are shown on the Employer’s
Drawings.
Uncharted Utilities-
Uncharted Utilities are the utilities (as defined above) which are not shown on the
Employer’s Drawings.
Responsibility of the Contractor.
1. The Contractor shall make his own enquiries and investigations, including excavating trial
holes/pits, to ascertain the existence, nature, location and size of utilities. A schedule of
utility diversions and utilities to remain but to be supported /protected (the utility diversion
plan) shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted with the Preliminary Design. The
schedule will list out utilities that:
 will be diverted by the Contractor during the course of the Works, and
 will remain in place and require the use of specific construction protection methods to
complete the underground structures around and below the utilities including
support/protection of the utilities during construction.
2. The Contractor shall take into consideration the time required for utility diversions into the
overall Works Programme for the Contract. However, efforts shall be made to avoid
diverting/disturbance of any utility and continue the Works by supporting/protecting the
same but the required services being provided by these utilities shall be maintained at all
the times at the cost of the Contractor.
3. The diversion work shall be undertaken by the Contractor as per the approval of the Utility
owning Agencies and a notice from the Engineer. Temporary supports and protection by
methods proposed by the Contractor and agreed by the Utility Agency and Engineer shall
be provided to the utilities. Permanent supports and protection shall be provided wherever
required for the safety and security of the utility service.
4. The Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer and the Utility Agencies of any
(a) damage to utilities;
(b) leakage of utilities;
(c) discovery of utilities not previously identified;
5. When diverting and/or protecting sewerage and stormwater lines the Contractor shall
ensure that drainage to the site and adjacent areas is maintained at all times and that at no
times flooding or other nuisance occurs.
6. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the programme of all works of utility diversion/
protection works and shall take all steps to enable the utility diversions to proceed in
accordance with the programme. The Contractor shall maintain close liaison with the Utility
Agencies. The Contractor shall set up and manage a Utility Liaison Group of experienced

Pag e |1
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 12 – Utilities

personnel for the duration of the Contract.

7. Records of the existing utilities encountered shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and
a copy provided for the Engineer. The records shall contain the following details :
(a)location of utility;
(b)date on which the utilities were encountered;
(c) nature and sizes of the utilities;
(d)condition of utility;
(e)temporary or permanent supports provided; and
(f) Diversions made –Temporary or permanent
8. The Contractor shall include the details (plan, location, ownership, size and material) of all
such utilities on the As Built Drawings.
Diversion and Protection of Underground/Overhead Utility Lines
9. The work comprises of replacement, relocation, diversion and protection of existing sub-
surface, surface and overhead public utilities viz. sewer mains, water lines, water wells,
storm water drains, gully pits including connection pipes, house drains, gas pipe lines,
electric and telephone cables, optical fibre cables including their appurtenance structure,
O.H. electrical transmission line, electric poles, traffic signals, etc… which will be disturbed
due to construction of the metro stations, shafts and tunnels, where applicable.
10. The Contractor shall divert and/or effectively protect all public utilities falling within the
metro station, Cut & Cover Ramps and shaft locations and their immediate adjoining areas
or which are likely to be exposed, disturbed or damaged during the execution of the work
or in consequence thereof, in such a manner and using such materials as required or
specified by the concerned public Utility Agencies and as per instruction of the Engineer,
and hold them in proper position without any damage being caused to them during
execution of work. Where adequate space is not available adjacent to the footprints of the
proposed stations, the utilities may have to be diverted within the station-box itself to
facilitate the construction of diaphragm/secant piles wall.
11. The Contractor shall have to bear the expenses of providing and laying pipes, water wells,
gas mains/gully pit connections/house drains and other electric, telephones, optical fibre
cables and other cables including their appeurtence structure, O.H. Electrical transmission
line, electrical poles, traffic signals or any other underground structures or services falling
within the metro station, shaft and tunnel locations, and their immediate adjoining areas
which may be found to have been disturbed or damaged due to the Contractor’s fault
and/or defective and careless workmanship. The decision of the Engineer in this respect
shall be binding and final and all costs of rebuilding or repairing of such damaged services
or structures as aforesaid shall be deducted from the Contractor, if the same is not taken
care of within a time frame, as directed by the Engineer.
12. The Contractor shall enquire of and collect information from all concerned public Utility
Agencies, owners, Government Departments and local bodies in connection with the sewer
lines, water mains, water wells, cables, wires and any other obstruction either overhead or
on ground or underground which may be encountered in the course of execution of the
work and which are likely to affect the progress of the work, at his own cost and risk. No
idle labour charge will be admissible on account of delay in collecting the above-mentioned
information.
13. The Contractor shall have to excavate trial trenches of suitable sizes for satisfactorily

Pag e |2
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 12 – Utilities

exploring all the underground utilities as required and as instructed by the Engineer before
commencement of any work below ground level.
The time of completion for the project is inclusive of diverting and/ or protection
(temporary as well permanent) of utilities.
Additional Conditions for Diversion/Protection of Utilities above Underground
Stations/Shafts
14. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to get the approval of the proposed
water/sewer/storm water/ pipeline etc diversion/shifting from PMC or the concerned
Agency/Authority. However PMRP will facilitate the co-ordination work with
PMC/concerned agency for getting the necessary approval.
15. In case the concerned utility agency/authority maintains a list of registered/approved
contractors for undertaking such works and desires such shifting/diversion of
pipeline/utility etc work to be undertaken by such registered/approved contractors, then
such shifting/diversion of pipeline/utility etc shall have to be carried out by engaging the
registered/approved contractors .
16. In case the Engineers of PMC /concerned agency intend to supervise the work, the
Contractor (or sub-contractors engaged by the Contractor) have to carry out the work as
per the instruction of the PMC /concerned agency’s Engineers during diversion work by
the Contractor.
17. In case of permanent diversion of water/sewer/stormwater/pipelines etc, it is the
responsibility of the Contractor to carry out such work without affecting water
supply/without affecting sewage disposal etc. If required alternative temporary
arrangement shall have to be made by the Contractor.
18. In case of temporary water pipe/sewer pumping mains (without manholes) etc. diversion
(which means divert the pipeline temporary away from station box and brought back to
the original position after completion of station work), it is the responsibility of the
Contractor either to use the retrieved diverted pipes or new pipes to restore back the
original place without affecting the water supply/utility service.
19. In case of temporary diversion of gravity sewer pipelines with manholes are required, the
Contractor, initially before taking up the station work has to ensure that the flow is
diverted by laying sewer pipeline and constructing manholes away from the station box
and then only divert the flow. After completion of station work, the Contractor shall have
to lay again another sewer pipelines and again construct new manholes for restoring back
to the original place.
20. In case of temporary supporting of water/sewer pipelines, if any damages occur during
construction period it is the responsibility of the Contractor to rectify the damages to the
satisfaction of PMC /relevant agency Engineers. The cost of the rectification works shall
have to be borne by the Contractor.
21. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain completion certificate from PMC /
concerned agency WSS for each diversion work. The payment for such work will be made
to the Contractor after obtaining completion certificate from PMC /concerned agency.
22. Maharashtra State Electricity Board (MSEB)The Contractor shall be responsible for
diversion of utilities with respect to the MSEB (Electrical utilities) works. The Contractor
shall carryout the diversion works complying with the following conditions.
23. The Contractor shall submit the utility diversion programme to PMRP/the Engineer with
diversion justification based on trial pit information.

Pag e |3
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 12 – Utilities

24. The Contractor shall submit the diversion plan to Engineer at least 60 (sixty) days in
advance of work commencing to obtain approval from MSEBMSEB. For utility diversion
proposals of MSEB, the Contractor shall submit diversion justification with trail pit
information and drawing(s) with the proposed diversion route(s).
25. The Contractor would submit application of diversion works to MSEB with diversion plans.
The Contractor shall render necessary assistance.
26. The Contractor shall coordinate with the MSEB’ local officials to assess quantities and
specifications of materials required for diversion works. Necessary assistance would be
provided by the Employer and the Engineer.
27. The Contractor shall obtain necessary permission from the MSEB to carry out the
diversion/shifting works and get necessary permission from Traffic Police Department.
28. Wherever possible, trenchless technology shall be adopted at location where utility
diversion works crosses roadways and require lane closures for excavation to avoid
inconvenience to the traffic.

29. The electrical utilities diversion/ shifting should be carried out by the Contractors/agencies
registered with the MSEB / PPWD and have the required grade license from the Chief
Electrical Inspector to Government. The Contractor should be well acquainted with
electrical works so as to maintain the concerned MSEB’ standard. The Contractor shall
inform the same to PMC/the Engineer for getting consent from the concerned electrical
utility agency
30. The Contractor shall identify the quantity of materials required for the contract such that
the material can be procured by the Contractor in bulk and in advance to the
implementation of the utility diversion works. The quality of materials to be procured shall
be approved by the concerned utility agency. Materials used for diversion / shifting shall
be of quality conforming to the applicable standard of the electrical utility agency and as
per relevant BIS.
31. The source of materials and the guarantee for the materials to be used shall be submitted
to Engineer for obtaining approval from the concerned utility agency . Any failure of the
material within the guarantee period shall be replaced and installed free of cost by the
Contractor.
32. Contractor shall inform the local officers/officials of the concerned utility agency about the
diversion works at least 15 (fifteen) days before the execution of diversion.
33. The diversion / shifting utility work shall be carried out under the direct supervision of
electrical utility agency’s officials and the utility agency’s decision shall be final in this
regard.
34. The Contractor shall provide free access to utility agency’s officers/ officials / workman for
the purpose of inspection / supervision..
35. After restoration of regular service completion certificate shall have to be obtained from
the MSEB. The regulations for working with utility agencies shall be as follows;
a. The diversion/shifting utility work should be carried out without causing any
inconvenience to the operation and maintenance of Sub-Station and other
departmental works of the MSEB .
b. The Contractor shall execute and complete the work strictly in adherence to the
time schedule and to the satisfaction of the concerned utility agency’s engineers
and adhere strictly the direction from in any matter.

Pag e |4
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 12 – Utilities

c. The Contractor shall be responsible to protect the public and the employees of
the MSEB against any accident that may arise during the execution of
diversion/shifting utility works. The Contractor shall indemnify the PMC/MSCB
for any claims for damages/injuries to the person/property resulting from any
such accident. The Contractor shall take steps to properly insure against claims
under the Workmen’s Compensation Act by the way of obtaining an accident
risk type insurance to meet all purpose of relief, failing which or otherwise the
Contractor shall be solely responsible for meeting the compensation awarded
under the said Act.
d. The Contractor shall undertake to ensure free flow of traffic during execution of
the diversion/shifting works and shall be responsible for any accident/loss of
lives/property. Damage to the other existing utilities during diversion shall have
to be rectified by the Contractor free of cost.
e. The Contractor shall employ qualified technical personnel to carry out the
diversion/shifting of utility works.
f. The Contractor shall apply well in advance for Line Clearance (LC) for carrying
out the joint works/shifting works. PMRP would authorise the Contractor to take
LC from the MSEB. If needed, PMC would provide assistance to the Contractor
to get the LC. LC will be given by the MSEB depending upon exigencies, which
have to be strictly adhered to.
g. The Contractor shall handover all the retrieved / unused material to the stores
of the concerned utility agency /concerned department at the Contractor’s cost.
h. The Contractor shall undertake not to revoke the above conditions until the
completion of diversion/shifting works.
Pune Municipal Corporation (PMC) / concerned Highways Department
35. Diversion of Storm water drain shall be carried out as per the design, standard and general
specifications of PMC / concerned Highways Department.
36. The diversion route for storm water drain shall be approved by PMC/ concerned Highways
Department.
37. The invert level of diverting drain shall be maintained on par with upstream/downstream
of connecting drains.
38. The Contractor shall make alternate arrangements to divert and ensure smooth flow of
water from upstream side during construction.
39. The Contractor shall provide the adequate sizes of drain or follow the existing sizes as
agreed by the concerned agency.
40. Diversion of storm water drain shall be carried out through the registered Contractors of
PMC/ Highways Department (if such a list of approved/registered contractors is
maintained by the utility agency).
41. The Contractor shall obtain No objection certificate from PMC/ concerned Highways
Department upon completion of diversion works.
42. The Contractor shall make necessary preventive measures to avoid damages to the
adjoining building and compound wall.
General
The Contractor shall provide a 6 months rolling programme every 3 months.

Pag e |5
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT

SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 13 – Site Accommodation For The Engineer

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 13 – Site Accommodation For The Engineer

ACCOMMODATION FOR THE ENGINEER

1. Accommodation for the Engineer / Employer shall consist of a Principal Office and 2
Number of site offices to be located at the Contractor's principal Works Areas.
The principal site office shall be close to the Contractors main office and allow for the
following rooms
PRINCIPAL SITE OFFICE No of Area Area required
Staff (Sq. m) (Sq.m)

Project Manager 1 20 20
Chief Resident Engineer 1 15 15
Resident Engineers (Tunnel/Stns) 2 15 30
Utility & Traffic Engineer 1 12 12
Survey Expert 1 12 12
Safety & Environment Engineer 1 12 12
QA/QC Engineer 1 12 12
Quantity surveyor 1 12 12
Section Engineer(Tunnel) 2 7.5 15
Section Engineer(stns) 2 7.5 15
Site Engineer (Tunnel) 2 5 10
Site Engineer (Stns) 6 5 30
Office Manager 1 10 10
CAD Operator 1 8 8
Secretary 1 8 8
Meeting Room (Large) 1 25 25
Meeting Room (Small) 1 10 10
File & Document Storage 2 15 30
Toilets with Changing Room 2 15 20
Pantry 1 10 10
Employer's Office 2 15 30
Entrance / Corridor 10 10

TOTAL 360 Sq.m

The 2 site offices shall be each 125sq meters of useable office area to be located as
agreed by the Engineer.
Offices shall be accessible only from a corridor within the building. An external double
door with reception area shall be provided to the corridor.

P a g e |2
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 13 – Site Accommodation For The Engineer

2. Materials used for the construction of the offices shall be new and of good quality.
Materials shall be chosen such that the buildings when erected shall give good heat
and sound insulation, and when combined with the heating and air condition
equipment installed by the Contractor will enable interior temperatures to be
maintained at within a range of 20-24 deg. C. at all times. (with Approx. 30% area as
air conditioned) Both external and internal walls shall be sound proof.
3. Windows to each room shall be of an area not less then 10% of the floor area. All
windows to ground floor offices shall be fitted with burglar bars firmly attached to
the structure of the building. All windows shall be fitted with mosquito netting. All
opening windows shall be fitted with locks and all sets of keys shall be delivered to
the Engineer. All windows shall be fitted with Venetian blinds.
4. Internal doors shall be hollow core flush doors and shall be fitted with door closers,
lever latches, mortise lock and keys.
5. External doors shall have barrel bolts both at top and bottom of one leaf and a Yale
lock on the other leaf. External doors shall be of solid external quality and hung with
heavy-duty hinges.
6. All buildings shall be supplied with continuous (24 hour) running potable cold water
to the kitchens and wash rooms. The toilets may use raw water for flushing, shall be
equipped with water closets and sitting type stools and shall be adequately ventilated
through the ceiling. The Contractor shall also arrange for the constant and hygienic
disposal of all effluent, sewage and rubbish from the buildings. Storage tanks will be
required due to restricted hours of water supply in the Bangalore Area.
7. All buildings shall be supplied with electricity at 240 voltage and 50 Hz that shall be
distributed to each room in accordance with the Regulations. Lighting and electrical
power points shall be provided in each room. The disposition and location of light and
power points will be as directed by the Engineer. A back up generator is required to
be provided to meet the full power load in case of power disruption.
8. Each kitchen shall be provided with worktops, a 2 drainer stainless steel double sink,
cupboards beneath the worktop and mounted on the walls, a cooker with 2 no. 2 gas
rings and a microwave oven and a 5 cu ft. refrigerator. Coffee making facilities for 20
persons shall be provided. Tiling shall be provided to the walls above the sink, cooker
and worktops.
9. Changing and shower facilities shall be provided as follows:
- Male facilities: 2 showers and 2 wash basins with 10 clothes lockers and
benching with pegs over for 6 persons.

P a g e |3
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 13 – Site Accommodation For The Engineer

- Female facilities: 1 showers and 1 wash basins with 5 clothes lockers and
benching with pegs over for 4 persons.
Each shower shall be provided with hot and cold water supply and shall be contained
in an individual cubicle with a screen or curtain to the entrance. Modesty screens
shall be provided adjacent to the entrance to all changing and shower facilities.
10. Fire fighting equipment shall be provided in accordance with the recommendations of
the Maharashtra Fire & Emergency Services.
11. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain appropriate name boards as
specified for each of the offices. The wording on each name board and its location
shall be agreed by the Engineer before it is erected.
12. Where Tunnelling machines are used the Contractor shall provide monitors and data
inputs to the Engineers offices to allow real time representation of the key TBM
parameters and viewing access to any CCTV cameras installed in the tunnels.
13. All site office shall have internet facility
14. Principal site office shall have video conferencing facility
15. The Contractor shall supply the following new furniture and equipment to the
Engineer's offices in the manner required by the Engineer :
- Conference table (2400 x 900) 3 No
- Conference chairs 30 No
All other Facilities as shown in Annexure 1
- Communication Facility
All other Facilities as shown in Annexure 1
Other office stationary
- Waste paper baskets 20 No
- 4-hole document punches 2 No
- Desk mounted pencil sharpeners 20 No
- Desk tray sets 50 No
- Plan meter set 2 No
- Fully automatic camera with date and time 2 No
- Recording facility downloadable to a PC 1 No
- First aid kits for up to 36 persons 4 No
- Safety helmets 90 No
- Safety harness 20 No
- Pairs steel toed construction boots 60 No

P a g e |4
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 13 – Site Accommodation For The Engineer

- Sizes to be advised 90 pr.

- Day-Glo waistcoat 60 No
- Pairs steel handling gloves 12 pr.
- Pairs industrial safety goggles 12 pr.
- Breathing masks and filters 12 No
- 5 L kettles 2 No
- 2 L kettles 4 No
- Heavy duty cotton trousers and 'T' shirts with collars and
breast pockets (long and short sleeved) and the
Laundering thereof 120 No
- Potable water dispenser with hot/cold
taps and paper/plastic cups 6 No
- Hot water heaters for kitchen and showers 9 No
- cups and saucers 60 No
- Side plates 60 No
- 15-piece dinner service 1 set
- 15-piece cutlery service 1 set
- Fire extinguisher 10 No

16. The Contractor shall supply the following personnel as required Chainmen /
Staff men 9 No
Field / Office Attendants 8 No
Messengers 8 No
Watchmen 6 No

17. The Contractor shall provide Following to NMRCL or its designated Engineer for
proper Management & supervision of construction work : -
Civil Team : Four number of AC SUV i.e. Innova/Xylo/Ertiga etc.. with driver for 24
hours. Maximum running of each vehicle shall be 4000 Km/month. The maintenance
expenses, wages of drivers, insurance, POL, toll, parking and other running expenses
of these vehicles shall be borne by Contractor. Make of all the car to be provided for
Employer shall not be earlier than 2016.
MEP Team : Two number of AC SUV i.e. Innova/Xylo/Ertiga etc.. with driver for 24
hours. Maximum running of each vehicle shall be 4000 Km/month. The maintenance

P a g e |5
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 13 – Site Accommodation For The Engineer

expenses, wages of drivers, insurance, POL, toll, parking and other running expenses
of these vehicles shall be borne by Contractor. Make of all the car to be provided for
Employer shall not be earlier than 2016

18. In principle site office, space for the following should also be provided apart from
existing requirement:

1 no. for GM (Underground),

2 numbers for E&M Experts (of Engineer),
2 numbers for E&M Engineers (of Engineer),

Out of 2 site offices, one 125 sqm of site office with fully equipped facilities should be
dedicated for E&M team.

The Printer’s cartridges and printing papers of A4, A3, A2, A1 and A0 sizes, whichever
is applicable and in required quantities during execution of work, for this project only,
apart from the other consumables etc. as mentioned in the tender should be
provided for total contract period of 180 weeks.

P a g e |6
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 13 – Site Accommodation For The Engineer

Annexure 1

P a g e |7
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 14 – Contractor’s Site Laboratory

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 14 – Contractor’s Site Laboratory

CONTRACTOR’S SITE LABORATORY

Maha-Metro in collaboration with Bureau Veritas (An international NABL accredited third party
lab/organization) will be setting up “material testing lab” at Pune with facilities and procedures as
per the international standards. All third party testing, validation, safety cum quality audit (as per
the need and direction of Maha-Metro) for this Package shall be carried out in this lab and the
cost of the testing shall be borne by the Contractor. The said lab may also take up day to day
testing of all civil and system works if the contractor desires so apart from witnessing calibration
of various equipment and ‘onsite’ testing of ingredients involved in concreting. These testing shall
be carried out at nominal rate.
.

Pag e |1
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents

UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT

SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 15 – Design Consolidation Unit Requirements

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 15 – Design Consolidation Unit Requirements

DESIGN CONSOLIDATION UNIT REQUIREMENT

15.1 Purpose of Requirement

This Employer’s requirement aims at:
 defining the scope of the Design Consolidation Unit,
 describing how the submission of the Consolidated Design drawings to the Engineer
shall be performed, and
 providing an outline for the overall design consolidation process as to design,
verification and notice activities.
15.2 Scope.
This Employer’s Requirement covers all deliverables documents prepared by the
Contractor throughout Design and Construction stages.
The Design Consolidation Unit shall be part of the Contractor’s organization with its main
purpose to be to provide a final control over technical drawings.
This Design Consolidation shall be managed by a Design Consolidation Manager, in charge
of :
 Managing and coordinating activities of all parties involved in the design and
Design Consolidation process,
 Scheduling and managing dedicated technical design and consolidation
meetings,
 Identifying complex technical and geometrical conflicts,
 Checking and approving technical Design Consolidation deliverables,
He is assisted by Consolidation Draftsman(s), in charge of :
 Creating the Consolidated Design drawings by compiling Xrefs ACAD files,
 Identifying technical and geometrical conflicts,
 Preparing & issuing Minutes of Technical Design and Consolidation Meetings,
 Updating the files with due diligence and storing them ,
The Design Consolidation activity shall be performed with 1:200 scale drawings.
15.3 Process
Draft Design Consolidation drawings (soft & hard copy) shall be submitted to the Engineer
for notice as per the Contractor’s design schedule and as required by attachment A1 of
Section A of this Section VI, Part 2
15.4 Consolidated Design Drawings Contents.
Consolidated Design Drawings (scale 1:200) are composed of a compilation of several “x-
refs” files. Working files are registered as per a commonly agreed WBS.
The following shall mandatorily be taken into account:
 Topography
 Furniture
 Land use
 Dry Utilities
 Wet Utilities
 Trackway Alignment
Pag e |1
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 15 – Design Consolidation Unit Requirements

 Cable ducts & trays (Low Voltage, Traction Power, Water, Air etc.)
 Planimetry
 Structures
 Catenary
For clarity’s sake, layers including texts, comments, and levelling points shall be frozen.
The Consolidated Design drawings shall include the Combined Services Drawings and
Structural Electrical and Mechanical drawings.
15.5 Work Schedule.
The Design Consolidation Unit shall comply with deadlines set by the Engineer for
submitting deliverables. Each party being involved in the Consolidation process shall be
fully responsible for its own lead-times in order for delays accumulation to be avoided.
The usual time schedule is as follows (calendar days):
When? Who ? What ?
Submission Design Approval & Submission to the Engineer
Date = J Consolidation version A02 or A03 where modifications have
Manager been made.
J Design Verification and issuance to the Engineer.
Consolidation
Manager
J-1 Design revision version - 02
Consolidation Second Consolidated Design drawings compilation,
Draftsman additional issuance [Link] & .plt files
Last [Link] update
J-3 Draughtsmen [Link] modifications
J-9 Design Preparation & issuance of Design Consolidation
Consolidation Minutes of Meeting, and « Comments file »
Draftsman
J - 10 Design Design
Consolidation
Consolidation
Unit
Meeting
J - 11 Design Consolidated Design drawings version- 01, editing
Consolidation of A0 & A4 drawings, identification of geometric &
Draftsman technical conflicts
J - 12 Draughtsmen Preparation of [Link] files
J – as per Design Choice of section for Design
approved Consolidation
Consolidation activity
schedule Manager

Pag e |2
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 15 – Design Consolidation Unit Requirements

15.6 Design Consolidation Unit Flow Chart

The different steps of the Synthesis process are listed hereafter:

Parties Steps Documentation

Contractor File Storage  [Link] AutoCAD as per list (

Draughtsmen 1- section 3.2, Appendix -7)

Consolidated Design
Design C ons olidation 2- drawings preparation  File version 01
Draftsman Associated AutoCAD file

Design Consolidation 3- [Link] compilation  Related Documentation ([Link])

Draftsman

Design C ons olidation 4- Technical & geometric

Manager conflicts identification  Synthesis drawings (A0 & A4 sizes)

Design C ons olidation 5- Design Consolidation

Manager and Draftsman Meeting  Minute of Meeting + comments
file

Contractor 6- [Link] modifications

Draughtsmen Conflicts analysis  Related Documentation
([Link]) version n+1

7- Reference files update

Design C ons olidation  Idem step 3 ([Link]
Draftsman n+1) & synthesis drawings
version 02

Design Manager 8- Verification & Approval

 visa transmittal sheet

Project Manager 9- Approval & issuance to 9- 8- r

the Engineer.  Synthesis drawings dwg-pdf-plt Hard copies
A0+A4 Transmittal sheet version A03

Pag e |3
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 15 – Design Consolidation Unit Requirements

15.7 Process Detailed Description.

Step 1
Working ribbon files including all relevant technical disciplines ([Link]) shall be stored by
draughtsmen within a dedicated Electronic Content Management system. The format of
these files shall be compliant with agreed CAD Management procedures.
Step 2
Preparation of Consolidated Design drawing: files compilation in accordance with the
Content of Technical Synthesis Drawing list.
Step 3
When all files are assembled for one specific section, hard A0 & A4 copies shall be printed
out, bearing the « version 01 » mark, to identify conflicts.
Step 4
Design Consolidation Meeting, called for by the Design Consolidation Manager, in order
to check the following :
o Consistency,
o Modifications to be brought towards identified conflicts
o Submission Deadline definition
Step 5
Modifications of working ribbon files ([Link]) by draughtsmen, according to the Minutes of
Design Consolidation Meeting.
Step 6
Update of Consolidated Design drawings with latest versions of reference files.
hard A0 & A4 copies shall be printed out, bearing the « version 02 » mark, to identify
conflicts.
Step 7
Design Consolidation Meeting, called for by the Design Consolidation Manager, in
order to check version 02.
Step 8
Design Consolidation Approval by Project Manager
Step 9
Printing of version 03 per section, for submission to the Engineer.

Pag e |4
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI - Employer’s Requirement

Appendix 16 - Earthing and Grid

May 2018
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

1. INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................1
1.1 Scope ...........................................................................................................................1
2. CATEGORIES OF EARTHING ..........................................................................................1
2.1 General Requirement...................................................................................................1
2.2 Neutral Earthing ...........................................................................................................1
2.3 Protective Earthing ......................................................................................................2
2.4 Adjacent Metallic Structures........................................................................................2
2.5 Mitigation of Interference Effects ................................................................................2
2.6 Treatment of unearthed systems.................................................................................2
2.7 Earthing for Lightning Protection .................................................................................2
2.8 Traction return current circuit .....................................................................................2
3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................................................3
3.1 Legislation and Standards ............................................................................................3
3.2 Treatment of AC Power Supplies .................................................................................4
3.3 Treatment of Unearthed Auxiliary Supplies .................................................................4
3.4 Lightning Protection .....................................................................................................4
3.5 Traction return current circuit System .........................................................................5
4. OVERALL EARTHING STRATEGY FOR THE PUNE METRO PROJECT ................................5
4.1 Earthing, Bonding, Lightning Protection and Corrosion Protection Principles .............5
4.2 Tunnels ........................................................................................................................5
4.3 Stations ........................................................................................................................5
4.4 Main Line and Depot External Track work ...................................................................7
4.5 Depot Workshop Track work .......................................................................................7
4.6 Traction return current circuit .....................................................................................7
4.7 Interfaces .....................................................................................................................7
5. EARTHING OF POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS......................................................................8
5.1 Supplies........................................................................................................................8
5.2 Earth Electrodes and Earth Systems.............................................................................8
5.3 System Earthing ...........................................................................................................9
5.4 Equipment Earthing (non-track side) .........................................................................10
5.5 Track and Trackside Equipment .................................................................................12
6. EARTHING OF COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS ......................................13
6.1 General ......................................................................................................................13
6.2 Trackside Equipment .................................................................................................13
6.3 Depot Equipment .......................................................................................................14
7. EARTHING OF OTHER METALLIC STRUCTURES ...........................................................15

TOC
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

7.1 General ......................................................................................................................15

7.2 Over ground Structures..............................................................................................16
7.3 Reinforced Concrete Track slab..................................................................................16
7.4 Services to Metro system premises. ..........................................................................16
7.5 Small Metallic Components .......................................................................................17
7.6 Depot Fencing ............................................................................................................17
7.7 Lightning Protection ...................................................................................................17
8. CORROSION CONTROL ...............................................................................................17

TOC
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 Scope
1.1.1 The purpose of this Earthing, Bonding, Lightning Protection and Corrosion
Protection Policy is to define the requirements for the earthing and bonding of
the electrical power supply systems and other parts of the Metro system to
ensure, as far as possible:
i) the safety of operating personnel and other persons from electrical shock.
ii) the minimum of electrical interference between the electrical power supply
and other electrical and electronic systems and the protection of electrical
equipment.
iii) the minimum of disturbance to existing statutory services and parts of the
Metro system due to any electrolytic corrosion effects arising from AC
traction currents flowing to and from the general mass of earth.
1.1.2 This document is divided into several sections. Sections 2 and 3 are of a general
nature whilst Sections 4 to 7 deal with specific items under system and
equipment- specific general headings and Section 8 deals with stray current
corrosion control
1.1.3 It should be noted that no Single section can be taken alone as being complete in
itself in covering all aspects of earthing under the general heading of that section.
In the implementation of the earthing policy account has to be taken of the
interrelationship, interface and integration of all systems comprising the Metro
system.
1.1.4 The Contractor shall develop his own designs as required for Earthing, Bonding,
Lightning Protection and Stray Current Corrosion Control, using this document as
a basis for doing so, which shall require a notice of no objection from the Engineer
, prior to commencing any such works.
1.1.5 The Contractor shall coordinate his designs for Earthing, Bonding, Lightning
Protection and Stray Current Corrosion Control as required with all Interfacing
Contractors.
1.1.6 Reference in other documents to "Grounding" shall be taken to be synonymous
with 'Earthing".

2. CATEGORIES OF EARTHING

2.1 General Requirement

2.1.1 The earthing system shall be capable of carrying full fault currents. The earthing
system provided at any location may be common to two or more categories of
earthing, in which case all the earthing points on the individual items of
equipment will be bonded together to discharge any earth fault currents: In
general, earthing and bonding is required under one or more of the following
categories.

2.2 Neutral Earthing

2.2.1 Connection to earth at one or more nominally equipotential points of the current-
carrying conductors of each section of the power supply system shall be arranged
to ensure that the voltage at any point in the system relative to the general mass

Page | 1
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

of earth will be within defined limits and will provide a low impedance path for
earth fault return currents.
2.2.2 For low impedance earth paths to be established the ground conditions must first
be measured (earth/ground resistivity Ohms / m) and the system designed
according to the results. Allowance shall be made for the fact that conditions may
vary throughout the year due to seasonal weather.

2.3 Protective Earthing

2.3.1 Connection to earth at one or more points of the non-current-carrying parts of
electrical equipment shall be arranged to ensure that, in the event of a failure of
insulation or other inadvertent connection between current and non-current-
carrying
parts, no dangerous potential difference occurs between the non-current-carrying
parts of the equipment and the general mass of earth or adjacent equipment, and
to provide a low impedance path for earth fault currents.

2.4 Adjacent Metallic Structures

2.4.1 This relates to connection to earth of metallic structures, which are not part of
the electrical equipment but are in close proximity to the electrical system.
2.5 Mitigation of Interference Effects
2.5.1 This relates to the connection to earth of the screening of light current signal and
control cables. The connection to earth of the screening conductors of any light
current cables will, in general, be confined to one end in order to avoid circulating
currents in the screen causing interference on the signal cores.
2.5.2 There may be exceptions to this and EMC considerations will determine the
solution to be adopted in individual cases.

2.6 Treatment of unearthed systems

2.6.1 This relates to unearthed systems where the current carrying conductors are fully
insulated from earth at all points. No part of such a system need to be
automatically disconnected immediately on the occurrence of a single earth fault
in that part. However special care needs to be taken during design and installation
when considering this type of earth system.

2.7 Earthing for Lightning Protection

2.7.1 This relates to the protection of buildings and structures from lightning by the
provision of lightning arrester and hence connection to the earth electrode
system. Account shall be taken of the locality and lightning incidence rate and
applied to the protection of the Railway Systems as a whole from "Far" and
"Near" strikes, individual structures and personnel protection.

2.8 Traction return current circuit

2.8.1 This relates to the connection to earth of the track rails and the protection
cables (Buried Earth Cable, Aerial Earth Conductor, etc ....).

Page | 2
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Legislation and Standards

3.1.1 Earthing, bonding, lightning and corrosion protection has to be in accordance with
applicable requirements related to the Metro systems, for the purposes of this,
the Earthing Policy on the Project shall be assumed to be no less onerous than the
relevant requirements of the following standards
a) European Standard EN50122-1 - 'Railway Applications Fixed Installations
Protective provisions relating to electrical safety and earthing'.
b) European Standard EN50122-2 - 'Railway Applications - Protective provisions
against the effects of stray currents traction systems
c) British Standard 7361, Part 1 - Cathodic Protection - Code of Practice for Land
and Marine Applications.
d) International Union of Railways Codes (UIC) 605 'Protection from Corrosion' -
Measures to be taken on catenaries to reduce the risk on adjacent piping and
cable systems.
e) BS 7671 - Requirements for Electrical Installations
f) IEC 60364 - Electrical Installations of Buildings
g) IEC 61312 - Protection Against Lightning
h) IEC 61024-1; Protection of Structures against Lightning, Part 1: General
Principles.
i) IEC 61024-4; Series protection against lightning electromagnetic impulses for
structure with electrical and electronic systems.
j) IEC 61000-5 Edition1, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part 5
k) BS 7430 - Code of Practice for Earthing.
l) ANSI/IEEE 80 - Earthing of Substations
m) IS—3043--EARTHING & IS: 2309 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION
n) BS-1013---SUBSTATION EARTHING
o) NFPA-- 780-- LIGHTNING PROTECTION
p) IEEE- 1100—EARTHING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT EN- 50122-2 Insulation
from Earth
q) EARTH RESISTANCE VALUES (ETI/PSI/EARTHING OF RDSO) RDSO’s Code No:
ET1/PS I /120 ( 2/91) Code of practice for earthing of Power Supply Installation
for 25kV ac single phase traction system
r) European Standard EN50121-1 -Railway Applications – Electromagnetic
compatibility - General'.
s) European Standard EN50121-4 - Railway Applications – Electromagnetic
compatibility – Emission and immunity of the signalling and
telecommunications apparatus'.
t) European Standard EN50121-5 - Railway Applications – Electromagnetic
compatibility – Emission and immunity of fixed power supply installations and
apparatus'.
u) RDSO/SPN/144/2004 Safety and reliability requirement of electronic signalling
equipment,
v) Local Codes. These may however conflict with International Codes/Standards
in which case discussion and agreement with the Engineer will be required.

Page | 3
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

3.2 Treatment of AC Power Supplies

3.2.1 The general policy followed in this document is to provide an earth farm/Mats for
each of the auxiliary substations and at other locations as required for purposes
of earthing AC power supply systems under the category of Clause 2.2 and
metallic enclosures and structures under Clauses 2.3 and 2.4.
3.2.2 The earth farms at each substation and other locations shall be multiple-
interconnected by provision of bonding connections cable sheaths, cable
armouring, to adjacent earth farms to form an incidental earth mat embracing the
whole of the Metro system
3.2.3 The armouring of HV power supply cables will not be connected to the incoming
supply to the bulk substation earthing system (this must be agreed with the local
authority) or other mitigation measures taken. However, there shall be provision
to do so conveniently on a temporary basis whilst work and testing requiring this
is carried out.
3.2.4 The alternative solution of segregating the utility supplier and Metro system
earth farm and its associated earth system from utility supplier earth farms and
earth systems could be difficult to implement and to maintain.
3.2.5 Although segregation will tend to discourage the flow of stray traction currents
through the earth systems, this will not necessarily decrease the corrosion of
particular electrodes and may well encourage stray currents to pass from buried
structure to buried structure, leading to corrosion of the structures.
3.2.6 Two other difficulties that could arise with segregation are as follows:
a) transferred potentials will appear across insulated joints used to segregate the
systems where there are interconnecting cables etc. and between adjacent
structures bonded to different earthing systems
b) provision of earthing for the screening of telecommunications cables to
reduce interference (Clause 2.5 above).
3.2.7 For the reasons described above, the effects of the segregation will need to be
monitored closely.

3.3 Treatment of Unearthed Auxiliary Supplies

3.3.1 Certain low voltage auxiliary, signalling, control or indication systems come under
the category of Clause 2.6, where the ability to temporarily continue in operation
with a single earth fault gives increased security of supply. The signalling or
control circuit can be isolated from Earth to avoid mal-operation or Nuisance.
Tripping of the control circuit which will therefore need its own Alarm to draw
attention to this fact and hence start the fault rectification process (normally by
manual investigation and maintenance operations).
3.3.2 The incoming power supplies to the control system however may have their own
Earth Fault detection.

3.4 Lightning Protection

3.4.1 The protection of above ground structures from lightning under the category of
Clause 2.7 is included within this policy document.

Page | 4
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

3.5 Traction return current circuit System

3.5.1 The Power Supply and Traction contractor will have to handle a traction
power supply simulation. The traction return current circuit will be designed
according to tender requirements, standards and traction simulation results.
4. OVERALL EARTHING STRATEGY FOR THE PUNE METRO PROJECT

4.1 Earthing, Bonding, Lightning Protection and Corrosion Protection Principles

4.1.1 Taking into account the previous general requirements in section 3:
a) A "Structure Earthing" strategy shall be applied throughout the Pune Metro
Project to ensure electrical safety and provide the basis of lightning
protection;
b) All trackwork with workshop buildings shall be bonded to the structure earth
of the building.
4.1.2 All buildings / structures shall be connected to mass earth via earth farms/Mats
which form part of the building I structure foundations and this earth shall be
continuous through all building structures by the appropriate interconnection and
bonding of all metalwork.

4.2 Tunnels
4.2.1 The reinforcement of the cut and cover tunnel frame forms the earthing system
of tunnel sections. On top of the tunnel segment, a track sub-structure (e.g. slab
or plinth) will be installed and fixed by means of connecting reinforcement. The
reinforcement of the tunnel forms the structure earth of tunnel sections. In each
section some dedicated longitudinal reinforcing rods of the uppermost
reinforcement layer shall be used for earthing. These dedicated rods shall be cross
bonded appropriately at the beginning and at the end of the segment. The cross
bonds are made accessible for connection of the segments to each other. From
this grid of longitudinal rods and cross bonds, connections will be provided to
items on the tunnel to be earthed. The longitudinal rods must be cross bonded at
each construction gap at minimum. For bored tunnels, the precast concrete
segments, are individually reinforced but are not interconnected. Due to the
watertight membrane separating the inner from the outer shell, the bored tunnel
structure is not regarded to be effective for earthing purposes. Because of the
small distances between reinforcement of individual segments, the inner tunnel
shell is regarded to be potentially conducive for higher voltages. Therefore
protective provisions against unintended transfer of dangerous potential shall be
required. In these tunnel sections a protective wire shall be used within the
pantograph zone and all rigid bar supports shall be connected to the earthing
system. Apart from that for earthing purposes all conductive structures within the
tunnel shall be bonded to the earthing system, especially continuous conductive
structures shall be connected in regular distances, not exceeding 250m in any
case.

4.3 Stations
4.3.1 Station buildings shall be provided with a structure earth. Earthing terminals shall
be necessary for LV power supply rooms, Technical rooms and facilities like Lifts &

Page | 5
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

Escalator and for steelwork like the roof supports etc.. The roof constructions of
the above ground parts of underground stations (entrances, Ventilation shafts
and ancillary buildings/structures etc.) shall be provided with an external lightning
protection system. The lightning protection system must be connected to the
structure earth to avoid dangerous voltage differences. Equipotential bonding
shall be provided to avoid safety issues. The trackside earthing and bonding
measures are the same as for the tunnels. That means all structure parts of
station buildings, which are located within the OCL/RCS and pantograph zone
have to be earthed similar to other structures. Continuous electrically conducting
bars of adequate cross-sectional area ( 2: 200 mm2 ) have to be embedded
parallel to the track as described below at all reinforced concrete structures. The
conducting bars have to be positioned as follows:
 Above each overhead line (only in covered area)
 In walls within the OCL zone
 In floors adjacent to the tracks within the OCL zone
4.3.2 The Earth mat (to be provided by the Civil Contractor) design shall ensure that the
potential rise is limited to 4.0V above water earth. Disturbances from HV, LV,
traction supplies when supporting the most adverse traffic pattern and PG (power
generating) sources shall be considered. The Earth mat should be designed to limit
the coupling from any lightning system earth mat to 110V when a discharge of
100KA lightning stroke [Link] ohmic value of main earthmat shall not be
more than 1 Ohm and for clean earthmat it will not be more than 0.5 ohms..
4.3.3 The Ringed earth mat shall comprise of earth rods inclusive of electrode pits and
heavy duty cover and 95 [Link] bare stranded copper wire laid 300mm below
basement slab/ground level. The earth rod is made up of two lengths of 1.8m,
16mm diameter copper bond steel rods coupled together with silicon aluminium
bronze coupling and copper wire joints are by exothermic weld and must be
inspected before backfilling. One earth riser cable 185 sq mm XLPE shall be
brought from the earth mat up through the basement floor or wall to each of the
substation rooms, communication Equipment room, SER, SCR and other
equipment rooms to the Engineer’s acceptance. At each earth riser cable entry
through the base slab, a tinned copper waterstop sleeve shall be provided to
prevent the ingress of water. The sleeve shall be coated with epoxy resin.
4.3.4 Further flat earth bars earthing terminals shall be provided in:
a) Every Station Control Room
b) Every Ticket Office
c) Every plant and equipment room
d) Other locations where required as an earthing point for metal work and
lightning protection. (It should be noted that general earthing of typical
electrical equipment should be through the reticulated earth of the low
voltage power supply system or back to the nearest earthing terminal.)
4.3.5 The flat steel bars shall be provided by the Civil Contractor to a design provided
by the power supply contractor.
4.3.6 Any distribution of earthing required beyond the above nominated locations shall

Page | 6
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

be provided by the respective contractors responsible for the provision of the

particular equipment.
4.3.7 Lightning interception facilities shall be provided on the roofs of buildings I
structures which shall be securely bonded to the structure earth of the building I
structure. These (Structure earth) shall be provided by the Civil Contractor to a
design provided by the power supply contractor.

4.4 Main Line and Depot External Track work

4.4.1 In order to ensure electrical safety and prevent the potential of the running rails
rising to excessive potentials above the structure earth, proper earthing shall be
used at appropriate locations to clamp the running rails to the structure earth.
These shall be provided by the power supply contractor at an appropriate number
of locations to control the rail potential to safe levels. As a minimum, one shall be
provided at each station and in each depot external area
4.4.2 The Main Line track work and the depot external track work shall be electrically
isolated from each other by the use of insulation joints boundary
4.5 Depot Workshop Track work
4.5.1 The running rails and traction return system of the Pune Metro Project within the
depot workshops shall be solidly bonded to the traction return earth. If a depot
building has an OCL, then the measures as described for passenger stations shall
be applied. All individual earthing installations and conductive parts of the depot
and workshop area shall be equipotential bonded. The totality of all earthing
installations connected to the equipotential bonding conductor forms the
structure earth of the depot and workshop area. Additionally for all major
workshop equipment, like under floor wheel lathe, wheel press and all other
maintenance equipments earth terminals for direct earthing at structure earth,
shall be provided.
4.5.2 The traction return rails for the depot workshop and the pit wheel lathe lane are
electrically isolated from the main line by means of insulated rail joints.

4.6 Traction return current circuit

4.6.1 The traction return current circuit of the Pune Metro Project will use the rail and
the following return current conductors:
- Buried Earth Cables
- Aerial Earth Cables
- Integral Transverse Bonds.
Cables cross sections will have to conform to EN 50122. Buried Earth cable, Aerial
earth cable, Integral Transverse Bond and Earth pit when available, will be bonded
together:
- on earth bar provided at the bottom of OHE mast on ramp/viaducts and in
Depot
- on earth connecting box in stations and in underground.

4.7 Interfaces
4.7.1 The design basis/philosophy of the earthing, bonding, lightning protection and

Page | 7
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

corrosion protection of the Pune Metro Line-3 Project shall be developed by the
Power Supply and Traction contractor. The design basis of the overall Traction
(RSS/TSS) and Auxiliary (ASS) sub-stations’ earthing & bonding, and corrosion
protection of the Pune Metro Project shall be undertaken by the Power Supply
and Traction contractor. According to the so provided design, the Civil
Contractor will install the earth mat and bring up the stubs at platform level or
at 300 mm level in tunnels or as required. Then the Civil Contractor (as
part of his MEP/E&M scope of works) shall ensure a double loop earthing
system and integrate with the traction earth system provided by PST Contractor.
4.7.2 During the development of its design, the Power Supply and Traction contractor
shall coordinate/include the earthing requirements of all Interfacing
Contractors.

5. EARTHING OF POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS

5.1 Supplies
5.1.1 The electrical power supply systems comprise 100/33 kV ( or as finalized by the
Power Supply and Traction contractor during detail design stage), 100/25 kV
and 415V, 3 phase, 3/4 wire ac supplies, 240V and 110V, 1 phase, 2 wire ac
supplies, at 50Hz and 110V dc equipment control supplies.

5.2 Earth Electrodes and Earth Systems

5.2.1 Earth Systems for Bulk In-feed Substations
[Link] Each bulk In-feed substation will be provided with earthing farms for both utility
supplier and Metro system.
[Link] Connections to the earth farms will be through two 'Principal Connections' links
by means of stranded insulated copper cables with a cross- section area
calculated for the worst case conditions of earth current through marshalling
earth bars in the area of the farms
5.2.2 Earth Systems for Substations
[Link] Each services Substation will be provided with an earth farm, of resistance less
than
1 ohm, and connected to the substation earthing system through two 'Principal
Connection' links by means of stranded insulated copper cables with a cross-
section area calculated for the worst case conditions of earth current.
[Link] The substation earthing system is to be compliant with IEC 60364 and IEC 61312
or BS 1013
5.2.3 Earthing for Distribution Systems
[Link] Supplies at 415/240 V, or 110 V are made available for Depot and station
equipment, and, where applicable, trackside equipment. These supplies are
derived from the Secondary winding of the power source
(Transformer/Generator etc) 415 V star- connected 3-phase supplies, the star
point of which is to be bonded to the auxiliary Substation earthing system by
PST contractor.
[Link] Continuity of this earth connection to the point of supply shall be provided by
the cable sheath / armouring and/or additional bonding cables by PST

Page | 8
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

contractor.
[Link] All locations receiving such supplies, which are remote from the earth system of
any traction or distribution substation/ASS, are to be earthed by one of the
following methods:
a) by low impedance connection to the trunk earth system such that the
minimum earth fault current is adequate to operate the over current
protection in accordance with IEC 60364
b) where the requirement in (a) cannot be met, approved earth leakage
protection is to be provided;
c) by connection of the earth terminal to the earth electrodes at any
adjacent location via cable sheaths and armouring and/or additional
bonding cables such that the earthing impedance meets the requirement
in (a) above;
d) by connection of the earth terminal via sheaths and armouring of the
supply cables or other bonding conductor to the earth system of the
auxiliary substation, such that the earth fault loop is entirely metallic and
of sufficiently low impedance to meet the requirement of (a) above.
[Link] The earthing of all distribution and sub-distribution systems is to be in
accordance with IEC 60364.

5.3 System Earthing

5.3.1 General
[Link] This section describes the connection to earth of the neutral or negative,
nominally equi-potential points of the current carrying conductors in each section
of the power supply system.
5.3.2 100 kV ( or as determined at the detail design stage) Supplies
[Link] The method of earthing of 100kV (or as determined at detail design stage), 3
phase supplies from utility supplier must be coordinated with utility supplier.
5.3.3 415V Supplies
[Link] The star point of the 415V secondary winding of the auxiliary transformer will be
connected to the earth bar of the 415V switchboard by PST contractor.
[Link] The earth bar will be connected to the neutral bar via a neutral link in the
switchboard by PST contractor.
[Link] The neutral bar of the transformer is to be solidly earthed, via a bolted link to the
earth system by PST contractor.
5.3.4 240V Supplies
[Link] The 240 volt supplies are taken from one phase and the neutral of the above
415V supplies. The neutral shall be earthed in accordance with Clause 5.2.3
5.3.5 110V AC Supplies
[Link] The 110V supplies are obtained from 240/110V transformers. Each 110V winding
of these transformers is to be fitted with a centre tap which is to be solidly
earthed.
[Link] Approved earth fault detection equipment is to be provided.
5.3.6 110V DC Supplies
[Link] Both poles of the 110V battery supplies used in traction and distribution

Page | 9
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

substations/ASS and elsewhere in connection with the power supply system are
to be insulated from earth.
[Link] Approved positive pole and negative pole earth fault detection equipment is to
be provided.

5.4 Equipment Earthing (non-track side)

5.4.1 This section refers to the treatment of metal enclosures or supporting metalwork
for the equipment associated with the power supply systems covered in Section
5.2.3 above, with the exception of the trackside equipment which is covered in
Section 5.5 below.
5.4.2 Earthing and bonding of electrical equipment is required to reduce the effects of
interference, and to ensure the personal safety of the public, operational and
maintenance staff by limiting the step and touch voltages to within acceptable
limits. Where there is a conflict between these requirements, personal safety is
always to take precedence.
5.4.3 33kV Cables / 25kV cables
[Link] The earthing of screens and armouring of all 33kV and 25kV cables is to be
earthed at both ends. Exception may be made at the extreme ends of the system
to avoid any circulating currents detected in service.
[Link] Means are to be provided for disconnecting the screen ends, individually, from
earth for testing purposes.
5.4.4 Other Power Supply Cables
[Link] This section covers the cables for the distribution of 415/240Vac supplies and
110Vdc Supplies
[Link] The armouring of multicore cables (e.g. 3 phase or twin and earth etc.) is to be
earthed at both ends via an earth terminal provided with the gland, or via
the metalwork of the cable box and structure to the earth bar or terminal of the
equipment at which the cable is terminated.
[Link] Exceptions will be where the equipment at each end does not share the same
earth system as, for example, the dc switchgear for which the enclosures are
insulated from the substation earth and connected to it via a leakage current
measuring shunt. In this case the armouring will be earthed only at the
distribution board end.
[Link] Single core cables are to be earthed in a similar manner but at one end only and
must avoid circulating eddy currents where the metallic cable sheath is
connected to a metallic cabinet.
5.4.5 100 kV/ 33 kV and 25 kV Switchgear
[Link] All ac switchgear will be earthed directly to the substation earthing system.
5.4.6 415V, 240v and 110 V Switchgear
[Link] All metallic components of the cubicles are to be bonded to an earth bar or
terminal which is to be connected to the substation earth system.
5.4.7 Battery Equipment
[Link] All metallic components of metal stands and cubicles for batteries, battery
chargers and DC distribution switchboards are to be bonded to an earth bar or
terminal which is to be connected to the earth system.

Page | 10
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

5.4.8 Transformer
[Link] All electrically separate parts of each transformer core are to be bonded together
and the core as a whole is to be insulated from the enclosure/tank. An accessible
removable link is to be provided between the core and the enclosure/tank for
earthing the core for core testing.
[Link] All metallic components of control compartments are to be bonded to an earth
terminal or bar, which is to be connected to the enclosure. The enclosure is to be
connected to the substation earth system with a suitable fault rated earth
connection.
5.4.9 415/110VTransformers
[Link] Each transformer is to be provided with a screen between the primary and
secondary windings so that in the event of a fault, the primary winding or its
connections cannot be connected to the secondary winding or its connections
[Link] The centre point of the secondary 110 V winding is to be connected to the
substation earth system.
[Link] This screen, the core and framework of each transformer is to be connected to
the earth bar or terminal of the enclosure in which the transformer is located.
[Link] The earth bar or terminal of the enclosure is to be connected to the substation
earth system.
5.4.10 Marshalling Panels
[Link] All metallic components of each cubicle are to be bonded to an earth terminal
or bar, which is to be connected to the earth system.
5.4.11 Instruments, Relays, Control Switches and other Electrical Components
[Link] All metallic cases and/or frames of instruments, relays, control switches and
other electrical components mounted on control panels or in cubicles are to be
connected to the earth bar or terminals of the cubicle in which the component
is mounted.
5.4.12 Ancillary Equipment
[Link] Cubicles, cabinets, racks and panels are to be provided with a copper earth bar
having a suitable cross-sectional area for the possible fault current, placed at a
convenient position within the equipment. All metal parts, other than those
forming part of an electrical circuit, are to be earthed by connection to the
earth bar.
[Link] When apparatus or instruments are accommodated on panel cubicle doors or
swinging frames, flexible cable or braid is to be used for earthing these items;
the door hinges are not acceptable as means of earthing this part of the
equipment. Except where otherwise approved, a stud type terminal of
diameter not less than 12 mm, or a tapped boss of equivalent size, is to be
provided on the outside of each cubicle or structure for the purpose of making
the connection to earth. This terminal is to be connected to the substation
earthing system.

Page | 11
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

5.5 Track and Trackside Equipment

5.5.1 Traction Return Running Rails (Main Lines)
[Link] The track rails, where used for traction return purposes in main line and Depot
areas, have to be regularly bonded to the Buried Earth Cable. Maximum
distance between two bondings should not exceed 500m. In Track circuited
areas, the bonding will be through appropriate track circuit device.
[Link] As the Metro system uses the train wheels and track rails for the traction
current return circuit, the rails electrical continuity has to be ensured.
Whenever the rails continuity is not ensured, mechanical joints for signalling
purpose, expansion joints for track purpose only, the rail’s continuity shall be
recreated using continuity bonds
[Link] Concerning the expansion joints for track purpose only, the continuity will be
ensured by 2* 70mm² (minimum cross section) cables bolted (or cad welded as
agreed by the Engineer) on the rails. The drilling (if agreed by the Engineer) and
the preparation of rail bonds shall be done in factory.
[Link] Concerning the mechanical joints for signalling purpose, the continuity will be
ensured by impedance bond.
[Link] As the Metro system uses the train wheels and track rails for the traction
current return circuit, the track rails will have volt drop along them as a result
of the flow of traction current. The rails are imperfectly insulated from earth or
the structures on which they are fixed and therefore a circuit parallel to the
rails can occur by means of which current driven by the volt drop flows out of
and back into the rails. The current, which flows out of the rails and returns at
some other point, is referred to as stray current.
[Link] The most serious effect of the stray current is electrolytic corrosion at the point
where current flows out of a metal surface into concrete or soil. An equivalent
of an Electrolytic circuit is formed the same as a battery cell is set up at the
interface, the potential of which varies with the ground, structure and rail
materials present. For corrosion to take place the interface potential must
exceed the potential of the cell.
[Link] The rails shall be properly bonded to Buried Earth Cables so that Buried Earth
Cable nominally constitutes the return path and limits the stray currents.
[Link] Track rails, Buried Earth Cables, Aerial Earth cables, Earth pits will be connected
together via Integral Transverse Bonds provided:
- with a maximum 500 meter spacing
- at mechanical joints.
Spacing will be determined by the PST Contractor in his EMI study.
5.5.2 Clearance To Earthed Equipment or Structures
[Link] Any exposed, non live, conductive part (metallic structure or other equipment),
which is closer than 2.0m from vehicle static envelope shall be earthed to the
Buried Earth Cable. If already part of an earthing system, the conductive part
should be connected to the buried earth cable via voltage limiting device.
[Link] Screen doors on station platforms will be bonded to the track by duplicate
insulated cables and insulated from the general body of earth. Metal enclosed
electrical equipment within 2.5 metres of the screens will not be earthed but

Page | 12
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

the enclosed live equipment 'double insulated' from the enclosure.

[Link] The station platform surface in the vicinity of the screen doors will be of
insulating material
6. EARTHING OF COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

6.1 General
6.1.1 There are several separate sub-systems which collectively form the control and
communications system. Equipment, enclosures and mountings associated with
these sub-systems are distributed throughout the Metro system at trackside,
stations and depot locations.
6.1.2 The equipment, enclosures and mountings associated with the control and
communications system are not anticipated to be located within 2m of any part
of the Metro system that is intentionally connected to the traction return
system. Earthing of the control and communications system will thus be by
conventional methods to the protected earth of the distribution switch board ..
6.1.3 Should it become necessary, during construction, to locate any item of
equipment associated with the control and communication system within 2m of
a part of the Metro system that is connected to the traction return system then
additional protective measures will need to be adopted. In such instances the
provisions of clause 7.1, to limit the touch potential between the two earth
systems, will apply, and the equipment enclosure will be earthed to the Buried
Earth Cable through voltage limiting devices.
6.1.4 Two separate clean earths of value not exceeding 0.5 Ohms required at each
station for signalling and telecommunication (including AFC), are to be
terminated in signal, telecom and AFC equipment rooms as well as in telecom
closets rooms at all stations, depot and OCC.

6.2 Trackside Equipment

6.2.1 Trackside equipment is considered to comprise all equipment, enclosures and
mountings located at stations, substations and adjacent to the track but, remote
from stations and substations.
6.2.2 Integral Transverse Bonds and insulated joints
[Link] The integral transverse bonds have to be connected at a maximum spacing of
500m. These integral transverse bonds will also serve the need of equipotential
link.
[Link] Insulated joints are mandatory on track at traction substations
6.2.3 Station Locations
[Link] At each station a UPS and UPS distribution switchboard will be provided by a
designated contractor.
[Link] Each item of control and communications equipment that is connected to a
240V single phase supply derived from this source is to have its earth terminal
directly connected to the main protected earth terminal at the distribution
board by an appropriate protective conductor
[Link] All metalwork (including enclosures, mountings, racks, trays etc.), associated
with an item of control and communications equipment that is not intended to

Page | 13
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

carry current is to be bonded to the earth terminal within the equipment

enclosure and extended to distribution board by an appropriate conductor.
[Link] Alternatively, if the design of the equipment requires, a direct earth cable, to
the station earth farm principal earth connection, may be provided.
6.2.4 Trackside Locations
[Link] Control and communication equipment at trackside locations, e.g. points
machines etc, are to derive their power supply from the UPS of the nearest
station or the depot as appropriate.
[Link] Each item of control and communications equipment that is connected to a
240V single phase supply derived from this source or otherwise is to have its
earth terminal directly connected to the main system earth cable running
between the earth systems of successive auxiliary substations. In these cases
the earth core of the supply cable will be left open at the end remote from the
supply to avoid excessive currents during fault conditions.
[Link] All metal work (including enclosures, mountings, etc.), associated with an item
of control and communications equipment that is not intended to carry current
e.g. signal lamp enclosures etc., is to be bonded to the main system earth cable
running between the earth systems of successive auxiliary substations.
[Link] The touch potential of the trunk earthing conductor will be controlled as
described in clause 5.5.2 above.
6.2.5 Substation locations
[Link] Control and communication equipment, housed within or immediately adjacent
to Sub-stations, are to derive their power supply by dedicated feed from the
UPS of the station or depot as appropriate.
[Link] Each item of control and communications equipment that is connected to a
single phase supply derived from this source is to have its earth terminal directly
connected to the protective earth terminal at the distribution board.
[Link] All metalwork (including enclosures, mountings etc.), associated with an item of
control and communications equipment that is not intended to carry current
shall be bonded to the equipment earth terminal.
[Link] The earth terminal of the distribution board will be connected to the
distribution switchboard protective earth.

6.3 Depot Equipment

Depot equipment comprises all control and communications equipment
contained within the Depot building and that located in the stabling yard and
mounted on the depot buildings.
6.3.1 Signalling and Telecommunications Room
[Link] Equipment contained within the signalling and communications is to be fed
from the UPS distribution board, installed complete with protective devices and
earth terminal
[Link] Power distribution to the various items of ancillary equipment and cubicles shall
be by means of several ring main circuits. Each circuit contains a dedicated
protective conductor (separate conductor or cable armouring) connected to the
protected earth terminal at the distribution Switchboard.

Page | 14
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

[Link] All items of control and communication equipment are to have a direct
connection between the equipment earth terminal and the circuit protective
conductor.
6.3.2 Operations Control Centre
[Link] Equipment contained within the Control centre is to be fed from the UPS
distribution board, installed complete with protective devices including surge
suppressor and earth terminal.
[Link] Power distribution to the various items of ancillary equipment and desks shall
be by means of several ring main or radial circuits. Each circuit contains a
dedicated protective conductor (separate conductor or cable armouring)
connected to the protected earth terminal at the distribution switchboard.
[Link] All items of control and communication equipment are to have a direct
connection between the equipment earth terminal and the circuit protective
conductor.
6.3.3 Other Depot Locations.
[Link] Control and communication equipment, located externally or on depot
buildings, is to derive its power from the control centre UPS.
[Link] Internal earthing of the equipment will be to a dedicated earth terminal
connected to the enclosure.
[Link] Where the equipment is outside the 3.0m limit to the vehicle static envelope an
earthing circuit for the metallic enclosure will be provided back to the protected
earth of the distribution switchboard. Where the equipment is within the 2.0 m
limit the enclosure will be earthed to the depot system earth. The touch potential
of this earth system will be controlled by strategically situated voltage limiting
devices as described in 5.5.2 above.

7. EARTHING OF OTHER METALLIC STRUCTURES

7.1 General
7.1.1 Other metallic structures comprise those structures which do not form part of the
Power Supply or Communication and Control Systems covered in Section 4 and 5
above. They include the reinforcing in concrete construction, pipes for other
services and fixtures and fittings in buildings and stations and depot.
7.1.2 Lightning protection of structures and buildings is also included in this Section.
7.1.3 The ac systems are generally arranged to operate with their neutrals earthed, and
with associated metallic enclosures also connected to earth, by conventional
methods.
7.1.4 The Buried Earth Cable shall be regularly earthed and connected to earth pits.
7.1.5 Earth pits shall be provided at each stations and their spacing should not exceed
300m in depot. Earth pits earthing value shall not exceed 1 Ohm.
7.1.6 Earth pit shall be provided with disconnecting bars so that their earthing value
can easily be checked.
7.1.7 Any exposed metallic structure, concerned by 7.1.1, which is closer than 10m
from the Over Head Line shall be earthed to the Buried Earth Cable as per clause
[Link].

Page | 15
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

7.1.8 The self-restoring properties of high voltage limiting devices avoid a permanent
leakage path for limited faults whereas a latched contactor needs to be manually
reset or a device needs to be physically replaced.

7.2 Over ground Structures

7.2.1 The frames of all buildings and other structural steelwork are to be bonded to the
local earth system unless all parts of the frame or structure are completely
encased in concrete, masonry or other non-metallic cladding.
7.2.2 Where a local earth system is not provided such a system is to be provided for the
purposes of this Clause in those locations where accidental contact with the
traction system is possible. Such an earth system is to have an overall resistance
not exceeding 10 ohms between any point of the earthed frame or structure and
the general body of the earth. In addition a self-restoring spark gap device is to be
connected between each separate structure and the traction return system
7.2.3 In the case of the building structure of the Depot workshop, where the traction
return system is deliberately earthed, the structure E&M service and traction
earthing systems are all to be interconnected.
7.2.4 In general the reinforcing bars in concrete structures or foundations are not to be
earthed in those cases where the reinforcing bars are completely encased in
concrete. This applies to substation foundation slabs.
7.2.5 Where external connections are made to the reinforcing, for the purpose of
providing studs for securing metallic structures or components which are earthed,
insulating sleeves and washers are to be fitted to the studs if there is a possibility
of traction return currents passing into the reinforcing via the studs.

7.3 Reinforced Concrete Track slab

7.3.1 The reinforced track slab will incorporate separate dedicated stray current
collection mats of rebar construction, for each track.
7.3.2 These stray current collection mats will be linked to each other in succession by
disconnectable links. At each link position one side of the link will be connected to
a trunk 'stray current collection/monitoring cable' of suitable section.
7.3.3 The trunk collection cable will be duplicated for each track and each terminated
at both ends on insulators adjacent to the station earthing system with the
possibility of connecting to the earth system through diodes for stray current
collection if later deemed beneficial
7.3.4 The diodes shall be provided at the outset and installed together with the
connection terminals such that they can be connected or not as may be required.
7.3.5 The stray current collection/monitoring cable will be insulated and protected
from earthed metal along its route.
7.3.6 All trackslab reinforcing in the workshop area, where the tracks are earthed, shall
be bonded to the earthed rebar and steel structures of the workshop building.
7.4 Services to Metro system premises.
7.4.1 Metallic service (I.e. water, gas, waste water etc) pipes entering the Metro system
premises, both over and underground, are to be provided with an insulated insert
at the point of entry, and the pipe work within the Metro system is to be bonded

Page | 16
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

to the local earth system.

7.4.2 Where both plastic and metal pipes are used, all lengths of exposed metal pipes,
or those connected to taps or apparatus, are to be bonded to the local earth
system. A separate bond is not required for the pipe if it is electrically continuous
with earthed apparatus.

7.5 Small Metallic Components

7.5.1 Small metallic and isolated structural parts which are effectively segregated from
any electrical apparatus or cables etc. or earthed metallic enclosures and
structures do not require to be bonded to the local earth system.
7.5.2 For the purposes of this Clause the metal angle supports for trench covers and
similar metalwork in electrical traction and distribution substations/ASS are not
effectively segregated and are to be bonded to the substation earth system.

7.6 Depot Fencing

7.6.1 Metallic fencing associated with the Metro system within 2.0 metres of the track
or any part of any structure or other equipment which is connected to it, is to be
earthed to the depot slab structural earth system.
7.6.2 The depot Substations will also derive their earthing from the depot slab
structural earth system
7.6.3 Metallic fencing associated with the Metro system within 10.0 metres of the
overhead contact line, is to be earthed to the Buried Earth Cable.
7.6.4 Each separate section of fencing is to be separately earthed in the appropriate
manner as above.
7.6.5 All gate posts are to be bonded to each other across the gate opening by an
underground conductor, and the gates themselves bonded across the hinges.
7.7 Lightning Protection
7.7.1 The need for lightning protection for individual mass transit system buildings is to
be assessed in accordance with IEC 61024-1 or BIS: 2309 or the local building
code. Where lightning protection is found to be necessary, it shall be provided in
accordance with this Standard.
7.7.2 All building structures will be of steel or steel reinforced concrete with every pillar
of the structures bonded into the structure earth of the depot
7.7.3 Metal roofing will be multiple bonded into the metal of the building structure.
Lightning conductors will be provided to bridge any non-metallic roofing and
conduct into the steel structure in the most efficient manner.
7.7.4 Cables with metal sheaths and other metallic services entering the building are to
be bonded to the structure at the point of entry and to any electrodes provided
for lightning protection, if not already adequately bonded via the local earth
system.

8. CORROSION CONTROL
8.1 The measures to be used to reduce corrosion and other interference effects are:
i) to ensure that the along-track resistance is as low as practicable;
ii) to ensure that the track-to-buried earth resistance is as low as possible,

Page | 17
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirement
Appendix 16 – Earth and Grid

iii) in slab track sections, to provide a substantial buried collector mat to

intercept a high percentage of traction leakage currents (stray current) and
return them to buried earth collector.

Page | 18
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 17 – Adjacent Works Contracts

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 17 – Adjacent Works Contracts

ADJACENT WORKS CONTRACTS

The Construction Projects (adjacent works contracts) that are to be undertaken adjacent to the
site area shall have to be identified by the Contractor with which the Contractor shall be
required to interface.
The Contractor should be fully responsible for identifying and interfacing with all adjacent
works projects. The information that might be available with Employer in this respect can be
shared with the Contractor.
Currently identified adjacent work Contracts are as defined below :
1. MSRTC development at Shivaji Nagar – Contractor shall liaise with MSRTC designer and
consider necessary input in construction underground structural design. Vis-a-viz shall
respect their requirements.
2. Civil Court Multistoried & Multi-parking development - Contractor shall liaise with
PMRL designer for civil court multistoried and multi level parking development and
consider necessary input in underground structural design. Vis-a-viz shall respect their
requirements.

Pag e |1
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 18 – Schedule Of Dimension
(Provisional SOD)

May 2018
 MAHA METRO

MAHARASHTRA METRO RAIL CORPORATION LIMITED

(A JOINT VENTURE OF GOVT. OF INDIA & GOVT. OF MAHARASHTRA)

SCHEDULE
OF
DIMENSIONS
FOR

STANDARD GAUGE
(1435 MM)
(25 kV AC OHE TRACTION)
(FOR 2900 MM WIDE STOCK)
(ELEVATED, AT-GRADE & UNDERGROUND SECTION)
VERSION-A
FEBRUARY 2018

MAHARASHTRA METRO RAIL CORPORATION LIMITED

The Orion Building, 1st Floor, 5, Koregaon Road,
Pune - 411001
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

INDEX

 Approval Letter
 Preamble…………………………………………………………………………………….. 1
 Introduction………………………………………………………………………………… 2
CHAPTER – I GENERAL
1.1 Spacing of Tracks…………………………………………………………………………. 3
1.2 Curves…………………………………………………………………………………………… 3
1.3 Gradients…………………………………………………………………………………….. 3
1.4 Buildings and Structures…………………………………………………………….. 4
1.5 Kinematic Envelope…………………………………………………………………….. 6
1.6 Structure Gauge………………………………………………………………………….. 6
1.7 Extra Clearance on Curves………………………………………………………….. 6
1.8 Minimum Track Spacing on Curves………………………………………………. 8
1.9 Derailment Guard…………………………………………………………………………. 11

CHAPTER - II STATIONS

2.1 Spacing of Track at Stations………………………………………………………. 12

2.2 Platforms……………………………………………………………………………………. 12
2.3 Track Gradient in Platform……………………………………………………….. 13
2.4 Interlocking and Signal Gear………………………………………………………. 14
2.5 Points and Crossings…………………………………………………………………… 14
2.6 Super elevation and Speed at Stations on Curve with Turnouts
of Contrary and Similar Flexure…………………………………………………. 15
2.7 Additional Clearance for Platforms on Curves…………………………... 16

CHAPTER - III ROLLING STOCK

3.1 Passenger Electric Multiple Units………………………………………………. 17

3.2 Locomotives and Engineering Service Vehicles…………………………. 18

CHAPTER - IV OVERHEAD ELECTRIC TRACTION-25 kV AC 50 Hz

4.1 Electrical Clearances for At-Grade and Elevated Section…………… 19

4.2 Electrical Clearances for Underground Sections..................... 20

CHAPTER – V PLATFORM GATE / PLATFORM SCREEN DOOR

5.1 Setting Out Dimensions……………………………………………………………….. 22

_____________________________________________________________________
i February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.

Appendix –1 Permissible Speed, Cant and Minimum 23

Track Spacing on Curves

Appendix – 2 Extra Horizontal Clearance on Curves 25

(Curvature effect)

Appendix – 3 Cant Effect on Kinematic Envelope– Horizontal 27

(Vehicle Speed 90 kmph)
For Elevated and At-Grade sections

Appendix – 3i Cant Effect on Kinematic Envelope– Horizontal 28

(Vehicle Speed 40 kmph)
For Elevated and At-Grade sections

Appendix – 3A Cant Effect on Structure Gauge (Corresponding to 29

90 kmph KE) – Horizontal
For Elevated and At-Grade sections

Appendix – 3Ai Cant Effect on Structure Gauge (Corresponding to 30

40 kmph KE) – Horizontal
For Elevated and At-Grade Sections

Appendix – 3 (UG) Cant Effect on Structure Gauge – Horizontal 31

(Vehicle Speed 90 kmph)
For Underground sections

Appendix – 4 Additional clearance for Platforms on Curves 32

For Elevated, At-Grade and Underground Sections

Appendix – 4 (UG) Cant Effect on Kinematic Envelope - Horizontal 33

For Underground Sections

Appendix – 5 Lateral and Vertical Shift of Circular Tunnel 34

_____________________________________________________________________
ii February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE DESCRIPTION PAGE NO

Figure No. PMSG-1 Kinematic Envelope for 90 kmph 35

(At-Grade and Elevated Sections) Except for
Passenger Platform

Figure No. PMSG – 1A Kinematic Envelope for 40 kmph 36

(At-Grade and Elevated Sections)
at Passenger platform

Figure No. PMSG – 2 Structure Gauge – At-Grade and Elevated 37

Sections (Outside Station) on level or
Constant Grade Tangent Track

Figure No. PMSG – 3 Effect of cant on Kinematic Envelope 38

Figure No. PMSG – 3A Effect of cant on Structure Gauge 39

Figure No. PMSG- 4 Effect of vertical curve on Structure Gauge 40

Figure No. PMSG-5 Structure Gauge at Elevated/ At-Grade 41

station with side platforms on level or
Constant Grade Tangent Track

Figure No. PMSG-6 Structure gauge at Elevated / At-Grade 42

station with island platform on level or
constant grade tangent track

Figure No. PMSG-7 Platform Gate Elevated/ At-Grade 43

(Platform) on level or constant grade
tangent track

Figure No. PMSG-08 Kinematic Envelope for Underground Section 44

(Tunnels) Except for Passenger Platform

Figure No. PMSG-09 Structure Gauge – Circular tunnel on tangent 45

track and on curve. Rectangular Box tunnel
on tangent track

Figure No. PMSG-10 Structure Gauge – Underground Station 46

(Tunnel) with Island Platform

Figure No. PMSG-11 Kinematic Envelope at Stations 47

(Underground)

Figure No. PMSG-12 Shift of the center of circular tunnel due to 48

Rotation of tunnel to provide cant

_____________________________________________________________________
iii February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

SCHEDULE OF DIMENSIONS
STANDARD GAUGE (1435 mm)
PREAMBLE
Pune Metro rail has adopted Standard Gauge with 25 kV AC OHE Traction System. The Schedule
of Dimensions has been prepared based on following factors: -

1. The Kinematic Envelope and other infringements have been calculated for 2900 mm wide
and 4048mm high (pantograph in locked down position) rolling stock, based on the
Kinematic Envelope calculations. The track and vehicle maintenance shall conform to the
clearances indicated therein, during the period these Rolling Stocks are in operation.

2. Track shall be maintained to the tolerances taken for calculation of Kinematic Envelope.

3. The clearances are based on assumption that windows are sealed, and all doors are closed
during movement / operation.

4. The Structure Gauge indicated in the SoD shall not be violated under any circumstances
except for platform coping, platform gate, track access gate, platform screen doors and
hand railing in back-of-house of platform edge.

5. The Kinematic Envelope(s) indicated in the SoD shall not be violated under any
circumstances.

6. The Vehicle Kinematic Envelope for 40 Kmph shall be applied only within the confines of
stations. At all other locations, the Kinematic Envelope corresponding to 90 kmph vehicle
speed with 100 kmph side wind speed shall be used for determining the Structure Gauge
and Electrical clearances.

7. The maximum speed for passenger operation shall be 80 kmph.

8. Maximum operating speed at platform shall be 40 kmph and Kinematic Envelope will not
be infringed under any circumstances.

9. This SoD is applicable for ballasted/ballastless track on mainline and ballasted/ballastless

track in Depots.

10. For evacuation of passengers, in case of emergency, including in cases of derailment of

the end coaches, emergency doors provided at both ends (front & rear) of the train shall
be used for evacuation. The emergency doors will open and rest between or onto the
track-plinth and the space available between the track-plinths shall be used as walkway.
The evacuation will be done under the supervision of train operator and/or station staff.

11. No workman/equipment/structure is allowed between vehicle and structure gauge during

operation/movement of train.

___________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

INTRODUCTION

The dimensions given in this Schedule of Dimensions are to be observed in all works on 1435
mm gauge (STANDARD GAUGE), unless prior sanction has been obtained from the Railway Board
through the Commissioner of Metro Railway Safety/Chief Commissioner of Railway Safety (as
per applicability) to execute works which infringe this Schedule of Dimensions.

This Schedule of Dimensions is applicable to Elevated, At-Grade and Underground sections of

Pune Metro Rail, which shall be with 25 kV AC Traction system and Over Head current
collection. The Rolling Stock shall be 2900 mm wide and 4048 mm high (maximum with
pantograph in locked down condition or without pantograph) with sealed windows and doors
closed while in motion.

Elevated Systems shall be with suitable over ground structure such as Viaduct. Elevated section
shall have suitably designed Ballastless (DFF) Track. The Underground System maybe with a
circular tunnel or Rectangular box or of any other suitable shall have suitably designed
Ballastless (DFF) Track. The At-Grade system and the Depot area may have either Ballasted
Track or Ballastless Track.

The Schedule of Dimensions (SoD) has been divided into five chapters as under

Chapter-I ------------------- General

Chapter-II ------------------- Stations
Chapter-III ------------------- Rolling Stock
Chapter-IV ------------------- Electric Traction
Chapter-V ------------------- Platform Gate / Platform Screen doors

___________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

CHAPTER-I
GENERAL

1.1 SPACING OF TRACKS

Minimum centre to centre distance of tracks without any structure in between tracks for
tangent (straight) track for:
(a) Elevated sections and At-grade sections…………..3650 mm
(b) Underground Sections………………………………………..3500 mm
Note: See Appendix-1 for minimum track centers distance on curves.

1.2 CURVES

1.2.1 Minimum radius of curves (horizontal)

i) On main running lines
(a) Elevated and At-Grade Sections 120 m
(b) Underground Section 200 m
(c) Underground Sections (Desirable) 300 m

ii) Depot and other non-passenger Lines 100 m

iii) At passenger platforms 1000 m

1.2.2 Check Rail / Restraining Rail

Check Rail / Restraining Rail shall be provided on curves on main line where radius is
190m or less. Check rail/Restraining rail shall not be mandatory for curves in depots,
yards and non-passenger lines, where speed is less than 25 kmph. The clearance between
check rail/restraining rail and running rail shall be suitably decided by metro depending
upon study of track vehicle interaction.

1.2.3 Minimum radius of Vertical Curve

On Main Line 1500 m

Note: 1. Minimum length of Vertical Curve - 20 m

2. No vertical curve shall be provided in platform area.
1.2.4 Cant and Cant Deficiency

a) Maximum Cant on curves 110 mm

b) Maximum Cant Deficiency 85 mm

1.3 GRADIENTS
1.3.1 The maximum grade (compensated) shall be 4%.
Note:
(i) There will be no change of gradient in transition portion of curves.
(ii) The gradient will be compensated for curvature at the rate of 0.04% per degree of
curve.

___________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

1.3.2 Maximum permissible gradient on turnouts

(i) On Ballasted Track 0.25%

(ii) On Ballastless Track 2.5%

Note:

(i) There shall be no change of gradient (i.e. Vertical curve) on and within 15.0m
(desirable)/3.0 m (minimum) of any turnout on Ballastless track. In case of ballasted
track, there shall be no change of grade on and within 30 meters of any turnout.

(ii) There shall be no horizontal curve within 15.0m (desirable)/3.0 m (minimum) of any
turnout on Ballastless track and 30 meters of any Turnout on Ballasted Track.

(iii) Turnout shall normally be installed on straight track. In exceptional situations,

turnout may take off from curve provided that the radius of lead curve (main line as
well as diverging line) is not less than 190m. The negotiability of rolling stocks on
such turnout must be certified by rolling stock supplier and confirmed through
oscillation trial and a suitable speed restriction should be imposed on main and/or
diverging track based on track geometry and other considerations, if required. In
case of turnout installed on curved track, the minimum distance from
commencement of vertical curve or another horizontal curve shall be 15m for
Ballastless track. Turnout shall not be laid on transition curve.

(iv) The limit of turnout for above purposes shall be taken from Stock Rail Joint (SRJ) to
end (i.e heel) of crossing for Ballastless track. For Ballasted track, it shall be from
SRJ to last common sleeper behind end of crossing.

(v) The maximum permissible gradient on turnout and the location of turnout with
respect to vertical/horizontal curves in vicinity shall be confirmed from rolling stock
supplier for the negotiability of rolling stock.

(vi) The above stipulations shall also be applicable for turnout to be laid outside station
limit, if any.

1.4 BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES

1.4.1 Minimum horizontal distance from centre of track to any structure (except at passenger
platform) for heights above rail level on level/constant grade tangent track shall be as
under: -
(a) Elevated and At-Grade Sections
Height from rail level Horizontal distance from C.L. of track
i. Up to 65 mm 1465 mm
ii. 65 mm to 200 mm 1465 mm increasing to 1640 mm
iii. 200 mm to 305 mm 1640 mm
iv. 305 mm to 930 mm 1640 mm increasing to 1735 mm
v. 930 mm to 1095 mm 1735 mm increasing to1740 mm

___________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

vi. 1095 mm to 3310 mm 1740 mm increasing to 1825 mm

vii. 3310 mm to 3775 mm 1825 mm decreasing to 1546 mm
viii. 3775 mm to 6200 mm 1546 mm
Also refer to Figure No. PMSG-2
(b) Underground Sections
(i) Circular Tunnels
Height from rail level Horizontal distance from C.L. of track
i. Up to 65 mm 1465 mm
ii. 65 mm to 200 mm 1465 mm increasing to 1585 mm
iii. 200 mm to 305 mm 1585 mm
iv. 305 mm to 940 mm 1585 mm increasing to 1670 mm
v. 940 mm to 1095 mm 1670 mm increasing to1675 mm
vi. 1095 mm to 3305 mm 1675 mm increasing to 1740 mm
vii. 3305 mm to 3965 mm 1740 mm decreasing to 1250 mm
viii. 3965 mm to 4775 mm 1250 mm
ix. 4775 mm to 5070 mm 1250 mm decreasing to zero along an
arc of circle of radius of 2900 mm
Also refer to Figure No. PMSG-09

(ii) Rectangular Box Tunnels

Height from rail level Horizontal distance from C.L. of track
i. Up to 65 mm 1465 mm
ii. 65 mm to 200 mm 1465 mm increasing to 1585 mm
iii. 200 mm to 305 mm 1585 mm
iv. 305 mm to 940 mm 1585 mm increasing to 1670 mm
v. 940 mm to 1095 mm 1670 mm increasing to1675 mm
vi. 1095 mm to 3305 mm 1675 mm increasing to 1740 mm
vii. 3305 mm to 3965 mm 1740 mm decreasing to 1250 mm
viii. 3965 mm to 4838 mm 1250 mm

Also refer to Figure No. PMSG-09

Note:
i) Extra clearances shall be provided for curves as laid down at Para-1.7.
ii) The term ‘structure’ covers any item including light ones like ladders, isolated
posts, cables etc. erected alongside the track except for passenger platform.
iii) Minimum lateral clearance for OHE masts for tangent track shall be 2150 mm
from centre line of nearest track.
iv) Minimum lateral clearance for OHE masts for tangent track at depot shall be
1950 mm from centre line of nearest track.
v) For passenger platform and PSD, refer to Para-2.2.1 to 2.2.3 of Chapter-II and
Chapter-V respectively.

___________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

1.5 KINEMATIC ENVELOPE

For the Kinematic Envelope for level or constant grade tangent track, refer to:
a) Figure No. PMSG-1 for At-Grade and Elevated Sections

b) Figure No. PMSG-1A for At-Grade and Elevated sections at passenger platform.

c) Figure No. PMSG-08 for Underground Section (Outside stations)

d) Figure No. PMSG-11 for Underground section at Passenger Platform

Note:
Extra clearances shall be provided for curves as laid down at Para-1.7

1.6 STRUCTURE GAUGE

(a) Elevated and At-Grade Sections
The Structure Gauge (Fixed Structure Line) has been arrived at by allowing minimum
clearance of 150 mm to Kinematic Envelope and minimum electrical clearance of
320mm from 25 kV live parts conforming to the stipulations in Chapter-IV of this SoD.
Refer to Figure No. PMSG-2 for Structure Gauge for outside stations on level or constant
grade tangent track.
(b) Underground Section
The Structure Gauge (Fixed Structure Line) has been arrived at by allowing minimum
clearance of 100 mm to Kinematic Envelope and minimum electrical clearance of
normally 270 mm from 25 kV live parts conforming to the stipulations in Chapter-IV of
this SoD.
Refer to figure No. PMSG-09 for structure Gauge for Underground sections (Outside
stations) with ballast less track for level or constant grade tangent track.
Note:
Extra clearances shall be provided for curves as laid down at Para-1.7

1.7 EXTRA CLEARANCES ON CURVES

Following are the extra clearances considered for curves.
Abbreviations used in Para-1.7:
C is the distance between centres of bogies in meters,
C1 is the coach (vehicle) length in meters,
R is the radius of curve in meters,
Ca is the Cant applied in mm,
h is the height from rail level in mm and
g is the distance between centres of rails in mm
1.7.1 INSIDE OF CURVE
A. Curvature effect
i) Mid throw at the center of the vehicle = V (in mm) =125xC2/R
___________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

ii) Clearance due to gauge widening on curves

For values of items (i) and (ii) above, refer to Appendix-2
Note:
Lateral shift of 26 mm due to nosing is included in Kinematic Envelope for tangent track
(and as a result, included in Structure Gauge also) shall be subtracted from the total
extra clearance worked out as at Para-1.7.1(A)-i &ii above for inside of a curve in case
the value of mid throw (V) is equal to or greater than 26 mm. In case the value of mid
throw (V) is less than 26 mm, the curvature effect shall be due to widening of the gauge
only. (The Mid throw minus 26 mm shall be taken as zero).

B. Clearance for Cant

Underground (Box Structure), Elevated and At-Grade Sections
The lean ‘L’ due to Cant at any point at height ‘h’ above rail level is given by:
L = Ca x h/g (all in mm)
For values of Structure Gauge (E1) for inside of a curve with cant effect only, (as
shown in Figure No. PMSG-3A), refer to Appendix-3A for Elevated and At-grade
Sections and Appendix 3(UG) for Underground Sections.

Circular Tunnels

In the case of circular tunnel, cant is provided by raising the outer rail and
suitably shifting the center of the circular tunnel towards inside of curve and
upwards. This has same effect as assuming rotation of the circular tunnel about
mid-point of top of inner rail resulting in shift of Tunnel center laterally towards
inside of curve and also vertically upwards.

The Rigid OCS shall also be rotated with the tunnel so as to be along the
center line of canted track

For values of horizontal and vertical shifts of center of circular tunnel for
different values of cant, refer to Appendix-5.

C. Clearance for vertical curve (vertical throw)

Vertical Throw V1 and V2 (in mm) for vertical curve shall be calculated as under:
V1 (with vehicle centre in sag or vehicle end on summit)

= 125xC2/R

V2 (with vehicle centre on summit or vehicle end in sag)

= (125xC12/R)-(125xC2/R)

For values of vertical throw V1 & V2 due to vertical curves of different radii, refer
to PMSG-4.

___________________________________________________________________
Page 7 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

1.7.2 OUTSIDE OF CURVE

A. Curvature effect

i) End throw at the end of vehicle = Vo (in mm)

= [125xC12/R]-[125xC2/R]

ii) Clearance due to gauge widening on curves

iii) Additional nosing due to gauge widening on curves
The values of items (i) to (iii) are shown in Appendix-2

B. Clearance for Cant

a) Underground (Box structures), Elevated and At-Grade sections
The lean ‘L’ due to Cant at any point at height ‘h’ above rail level is given by:
L = (-) Ca x h/g (all in mm)
-ve sign indicates relief due to cant or reduction in clearance required.
Note:
Full relief for lean due to cant (Ca) is to be taken into account only for calculation of
track spacing without any structure between tracks. In case there is a structure
adjacent to track, relief for lean is to be taken into account only if the cant provided is
greater than 50 mm and shall be limited to a value = (Ca - 50) x h/g.
For values of Structure Gauge (F1) on outside of curve with Cant effect only (as shown
in Figure No. PMSG-3A), refer to Appendix-3A for Elevated and At-Grade Sections and
Appendix-3 (UG) for Box tunnel sections.
b) Circular Tunnel
In the case of circular tunnel, cant is provided by raising the outer rail and
suitably shifting the center of the circular tunnel towards inside of curve and
upwards. This has same effect as assuming rotation of the circular tunnel about
mid-point of top of inner rail resulting in shift of Tunnel center laterally towards
inside of curve and also vertically upwards.
The Rigid OCS shall also be rotated with the tunnel so as to be along the center
line of canted track.
For values of horizontal and vertical shifts of center of circular tunnel for
different values of cant, refer to Appendix-5.

C. Clearance for vertical curve (Vertical throw)

The provisions at Para-1.7.1 (C) above shall be applicable in this case also.
For values of vertical throws V1 & V2 due to vertical curves of different radii, refer to
PMSG-4.

1.8 MINIMUM TRACK SPACING ON CURVES

Underground Section, Elevated and At-Grade sections:

The worst case will be when the end of a bogie carriage on the inner track is opposite
the center of a similar carriage on the outer track.

___________________________________________________________________
Page 8 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

1.8.1 Without any structure between tracks

The minimum track spacing on curves without any structure between tracks shall be the
sum of the following:

i) (E + F),
ii) T1 (Extra lateral clearance due to curvature on inside of curve
iii) T2 (Extra lateral clearance due to curvature on outside of curve
iv) Minimum clearance between adjacent Kinematic Envelopes stipulated is
as under:-
300 mm for Elevated and At-Grade Sections
200 mm for Underground Section

Where,
‘E’ is the distance from vertical axis of center line of canted track to canted
Kinematic Envelope on inside of curve at a height ‘h’ (from rail level) for a given
cant (Figure No. PMSG-3)
and
‘F’ is the distance from vertical axis of centre line of canted track to canted
Kinematic Envelope on outside of curve at a height ‘h’ (from rail level) for a
given cant (Figure No. PMSG-3)

Notes:
i) The value of ‘F’, calculated from the formula at Figure No. PMSG-3 includes full
relief due to Cant.
ii) The sum of 'E' and 'F' for same height (which are with Cant effect only) shall be
the maximum of values calculated for various heights from rail level.

For values of E, F, T1 and T2, refer to the Appendices as shown below:

SECTIONS For E & F For T1 &T2

Underground 4 (UG) 2

Elevated and At-Grade 1. 3 for 90 kmph KE 2

2. 3i for 40 kmph KE

1.8.2 With a structure between adjacent tracks

The minimum track spacing on curves with a structure between tracks shall be the sum
of the following:
i) (E1 +T1) Minimum clearance to the structure from center line of track on
inside of curve (for outer track)

ii) (F1 +T2) Minimum clearance to the structure from center line of track on
outside of curve (for inner track)

___________________________________________________________________
Page 9 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

iii) Width of structure between adjacent tracks (measured across the tracks).

Where,
E1 is the horizontal distance from vertical axis of centre line of track to canted
Structure Gauge on inside of curve for a given cant, (Ref Fig no: PMSG-3A)

F1 is the horizontal distance from vertical axis of centre line of track to canted
Structure Gauge on outside of curve for a given cant, (Ref Fig no: PMSG-3A)

T1 is extra lateral clearance due to curvature on inside of curve

T2 is extra lateral clearance due to curvature on outside of curve.

Notes:

(i) The values of ‘E1’ and ‘F1’ for a given cant Ca, shall each be the maximum of
values at different heights of structure from rail level. In case the cant provided
is greater than 50 mm on inner track, the value of F1 shall be for the cant of
(Ca-50) mm. In case the cant provided is 50 mm or less on inner track, the value
of F1 shall be for ZERO cant.

(ii) Minimum track spacing, so worked out with a structure between the adjacent
tracks shall not be less than that calculated as per Para 1.8.1 for tracks without
any structure between adjacent tracks.

For values of E1, F1, T1 and T2, refer to the Appendices as shown below:

SECTIONS For E1 & F1 For T1 &T2

Underground 3 (UG) 2

Elevated and At-Grade 1. 3A for Structure Gauge 2

corresponding to 90 kmph
KE.
2. 3Ai for Structure Gauge
corresponding to 40 kmph
KE.

1.8.3 Pathways / Walkways for Underground Sections

A) Minimum width of Pathway / Walkway = 552mm

B) Minimum height of Pathway / Walkway = 1000mm
C) Maximum height of Pathway / Walkway = 1200mm

Note: Extra allowance shall be provided for curves as laid down at Para 1.7

(i) Maximum and Minimum heights of pathway / walkway on curves are above inner
rail.

___________________________________________________________________
Page 10 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

(ii) No Structure, other than signaling and minor signaling equipment post, shall be
permitted within the minimum width of pathway / walkway.
(iii) Minimum clearance to pathway / walkway at the nearest edge from kinematic
envelope shall be 100mm for underground sections.
(iv) Pathway / walkway could be used by metro inspection group only in non-
operation periods and for evacuation of passengers in emergency.

1.9 DERAILMENT GUARD

(a) Derailment Guard shall be provided on inside/outside of running rail in viaduct and
in tunnels at locations specified by the Metro Railway. In tunnels, the derailment
guard should preferably be provided inside the track, so that it permits less sway of
coach towards tunnel wall in case of derailment.

(b) Lateral Clearance between the running rail and the derailment guard shall be 210 ±
30 mm. It shall not be lower than 25 mm below the top of running rail and shall be
clear of the rail fastenings to permit installation, replacement and maintenance.

Note:

In case of Double Resilient Base Plate Assembly Fastening System as approved by MoR,
the lateral clearance between running rail and the derailment guard shall be 250+20
mm.

___________________________________________________________________
Page 11 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

CHAPTER - II

STATIONS

2.1 SPACING OF TRACKS AT STATIONS

Minimum spacing of tracks at station on straight and on curve of radius of 1000 m and
flatter, without any structure between tracks

(a) Elevated sections and At-grade sections 3700 mm

(b) Underground Sections 3900 mm
Note:
‘Station Limits’ means platform portion only from SoD point of View

2.2 PLATFORMS
2.2.1 Maximum horizontal distance from centre of track to face of passenger platform coping
for tangent track

(i) For Elevated/At-Grade section 1525 mm

(ii) For Underground Section 1515 mm

2.2.2 Minimum horizontal distance from centre of track to face of passenger platform coping
for tangent track

(i) For Elevated/At-Grade section 1520 mm

(ii) For Underground Section 1510 mm

Notes:

a) Platform faces shall be flared away smoothly from the centre line of the track at either
end for a distance of 1500 mm beyond passenger area so as to give from centre of track
a dimension:
 1590 + 5 for At grade and Elevated Stations
 1575 + 5 for Underground Stations
b) For additional clearance for platforms on curves, refer to Para-2.7
c) The track access gates at the end of platform up to a height of one meter from top of
platform shall not infringe the Kinematic Envelope.
2.2.3 Height above rail level for passenger platform:
Maximum Minimum

(a) Ballasted Track 1085 mm 1075 mm

(b) Ballastless Track (DFF) 1095 mm 1085 mm

___________________________________________________________________
Page 12 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

2.2.4 (i) Minimum horizontal distance of any isolated structure on 2500 mm

a passenger platform from the edge of coping except platform
gate/ track access gate/ PSD provided in the flared portion of
the platform end.

ii) Minimum horizontal distance of any continuous structure on 3000 mm

a passenger platform from the edge of coping except platform
gate/ track access gate/ PSD provided in the flared portion of
the platform end.

Notes:
a) Platform screen door (PSD) maybe installed at platform as per design of PSD but
shall have minimum clearance of 10 mm from the kinematic envelope.

b) The structure on the platform is treated as isolated if the length along the platform
length is 2000 mm or less. Any structure having a length exceeding 2000 mm is
treated as continuous structure. The clocks/mirrors/CCTV screens etc shall not be
considered structures and shall be located at a minimum horizontal distance of 1000
mm from platform edge/coping with minimum height of 2000 mm from top of
platform.

c) For platform structure setting out dimensions at stations, refer Fig. no. PMSG-10.
No fixed structure should infringe the structural gauge except for designated railway
operational structures which includes platform coping, platform screen doors, hand
railing in back of house platform edge, track access gates. Such designated railway
operational structure should not infringe the kinematic envelope under any
circumstances.

d) For Structure Gauge at stations at Underground Stations, refer to figure no PMSG-10

2.2.5 For Structure Gauge at stations at Elevated Stations and At-Grade, refer to figure
no PMSG-5 & PMSG-6.

2.3 TRACK GRADIENT IN PLATFORM

Gradient of track in station platform length shall be as under:

(a) Maximum gradient 1 in 400

(b) Desirable Level

Note: There shall be no change in gradient in platform line.

___________________________________________________________________
Page 13 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

2.4 INTERLOCKING AND SIGNAL GEAR

Maximum height above rail level of any part of interlocking or signal gear on either side
of centre of track subject to the restrictions embodied in Note below shall be as under:
For Underground, At-Grade and Elevated Stations

 From C.L. of track to 1330 mm 25 mm

 From 1330 mm to 1465 mm 25 mm increasing to 65 mm
 From 1465 mm to 1640 mm 65 mm increasing to 200 mm
Note:
Except for check rails on curves, ordinary and diamond crossings or wing rails and point
rails of crossings leading to snag dead ends, or such parts of signalling gear as are
required to be actuated by the wheels, no gear or track fittings shall project above rail
level for a distance of 229 mm outside and 140 mm inside the gauge face of the rails.

2.5 POINTS & CROSSINGS

2.5.1 Maximum clearance of check rail opposite nose of crossing 42 mm

2.5.2 Minimum clearance of check rail opposite nose of crossing 40 mm

2.5.3 Minimum clearance between switch rail and stock rail at heel of Switch 60 mm

2.5.4 Maximum clearance of wing rail at nose of crossing 43 mm

2.5.5 Minimum clearance of wing rail at nose of crossing 41 mm

2.5.6 Minimum clearance between toe of open switch and stock rail 160 mm

2.5.7 Minimum radius of curvature for slip points, turnouts and crossovers 140 m

2.5.8 On main lines, the turnouts and diamond Crossings shall be of the following types

a) 1 in 9 type turnout 300 m radius

190 m radius
(Exceptional circumstances)

b) 1 in 7 type turnout 190 m radius

(Desirable)

140 m radius
(Exceptional circumstances)

c) Scissors cross-over of 1 in 9 type consisting of 4 acute turnouts of 1 in 9 and 1

diamond crossing.

d) Scissors cross-over of 1 in 7 type consisting of 4 acute turnouts of 1 in 7 and 1

diamond crossing.

___________________________________________________________________
Page 14 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

2.5.9 On depot lines, non-passenger lines like pocket track, depot entry lines etc, the

turnouts and diamond Crossings shall be of the following types:

a) 1 in 7 type turnout 190 m radius

140 m radius
(Exceptional circumstances)

b) Scissors cross-over of 1 in 7 type consisting of 4 acute turnouts of 1 in 7

and 1 diamond crossing.

c) 1 in 7 derailing switches/ 1 in 7 type symmetrical split turnout.

2.5.10 Diamond crossings not to be flatter than 1 in 4.444.

Note:
a) The above restrictions shall not apply to moveable diamond crossings.
b) Switches and crossings shall not be located on transition curves & vertical curves.
b) There must be no change of super elevation (of outer over inner rail) between points
18 m outside toe of switch rail and nose of crossings respectively, except in the
case of special crossing leading to snag dead-ends or under circumstances as
provided for in item 2.6 below.

2.5.11 Minimum length of tongue rail 9000 mm

2.6 SUPER-ELEVATIONS AND SPEED AT STATIONS ON CURVES WITH TURNOUTS OF

CONTRARY AND SIMILAR FLEXURE.

2.6.1 Main Line:

Subject to the permissible run through speed based on the standard of interlocking, the
equilibrium super-elevation, calculated for the speed of the fastest train may be
reduced by a maximum amount of 85 mm without reducing speed on the main line.
2.6.2 Turnouts:

i) Curves of contrary flexure

The equilibrium super-elevation (s) in mm should be = (1510/127)*(V2 / R) Where,

R = Radius of turnout in meters and V is speed on turnout in Kmph.
The permissible negative super-elevation on the turnout (which is also the actual super-
elevation of the main line) may then be = (85 – s) mm.

ii) Curves of similar flexure

___________________________________________________________________
Page 15 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

The question of reduction or otherwise of super-elevation on the main line must

necessarily be determined by the administration concerned. In the case of a reverse
curve close behind the crossing of a turnout, the super-elevation may be run out at the
maximum of 1 mm in 400 mm.

2.7 ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE FOR PLATFORMS ON CURVES

The additional clearance for platforms on curves shall be provided as shown at
Appendix-4
Note:
(i) As the minimum radius of curve for stations is 1000 m, there will be no super
elevation and gauge widening on passenger platform lines.

___________________________________________________________________
Page 16 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

CHAPTER-III
ROLLING STOCK

3.1 PASSENGER ELECTRIC MULTIPLE UNITS

3.1.1 (a) Maximum Length of the coach body 21940 mm

(including end fairings)

(a) (b) Maximum width of the vehicle 2900 mm

(b)
(c) Height of the coach body
(maximum with pantograph in 4048 mm
locked down condition)

3.1.2 Distance between bogie centers 14850+ 250 mm

3.1.3 Kinematic Envelope for level tangent track

a. For At-Grade and Elevated Sections except Figure No.

for passenger platform PMSG-1

b. For At-Grade and Elevated Sections at

Figure No.
passenger platform.
PMSG-1A

c. For Underground sections except for Figure No.

passenger platform. PMSG-08

d. For Underground sections at passenger PMSG-11

platform.

3.1.4 Minimum clearance above rail level under dynamic 75 mm

condition of fully loaded vehicle under worst condition**
for bogie and axle mounted equipment.

3.1.5 Minimum clearance above rail level under dynamic 102 mm

condition of fully loaded vehicle under worst condition***
for body mounted equipment.

**The “worst condition” means it is with deflection of primary suspension and

maximum tread wear.

***The “worst condition” means it is with deflection of primary suspension and,

deflated air spring and maximum tread wear.

3.1.6 Wheel

a) Maximum wheel gauge back to back distance 1360 mm

b) Minimum wheel gauge back to back distance 1358 mm

___________________________________________________________________
Page 17 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

3.1.7 a) Maximum diameter on the tread (measured at 70 mm 860 mm

from wheel gauge face)

b) Minimum diameter on the tread (measured at 70 mm

from wheel gauge face) 780 mm

3.1.8 a) Minimum projection for flange of new wheel 28 mm

(measured at 70 mm from wheel gauge face)

b) Maximum projection for flange of worn wheel 36 mm

(measured at 70 mm from wheel gauge face)

3.1.9 a) Maximum thickness of flange of wheel measured from 32.5 mm

wheel gauge face at 18 mm from outer edge of
flange.

b) Minimum thickness of flange of wheel measured from 22 mm

wheel gauge face at 18 mm from outer edge of
flange.

3.1.10 Minimum width of wheel 135±1 mm

3.1.11 Incline of tread 1 in 20

3.1.12 Floor Height

a) Maximum height above rail level for floor of any 1130 mm

unloaded vehicle
b) Minimum height above rail level for floor of fully
1100 mm
loaded normal vehicle
3.1.13 a) Maximum height of centre coupler above rail level 815 mm
for unloaded vehicle

b) Minimum height of centre coupler above rail level for 740 mm

fully loaded vehicle

22600 mm
3.1.14 Maximum length over couplers
2200 to
3.1.15 Length of rigid wheel base for single bogie
2600 mm

3.1.16 Maximum distance between any two adjacent axles 12900 mm

3.2 LOCOMOTIVES AND ENGINEERING SERVICE VEHICLES

Other items of rolling stock, viz shunting locomotives, OHE maintenance and inspection
cars, emergency re-railing vans, track machines, etc., used on Pune Metro System
(where these cars would be plying) will conform with the Kinematic Envelope of the
Passenger Electric Multiple Units as shown in Drawing No PMSG-1 for Elevated & At-
Grade sections, Drawing No. PMSG-1A for Elevated & At-Grade sections at Platforms,
Figure No. PMSG-8 for Underground sections and Figure No. PMSG-11 for Underground
section at platforms.

___________________________________________________________________
Page 18 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

CHAPTER-IV
ELECTRIC TRACTION

(OVERHEAD ELECTRIC TRACTION 25 kV/AC 50 CYCLES PER SECOND)

Note: Special precautions must be taken to maintain following clearances:

4.1 ELECTRICAL CLEARANCES FOR AT-GRADE AND ELEVATED SECTIONS

4.1.1 The clearances between 25 kV live parts and earthed parts of fixed structures or moving
loads shall be as large as possible. The minimum electrical clearances (vertical and
horizontal) to be maintained under the worst condition of temperature, wind, etc.
between any live part of the overhead equipment or pantograph and parts of any fixed
structures (earthed or otherwise) or moving loads shall be below:

Vertical Clearance:
(i) Long Duration 320 mm
(ii) Short Duration 200 mm

Horizontal/Lateral Clearance:
(i) Long Duration 320 mm
(ii) Short Duration 200 mm

Note:
(a) Long duration means when the conductor is at rest and Short Duration means when
the conductor is not at rest.
(b) A minimum vertical distance of 340 mm shall normally be provided between rolling
stock and contact wire to allow for a 20 mm temporary raising of the tracks during
maintenance. Wherever the allowance required for track maintenance exceeds 20
mm, the vertical distance between rolling stock and contact wire shall
correspondingly be increased.
(c) Where adoption of above clearance is either not feasible or involves abnormally high
cost, a minimum vertical distance of 250 mm shall be provided between rolling stock
and contact wire. At such locations, the following factors shall be maintained.
(i) Track to be frozen by providing permanent bench mark to indicate the level of
track to be maintained.
(ii) Erection tolerance shall be taken as zero.
(iii) OHE span length shall be kept 36m or below to restrict the oscillation of contact
wire.

4.1.2 Height of contact wire:

Minimum height from rail level to the underside of live Conductor wire

i) In the open 5000 mm

ii) Special locations (Under bridges)
for locked down height of pantograph 4800 mm
iii) In depot open area 5200 mm

___________________________________________________________________
Page 19 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

iv) In carriage sheds and depot where the staff will likely
to be working on the roof of rolling stock during the
maintenance 5500 mm
v) At level crossing 5500 mm

Note:
a) The normal height from rail level to the underside of contact wire is 5000 mm
b) On curves, all vertical distances specified in items 4.1.2 above, shall be
measured above level of the inner rail, increased by half the super-elevation.

4.1.3 Maximum variation of the live conductor wire on either side of the centre line of the
track under static conditions:
i) On straight +200mm
ii) On Curves +300mm
Note:
These limits would not apply to special locations like insulated overlaps and out of run
wires.

4.1.4 Maximum width of pantograph collector:

The Kinematic Envelope with the size of Pantograph adopted shall be within the
Kinematic Envelope shown at Figure No. PMSG-1.

4.2 ELECTRICAL CLEARANCES FOR UNDERGROUND SECTIONS

4.2.1 Minimum height from rail level to underside of wearing copper /

metal conductor of rigid OCS (Overhead contact system) in Tunnel 4318 mm

Note:-

a) Location of exit crossing from exit point of the tunnel will take into the
considerations the OHE height of 4318 mm at the tunnel exit and the permissible
contact wire gradient.

b) In the depot deck portion, if rigid OCS is provided and track is ballastless, the
electrical clearances laid down at para 4.2.1 to 4.2.4 shall be applicable.

c) For location of rigid OCS in circular tunnel with canted track, refer to Para 1.7.1
(B)-b and 1.7.2 (B)-b

d) It shall be ensured that environment level inside the tunnel is controlled suitably so
that no extra air clearance, over and above the minimum separation prescribed in
Para 4.2.3 and 4.2.4 on account of pollution, fog etc., is required.

4.2.2 Stagger of rigid OCS conductor in tunnels shall not be more than

(i) On Straight +200mm

(ii) On Curves +300mm

___________________________________________________________________
Page 20 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

4.2.3 Prescribed minimum clearances between live parts of contact lines and bodies of
structures

Air clearance between bodies of structures and live un-insulated body parts of contact
lines, feeders and current collectors for 25KV shall be as per IEC 60913 as under:

Absolute minimum
Minimum Clearance
S. dynamic clearance
Condition between live parts and
No between live parts and
structures
structures
Long duration
(A) 270 mm -
(Static)
Short duration
(B) 170 mm 150mm*
(Dynamic)
*In exceptional cases and operating in climatic conditions (Ref: IEC 60913)

4.2.4 Prescribed minimum clearances between live parts of contact lines bodies of vehicles

Minimum air clearance between bodies of vehicles and the live un-insulated parts of
the contact line or feeders for 25 kV.

S. Clearance
Condition
No (mm)
(A) Long duration (Static) 270 mm

(B) Short duration (Dynamic) 170 mm

4.2.5 Maximum width of pantograph – Under dynamic conditions

The kinematic envelope for underground sections in Ballastless tracks is shown in Fig.
PMSG-08. The pantograph adopted should be such that its actual half KE width does not
exceed 820 mm and 980 mm at the top and the bottom respectively in pantograph raised
condition for a contact wire height of 4318 mm to fulfill electrical clearance as per item
4.2.3

Note:

These limits should not apply to special locations like insulated overlaps and out of run
wires.

___________________________________________________________________
Page 21 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

CHAPTER-V
PLATFORM GATE / PLATFORM SCREEN DOORS

5.1 SETTING OUT DIMENSIONS

Minimum Platform Gate width 2000 mm

Minimum Platform Gate height 1500 mm

1500 mm (Partial Height)

Minimum Platform Screen door height
2100 mm (Full Height)
Minimum Platform Gate threshold offset from track
1530 mm
centerline – straight track (Elevated / At-Grade)
Minimum Platform Gate panel offset from track
1535 mm
centerline – straight track (Elevated / At-Grade)
Minimum Platform Gate header offset from track
1580 mm
centerline (Elevated / At-Grade)
Minimum Platform threshold offset from track
1515 mm
centerline – Straight track (Underground)
Minimum Platform screen door panel offset from
1589 mm
track centerline – Straight track (Underground)

Note:
(a) Assumed plus/minus 300 mm stopping accuracy.
(b) Platform gate at stations on curves shall be considered separately taking into
account the additional clearance as per Appendix-4.
(c) Platform gates are designated as railway operational structures. Therefore,
platform gates may infringe the Structure Gauge, but does not infringe the
kinematic envelope and having minimum clearance of 10 mm from kinematic
envelope to platform gate (refer PMSG-7)
(d) The deflector attached to the bottom of the sliding door shall be designed in
order not to protrude beyond the gate threshold.

__________________________________________________________________
Page 22 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

Appendix-1

PERMISSIBLE SPEED, CANT AND MINIMUM TRACK SPACING ON CURVES

ELEVATED AND AT-GRADE SECTIONS

MINIMUM DISTANCE
MAXIMUM
RADIUS OF BETWEEN ADJACENT
CANT PERMISSIBLE
CURVE TRACKS
SPEED
See note (a)
(m) mm kmph mm

3000 or more 15 80 3650

2800 15 80 3650
2400 20 80 3650
2000 20 80 3650
1600 25 80 3650
1500 30 80 3650
1200 35 80 3650
1000 40 80 3700
800 55 80 3700
600 70 80 3750
500 90 80 3750
450 95 75 3750
400 105 75 3800
350 110 70 3800
300 110 65 3850
200 110 50 3950
190 110 50 3950
175 110 50 4000
150 110 45 4050
150* 0 30 4050
120 110 40 4150
120* 0 30 4150
100* 0 25 4250

UNDERGROUND (TUNNELS)

MINIMUM DISTANCE
MAXIMUM
RADIUS OF BETWEEN ADJACENT
CANT PERMISSIBLE
CURVE TRACKS
SPEED
See note (a)
(m) mm kmph mm
>3000 - 80 3500
3000 15 80 3500
2800 15 80 3500
2400 20 80 3500
2000 20 80 3500
1600 25 80 3500
1500 30 80 3510
1200 35 80 3510

__________________________________________________________________
Page 23 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

1000 45 80 3550
800 55 80 3550
600 70 80 3570
500 85 80 3600
450 95 80 3610
400 105 80 3650
350 110 75 3650
300 110 70 3700
200 110 55 3800
150 110 50 4000
150* 0 30 4000
120 110 45 4000
120* 0 30 4000
100* 0 15 4000

Notes:

(a) The track spacing shown in the table above is without any column/structure between
two tracks and is with equal cant for both outer and inner tracks.
b) Track spacing shown in Table above is not applicable to stations which should be
calculated depending on specific requirement but should not be less than spacing
specified in para 2.1.
c) Track spacing is calculated as per Para 1.8 (E+F+T1+T2+300mm for Elevated & At-
Grade sections; E+F+T1+T2+200mm for Underground sections)
d) Figures for any intermediate radius of curvature may be obtained by adopting the
value for sharper curve.
e) Cant provided is limited to desirable value of 110 mm.
f) Maximum cant deficiency is 85 mm.
g) Check rail / Restraining Rail shall be provided on curve on main line where radius is
190 m or less.
* Curves to be provided in depots.

__________________________________________________________________
Page 24 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

Appendix-2
EXTRA HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE ON CURVES
(CURVATURE EFFECT)
INSIDE OF CURVE
REFERENCE: PARA 1.7.1
NOSING
INCLUDED IN
EXTRA EXTRA
RADIUS MID- K.E/
GAUGE HORIZONTAL
OF THROW STRUCTURE REMARKS
TOLERANCE CLEARANCE
CURVE (28500/R) GAUGE FOR
ON CURVES ON CURVE
TANGENT
TRACK
(m) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
(R) (V) (N) (G) (T1)
100 285.0 26.0 9.0 268
120 237.5 26.0 9.0 221
150 190.0 26.0 9.0 173 (G) EXTRA GAUGE
175 162.9 26.0 9.0 146 TOLERANCE ON
190* 150.0 26.0 9.0 133 CURVES SHARPER
200 142.5 26.0 9.0 126 THAN 1000 m
250 114.0 26.0 9.0 97 RADIUS: 9 mm FOR
300 95.0 26.0 9.0 78 CURVES WITH
350 81.4 26.0 9.0 64 RADII SHARPER
400 71.3 26.0 9.0 54 THAN 500 m AND 5
450 63.3 26.0 9.0 46 mm FOR CURVES
500 57.0 26.0 5.0 36 WITH RADII OF 500
600 47.5 26.0 5.0 27 m TO LESS THAN
700 40.7 26.0 5.0 20 1000 m.
800 35.6 26.0 5.0 15
900 31.7 26.0 5.0 11
1000 28.5 26.0 0.0 3
1200 23.8 26.0 0.0 0
1500 19.0 26.0 0.0 0 T1=V-N+G for V
1600 17.8 26.0 0.0 0 EQUAL TO OR
2000 14.3 26.0 0.0 0 GREATER THAN
2400 11.9 26.0 0.0 0 (N) AND T1= G for
2800 10.2 26.0 0.0 0 V < (N)
3000
or 9.5 26.0 0.0 0
more

Note:
Mid throw ( in mm ) V = (125 x C2) /R= 28500/R
Where 'C' is the distance between bogie centers=14.850+0.250=15.100m OR 14.85 -
0.250=14.600 m
The worst case will be with C=15.100 m
R is the radius of curve in metres.
Mid throw (in mm) V = (125 x C2) /R= 28500/R
* Check Rail / Restraining Rail shall be provided on curves on main line where radius is
190m or less.

__________________________________________________________________
Page 25 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

OUTSIDE OF CURVE
REFERENCE: PARA 1.7.2
EXTRA
NOSING EXTRA
RADIUS END- EXTRA GAUGE
DUE TO HORIZONTAL
OF THROW TOLERANCE ON REMARKS
EXTRA CLEARANCE
CURVE (33525/R) CURVES
GAUGE ON CURVE
TOLERANCE
(m) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
(R) (Vo) (G) (EN) (T2)
100 335.3 9.0 2.3 347
120 279.4 9.0 2.3 291
150 223.5 9.0 2.3 235
175 191.6 9.0 2.3 203 (G) EXTRA GAUGE
190* 176.4 9.0 2.3 186 TOLERANCE ON
200 167.6 9.0 2.3 179 CURVES SHARPER
250 134.1 9.0 2.3 145 THAN 1000 m
RADIUS: 9 mm FOR
300 111.8 9.0 2.3 123
CURVES WITH
350 95.8 9.0 2.3 107
RADII SHARPER
400 83.8 9.0 2.3 95 THAN 500 m AND 5
450 74.5 9.0 2.3 86 mm FOR CURVES
500 67.1 5.0 1.3 73 WITH RADII OF 500
600 55.9 5.0 1.3 62 m TO LESS THAN
700 47.9 5.0 1.3 54 1000 m.
800 41.9 5.0 1.3 48
900 37.3 5.0 1.3 44
1000 33.5 0.0 0.0 34
1200 27.9 0.0 0.0 28
1500 22.4 0.0 0.0 22
1600 21.0 0.0 0.0 21
T2=Vo+G+EN
2000 16.8 0.0 0.0 17
EN=Gx0.251986301
2400 14.0 0.0 0.0 14
2800 12.0 0.0 0.0 12
3000 or
11.2 0.0 0.0 11
more
Note:
End Throw ( in mm ) Vo= (125 x C12) /R - (125xC2)/R = 33525/R
Where 'C' is the distance between bogie centres = 14.850+0.250=15.100m OR 14.850-
.250=14.600 m
Worst case will be with C=14.600 m
'C1' is length of coach in meters = 21.940 m and
'R' is radius of curve in meters.

* Check Rail / Restraining Rail shall be provided on curves on main line where radius is
190m or less.

__________________________________________________________________
Page 26 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

Refer to Figure PMSG-3

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 27 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

Refer to Figure PMSG-3

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 28 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

Refer to Figure PMSG-3A

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 29 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

Refer to Figure PMSG-3A

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 30 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

Refer Figure No. PMSG-3A

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 31 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 32 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

APPENDIX 4 (UG): CANT EFFECT ON KINEMATIC ENVELOPE– HORIZONTAL

Refer Figure No. PMSG-3

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 33 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

APPENDIX - 5
LATERAL AND VERTICAL SHIFT OF CENTER OF CIRCULAR TUNNEL FOR DIFFERENT CANT VALUES
(WITH D1 = 730mm)
Sin ∝ =
Cant Cant/1510 Angle α
tan = (r- Angle θ
Lateral Shift of Lateral Shift of Tunnel
REMARKS
D1)/(g/2) Tunnel Center=X Center=Y

mm Degree Degrees mm mm
110 0.0728 4.1776 2.8742 70.8159 160 49
105 0.0695 3.9874 2.8742 70.8159 153 47
100 0.0662 3.7972 2.8742 70.8159 145 45
95 0.0629 3.6071 2.8742 70.8159 138 43
90 0.0596 3.4170 2.8742 70.8159 131 41
(a) The cant is provided by raising the outer rail which will mean, roatting
85 0.0563 3.2270 2.8742 70.8159 123 39
the tunnel about the mid point of top of inner rail.
80 0.0530 3.0370 2.8742 70.8159 116 37
(b) 'X' is lateral shift of the center of the tunnel towards inside of the curve
75 0.0497 2.8470 2.8742 70.8159 109 35
X= [{2x(r-D1)/sin(θ)} x {sin(α/2)}] x cos (90-θ-α/2)
70 0.0464 2.6570 2.8742 70.8159 101 33
(c) 'Y' is the vertical shift of the center of the tunnel (upwards)
65 0.0430 2.4671 2.8742 70.8159 94 30
Y= [{2x(r-D1)/sin(θ)} x {sin(α/2)}] x sin (90-θ-α/2) where,
60 0.0397 2.2773 2.8742 70.8159 87 28
'r' is internal radius of the circular tunnel = 2900mm
55 0.0364 2.0874 2.8742 70.8159 80 26
'D1' = depth from rail level to invert of circular tunnel = 730mm
50 0.0331 1.8976 2.8742 70.8159 72 24
α= angle of rotation
45 0.0298 1.7077 2.8742 70.8159 65 22
sin(α) = (Cant/g)
40 0.0265 1.5179 2.8742 70.8159 58 19
θ= angle subtended by line joining top of two rails and the line joining
35 0.0232 1.3282 2.8742 70.8159 51 17
mid point of top of inner rail and the center of circular tunnel
30 0.0199 1.1384 2.8742 70.8159 43 15
tan(θ) = [(r-D1)/(g/2)] which gives θ = 70.8159 degrees
25 0.0166 0.9486 2.8742 70.8159 36 12
g= Center to center of rails = 1510mm
20 0.0132 0.7589 2.8742 70.8159 29 10
15 0.0099 0.5692 2.8742 70.8159 22 7
10 0.0066 0.3794 2.8742 70.8159 14 5
5 0.0033 0.1897 2.8742 70.8159 7 2
0 0.0000 0.0000 2.8742 70.8159 0 0

Refer Figure No. PMSG-12

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 34 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 35 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 36 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 37 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 38 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 39 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 40 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 41 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 42 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 43 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 44 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 45 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 46 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 47 of 48 February 2018
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation Limited

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 48 of 48 February 2018
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS

Section VI – Employer’s Requirements

Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

May 2018
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

1. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS .............................................................................. 1

2. INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................. 2
3. CO-ORDINATION ........................................................................................................... 4
3.1 Contractor’s Co-Ordination Responsibilities ................................................................. 4
3.2 Site Co-Ordination & Attendance ................................................................................. 4
4. INTERFACE .................................................................................................................... 6
4.1 Co-Ordination of Contractor’s Scope of Work .............................................................. 6
4.2 Interfacing Contractors ................................................................................................. 6
4.3 Interfacing Contractors - Communications and Information Exchange ........................ 7
4.4 Resolution of Co-ordination Difficulties ........................................................................ 9
4.5 Interface Performance .................................................................................................. 9
5. CONTRACTOR’S INTERFACE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ................................................. 10
5.1 Interface Management System ................................................................................... 10
5.2 Interface Management Team ..................................................................................... 11
6. INTERFACE MANAGEMENT PLAN & INTERFACE MANAGEMENT PROGRAMME ......... 11
6.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 11
6.2 Interface Management Programme (IMPG) ............................................................... 12
6.3 Interface Management Plan (IMP) .............................................................................. 12
6.4 Requirements For The Interface Management Programme & Interface Management
Plan ............................................................................................................................. 12
6.5 Interface Specification. ............................................................................................... 13
7. INTERFACE COORDINATION SHEET (ICS) ..................................................................... 14
8. COORDINATION DRAWINGS ....................................................................................... 15
8.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 15
8.2 Combined Services Drawing (CSDs) And Structural E&M Drawings (SEMs) ................ 15
8.3 Interface Drawings ...................................................................................................... 16
8.4 As Constructed Drawings ............................................................................................ 16
9. ATTACHMENTS. .......................................................................................................... 16

TOC
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION INTERFACE MANAGEMENT

1. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
1.1 Chief Interface Coordinator means a suitably qualified person, assigned by the
Contractor, who is the Team Leader responsible for administrating, monitoring,
managing, supervising, coordinating and resolving all interface issues between
Interfacing Contractors for the Pune Metro Project.
1.2 Combined Services Drawings (CSD) means those drawings produced by the Contractor,
showing the locations, layouts, sizes and details of all services, including those of
Interfacing Contractors (All Project Contractors), such as equipment, cables, other
services, cable containment, pipes, etc. complete, co-ordinated so as to eliminate all
clashes. These drawings are to be used to enable all equipment, pipes, cables, etc. to
be installed without conflict and to enable future changes or modifications to be
performed without impacting the existing installation.
1.3 Interface means the region of interaction across the common boundary between two
adjacent but separately managed and controlled parts (or Contracts) of the Project.
The coordination and management of the interaction regions is necessary to ensure
that the overall scope and definition of the Project works is complete and seamless
across all such boundaries.
1.4 Interfacing Contractors means any of the following whose activities or the works they
are engaged to carry out in any way or at any time affect or are affected by the Works:
(a) Project Contractors and design or specialist consultants engaged on the Project
from time to time by the Employer, the Government of Republic of India, the
Government of Maharashtra or the utility providers;
(b) utility providers;
(c) developers or franchisees appointed on the Project from time to time by the
Employer;
(d) subcontractors of any tier of the contractors within category (a) above, and
contractors and subcontractors of any tier of utility providers, developers and
franchisees within categories (b) and (c) above;
Provided that the definition shall exclude the Contractor and his subcontractors of any
tier in relation to the Works and in any other capacity which would otherwise fall
within categories (a) to (d) above in relation to other works.
1.5 Interface Coordination Sheet (ICS) means a document produced by the Contractor
which defines the integration and interfaces between his Contract and the Interfacing
Contractors employed on the Project.
1.6 Interface Management Programme (IMPG) means the programme produced by the
Contractor, developed and updated on a quarterly basis, which describes the
sequence and timing of each of the Interfacing Contractors’ scope of work, and clearly
describes dependencies between his Works and the work of the Interfacing
Contractors.
1.7 Interface Management Plan (IMP) means the Report prepared by the Contractor,
Pag e |1
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

developed and updated on a quarterly basis that provides a clear description of his
interfaces both sequentially and technically as specified in the Contract or as
additionally identified by the Contractor/Interfacing Contractors. The report will be
reviewed in accordance with this procedure and is a pre-requisite to the Engineer’s
Notice of No Objection.
1.8 Interface Specification (IS) means the specification document developed by the Lead
Contractor for the interfacing part of his Project/Contract on the basis of, and by
integrating into his design, the information provided by the Interfacing Contractor(s),
in accordance with the interface agreements as contained in the ICS. The Interface
specification needs to be agreed upon by both the Lead Contractor and the Interfacing
Contractor(s), before it is submitted to the Engineer for Notice of No Objection
(NONO).
1.9 Master Interface Matrix (MIM) means the document developed by the Engineer,
which may be updated, and/or expanded to include additional Interfacing Contractors,
by the Engineer as the Project progresses. The purpose of the Master Interface Matrix
is to allocate which Interfacing Contractors are the lead party(s) for each contract.
1.10 Structural, Electrical and Mechanical Drawings (SEM) means those drawings produced
by the Contractor, showing the locations, sizes and details for all structural openings,
plinths, embedments, sumps, floor chases, etc. required for the installation of all
equipment, cable trays, pipes, etc...
1.11 Zone of Interface means where two or more components of the railway (Metro
System) provided by two or more Interfacing Contractors combine to provide a single
element.
2. INTRODUCTION
2.1 Interface and co-ordination of the Works will include the co-ordination of all design,
technical and programming matters with the various Interfacing Contractors to
achieve fully co-ordinated construction and installation of the facilities.
2.2 This Appendix 19 describes the Contractor’s responsibilities with regard to interface
management and coordination with those Interfacing Contractors who are responsible
for undertaking work, which interfaces with the Contract. The Contractor’s
responsibility for interface coordination shall include currently defined Interfacing
Contractors and those who may be identified in the future. This responsibility is not
limited to a particular number of Interfacing Contractors.
2.3 The Contractor’s responsibility for interface co-ordination shall include identification
of Interfacing Contractors and those who may be subsequently identified during the
course of the Contract with whom the Contractor will need to interface and
coordinate the Works. This in no way detracts from the fact that the Contractor
remains solely responsible for identifying, liaising, and co-ordinating with all
Interfacing Contractors in relation to the Works.
2.4 The Engineer will monitor and oversee the interface Management activities by the
Contractor and will specifically provide direction or information in the following

Pag e |2
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

circumstances.
(a) When the interfacing contract has not yet been awarded
(b) When common agreement cannot be reached between the interfacing parties
(c) When it is in the interest of the project programme, quality or safety to issue
direction.
Direction or information provided by the Engineer wherever necessary, shall not in
any way relieve the Contractor of his full responsibility to ensure the correctness,
accuracy and suitability of the interface implementation and the required
specification.
2.5 The Contractor shall at all times, use his best endeavours to resolve all interfaces
applicable to the Contract and shall be proactive in seeking out interface issues and
their solutions.
2.6 The Contractor shall ensure that all of the above Interface requirements are included
in his Interface Management Plan, refer to Clause 6 of this Appendix 19. Flow charts
illustrating the process of entering into an Interface agreement and Monitoring its
progress with the help of the Interface Coordination Sheet are provided as
Attachments A & B of this Appendix. Figure 1 gives a schematic presentation of the
Interface Communication and Coordination processes between the various role-
players in the Project.
2.7 The Contractor’s internal sub-contractors’ and suppliers’ interfaces are the sole
responsibility of the Contractor and are not covered in this Appendix. However, the
Contractor shall co-ordinate and manage these interfaces in such a way as to identify
and cater for the requirements of the Interfacing Contractors and domestic interfaces,
including but not limited to, the avoidance of clashes and sequencing of Works. The
Contractor shall compile an internal IMP for his own use, a copy of which shall be
furnished to the Engineer on request at any time.

Pag e |3
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

3. CO-ORDINATION

3.1 Contractor’s Co-Ordination Responsibilities

The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Engineer and may be required to attend
meetings on issues appertaining to Government authorities and utility agencies
regarding the services/facilities to be provided by them for the project.
The Contractor shall ensure that the work of all Interfacing Contractors can be carried
out in accordance with the Interface Management Plan prepared by the Contractor.

3.2 Site Co-Ordination & Attendance

3.2.1 The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide all attendance on and co-ordination
with Interfacing Contractors. The following items are not a comprehensive or
exhaustive list of the co-ordination or interface attendance items to be provided for
the Interfacing Contractors’ use, but are intended to provide an outline of the
content of amenities, services and facilities for which the Contractor is responsible:
a) Single point of contact for meetings, actions, planning, scheduling and co-
ordinating.
b) Site access
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Interfacing Contractors and provide
access and use of temporary access roads to and from and within the Site. The
Contractor shall co-ordinate all vehicle movements, deliveries and other
activities with the Interfacing Contractors so as to ensure that conflicts of use are
controlled on and around the Site.
c) Storage and Accommodation area
The Interfacing Contractors will require limited temporary site accommodation
and storage areas. The Contractor shall agree with the Interfacing Contractors
access and areas for storage and temporary site accommodation prior to their
commencing work on Site.
d) Work space requirement and sequence of Works
e) Shared use of Contractor’s scaffold
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Interfacing Contractors and provide
free use and shared access of his erected scaffolding, ladders and hoists should
they be available at the time the Interfacing Contractor requires to use them.
Notwithstanding this requirement, the Contractor shall at all times remain
responsible for the management of safety and the maintenance of such
scaffolding, ladders and landings. The Contractor will not be required to adapt or
erect access scaffolds specifically for the use of Interfacing Contractors.
If the Interfacing Contractor erects and uses his own scaffold he will be required
to adhere to the Contractor’s safety rules and access routing for equipment and
materials. The Contractor shall ensure that all scaffolds of Interfacing
Contractors are erected in a safe manner and are subject to permits for use
issued by the Contractor.
f) Setting out control points
g) Access Openings
The Contractor will form all penetrations and delivery openings and
subsequently close them (either temporary or permanent) for access to rooms
or areas for the delivery of equipment and materials.
Pag e |4
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

h) Temporary lighting requirement will be 100 lux minimum.

i) Temporary power and water supplies shall have to be provided at agreed
locations around the Site for the Interfacing Contractors’ use.
j) Water tightness. All rooms and areas handed over to Interfacing Contractors shall
be in a watertight condition and maintained as such.
k) Ensure all electrical supplies both temporary and permanent have the correct
testing and commissioning certification.
l) Waste management and disposal
m) Appropriate protection to finishes, walls, floors, ceilings and equipment using
polythene, hardboard, steel plates etc.
n) Programme agreement for mobilizing and demobilizing
o) Firefighting and supply and maintenance of fire extinguishing equipment and
devices pursuant to the Contractor’s obligations.
p) Construction interface co-ordination management of penetrations in structures,
embedded and cast-in items, etc.
q) Temporary Drainage
The Contractor shall provide, operate and maintain all necessary temporary
drainage, sumps, silt traps and sump pumps to collect and dispose of wastewater
from Interfacing Contractors construction processes including installation, testing
and commissioning activities.
r) Sanitation facilities
The Contractor shall provide all sanitation facilities and the disposal of waste. No
unauthorised sanitation facility will be allowed on the Site.
s) Making good and fire stopping, of penetrations
t) Lifting apparatus and hoists
The Contractor will be required to install all temporary and permanent lifting
hooks and beams shown on the drawings and the Specification, required for
installation and/or maintenance purposes. The Contractor will be responsible for
the testing and labeling of all apparatus. The Contractor will be required to make
available any lifting or hoist apparatus on Site as required by the Interfacing
Contractor at agreed times and duration for their use. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the maintenance testing and operational management of hoists.
The Contractor shall make available his cranes for lifting equipment or materials
for Interfacing Contractors.
u) Health and Welfare Facilities
The Contractor shall allow Interfacing Contractors use of his health, welfare and
mess facilities, and temporary background lighting. He shall liaise with the
Interfacing Contractors to determine their planned and actual manning levels
and ensure that sufficient facilities are provided prior to them commencing work
on Site. The facilities shall be maintained on Site until the Interfacing Contractors
have completed their Works and demobilised or such earlier time as the Engineer
may direct.
3.2.2 The Contractor is deemed to have ascertained for himself the full scope of his
responsibilities and obligations under the Contract in terms of attendance on and co-
ordination with Interfacing Contractors and shall not be entitled to any additional
payment, Cost or extension of time for completion should he have failed to do so.
Pag e |5
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

3.2.3 The Contractor shall make due allowance for providing Attendance, including power
and other utilities’ supplies, throughout all phases of the Interfacing Contractors
work including testing and commissioning and where supplies to various Interfacing
Contractors need special consideration during testing and performance trials under
peak load conditions.

4. INTERFACE

4.1 Co-Ordination of Contractor’s Scope of Work

In accordance with the requirements of the Conditions of Contract and other
specified requirements, the Contractor shall co-ordinate his own work with that of all
Interfacing Contractors and ensure that the design, construction, installation and
testing requirements of the Interfacing Contractors are incorporated into the
Contractor’s co- ordinated plans, programmes and Works. The Contractor shall
proactively seek out interface issues and solutions.
In addition to the Contractor’s obligations to the Interfacing Contractors contained
elsewhere in the Contract, the Contractor shall provide / handover occupation or
access as required, to the Interfacing Contractors to those parts of the Works which
are subject to Key Dates by the required Key Dates.
The Contractor shall complete those parts of the Works, which are subject to Key
Dates, by the required Key Dates that may be specified in the Appendix to Tender
and/or Appendix 2 of Section-VI – Employer’s Requirements of this Contract. Those
parts of the Works subject to Key Dates shall be completed to a state whereby any
Interfacing Contractor can immediately commence his works without the need to
make any change, addition or modification to the Contractor’s Works.

4.2 Interfacing Contractors

4.2.1 The Interfacing Contractors will require interface and co-ordination for information,
programming, drawings acceptance, handover, etc. as shown on the Interface
Coordination Sheet enclosed in Attachment F of this Appendix.
However, the Contractor should note that the Interface Coordination Sheet shown
herein has been compiled by the Engineer, and is therefore given as example only.
The Contractor’s responsibilities in this respect are in no means restricted by the
details listed in such sheets and no warranty is given by the Employer or the Engineer
that all interfaces and Interfacing Contractors have been included in such sheets. The
Contractor is to confirm and verify all of the details included in the Interface
Coordination Sheets, and his review should ensure that all interfaces have been
included.
The Contractor shall take overall responsibility for the Interface Coordination Sheets,
which must be submitted to the Engineer for a notice of no objection.
4.2.2 The Master Interface Matrix (MIM), enclosed in Attachment E, assigns the
Contractors which have been designated as the Lead party(s) for each interfacing
contractor. The MIM has been developed by the Employer/Engineer, which he may
update and/or expand at any time to include additional Interfacing Contractors, and
the Contractor’s Contract price shall be deemed to include any such additional works
related to interfacing or Interface Management. The leading Interfacing Contractor
shall be responsible for administrating, monitoring, managing, supervising and
Pag e |6
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

resolving all interface issues between all Interfacing Contractors.

4.2.3 In a situation when the Lead Contract has not yet been awarded and the Interfacing
contractor has commenced work, the Engineer will perform the coordination
activities including preparation of tentative ICS / Interface Specification, with the
express understanding that they may undergo changes as and when the Lead
Contractor commences his work on being awarded the Contract.
4.2.4 Where an interfacing contract has yet to be awarded, the Lead Contractor shall
proceed with the coordination activities (including preparation of ICS and Interface
specification) as instructed by the Engineer until such time when the Interfacing
Contractor is available.

4.3 Interfacing Contractors - Communications and Information Exchange

4.3.1 GENERAL
a) The Contractor shall communicate, co-ordinate and exchange information directly
with the Interfacing Contractors and the Contractor shall keep the Engineer advised
at all times. Information necessary to fulfil the Contractor’s interface obligations shall
be directly requested and obtained from the Interfacing Parties, and receipt
acknowledged. Conversely, the Contractor shall provide directly to the Interfacing
Contractors information within the Contractor’s scope that is required by them.
b) All requests for information, acknowledgement of receipt of information, and any
official communication between the Contractor and the Interfacing Contractors shall
be made in writing, with a copy to the Engineer for his information. The Engineer
shall be invited to attend all interface meetings between the Contractor and the
Interfacing Contractors. Irrespective of whether these meetings were attended by
the Engineer or not, the Contractor’s monthly progress report to Engineer shall
invariably include the details of all interface meetings held and decisions arrived.
c) The Contractor’s programme shall allow time for the availability of necessary
interface information from the Interfacing Contractors and in this regard the
Contractor shall, where required, proceed on a late start basis to allow adequate
time for others to provide required information and thereby achieve design process
compatibility.
d) The Contractor shall allow for the fact that many of the design and construction
activities for the different contracts will be proceeding concurrently. In the event
that certain interface information is not forthcoming at the time targeted, the
Contractor shall be responsible to resolve the matter with the relevant Interfacing
Contractor without recourse to the Engineer, and where necessary develop
alternative interim arrangements such that the interface information may be
accommodated at a later date.
e) Definitive dates for transfer of information and particular interface actions shall be
confirmed between the Contractor and the Interfacing Contractors.

4.3.2 INTERFACING FUNCTIONS

The Interfacing Contractors are responsible for, but not limited to, the following;
 the management of Contract to Contract Interfaces as required;
 preparing the Interface Management Plan and subsequent procedures;
 preparing their Interface Management Programmes in accordance with this
procedure and submitting these to the Interfacing Contractors for concurrence;

Pag e |7
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

 preparing the Interface Management Programmes and submitting these to the

Engineer for a Notice of No Objection;
 preparing their Interface Coordination Sheets and Interface Specifications and
issuing same to the relevant Interface Contractors and Engineer;
 co-ordinating with the relevant Interface Contractors to establish coordinated
CSD & SEM Drawings;
 maintaining their ICS updated continuously and attaching it to their Monthly
Progress Report submitted to the Engineer in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract and this Appendix.
4.3.3 DOCUMENTATION REVIEW
The Contractor shall, as a minimum:
 review those portions of the Specification and Drawings relevant to the
interface and transmit such information to the Interfacing Contractors;
 co-ordinate and co-operate with Interfacing Contractors on all Site related
matters including, but not limited to, Site access and occupation, attendance,
safety, verification of work compatibility, survey control, etc...;
 review the interface information received and agree in writing with the
Interfacing Contractors that the interface information is adequate for that stage
of that activity.
4.3.4 DESIGN STAGE
The design interface is an iterative process, thus throughout the design process, the
Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his own design with Interfacing
Contractors to develop interface designs in conjunction and co-operation with the
designers of Interfacing Contractors. These interface designs will be monitored and
have to be given Notice of no objection by the Engineer, but the Contractor shall
work directly with the Interfacing Contractors to develop designs which are mutually
acceptable to all parties.
The Contractor shall, immediately upon Contract Award, gather all necessary
information and develop his design to a level where meaningful interaction can take
place as soon as the Interfacing Contractors are available.
4.3.5 INTERFACE DESIGN CHANGE PROCESS
The Contractor shall establish an interface design change process to ensure that:
 All proposed changes for a specific interface are reported, recorded and
resolved;
 Proposed changes are fully evaluated; and
 Internal/External communications and distribution paths are properly defined
4.3.6 CONSTRUCTION PHASE
During construction the Contractor shall, when a construction item is ready for field
inspection, advise the Interfacing Contractor in advance to verify compatibility with
the Interfacing Contractor’s needs.
The Contractor shall:
 advise the Interfacing Contractors in writing when the as-constructed interface-
related work can be inspected, and provide the necessary Site access and
occupation;

Pag e |8
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

 request in writing and obtain from the Interfacing Contractors, interface

information required for that stage of the Contract;
 agree in writing with the Interfacing Contractors on the adoption of any
applicable comments on the constructed work;
 agree that any testing and commissioning for works can be carried out in
accordance with the Interface Management Plan;
 conduct on-Site inspections of the work elements, and give comments in
writing to the Interfacing Contractors;
 agree in writing with the Interfacing Contractors that the as-constructed work
meets the interface requirements.
 Where the execution of work by Interfacing Contractors depends upon the
Contractor’s site management or upon information to be given by the
Contractor, the Contractor shall provide the Interfacing Contractors with the
required services or the correct and accurate information required to enable
the Interfacing Contractors to meet their programme for the construction or
installation of their works.

4.3.7 INTERFACE COMMISSIONING

The Contractor shall co-ordinate all of his testing and commissioning activities with
the Interfacing Contractors. Interface commissioning shall demonstrate that the
delivered interface, part A of the interface, is ready and meets the interface
requirements of the interface part B, and vice versa.
Successful completion of all interface commissioning shall prove its readiness for
commissioning of the overall Contract scope and completion of the overall Metro-rail
Project, prior to handover to the Employer for their commercial operation.

4.4 Resolution of Co-ordination Difficulties

When the Contractor identifies interface co-ordination difficulties, the Contractor
shall review the pertinent points of each Interfacing Contractor to determine possible
compatible solutions in terms of sequence, timing and technical details. The
Contractor shall then meet with the relevant Interfacing Contractor(s) to determine
solutions, which are mutually acceptable to each Interfacing Contractor and advise
the Engineer.
Where an acceptable solution has not been identified, the Contractor shall advise the
Engineer in writing of the problems encountered. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, an
interface is not proceeding satisfactorily, then the Engineer will review the matter,
and establish a co-ordinated plan directing the Contractor and the Interfacing
Contractor(s) on the required action. In the event that no agreement can be made
between the Contractor and the Interfacing Contractor(s), the Engineer shall
determine the requirements to the best of his knowledge, and his determination shall
be final and binding on the Contractor and the Interfacing Contractor(s).

4.5 Interface Performance

The Contractor’s performance in relation to his compliance with the interface
requirements under the Contract shall be assessed by the Engineer 3 months after
the Commencement Date and thereafter at three monthly intervals. The assessment
will be in the form of an audit of the Contractor’s interface management system. This
audit will assess the Contractor’s compliance with the responsibilities delineated in

Pag e |9
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

this Appendix and elsewhere as related to interface management and the preparation
of the Interface Management Plan and Programme and other documentation and
procedures associated with Interface Management and Coordination.
The Contractor will be notified of non-conformances from the audit, which will
require rectification. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor has failed
to rectify a non-conformance within a reasonable period from the date of
notification, this may lead to non-payment of any lump sums, until such time as the
non-conformance has been rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer, refer sub-
clause below.
The Contract allows for continuous audits of the Contractor’s compliance with his
Interface Management Plan and the requirements of this Appendix 19 of Section-VI
Employer’s Requirements, and any extreme or continuing failures shall result in a
negative audit report, which may lead to non-payment of the relevant payment item
in the Preliminaries section of the Pricing Document. The decision of the Engineer in
this regard shall be final.

5. CONTRACTOR’S INTERFACE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

5.1 Interface Management System

The Contractor shall establish and maintain an Interface Management System to
identify, control and monitor the interfaces of the Contract, which shall include, but
not be restricted to, the following:
 Establishment and maintenance of an Interface Management Team suitably
qualified and experienced in co-ordination and interface management.
 Provision, as one of his Key Personnel, of a Chief Interface Co-ordinator, to
head the Interface Management Team, suitably qualified and experienced as
noted in Sub-division A of this Section-VI, Employer’s Requirements, with the
responsibility, experience and authority to resolve interface matters in
accordance with the Contract. The Chief Interface Co-ordinator will develop a
monitoring and reporting procedure to be implemented by his team for the
duration of the Contract.
 Implement and maintain a strict monitored control of information transfer to
the Interfacing Contractors, the Employer and the Engineer utilising the official
channels of communication.
 Provide a comprehensive interface schedule of Interfacing Contractors,
including specialist domestic interfaces (i.e. specialist testing and
commissioning engineers) identifying all interfacing activities and timetables of
events.
 Arrange all internal and external interface meetings. The Engineer may arrange
regular meetings to monitor the status of interfaces, and may require special
meetings as may be necessary to resolve specific issues. The Contractor’s
Interface Management Team will be required to attend such meetings. The
Contractor may request assistance from the Engineer to arrange meetings on
particular subjects.
 Providing the Engineer with all information and/or details of interfaces,
including copies of all correspondence and material.
 Providing the Engineer with access to information for the purpose of

P a g e | 10
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

conducting audits on the interface system and for confirming that interface co-
ordination is proceeding consistently with the Project requirements.
 Establish interface dates for information, documentation, access or works
completion requirements.

5.2 Interface Management Team

The Contractor’s Interface Management Team will undertake and fulfil the following
tasks:
 Provide timely interface information when requested, anticipating the
information needs of the Interfacing Contractors and transmitting such
information as soon as it is available.
 Pro-actively keep the Interfacing Contractors informed of any development of
the Works related to the interfaces. Communicating and co-operating with the
Interfacing Contractors to identify and resolve potential interface problems.
 Advice the Interfacing Contractors on potential problems related to the
interfaces, together with proposed solutions likely to be acceptable to
Interfacing Contractors and which meet the needs of the Project.
 Arrange and/or attend meetings with the Interfacing Contractors as necessary
to resolve interface issues.
 During each stage of the Contract, the Contractor shall directly communicate
and co-ordinate with Interfacing Contractors as necessary to achieve a fully co-
ordinated design / construction / installation.
 Contractor shall issue true records of all interface meetings, with appropriate
actions and attendance lists, to all Interfacing Contractors, whether in
attendance or not, and to the Engineer, within 3 days of the meeting. Minutes
of meetings shall be signed by all parties in attendance, signifying their
agreement to the contents thereof, before being formally issued by the
Contractor.
The authority and responsibilities of all personnel involved in the Interface
Management Team must be clearly defined in the IMP.

6. INTERFACE MANAGEMENT PLAN & INTERFACE MANAGEMENT PROGRAMME

6.1 General
The Contractor shall prepare the proposed Interface Management Plan and proposed
Interface Management Programme, in accordance with the Contract stipulations and
based on the formats noted in Attachments H and I, to which the Engineer issues a
notice of no objection. The Interface Management Plan and Interface Management
Programme shall completely define the Contractor’s programme and methodology
for interface co-ordination and management, whilst complying with all Key Dates
stated in Appendix 2B of this Section-VI Employer’s Requirements.
Subsequently they shall be kept up to date and submitted on a quarterly basis to the
Engineer for scrutiny and notice of no objection, and a summary of the principal
issues shall be included in each Monthly Progress Report. The Contractor shall note
that each submission of these documents is subject to regular audits and the issue of
a notice of no objection by the Engineer.

P a g e | 11
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

6.2 Interface Management Programme (IMPG)

The Interface Management Programme describes the sequencing and timing of each
of the Interfacing Contractors’ scope of work, clearly describing the
interdependencies for all stages of the work between the Contractor's works and that
of the Interfacing Contractors and complementing the Interface Management Plan,
whilst complying with all Key Dates stated in the Appendix 2B of this Section-VI
Employer’s Requirements.
The programme shall be structured to detail each of the primary zones of interface
and the principal elements of the design and of the works requiring interfacing
contribution from others. This Interface Management Programme shall also be
related to the Contractor’s Works Programme and shall show the sequences and
timing agreed with the Interfacing Contractors to the necessary degree of detail to
clearly illustrate each of the interfaces to be undertaken.
Targets to receive or supply information shall also be shown, with due allowance
being given for the design process of others. Information relating to Contractual Key
Dates and information exchange dates shall be shown for both the Contractor and the
Interfacing Contractors to demonstrate a matching of design processes.
A record of these interfaces, with current status and agreed dates for information
transfer, site inspections, access, occupation, handover, etc. shall be maintained and
also identified on the ICS, refer Clause 7 below.
Refer to Attachment H - Guidance Notes for the Preparation of IMPG.

6.3 Interface Management Plan (IMP)

The Interface Management Plan is that document which describes the Contractor’s
interface management in terms of providing a clear description of each of the
interfaces, both technically and sequentially, and represents an account of how t he
Contractor proposes to achieve co-ordination of the Works. The description shall
completely detail the Contractor's work scope and interface with each of the
Interfacing Contractors in terms of technical description, sequence and timing for
each of the elements required to achieve a coordinated design. The Contractor shall
demonstrate how potential interface conflicts can be eliminated by design
simplification. This document is also required to demonstrate that the co-ordinated
design and construction details described therein fully comply with the needs of
others, and agreement in writing of these details by the Interfacing Contractors will
be a pre-requisite to the Engineer issuing a notice of no objection.
Refer to Attachment I – Guidance Notes for the Preparation of IMP.

6.4 Requirements For The Interface Management Programme & Interface Management
Plan
The Interface Management Programme (IMPG) shall be a process-driven programme
in a format to be agreed with the Engineer. The IMPG shall incorporate the key
activities from both the Interfacing Contractors’ and Contractor’s Works programmes
that will enable the Contractor to demonstrate that any Interface is being correctly
managed and will result in fully co-ordinated design / construction / installation of
works.
The Interface Management Plan and Interface Management Programme shall:
 Follow the outline structure, numbering system, and related procedures in a
format to be agreed with the Engineer.
P a g e | 12
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

 Be co-ordinated with the Interfacing Contractors to ensure compatibility of

interface identification and definition.
 Comply with the Key Dates stated in the Appendix 2B of this Section-VI
Employer’s Requirements.
 Be transmitted to the Interfacing Contractors concurrently with submittals to
the Engineer.
 Support the Works Programme to which the Engineer has given a notice of no-
objection.
 Address each zone of interface, i.e., ancillary buildings, train stabling, trackwork
external, trackwork internal, substations, signalling and telecommunications
facilities, operation and control rooms, staff accommodation, external works
etc. related to each design submission and stage of design / construction /
installation.
 List all relevant interfaces in detail, their status, and the corresponding
source(s) of information.
 Include interface information transfer dates which have been agreed by the
Interfacing Contractors.
 Accommodate comments and input required by the Engineer.
 Include an account of how the interfaces are being managed.
 Identify the latest information regarding agreements with the Interfacing
Contractors and transfers of information.
 Review and address the design, supply, installation, testing & commissioning
programme of the Interfacing Contractors to ensure that the Key Dates of each
contract can be achieved, and highlight any programme risks requiring
management attention.
 Identify any problems related to co-ordination with Interfacing Contractors.

6.5 Interface Specification.

6.5.1 The Interface Specification, proforma enclosed in Attachment C, and associated
drawings shall specify the proposed method and schedule for verifying the interface
integrity, the individual equipment / system performance and the combined system
performance.
The Interface Specification shall include a programme of tests to demonstrate the
performance and integrity of the integrated system. The interface sheets developed
by the Employer / Engineer are enclosed in Attachment D. The attached interface
sheets are not final and do not relieve the Contractor’s obligation to identify any new
interface to meet contract requirements. The interface sheets, which the Contractor
shall develop, shall be used as a basis to establish the Interface Specification. Any
revision to the Interface Specification shall be mutually agreed between the
Contractor and Interfacing Contractors, with submission to the Engineer, and shall
specifically -
 Understand the design requirements of each party and associated constraints;
 Determine the detailed interface works to be performed during the various
stages; and
 Agree on the interface works in reference to respective scope, with any
agreements reached to be formally documented in Interface Meeting Minutes,
including an actions item list.

P a g e | 13
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

6.5.2 The Interface Contractors shall mutually identify and agree the Interfaces that will
exist between them using the Interface Coordination Sheets, the format of which is
contained in Attachment F. These interfaces may be expanded to include all, and any
other, interfaces that develop during the execution of the Project.
6.5.3 The Interfacing Contractors shall mutually agree upon the information to be
exchanged and shall develop a unique Interface Specification for each interface
identified. A sample Interface Specification proforma is provided in Attachment C.
The ICSs will be tracked and monitored using an ICS Register to be compiled by the
Contractor. This register will track the progress of the ICS from inception through to
closure and final processing by the Contractor, prior to transmittal to the Engineer as
a complete Integrated Design.
Each interface shall have a unique reference number to enable the Interface to be
readily identified, tracked and monitored.

7. INTERFACE COORDINATION SHEET (ICS)

7.1 The Contractor’s Interface Coordination sheet, the format of which is shown in
Attachment F – Part 1, is required to be used by each of the Interfacing Contractors
to record all of the Contract Interfaces. The Contractor shall ensure that each
Interfacing Contractor provides input and maintains the ICS continually updated as
required in this Appendix.
7.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the Interfacing Contractors demonstrate their co-
ordination efforts as required by the Contract. To achieve this, the Contractor and
the Interfacing Contractors shall identify their interface requirements which shall be
input into the interface documents, i.e., IMP, IMPG, ICS, etc., by the Contractor.
7.3 The Contractor shall monitor the ICS to ensure that, as the Interface progresses, the
records show the appropriate Status (refer status codes indicated in Part 3 of
Attachment F) as agreed with the Interfacing Contractors. The Contractor will be
responsible for confirming the “Closing Out” of each ICS record, whilst ensuring that
throughout the interface process all Interfacing Contractors have agreed to the
following:
a) The receiving Interfacing Contractor has received and accepted the Interface
being recorded.
b) All Interfacing Contractors have recorded the interface record as “Proposed
Close Out”.
c) The Confirmation of Co-ordination form in Attachment G has been updated
and signed by the relevant Interfacing Contractors, refer clause 7.4 below.
7.4 When documents are exchanged for review/comment with Interfacing Contractors,
the originator preparing these documents should ensure that they are accompanied
by the Confirmation of Coordination form in Attachment G. When the Interfacing
Contractor returns these documents with comments to the originator, they should
be returned with the Confirmation of Coordination form duly completed, confirming
coordination and agreement or comment as appropriate, as a record of them having
coordinated the interface item. This Confirmation of Co-ordination is to be
transmitted to the Engineer upon signing by the Interfacing Contractor(s).

P a g e | 14
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

8. COORDINATION DRAWINGS

8.1 General
For the purpose of achieving a Project which is fully co-ordinated with respect to civil,
structural, architectural, building services, electrical, mechanical works and interface
elements, and to ensure compatibility between different facilities and services, and
adequate space requirements, all drawings are to be reviewed and co-ordinated by
the Contractor.
The Contractor will provide and issue detailed Interface Working Drawings in terms of
items such as; special arrangements, space allocation, cast in items, primary and
secondary fixings, grouting of equipment/plinths, drill and fix brackets, embedded
and cast-in items and the like.
The drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall also include composite
cross-sections and layouts, which show the spatial requirements of all Interfacing
Contractors and identify items to be finalised, defined, or resolved.

8.2 Combined Services Drawing (CSDs) And Structural E&M Drawings (SEMs)
The Contractor’s CSDs and SEMs must be clear and sufficiently detailed to
unambiguously show the intent of the subject services and the corresponding
structure / facility allowances. While these drawings do not have to duplicate all of
the details of the Drawings, they must include plans, sections and elevations as
required to clearly illustrate the compatible relationship between the different
disciplines. Specifically, the drawings will include wall elevation drawings at 1:50 scale
(or larger where required) indicating all openings, access panels, reinforcement
zones, embedded and cast-in items and the like, and shall be submitted to the
Engineer for a notice of no objection.
The CSDs shall show the intended locations, routes and spatial relationships of the
individual E&M services, Building Services systems, and installations, Depot
Equipment (where applicable), Core Systems installations and other installations, fully
co-ordinated with each other and the civil structural and architectural work. The CSDs
shall also clearly indicate that effective cable co-ordination has been achieved in
terms of cable location or cable trays and the trunking and cable routing.
The SEMs shall show all civil, structural, and architectural requirements for the E&M
services, Building Services systems and installations, Builder’s works and the Core
Systems and other installations.
Where Builder’s works are required by the Interfacing Contractors, the drawings,
details, specification notes and catalogue information and the like shall be obtained
by the Contractor from these Interfacing Contractors indicating the builder’s work to
be incorporated into the Works. The Contractor shall include details of such Builder’s
works in the SEMs and Method Statements as appropriate.
Builder’s work comprises, but is not limited to, the following:
 Construction of plinths, bases, builders bund walls and the like.
 placing and fixing of holding down bolts, lifting beams and hooks and other
supporting items;
 supply, fabrication installation, protection, fixing and finishing of supporting
steelwork, for equipment and associated accessories;
 casting in of edgings, angles in recesses, ducts, conduit, pipes etc.;

P a g e | 15
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

 fixing equipment and associated, brackets, cable containment and fixtures;

 forming of penetrations, sleeves, access panels, holes, chases, recesses,
openings;
 All in accordance with the Contract.
The CSD/SEMs shall also be used for the purpose of co-ordinating with the
Interfacing Contractors and shall be continuously updated to reflect the latest
interface co-ordination. Copies of the CSD/SEM drawings shall be included in
submittals to the Engineer.
Where the CSDs or SEMs do not fully co-ordinate with the Site conditions the
Contractor shall co-ordinate and propose a solution to the problem. All proposed
solutions shall be issued to the Engineer.

8.3 Interface Drawings

For the Interface Drawings, the Contractor shall prepare in diagrammatic format for
each interface the demarcation of scope of responsibilities between the Contractor
and each of the Interfacing Contractors. The Contractor shall submit all Drawings with
interface requirements for a notice of no objection from the Engineer. Any proposed
deviation to the Construction Specification or noticed drawings shall be identified and
justified with design documentation, details and drawings. The submission shall also
identify all interface requirements. The contractor shall develop interface drawings
with detailed design and dimensions and submit the same to other interfacing
contractors.

8.4 As Constructed Drawings

Upon completion of the Works the Contractor shall submit all Combined Services
Drawings, Structural E&M Drawings, and Interface Demarcation Drawings showing
the final “As Constructed” status of the Works related to these drawings.

9. ATTACHMENTS.

Attachment A - Flow Chart for creation / elaboration of Interface Coordination Sheet

Attachment B – Flow Chart for Progress Monitoring of Interface Agreements

Attachment C – Interface Specification Form.

Attachment D – Indicative Interface sheets

Attachment E – Master Interface Matrix

Attachment F – Interface Coordination Sheet

Attachment G – Confirmation of Co-ordination Form

Attachment H - Guidance Notes for the Preparation of IMPG

Attachment I – Guidance Notes for the Preparation of IMP

P a g e | 16
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Attachment A Flow Chart for creation / elaboration of Interface Coordination Sheet

Interface Identified
by Lead Contractor From either Interface Sheet
/Matrix given in the Contract
or additional as identified by
the Contractor / Interfacing
Contractors or through other
sources
New or Existing
Revision of
Existing?

New

Record S&P1 Interface Coordination Sheet (ICS) Create new

created / revised and issued by Revision
Chief Interface Coordinator (CIC)
of the Lead Contractor

Address
Objections

Record S&P1 Other Party

consented
to Interface
Agreement?

No

ICS containing mutually agreed

Interface agreement sent to
Engineer for NONO

Record S&P1 NONO

Issued?

Recording in Master Interface

Register and reporting status
to Maha Metro periodically by
Interface Management team in Note: All activities in the chain of
Engineer’s organization shaded boxes are performed
by Contractors, duly overseen
by Engineer.

P a g e | 17
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Attachment B Flow Chart for Progress Monitoring of Interface Agreements

Interface meeting held by CIC to

confirm status of Interface
Agreement contained in ICS (that
forms the basis of all further
activities in this Flow Chart)

Monitor through
Interface Meetings
Required info
Record S&P Provided by
interfacing
contractor? No

Record S&P No
Info
Accepted?

Yes

Interface
Specification
developed by
Lead contractor

Rework by
Lead Contractor
Record S&P Agreed by
Interfacing
Contractor?

Yes
Submitted
to Engineer
for NONO

NONO
issued? No
Record S&P

Recording in Master
Interface Register and
reporting status to Maha Close Interface
Metro periodically by Agreement
Interface Management team
of Engineer’s Organization

Note: All activities in the chain of

shaded boxes are performed by
Contractors, duly overseen by
Engineer.

P a g e | 18
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Attachment C - Interface Specification Form

INTERFACE SPECIFICATION Ref:

Contractors
Contract Sequence Date of Issue
Designation Number
Initiating Interface
Contracto Manager
rResponding Interface
Signature
Contractor Manager
Interface Response
Signature
Specification Required by;
Required
for;
Reviewed by;
Station Arch. /
Design Sections Civil Work Track work Core Systems
Building Services
Description of the Interface

Specific Details of the Interface Location

Drawings / Specifications Attached

Title Drawing / Specification Ref. Drg. Issue

Document Name Date Document References (if any)

Prepared by:

P a g e | 19
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Attachment D – Indicative Interface Sheets

List of Interface sheet for UGC-01

SL NO Description
1 UGC-01 (Tunnel) vs. UGC-02 Station
2 TVS&VAC(ECS) vs. Civil UG Stations & Tunnel (UGC-01)
3 Lifts & Escalators vs. Civil UG Stations (UGC-01)
4 Rolling Stock vs. Civil UG Stations & Tunnel (UGC-01)
5 Track vs. Civil UG Stations (UGC-01)
6 Track vs. Civil UG Tunnel (UGC-01)
7 Power Supply System vs. Civil UG Stations & Tunnel (UGC-01)
8 OHE vs. Civil UG Stations (UGC-01)
9 OHE vs. Civil UG Tunnel (UGC-01)
10 S&T vs. Civil UG Stations (UGC-01)
11 S&T vs. Civil UG Tunnel (UGC-01)
12 PSD vs. Civil UG Stations (UGC-01)
13 AFC vs. Civil UG Stations (UGC-01)

P a g e | 20
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

1. UG Tunnel (UGC-01) and UG Station (UGC-02)

Contract A : UG Tunnel (UGC-01) Contract B : UG Station (UGC-02)
Sheet # : 1/3
(Interface Lead) (Interface follower)
Contract A ( UGC-01 - Tunnel) DESIGN STAGE Contract-B (UGC-02 –Station)
UT/US-01: Contractor-A shall provide to the Contractor-B all the details and UT/US-01: Contractor-B shall provide the required soft-eye in the Diaphragm
parameters necessary for the provision of soft-eye in the wall/secant pile wall/tunnel face of Budhwar Peth station duly
Diaphragm wall/secant pile wall/tunnel face of Budhwar Peth ensuring the overall compatibility with the Station design.
station.

UT/US-02: Contract-B shall Design station walls/tunnel face to be compatible

UT/US-02: Contractor-A shall design any ground improvement/ treatment with the tunneling scheme and arrangements including any
required outside the station wall/tunnel face depending upon ground treatment of the Contractor-A. Contractor-A TBMs in the
his chosen tunneling scheme in consultation with Contractor-B Civil Court station .
duly interfacing and sharing the required information/details UT/US-03: Contractor-B shall agree Survey and Alignment with Contractor-A
with him.

UT/US-03: Contractor-A shall agree Survey and Alignment with Contractor-B

P a g e | 21
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A : UG Tunnel (UGC-01) Contract B : UG Station (UGC-02)

Sheet # : 2/3
(Interface Lead) (Interface follower)
UT/US-04: Contractor-A shall design temporary and permanent drainage UT/US-04: Contractor-B shall plan and design drainage system in consultation
system in consultation with contractor-B with contractor-A
UT/US-05: (a)Contractor-A shall design and install electrical services like UT/US-05:(a)Contractor-B shall provide cable tray for Contractor-A
emergency light, fire detection linear cable etc., from half of requirements from the common contract boundary point upto the
tunnel and extend them up to the termination points inside the termination points and design the electrical system for emergency
Budhwar Peth station, light and fire detection etc.,
(b)Contractor-A shall design and install fire hydrant, plumbing (b)Contractor-B shall design and install fire hydrant, plumbing
services, etc., upto the boundary line of the two Contracts. services, etc., to suit the contractor-A design and tap it from the
Contract boundary line.
Contract A ( UGC-01 - Tunnel) CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION STAGE Contract-B (UGC-02 –Station)
UT/US-06: Contractor-A shall Provide TBM programme/Access Schedule, land UT/US-06: Contractor-B shall Review & follow TBM programme and shall
sharing schedule , construction programme and actual Physical provide space for TBM break-through and retrieval from Station
progress central portion and drainage systems .
UT/US-07: Contractor-B shall Provide space and access to Contractor-A
UT/US-07: Contractor-A shall carry out any ground improvement/ treatment (tunnel Contractor), inside/outside the station, as required, for
work required outside the station wall/tunnel face depending carrying out the ground treatment works.
upon his chosen tunneling scheme in consultation with
Contractor-B duly interfacing and sharing the required UT/US-08: (a) Contractor-B shall install/provide cable tray meeting the
information/details with him. requirements of Contractor-A, from Contract boundary point upto
UT/US-08: (a) Contractor-A shall install tunnel electrical systems/services the termination points and provide proper terminal points to
cables up to the Distribution boards/terminal points inside the connect tunnel side electrical cables
Budhwar Peth Station (b) Contract-B shall tap fire hydrant system, drainage system etc.
from the Contract boundary point
(b) Contractor-A shall terminate fire hydrant system, drainage
system etc. at Contract boundary point UT/US-09 : Contractor-B shall construct temporary and permanent drainage
system and interlink with Contractor-A drainage system
UT/US-09: Contractor-A shall construct temporary and permanent drainage
system and interlink with Contractor–B drainage system

P a g e | 22
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A : UG Tunnel (UGC-01) Contract B : UG Station (UGC-02)

(Interface Lead) (Interface follower) Sheet # : 3/3
UT/US-10: Contractor-A shall Install cradle for receiving the TBMs UT/US-10: Contractor-B shall clear the area and provide the space for cradle

UT/US-11: Contractor-B shall Construct soft-eyes in Station wall/tunnel face

UT/US-11: Contractor-A shall Breakthrough soft-eyes with TBMs to accept two TBMs

UT/US-12: Contractor-B shall Allow Contractor-A for the breakthrough &

UT/US-12: Contractor-A shall Dismantle and remove TBMs from the station removal of TBMs from station central portion
central portion
UT/US-13: Contractor-B shall Jointly inspect and accept the sealing
UT/US-13: Contractor-A shall provide proper sealing in the tunnel eye (if
found necessary)
UT/US-14:Contractor-B shall Install water stoppage barrier to prevent water
UT/US-14:Contractor-A shall Request water stoppage barrier to prevent entry from UGC-02 to UGC-01 area
water entry from UGC-02 to UGC-01 area

Contract A ( UGC-01 - Tunnel) TEST & COMMISIONNING STAGE Contract-B (UGC-02 –Station)

UT/US-15: Alignment of the tunnels and 1st stage concrete in the tunnels to UT/US-15: Agree and accept
match the arrangement/level with respect to the station/tunnel
base slab

UT/US-16: Joint inspection and accept

UT/US-16: Stop water leakage between the station wall/NATM tunnel face &
bored tunnels

Tunnel
1st Stage
P a g e | 23
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

2. Tunnel Ventilation & UG Station Air Conditioning System (TVS and ECS) and UG Stations & Tunnel (UGC-01)
Contract A : Tunnel Ventilation & UG Station Air Conditioning System Contract B : UG Stations & Tunnel (UGC-01) (Interface
(Interface Lead) Sheet # : 1/7
follower)
Contract A (TVS and ECS) DESIGN STAGE Contract B (UG-Stations & Tunnel)
Interface related to Architectural:
TV/UG-01: Contractor A shall collect station Architectural/Structural drawings, TV/UG-01: Contractor B shall provide the same as requested by contractor A.
false ceiling details including room names, location of rooms and
sectional views in the concourse level, mezzanine level (where
applicable), platform level and street level including subways and
shafts etc., TV/UG-02: Shall incorporate the same in the station design.
TV/UG-02: Shall provide the room size, door size, shaft & Plenum size and
finish details for all VAC (ECS) and Tunnel ventilation (TVS) TV/UG-03: Shall provide all corridor and door details as requested by
equipment systems. contractor A and incorporate the changes as per the
TV/UG-03: Shall collect all corridor and door details to facilitate equipment requirements of Contractor-A.
delivery in the station ancillary areas, VAC(ECS) and Tunnel
ventilation (TVS) equipment rooms etc. and request for any TV/UG-04: Shall provide the same as requested by contractor A.
changes/modifications, if required,
TV/UG-04: Shall collect the details of walls, ceiling, floor, windows and finish TV/UG-05: Shall incorporate the same in the station design and provide the
details to design VAC (ECS) system. suitable shaft locations.
TV/UG-05: Shall provide size to get space and location of VAC concrete shaft TV/UG-05(A): Shall Design/provide the External Intake and Outlet Louvers for
and Tunnel ventilation concrete shaft as well as adjust the location the TVS and ECS shafts and incorporate the same in the station
of shaft. design duly considering the site- specific architectural and
TV/UG-05(A): Shall provide the required design details (such as spacing, free finishing requirements and fulfilling the design requirements
area required, material, various dimensions and clearances etc.) provided by Contractor A.
of the External Intake and Outlet Louvers for the TVS and ECS
shafts to Contractor B. TV/UG-06: Shall incorporate the same in the station design and provide the
TV/UG-06: Shall provide size to get space and location of concrete shaft for suitable shaft location.
condensed water pipes from cooling tower to chiller plant room as
well as adjust the location of shaft. TV/UG-07: Shall incorporate the same in the station design and provide
suitable shaft location.
TV/UG-07: Shall provide size to get space and location of concrete shaft for
chilled water pipes from chiller plant room to Air handling units as
well as adjust the location of shaft. P a g e | 24
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A : Tunnel Ventilation & UG Station Air Conditioning System Contract B : UG Stations & Tunnel (UGC-01) (Interface
(Interface Lead) follower) Sheet # : 2/7
TV/UG-08: Shall collect opening size, location details, and cross sectional TV/UG-08: Shall provide the same to design VAC (ECS) system.
views of all staircases including emergency staircase to design
staircase pressurisation system.
TV/UG-09: Shall collect details of smoke protection zone to design smoke TV/UG-09: Shall provide the detailed drawing to design VAC (ECS) system.
extract fan and fire limit zone for evacuation of people.
TV/UG-10: Shall provide size to get space and location of concrete duct for TV/UG-10: Shall incorporate the same in the station design.
under platform exhaust and over track way exhaust system.
TV/UG-10A:Shall provide details of fire rated door size and location in the TV/UG-10A:Shall incorporate contractor-A requirements in TVS equipment
tunnel ventilation concrete shaft in the TVS equipment room room

Interface related to Civil:

TV/UG-11: Shall provide size and location details to make pedestal for TV/UG-11: Shall design the pedestal for VAC (ECS) equipment and Tunnel
VAC(ECS) equipment and Tunnel ventilation equipment (TVS); ventilation (TVS) equipment to accommodate the details by
such as Air handling units, Fans and Outdoor units for Split air Contractor-A.
conditioning etc.,
TV/UG-12: Shall provide size and location details to make pedestal for chiller TV/UG-12: Shall design the pedestal for chiller plant room equipment to
plant room equipment. accommodate the details by Contractor-A.

TV/UG-13: Shall provide size and location details to make pedestal for cooling TV/UG-13: Shall design pedestal or foundation for cooling tower plant
tower plant equipment. equipment to accommodate the details by Contractor-A.

TV/UG-14: Shall provide size and location details to make pedestal for TV/UG-14: Shall design the pedestal for condensed water and chilled water
condenser water and chilled water pipes. pipes to accommodate the details by Contractor-A.

TV/UG-15: Shall provide duct size and duct routing to make opening in the TV/UG-15: Shall provide coordinated combined builders work drawing agree
wall/ceiling/slabs as well as get the space for ducting. jointly and provide opening in wall/ ceilings/slabs for duct route.

TV/UG-16: Shall provide pipe size and pipe routing to make opening in the TV/UG-16: Shall provide coordinated combined builders work drawing agree
wall/ceiling/slabs as well as get the space for piping. jointly and provide opening in wall/ ceilings/slabs for pipe route.

P a g e | 25
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A : Tunnel Ventilation & UG Station Air Conditioning System Contract B : UG Stations & Tunnel (UGC-01) (Interface
(Interface Lead) follower) Sheet # : 3/7
TV/UG-17: Shall provide cabling size and cable routing to make opening in the TV/UG-17: Shall provide coordinated combined builders work drawing agree
wall/ceiling/slabs and get the space for cabling including cable tray jointly and provide opening in wall/ ceilings/slabs for cable route
and brackets etc. and provide the space for cabling including cable tray and
brackets etc.
TV/UG-18: Shall give opening size and location in the false ceiling to mount TV/UG-18: Shall provide openings in false ceiling to mount grilles and dampers
grille and dampers.
TV/UG-19: Shall give size and location to make concrete shaft for chilled water TV/UG-19: Shall accommodate the details given by contractor-A in making
pipe line from chiller plant room to Air handling unit. concrete shaft.
TV/UG-20: Shall give size and location to make concrete shaft for condensed TV/UG-20: Shall accommodate the details given by contractor-A in making
water pipe line from cooling tower to chiller plant rooms. concrete shaft.
TV/UG-21: Shall give size and location to make concrete shaft for VAC system TV/UG-21: Shall accommodate the details given by contractor-A in making
(ECS) and Tunnel ventilation system (TVS). Water proofing concrete shaft.
required in the concrete shaft.
TV/UG-21(A): Shall give the requirements and details of the External Intake TV/UG-21(A): Shall provide/construct the External Intake and Outlet Louvers
and Outlet Louvers for the TVS and ECS shafts to Contractor B. for the TVS and ECS shafts as per the requirements and details
provided by Contractor A.
TV/UG-22: Shall provide size and location of pipe/cable to fix sleeves. TV/UG-22: Shall provide coordinated combined builders work drawing agree
jointly and accommodate the sleeves for pipe/cable
TV/UG-23: Shall provide size and location to make opening in the TV/UG-23: Shall accommodate the size and location of opening in the
wall/ceiling/slabs to carry VAC system equipment and Tunnel wall/ceiling/slabs to carry VAC system equipment and Tunnel
ventilation system equipment from one level to another level. ventilation system equipment from one level to another level.
TV/UG-24: Shall give size and location details to get space for mounting fan TV/UG-24: Shall provide space to accommodate them in station
coil units and split air conditioning units in the station
ancillary/plant rooms. ancillary/plant rooms.

TV/UG-25: Shall provide size and location to make opening in the wall to TV/UG-25: Shall make opening in the wall to accommodate them in station
provide air louver and ventilation fans in the station ancillary/plant ancillary/plant rooms and electrical rooms.
rooms and electrical rooms.

P a g e | 26
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A : Tunnel Ventilation & UG Station Air Conditioning System Contract B : UG Stations & Tunnel UGC-01 (Interface
(Interface Lead) followe Sheet # : 4/7
TV/UG-26: Shall provide number of openings, opening size and location details TV/UG-26: Shall accommodate them.
in the concrete duct for under platform exhaust and over track
way exhaust system.
TV/UG-27: Shall get the space to fix air curtains in the station entrances TV/UG-27: Shall provide the space to fix air curtains in the station entrances
(including subways entrances) to prevent conditioned air loss (including subways entrances) to prevent conditioned air loss
from concourse public areas. from concourse public areas

Interface related to Plumbing:

TV/UG-28: Shall provide drain point information in the VAC (ECS) equipment
rooms, chiller plant room, Cooling tower plant and Tunnel TV/UG-28: Shall provide plant room floor drains.
ventilation equipment rooms etc.,
TV/UG-29: Shall provide drain point information for all fan coil units and its TV/UG-29: Shall provide floor drains in the nearby wet area. (Janitors closet /
associated pipes in the station ancillary areas and terminate Refuse room / Cleaners room / Lunch room / Toilet / Mechanical
condensate drain pipe to the nearest drain point. equipment room, etc.)
TV/UG-30: Shall collect water supply pipe line connection and other TV/UG-30: Shall provide one point of connection up to cooling tower Make up
accessories from plumbing centre to the makeup water tank. water tank.
Shall provide water requirements for cooling tower system.
TV/UG-31: Shall collect water supply pipe line connection(where required), TV/UG-31: Shall provide Water supply through one point of connection and
floor drain with grating for VAC equipment rooms, chiller plant floor drain through plant room floor drains.
room and Tunnel ventilation equipment rooms etc.,

Interface related to Electrical (Low Voltage Distribution):

TV/UG-32: Shall collect the details of equipment heat generation load, TV/UG-32: Shall provide the details as requested by contractor A.
number of persons and operating temperature details in the
electrical rooms such as room, DG room and UPS room etc. to
design VAC system.
TV/UG-33: Shall collect the details of lighting heat generation load in the TV/UG-33: Shall provide the details of lighting heat generation load.
station (public and non-public areas including subways etc.) to
design VAC system.

P a g e | 27
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A : Tunnel Ventilation & UG Station Air Conditioning System Contract B : UG Stations & Tunnel (UGC-01) (Interface
(Interface Lead) follower) Sheet # : 5/7

TV/UG-34: Shall coordinate for power requirements (Normal ,DG, & UPS) for TV/UG-34: Shall coordinate for power requirements (Normal, DG & UPS) the
complete Station and Tunnel loads to design the main three phase and single phase including fault levels etc. for the
switchboards in the ASS room.. Shall provide the location and power loads in station and tunnel, to enable TVS/ECS contractor
power requirements for the TVS and VAC electric panels to design and supply the main switchboards in the ASS room.
considering all modes to enable UGC-01 contractor to plan for Shall check the location of Outgoing feeders from main
distribution and sizing the DG and UPS. distribution boards to design the further distribution.

TV/UG-35(A): Shall get the cable containment for VAC and tunnel ventilation
system upto inner wall of VAC and TVS panel rooms. TV/UG-35(A): Shall provide the cable containment for VAC and tunnel
TV/UG-35(B): Shall get the earth bus in the VAC and tunnel ventilation system ventilation system upto inner wall of VAC and TVS panel
equipment rooms. rooms.
TV/UG-35(B): Shall provide the earth bus in the VAC and tunnel ventilation
Interface related to Fire Detection System: system equipment rooms.

TV/UG-36: Shall collect the details of fire heat generation capacity (Fire load)
in the station areas (and subways’ etc.) to design smoke exhaust
fan capacity. TV/UG-36: Shall provide the details as requested by contractor A.

TV/UG-37: Shall provide cabling up to Interface terminal board/Interface unit

to get control signal from fire alarm main panel to Smoke Control
Panel/Motor control centre via SCADA for the operation of smoke TV/UG-37: Shall provide the signal from Fire alarm panel and linear heat
detection system through Interface terminal board/Interface
extract fan, Track way exhaust system and Tunnel ventilation
unit/Control module/Monitor module etc.
system during a fire in station, tunnel and cross over. Shall provide
VAC system and Tunnel ventilation system functions for fire in
station, tunnel and crossover in the operation mode table for
comply with compatibility.

P a g e | 28
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Interface related to Tunnel:

TV/UG-37(A): Shall provide the details of pressure effects on cross passage TV/UG-37(A): Shall get the details of pressure effects on cross passage doors
doors and the wayside equipment in the tunnel induced by and the wayside equipment in the tunnel induced by train
train piston effect. piston effect.
Contract A(Tunnel Ventilation & Station VAC) CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION STAGE Contract B(UG-Station&Tunnel)
cross passage
Interface related to Architectural:
TV/UG-38: Contractor A shall check room sizes, stair case sizes, door sizes and
TV/UG-38: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor –A
finishes for VAC and Tunnel ventilation system as provided by
contractor B.
Contract A : Tunnel Ventilation & UG Station Air Conditioning System Contract B : UG Stations & Tunnel (UGC-01) (Interface
(Interface Lead) follower) Sheet # : 6/7
Interface related to Civil:

TV/UG-39: Shall check all pedestals for VAC and Tunnel ventilation system TV/UG-39: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor –A
equipment as provided by contractor B.

TV/UG-40: Shall check all concrete shafts (including Intake and Outlet TV/UG-40: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor –A
external Louvers) for VAC and Tunnel ventilation system.

TV/UG-41: Shall check all concrete ducts for VAC and Tunnel ventilation system. TV/UG-41: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor –A

TV/UG-42: Shall check the space and all opening dimensions in the
Wall/ceiling/slabs to run ducting, piping and cabling. TV/UG-42: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor -A

TV/UG-43: Shall check all opening dimensions in the false ceiling to mount
grilles and dampers. TV/UG-43: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor –A

TV/UG-44: Shall check opening dimensions in the wall/ceiling/slabs to carry

VAC and Tunnel ventilation equipment. TV/UG-44: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor -A

P a g e | 29
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

TV/UG-45: Shall check the space to mount fan coil units and split air TV/UG-45: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor -A
conditioning units.

TV/UG-46: Shall check the sleeves for pipe/cables. TV/UG-46: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor -A

TV/UG-47: Shall check opening sizes in the wall to provide air louver and TV/UG-47: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor –A
ventilation fans in the station ancillary/plant areas and electrical
rooms.

TV/UG-48: Shall check number of openings, opening size in the concrete duct TV/UG-48: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor –A
for under platform exhaust and over track way exhaust system.

Contract A : Tunnel Ventilation & UG Station Air Conditioning System Contract B : UG Stations & Tunnel (UGC-01) (Interface
Sheet # : 7/7
(Interface Lead) follower)
Interface related to plumbing:
TV/UG-49: Shall check all the drain point, grating for the floor drain and TV/UG-49: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor –A
connection for water supply for VAC and Tunnel ventilation
system as provided by contractor B.

Interface related to Electrical (Low Voltage Distribution):

TV/UG-50: Shall check three phase and single phase incoming power supply for TV/UG-50: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor –A and shall check the location of
normal, congested and emergency operation for all VAC and all main/emergency LV switchboards in ASS room for further distribution.
Tunnel ventilation system equipment.
TV/UG-50(A): Shall check the cable containment works.

Interface related to Fire Detection system: TV/UG-50(A): Shall Co-ordinate with contractor –A
TV/UG-51: Shall check cabling in the Interface terminal board/Interface unit to
get control signal from fire alarm main panel to Smoke Control
Panel/Motor control centre via SCADA for the operation of smoke TV/UG-51: Shall Co-ordinate with contractor -A
extract fan, Track way exhaust system and Tunnel ventilation
system during a fire in station, tunnel and cross over.

P a g e | 30
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A(TVS and ECS ) TEST & COMMISIONNING STAGE Contract B(UGC-01—Station & Tunnel)

Interface related to Electrical (Low Voltage Distribution):

TV/UG-52: Shall conduct joint testing on the electrical inputs and outputs TV/UG-52: Shall agree and do the needful.
operation required for VAC (ECS) and TV system (TVS).
Contract A(TVS AND ECS ) MAINTENANCE STAGE Contract B(UGC-01—Station & Tunnel)
TV/UG-53:Shall jointly agree and accept as per the maintenance specification TV/UG-53: Shall do the needful as per the maintenance specification of the
station and tunnel.

P a g e | 31
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

3. Lifts and Escalators and UG Stations & Tunnel (UGC-01)

Contract A : Lifts and Escalators Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 1/2
(Interface Lead) follower)
Contract A (Lifts & Escalators) DESIGN STAGE Contract B (UG station)
LE/US-01: Shall provide the requirements of total Electrical Power (Normal, LE/US-01: Shall collect the load details and design the power supply, earthing
DG and UPS), Earthing, Cable Routing & location of the power point (from earth pit to respective equipment room), Cable
(Isolator) for Lifts and Escalators in the station. routing and isolators locations as per the requirements.
LE/ES-02: (a) Shall collect the details from Contractor-A and utilize the input
LE/ES-02: (a) Shall provide the interface details of Fire alarm system inside the for fire protection/Alarm system
lift & firefighting system inside the escalator to Contractor-B. (b) Shall provide functional requirements under various emergency
(b) Shall implement functional requirements in software conditions

LE/US-03: Shall provide the requirement of mounting and structural details LE/US-03: Shall incorporate Contractor-A’s requirements in his station design.
like head room space, lift shaft spacing, lift pit (water resistant),
Escalator pits (water resistant), with notches and gravitational
drainage system to Contractor-B LE/US-04: Shall incorporate Contractor-A’s requirement in his station design.
LE/US-04: Shall request access (to site) and delivery space for Lifts and
Escalators LE/US-05: Shall provide the station architectural/structural drawings.
LE/US-05: Shall request the station architectural/structural drawings
LE/US-06: Shall provide the architectural/structural/fixing ‘general LE/US-06: Shall incorporate Contractor-A’s requirement in his station design.
arrangement drawing’ of Lifts and Escalators for installation with
load details. LE/ES-06A: Shall collect details from Contractor-A to provide water tap at
LE/ES-06A: Shall provide interface details of sprinkler system inside Escalator suitable location and design his system accordingly
to Contractor-B
Contract A (Lifts & Escalators) CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION STAGE Contract B (UG station)
LE/US-07: Shall jointly check the availability of requirement (shaft/site, LE/US-07: Shall provide ‘Contractor A’ requirements in station.
readiness) for Lifts and Escalators installation, like Power Supply, Earthing
Cable routing, power supply Isolator points, mounting facility, water resistant
pits, access and delivery space as per the drawing (provided by Lift &
Escalator Contractor) suitable for lifts & Escalators erection and confirm.

P a g e | 32
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A : Lifts and Escalators Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 2/2
(Interface Lead) follower)

LE/US-08: Shall request free space for temporary storage in the Station LE/US-08: Shall provide free space for the temporary storage for
building. limited period.

LE/US-09: Space should be free from human interference materials. LE/US-09: Will ensure the space is free from human interference
materials

LE/US-10: Shall request Contractor-B for Lift entrance cladding (Architrave). LE/US-10: Shall provide Lift entrance cladding (Architrave).

LE/US-11: Shall provide the safety working atmosphere at work site. LE/US-11: Shall request the safety working atmosphere at work site.

LE/US-12: Shall provide the micro schedule of erection. LE/US-12: Shall request the micro schedule of erection before erection starts.

LE/US-13: Shall request water connection to Escalator sprinkler system. LE/US-13: Shall provide the water connection as per the requirements of
Contractor-A.
Contract A (Lifts & Escalators) TEST & COMMISIONNING STAGE Contract B (UG station)

LE/US-14: Contract-A Shall Conduct test run jointly with Contractor-B LE/US-14: Contractor-B shall co-ordinate with Contractor - A.

Contract A (Lifts & Escalators) MAINTENANCE STAGE Contract B (UG station)

LE/US-15: As per the maintenance manual supplied by supplier and agreed by LE/US-15: As per the maintenance manual supplied by supplier and agreed by
all the parties. all the parties

P a g e | 33
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

4. UG Stations & Tunnel (UGC-01) and Rolling Stock

Contract A: UG Stations and Tunnel (UGC-01) (Interface Contract B : Rolling Stock Sheet # : 1/2
Lead) (Interface follower)
Contract A(UG Station & Tunnel (UGC-01)) DESIGN STAGE Contract B (Rolling stock)
Tunnel:
TL/RS-01: (a) Contractor-A shall give the details of Tunnel Design Drawings TL/RS-01: (a)Contractor-B shall obtain the details of Tunnel Design Drawings
showing the indicative curves, dimensional clearances, gradients, chainages, showing the indicative curves, dimensional clearances, gradients, chainages,
levels to rolling stock contractor(Contractor-B) levels to design rolling stock suitably
(b) Shall obtain from the Contractor-B, the values of maximum
attainable speed on each curve in normal and all-out modes (based on (b) Shall provide the required details to Contractor-A
simulation studies to be done by the Contractor-B) so as to determine the
values of cant to be provided on each curve to determine the
design/theoretical coordinates of tunnel center on each curve.
(c) Shall obtain from the Contractor-B the Rolling Stock details
such as length of train cars, height and location of doors, loading (c) Shall provide the required details to Contractor-A
configuration (axle loads and configurations) etc. for tunnel and walkway
design.
TL/RS-02: Contractor-A Shall give details of the emergency escape provision TL/RS-02: Contractor-B shall design the rolling stock with suitable
in tunnels to Contractor-B emergency escape provision to match tunnel provision
TL/RS-03: In tunnel, maximum flood level (water height) will be 100 mm –car TL/RS-03: Contractor-B shall design under slung equipment suitably
must still operate
UG-Station:
TL/RS-04: Contractor-A shall obtain the details of Rolling stock including TL/RS-04: Contractor-B shall give the required details to Contractor-A
length of train cars, height , throws on curves, platform clearances to be
maintained on straight and curved tracks, loading configuration(axle loads
and configurations) etc. for station design.

P a g e | 34
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: UG Stations and Tunnel (UGC-01) (Interface Contract B : Rolling Stock Sheet # : 2/2
Lead) (Interface follower)
TL/RS-05: Contractor-A shall require the details of kinematic, structural TL/RS-05: Contractor-B shall give the details of kinematic, structural gauges
gauges and swept envelope on straight and curved tracks and swept envelope for straight and curved tracks.

Contract A(UG Station & Tunnel (UGC-01) CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION STAGE Contract B (Rolling stock)

TL/RS-06: Shall jointly check and confirm the curves, dimensional clearances, TL/RS-06: Shall co-ordinate and confirm with contractor-A
gradients, chainages, levels and emergency escape provision

TL/RS-07: Contractor-A shall participate/attend test run and do TL/RS-07: Contract-B shall be required to conduct test run with the train at
modifications, if required. low speed.

Contract A(UG Station & Tunnel (UGC-01) TEST & COMMISIONNING STAGE Contract B (Rolling stock)

TL/RS-08: Shall jointly check and confirm the maximum noise/echo level with
TL/RS-08: Shall co-ordinate and confirm with contractor-A
Respect to various operating speeds of rolling stock.

TL/RS-09: Contractor-A shall coordinate with contractor-B to complete TL/RS-09: Contractor-B shall be required to conduct integrated tests with all
testing and commissioning work systems

Contract A(UG Station & Tunnel (UGC-01) MAINTENANCE STAGE Contract B (Rolling stock)
NIL NIL

P a g e | 35
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

5. Track and UG Stations (UGC-01)

Contract A: Track Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 1/2

(Interface Lead) follower)
Contract A(TRACK) DESIGN STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)

TK/UG-01: Shall fix chainages of the Turnouts / Cross over based on the TK/UG-01: Shall furnish correct chainage of Station centre line to Contractor-
chainage of Station Centre Line furnished by the Contractor-B. A.

TK/UG-02: Shall ensure at design stage. TK/UG-02: Shall ensure that the pillars / columns supporting the station
structure and all other structures are located clear of the
minimum infringement clearances from centre of track as
stipulated in the approved S.O.D.
TK/UG-03: Shall provide Track drainage consistent with the General Drainage TK/UG-03: Shall design the General drainage system (overall drainage
arrangement in Station area and agree & provide the Point of system) in the Station area taking into account Track Drainage
interface and accept the Point of Interface in the Station/Platform Area.

TK/UG-04: Shall provide required no. of HDPE cross-track ducts/sleeves of TK/UG-04: Shall provide details related to cross-track ducts/sleeves
the required size at required locations. required for crossing of services such as cables, pipes below the
track.
Contract A(TRACK) CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)

P a g e | 36
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

TK/UG-04: Shall arrange for taking over after joint verification with TK/UG-04: Shall hand over to the Track contractor(Contractor-A) the
Contractor-B concrete base ( duly providing 1st pour concrete, if required,
and the shear connectors for track laying within the permitted
tolerances) for track structure and the station platform to
designated levels / clearances with in the tolerances permitted.

TK/UG-05: Shall ensure before taking up track installation work. TK/UG-05: Shall hand over the track installation area in the vicinity of Pillars /
Columns and such structures/obstructions clear of the
infringement distances stipulated in the approved S.O.D.

P a g e | 37
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: Track Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 2/2

(Interface Lead) follower)
TK/UG-06: Shall jointly decide with the Contractor-B opening requirements, TK/UG-06: Shall provide the required openings in the structures to lower the
storage spaces and Schedule of Access Periods and ensure track materials/plants/equipment including rails for track
implementation based on track construction program. construction and provide storage space for Track materials in
consultation with Track contractor (Contractor-A) and shall permit
Access to Track contractor for construction of Track as per agreed
Schedule of Access Periods.
TK/UG-07: Shall furnish details of requirements to Contractor-B. TK/UG-07: Shall provide Temporary water supplies for construction of Track.
Shall design & construct the water supply scheme in consultation
with Track Contractor.
TK/UG-08: To check the levels of platform and track base concrete at the TK/UG-08: Shall ensure that levels of Platform and Track Base Concrete in
time of taking over from Contractor-B and ensure that the heights Station Boxes conform to the Design Levels and Tolerances. Shall
and clearances from rail level / centre of track are with furnish completed levels, curvature & cant, if any, to Track
inacceptable limits as per the approved S.O.D. Contractor (Contractor-A) for any adjustment in rail
level/alignment while laying Track.
Contract A(TRACK) TEST & COMMISIONNING STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)

TK/UG-09:Shall attend and assist in the joint check with concerned interface TK/UG-09: Shall attend and assist in the joint check with concerned interface
contractors to ensure that all permanent structures are clear of contractors to ensure that all permanent structures are clear of
the structure gauge specified in the approved S.O.D the structure gauge specified in the approved S.O.D

Contract A(TRACK) MAINTENANCE STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)

NIL NIL

P a g e | 38
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

6. Track and UG Tunnel (UGC-01)

Contract A: Track Contract B : UG Tunnels (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 1/2

(Interface Lead) follower)
Contract A (TRACK) DESIGN STAGE Contract B (UG-TUNNEL)
TK/UG-01: Shall provide for Track Drainage system design consistent with the TK/UG-01: Shall design the general drainage system in the Tunnel taking into
general drainage arrangements in the Tunnel and agree & account Track Drainage and accept the Point of Interface in the
provide the Point of interface in the cross passage / track sump. cross passage/track sump.
Contract A (TRACK) CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION STAGE Contract B (UG-TUNNEL)
TK/UG-02: Shall arrange for taking over after joint verification with TK/UG-02: Shall complete construction of the 1st pour concrete over the sill
Contractor-B and take up construction of the 2nd Pour concrete of the Tunnel to specified levels (in consultation and
in the track above the 1st pour concrete done utilising the coordination with Contractor-A) and within permitted tolerances
provisions of keying / shear connectors done by the Tunnel and provide keying /shear connectors for the 2nd pour concrete
contractor ( Contractor-B) TK/UG-03: Shall provide to the Track contractor ‘monument plates’ for
TK/UG-03: Shall set the track to the ‘monument plates’ provided by the civil setting the permanent track to its correct position.
contractor (Contractor-B) which will be verified prior to laying /
concreting the Track.
TK/UG-04: Shall furnish levels/details of the Drainage system in the Tunnel to
TK/UG-04: Shall provide the track Drainage system in the 2nd pour concrete
Track contractor (Contractor-A) duly ensuring that Track
consistent with the General Drainage arrangements constructed
Drainage is compatible with the General Drainage system (overall
by the Tunnel Contractor (Contractor-B).
drainage scheme).
TK/UG-05: To decide openings/way, storage spaces and schedule Access
TK/UG-05: Shall provide the required openings/way to take the track
Periods jointly with Tunnel contractor (Contractor-B) and ensure
materials/plant/equipment underground for track laying and
implementation based on Track construction program.
provide storage space for Track materials in consultation with
track contractor and to permit access to track contractor for
construction of Track as per agreed schedule of Access Periods.

TK/UG-06: Shall provide services (water, power, and light) for construction of
TK/UG-06: To furnish details of requirement of services to Tunnel Contractor
track. To Design and construct water supply schemes for Tunnel
(Contractor-B).
Work in consultation with Track Contractor.

P a g e | 39
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: Track Contract B : UG Tunnels (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 2/2

(Interface Lead) follower)
Contract A (TRACK) TEST & COMMISIONNING STAGE Contract B (UG-TUNNEL)
TK/UG-07:Shall attend and assist in the joint check with concerned interface TK/UG-07: Shall attend and assist in the joint check with concerned interface
contractors to ensure that all permanent structures are clear of contractors to ensure that all permanent structures are clear of
the structure gauge specified in the S.O.D the structure gauge specified in the approved S.O.D

Contract A (TRACK) MAINTENANCE STAGE Contract B (UG-TUNNEL)

NIL NIL

P a g e | 40
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

7. Power Supply System ( Power Supply and Traction; PST ) and UG Stations and Tunnel (UGC-01)
Contract A: Power Supply System (PST ) Contract B : UG Tunnels (UGC-01) (Interface
Sheet # : 1/5
(Interface Lead) follower)
Contract A(Power supply system) DESIGN STAGE Contract B(UG Station & Tunnel)
Tunnel: Tunnel:

PS/UG-01: Contractor-A shall specify the cable routing and section needed at PS/UG-01: Shall design the section accordingly in the Tunnel.
the interface between Tunnel and station.
PS/UG-02: Contractor-B shall study the alignment with chainage and space
PS/UG-02: Contractor-A shall specify Size and space in the Tunnel for the PST availability in the Tunnel and design PST and PS SCADA cable
and PS SCADA cable containments/brackets/trunking/trench containments/brackets/trunking/trench in tunnel.

PS/UG-03: Contractor-A shall give the cable installation/Laying program PS/UG-03: Shall plan accordingly to meet the requirement.
Including starting and finishing chainage.
PS/UG-04: Shall provide the Structural gauge clearance. UG Stations:
PS/UG-04: Shall study and agree Structural gauge clearance.

UG Stations:

PS/UG-05: Contractor-A shall request the structural openings for cable PS/UG-05: Shall design the structural openings and provide the combined
entries/exit in regard of the chainage and agree jointly. service drawings and agree jointly.
PS/UG-06: Contractor-A shall request cable containments/trunking /brackets
for PST cable routing. PS/UG-06:Contractor-B shall install cable Containment/
brackets/trays/trunking required for all cable routings
PS/UG-07: Shall provide inputs to combined services drawings (CSD) for
detailed cable (for duct bank/cable trays/Cable troughs/Cable
PS/UG-07: Shall prepare the combined services drawings (CSD) in time
shafts and etc.) layout/routing/Laying [HV and LV cables crossing
required for the cable layout/routing/Laying within the Station and
to be avoided] within the Station and cable crossing at stations.
cable crossing at stations.
PS/UG-08: Contractor-A shall request the total power load in the PS/UG-08: Contractor-B shall give the details of total power load of the
underground Station (including tunnels and subways etc.) from Station (including tunnels and subways etc.) by collecting the load
Contractor ‘B’ and accordingly design the transformer capacity. requirements from all other sub-contractors (interfacing and
project Contractors) to the TVS/ECS Contractor and [Link]
Contractor shall submit to Contractor ‘A’.
P a g e | 41
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: Power Supply System (PST ) Contract B : UG Tunnels (UGC-01) (Interface

(Interface Lead) follower) Sheet # : 2/5

PS/UG-09: Contractor-A shall design the technical room layout including PS/UG-09: Shall incorporate ‘Contractor A’ requirements in UG station design
builders works requirement in accordance with the finalized space and shall co-operate and co-ordinate with contractor-A.
provision. Contractor-A shall furnish room layout with equipment
foot prints and equipment static and dynamic load and shall co-
operate and co-ordinate with contractor-B.
PS/UG-10: Contractor-A shall specify the operating temperature (ventilation),
PS/UG-10: Contractor-B shall design illumination (lux level) according to
illumination parameters affiliated to electrical technical rooms
electrical technical rooms specification requirements
PS/UG-11: Contractor-A shall request for signage boards for all HV equipment
PS/UG-11: Contractor-B shall design the signage as per requirement of
and technical rooms
contractor-A
PS/UG-12: Contractor-A shall co-ordinate with ‘Contractor B’ to design best
access for lifting facilities for electrical PS/UG-12: Contractor-B shall consider in the station design the requirements
machineries/plants/equipment for installation and easy pertaining to access for lifting facilities and easy maintenance for
maintenance wherever required. Electrical equipment in close Co-ordination with ‘Contractor A’.

PS/UG-13: Contractor-B Shall co-ordinate with the ‘Contractor A’ and design

PS/UG-13: Shall Design the earthing for HV and LV power supply systems
the station earthing pits and earthing bus in the technical/plant
including building structures and request for appropriate earth
rooms.
bus routing in the technical/plant rooms.
PS/UG-14: Contractor-B shall co-ordinate with all other contractors
PS/UG-14: Contractor-A shall be in the up-stream and request the type of
(Interfacing/Project Contractors) and collect the data of type of
tripping and protections required for the station equipment and
tripping and protection they have in their equipment and handing
design the equipment accordingly to meet the requirements.
over to TVS/ECS Contractor and by TVS/ECS Contractor to
Contractor-A.
Contract A(Power supply system ) CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION STAGE Contract B(UG Station & Tunnel)
Tunnel:
PS/UG-15: Shall check the PST cable routing/ cable PS/UG-15: Shall provide the quality tunnel lining and co-ordinate with
containment/brackets/ trunking provided by contractor-B. Contractor-A.

P a g e | 42
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: Power Supply System (PST ) Contract B : UG Tunnels (UGC-01) (Interface

Sheet # : 3/5
(Interface Lead) follower)
PS/UG-16: Shall check the cable laying works requirements like routing, PS/UG-16: Shall co-ordinate with contractor-A.
Sections, cross passages and confirm.
PS/UG-17: Shall check the total space in the tunnel for cable laying works and PS/UG-17: Shall co-ordinate with contractor-A.
confirm.
PS/UG-18: Shall check the structural openings for cable entries/exit in regard PS/UG-18: Shall co-ordinate with contractor-A.
of the chainage.
PS/UG-19: Shall provide the cable laying works program and schedule. PS/UG-19: Shall co-operate and agree with contractor-A.

PS/UG-20: Space should be free of obstacles at the time of cable laying Works. PS/UG-20: Site will be cleared free from obstacles and handed over for cable
laying works.
UG Stations:
PS/UG-21: Contractor-A Shall install the rated capacity Transformer PS/UG-21: Shall construct the suitable solid foundation/Platform sufficiently
at “out of reach of flood”, and co-ordinate accordingly for civil
and structural works.

PS/UG-22: Shall jointly check the technical rooms made ready by ‘Contractor PS/UG-22: Technical rooms shall be made ready with lighting, small power,
B’ and the same shall be confirmed. fire Detection and Fire Fighting systems, Cable Trays/
Supports/trenches/ Troughs Etc. and Shall be co-operated/co-
ordinated with ‘Contractor A’.

PS/UG-23: Shall jointly check the arrangements made ready for cable PS/UG-23: All the necessary arrangements shall be made ready for the cable
routing/Laying [HV and LV cables crossing to be avoided] within routing/Laying and shall be co-operated/coordinated with
the Station and cable crossing at stations and to be confirmed. ‘Contractor A’.

PS/UG-24: Shall jointly check the arrangements made ready for ventilation, Air PS/UG-24: Rooms should be ready with the requirements of ventilation, Air
conditioning and illumination within the Station rooms and to be conditioning and illumination (lux level) and shall be co-
confirmed. operated/coordinated with ‘Contractor A’.

PS/UG-25: Shall jointly check the signage provided for all the technical rooms PS/UG-25: Signage for all technical rooms should be made ready and shall be
and to be confirmed. Co-operated/co-ordinated with ‘Contractor A’.

P a g e | 42
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: Power Supply System (PST ) Contract B : UG Tunnels (UGC-01) (Interface

Sheet # : 4/5
(Interface Lead) follower)
PS/UG-26: Shall jointly check the access provided for lifting facilities for PS/UG-26: Access for lifting facilities and easy maintenance for Electrical
electrical machineries for installation and easy maintenance and equipment shall be made ready as per the requirements and
to be confirmed. shall be co- operated/co-ordinated with ‘Contractor A’.
PS/UG-27: Shall jointly check the earthing works and earth bus in the PS/UG-27: All the earthing works shall be made ready and handed over to
Technical rooms required for High Voltage and Low Voltage Contractor-A.
power supply systems including the building structures and to be
confirmed.
PS/UG-28: Shall jointly check the arrangements for cable crossing at station PS/UG-28: Requirements for cable crossing shall be made ready and shall be
and to be confirmed. Co-operated/co-ordinated with ‘Contractor-A’.
PS/UG-29: Contractor-A shall incorporate in his systems the requirements of PS/UG-29: Contractor-B shall hand over all the protection and tripping
tripping and protection and the same shall be confirmed. systems of all other Contractors (Project contractors) in the
station to ‘Contractor- A’ through TVS/ECS Contractor and shall
PS/UG-30: Shall Request the Temporary power requirement. Co-operate/co-ordinate.
PS/UG-31: Shall request the temporary storage area in the station building PS/UG-30: Shall provide the temporary power requirement at one place
PS/UG-31: Shall study the space availability in the station and provide
accordingly

Contract A(Power supply system) TEST & COMMISIONNING STAGE Contract B(UG Station & Tunnel)
Tunnel:
PS/UG-32: Space should be free from man and material. PS/UG-32: As per the requirement shall agree and do the needful.
UG Stations:

PS/UG-33: Shall jointly check the parameters of ventilation and Air PS/UG-33: Shall jointly co-ordinate to check the parameters of ventilation
conditioning within the Station rooms and to be confirmed. and Air conditioning with ‘Contractor A’.
PS/UG-34: Shall jointly check the resistance of all earthing works at station PS/UG-34: Shall jointly check the resistance of all earthing works made at
required for High Voltage and Low Voltage power supply systems station and shall be co-operated/co-ordinated with ‘Contractor
including the building structures and to be confirmed. A’.

PS/UG-35: Shall request Space free from human interference and materials. PS/UG-35: Shall arrange Space free from human interference and materials.
PS/UG-36: Prepare joint maintenance procedures in consultation with PS/UG-36: Validate and accept joint Maintenance procedure with contractor-
contractor-B and Shall jointly agree and accept. A
P a g e | 43
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

8. OHE (PST) and UG Tunnel (UGC-01)

Contract A: OHE (Interface Lead) Contract B : UG Tunnels (UGC-01) Sheet # : 1/3
(Interface follower)
Contract A(OHE) DESIGN STAGE Contract B(UG Tunnel)
Rigid catenary system for tunnel

OH/UG-01: Shall design all the required fixings to support rigid overhead OH/UG-01: Shall provide segment & tunnel lining details and limit of fixing
contact system according to Contractor-B constraints. penetrations.
OH/UG-02: Shall transmit his fixing design details to the Contractor-B and the
OH/UG-02 Shall provide notice of no objection once the fixing details are
Engineer for notice of no objection.
agreed.
OH/UG-03: Shall furnish the details of height of contact wire and the minimum OH/UG-03: Shall design the structures accordingly.
electrical clearances needed.
OH/UG-04: Shall design the OHE according to the gradients and curves. OH/UG-04: Shall furnish the gradients and curve details.
OH/UG-05: Neutral section to be located on straight track and having OH/UG-05: Shall provide the gradient chart and curve details. Shall
negligible gradient. Shall provide the requirements/details and adjust/modify the vertical alignment of the tunnels at the
location of the Neutral Section to Contractor B. Neutral Section location as may be required to suit the
requirements of Contractor B for installation of Neutral Section.
OH/UG-06: Shall design and fix all required fixings of the beam to support rigid
overhead contact system for tunnel launching area (TBM OH/UG-06: Shall provide segment, RCC structure & tunnel lining details and
launching area) according to Contractor-B constraints. Shall limit of fixing penetrations. Shall provide notice of no objection
transmit his fixing design details to the Contractor-B and the once fixing details are agreed.
Engineer for notice of no objection.

Drop arm and its base fixing arrangement in tunnel.

OH/UG-07: Shall provide notice of no objection to Contractor-A, once fixing
OH/UG-07: Shall design the type of drop arm and shall fix in accordance with details are agreed.
the agreed fixing details.

OH/UG-08: Shall design and furnish the span of drop arms of OHE. OH/UG-08: Shall furnish the details of curves/alignment.

P a g e | 44
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: OHE Contract B : UG Tunnels (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 2/3

(Interface Lead) follower)
OH/UG-09: Obligatory drop arm to be furnished (if any). OH/UG-09: Shall provide the details of the location of points and crossings,

OH/UG-10: Loading on drop arm to be provided. OH/UG-10: Collect the details of drop arm loading.

OH/UG-11: KM no / Drop arm no of drop arm location to be prepared. OH/UG-11: Shall furnish the KM details of tunnel.

Earthing of OHE in underground tunnel.

OH/UG-12: Shall design and provide necessary details of earthing (Buried OH/UG-12: Shall coordinate and fulfil the requirements of provision in civil
Earth conductor and Overhead protection cable). works for earthing as per the design provided by Contractor-A.

OH/UG-13: Shall provide the drawing of conduit carrying the buried earth OH/UG-13: Shall coordinate and fulfil the requirements for carrying the buried
conductor. earth conductor.

OH/UG-14: Shall provide the details of structure bonds including locations. OH/UG-14: Shall coordinate and fulfil the requirements.

Contract A(OHE) CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION STAGE Contract B(UG Tunnel)

OH/UG-15: Shall cross check the programme/planning of implementation. OH/UG-15: Shall coordinate

OH/UG-16: Shall cross check and keep records (jointly signed) of all OH/UG-16: Shall report progress of construction at mutually agreed intervals.
Requirements as the Work progresses.

OH/UG-17: Shall tackle the notified changes if any. OH/UG-17: Shall furnish the changes in design/plan if any.

Contract A(OHE) TEST & COMMISIONNING STAGE Contract B(UG Tunnel)

OH/UG-19: Shall Test the brackets. OH/UG-19: Shall agree and accept the bracket testing.

P a g e | 45
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: OHE Contract B : UG Tunnels (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 3/3

(Interface Lead) follower)

OH/UG-20: Shall provide testing procedure. OH/UG-20: Shall agree and accept.

OH/UG-21: Shall measure the earth resistance values of all locations and OH/UG-21: Shall co-operate.
display and keep the records.

Contract A(OHE) MAINTENANCE STAGE Contract B(UG Tunnel)

OH/UG-22: Shall agree and accept. OH/UG-22: Shall stop water leakage and maintain water tight tunnels to the
Contract Specifications.

OH/UG-23: Shall measure and record earth resistance values jointly at suitable OH/UG-23: Shall co-operate.
interval

P a g e | 46
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

9. OHE (PST)and UG Stations (UGC-01)

Contract A: OHE Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 1/2
(Interface Lead) follower)
Contract A(OHE) DESIGN STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)
Rigid catenary system and its insulators.

OH/UG-01: Shall design Rigid catenary system and furnish details including OH/UG-01: Shall design and construct the base support fixtures on soffit of
locations, Loads etc., Concourse level (or as required) to support the rigid catenary
system.
OH/UG-02: Shall furnish the details of height of contact wire and the OH/UG-02: Shall design the soffit of Concourse structures accordingly.
minimum electrical clearances needed.
OH/UG-03: Shall furnish the space requirement of traction cabin for provision OH/UG-03: Shall provide size of cabin as required by Contractor-A.
of equipment of sub-sectioning and paralleling post, sectioning
post, sub- sectioning post if needed.
OH/UG-04: Shall provide drawings showing the locations, Cable ducts and OH/UG-04: Shall provide combined builders drawings/CSDs and agree jointly
sizes of Openings for passage of cables including routing. and provide cable route openings as per drawing.
OH/UG-05: Shall design obligatory catenary/OCS location. OH/UG-05: Provide the details of crossovers, turnout etc. if any.

Earthing of OHE in underground station.

OH/UG-06: Shall design and provide necessary details of earthing (Buried OH/UG-06: Shall coordinate and implement the earthing system of building
Earth Conductor and Overhead Protection Cable).Shall furnish structures, platform, over/under pass/shelters etc. to be
the drawings. ultimately connected to buried earth conductor and Arial earth
cable.
OH/UG-07: Shall provide the details of connecting link terminal locations. OH/UG-07: Shall coordinate and implement the locations of connecting links.

Contract A(OHE) CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)

OH/UG-08: Shall check the load of supporting fixtures of catenary/OCS OH/UG-08: To assist and cross check the load requirements.
system.

OH/UG-09: Shall review the progress at suitable interval. OH/UG-09: Shall report progress of construction at mutually agreed intervals.

P a g e | 47
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: OHE Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 2/2

(Interface Lead) follower)

OH/UG-10: Shall seek access to work. OH/UG-10: Shall provide the access to work area in underground stations

Contract A(OHE) TEST & COMMISIONNING STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)

OH/UG-11: Cross check the loading by OHE and agree. OH/UG-11: Test the base supporting fixture load carrying capacity jointly.

OH/UG-12: Measure the earth resistance values of all locations and display and OH/UG-12: Shall coordinate and put joint efforts to bring earth values to
keep the records (i.e., Combined Earth resistance value: 0.5 below maximum prescribed/required values.
ohms, Individual Earth resistance value: 10 ohms)

Contract A(OHE) MAINTENANCE STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)

OH/UG-13: Measure and record earth resistance values jointly at suitable OH/UG-13: Shall co-operate.
interval.

P a g e | 48
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

10. Signalling & Telecommunication and UG Stations (UGC-01)

Contract A: Signalling & Telecommunication Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 1/6
(Interface Lead) follower)
Contract A(Signalling & Telecom) DESIGN STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)
ST/US-01: Shall furnish the space and mechanical load requirements of the ST/US-01: a) Shall provide station layout and drawings showing the rooms
Signal Equipment Room (SER), Communication Equipment Room and vertical cable risers etc.
(CER), Station Control Room (SCR), Telecom closets and lighting, b) Shall Update the Station drawings to accommodate the
flooring, false flooring, cable duct and vertical cable risers in the
requirements of Contractor- A.
above mentioned rooms.
c) Shall collect the data & integrate with other users and provide
it to all the Interfacing/Project Contractors.
ST/US-02: Shall furnish the sizes of S & T equipment to be installed in SER, ST/US-02: All corridors and doors shall be sized to enable equipment to be
CER, SCR and Telecom Closets. delivered to SER, CER, SCR and Telecom Closets for installation
and replacements.
ST/US-03: Shall furnish the detailed drawings of line side equipment to be ST/US-03: Shall suitably incorporate the detailed drawings/requirements
installed like signals, point machines, signal post telephones, prepared by Contractor-A.
ATP ATO equipment, Train stoppage beacons, antennas,
impedance bonds (where applicable) and location boxes etc.,
ST/US-3A:a) Shall furnish the routing of the cables for S&T equipment in ST/US-3A: Shall establish the synthesis layout for cable routing according to
whole Station all the Sub-systems layouts
b) Shall validate the synthesis cable routing layout proposed by
Contractor-B ST/US-04: a) & b) Shall design the cable routing and cable containments in
ST/US-04: a) Shall furnish the detailed drawings of main cable routing the station.
arrangements in respect of S & T cables in the station (including
requirements of minimum 1 meter separation between S & T
cables and HV cables). Shall furnish the details of Signal &
Telecommunication cables like dimensions, weight, minimum
bending radius and supporting & mounting details.
b) Shall provide detailed drawings with the locations of all
equipment and cables to be installed on the track.

P a g e | 49
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: Signalling & Telecommunication Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 2/6
(Interface Lead) follower)
c) Shall provide detailed drawings of locations, loads, type of c) For heavy equipment like CCTV monitors, display boards, analogue clocks
fixing/mounting arrangements for signalling and Telecommunication etc., to be mounted on walls / suspended from the roof, Contractor-B shall
equipment to be installed on the platform, Mezzanine( where applicable), integrate the fixing arrangements with the structural design.
concourse and entrance levels like PA system, PID’s, CCTV cameras, clocks,
CCTV monitors, emergency stop plungers and staff protection keys etc.
ST/US-05: Shall furnish the locations and space requirements of passenger ST/US-05: Shall validate the locations of passenger emergency
emergency communication and help point equipment to be communication system and help point system.
installed.
ST/US-06: Shall furnish the locations and details of access control system and ST/US-06: Shall validate the locations of access control system and intrusion
Intrusion detection system. detection system.
ST/US-07: Shall furnish the requirements of earthing arrangement including ST/US-07: Shall provide the earthing arrangement for different systems and
earth impedance value for different S & T systems to be installed extend it up to SER, CER and SCR and Telecom Closets accordingly;
in SER, CER, Telecom closets and SCR and line side equipment Shall also extend the earth for earthing of line side equipment, if
required.
ST/US-08: a) Shall design the M & E SCADA system to suit the requirements ST/US-08: a) Contractor-B shall define the control / monitoring requirements
of controlled / monitored Non-traction SCADA systems to be installed by and parameter measurement requirements (zone/ group). Contractor- B
Contractor-B. shall install the local control panel (LCP) and wire it to control all controlled
devices. Contractor-B shall provide the interface devices with M & E SCADA.
b) Shall validate the interface design. Design the connectivity requirements
b) Shall design the interface device for each monitored / controlled
from the interface devices up to the CER and to the SCR / OCC. equipment, Local control panel (where applicable) for the station M & E
c) Shall design the HMI of M&E SCADA at the SCR and OCC to meet the equipment, LV power distribution , UPS, DG , lighting systems and building
control and monitoring requirements of equipment installed by Contractor- management systems installed under the Contract B.
B. c) Shall advise the locations and connectivity requirements of interface
devices associated with M & E equipment to be monitored / controlled by
non- traction SCADA.
ST/US-09: Shall furnish the requirements of signs and labels except for ST/US-09: Shall design all the statutory signs and labels except for S & T
equipment installed by Contractor- B. equipment.

ST/US-10: Shall furnish the EMI / EMC levels of S & T equipment to be ST/US-10: Shall incorporate in station design and prepare a common EMI /
installed in stations. EMC plan.

P a g e | 50
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: Signalling & Telecommunication Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 3/6
(Interface Lead) follower)
ST/US-11: Shall furnish the acoustic intelligibility and lighting visibility criteria ST/US-11: Shall accommodate the requirements of Contractor- A and furnish
to ensure that the performance of PA and PID systems are the architectural design details of the stations.
as per laid down standards.
ST/US-12: Shall furnish the requirements of temporary power supply for ST/US-12: Shall plan the power supply system accordingly.
preliminary testing of S & T equipment installed in stations.

ST/US-13: Shall validate the interface document and relevant portion of ST/US-13: Shall design the interfacing of fire system with PA system etc. and
technical specifications of fire protection system. provide the relevant technical specifications of fire protection
system.
ST/US-14: a) Shall furnish the detailed load requirement of various S & T
equipment for the UPS (240V) power supply. ST/US-14: Shall design the UPS with Suitable protection devices at the output
b) Shall design the power cable requirement from distribution accordingly.
panel in UPS room to SER / CER / Telecom closets.
ST/US-15: Prepare joint maintenance plan involving M & E SCADA of S & T
and station M & E equipment / power supply systems / UPS /DG/ ST/US-15: Validate the joint maintenance plan.
Lighting system / building management functions.
Contract A(Signalling & Telecom) CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION Contract B(UG-Station)
STAGE
ST/US-16: Shall verify that the requirements of lighting, false flooring (for ST/US-16: Shall provide the lighting, false flooring (for prescribed load levels)
prescribed load levels) and vertical cable risers in SER, CER, and vertical cable risers in SER, CER, Telecom Closets and SCR.
Telecom Closets and SCR are as per the requirement.

ST/US-17: Shall install all signalling and communication cables and provide the ST/US-17: Shall ensure provision of cable ducts, main cable crossing
connections to individual devices. arrangements, including openings required for entry / exit
arrangements for main S & T cables in the station.

ST/US-18: Shall install the line side S & T equipment like signals, ATP/ATO ST/US-18: Shall provide the necessary arrangements to install line side S & T
equipment, antennas, train stoppage beacons, location boxes, equipment like signals, ATP / ATO equipment, antennas, train
signal post telephones and impedance bonds etc. stoppage beacons, location boxes, signal post telephones and
Impedance
bonds etc..
P a g e | 51
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: Signalling & Telecommunication Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 4/6
(Interface Lead) follower)
ST/US-19: Shall install the emergency communication and help point ST/US-19: Shall provide necessary arrangements to install emergency
equipment. communication and help point equipment.
ST/US-20: a) Shall arrange the mounting and fixing accessories to station ST/US-20: Shall install the mounting and fixing arrangements for heavy
Contractor (Contractor-B). equipment like CCTV monitors, display boards, analogue clocks
b) Shall install the equipment at stations like staff protection etc., during the construction as per the S & T requirements.
keys, Emergency stop plungers, PIDs, PA system, clocks, CCTV
cameras and Television system equipment etc.,
ST/US-21: Shall install the access control system and intrusion detection ST/US-21: Shall provide necessary arrangements to install access control and
system. intrusion detection systems.
ST/US-22: Shall verify that the requirements of earthing system are met. ST/US-22: Shall install earths and earth bars for S & T equipment for various
systems and terminate inside the main equipment rooms, SCR
and telecom closets and on the tunnel side (if required) for
earthing of line side signalling and Telecommunication systems (if
required).
ST/US-23: Shall install the M & E SCADA system at the OCC & SCR and provide ST/US-23: Shall provide, wire and connect the interface devices upto the
LAN connectivity up to interface device for all controlled / station LAN port provided by Contractor-A for various equipment,
monitored systems installed by Contractor- B. local control panels (where applicable) for M & E equipment, LV
power distribution system, UPS system, DG, lighting system and
building management system etc., forming part of Contract- B.
ST/US-24: Shall verify the requirements of statutory signs and labels. ST/US-24: Shall install all the statutory signs and labels except those relating
to S & T equipment.
ST/US-25: Shall bring the power supply from distribution panel to SER /CER. ST/US-25: Shall provide the temporary power supply with suitable protection
arrangements.

ST/US-26: Shall verify the interfacing of fire system with PA system. ST/US-26: Shall install the fire alarm and control system and provide the
necessary interfaces with PA system.

ST/US-27: Shall install the power cables from the distribution panel in UPS ST/US-27: Shall install the UPS and suitable protection devices at the output.
room to SER / CER and extend it to the SCR, Telecom Closets etc.,

P a g e | 52
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: Signalling & Telecommunication Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 5/6
(Interface Lead) follower)
ST/US-27A:Shall run the LAN cable from station to all cross passage and ST/US-27A:Shall provide the cable tray/ladders for LAN cable routing
permanent access egress location
Contract A(Signalling & Telecom) TEST & COMMISIONNING STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)
ST/US-28: Shall conduct a joint test with Civil (Underground stations) ST/US-28: Shall attend the joint testing of earth impedance with Contractor-
Contractor for testing of earth impedance of all earths provided A
for tunnels & stations.
ST/US-29: Shall conduct joint testing on the networking, monitoring &
control (where applicable) of M & E, LV distribution, UPS, DG, ST/US-29: Shall attend the joint testing and validate the test results.
lighting system and building management systems etc., (provided
under the Station Contract— Contract-B) through the M & E
SCADA from OCC and SCR as per jointly agreed control logic and
display formats.
ST/US-30: Shall conduct the joint testing and confirm that there are no EMI / ST/US-30: Shall attend the joint testing with S & T, RS and OHE contractors.
EMC impacts on S & T equipment installed in stations.
ST/US-31: Shall conduct joint testing on the functioning of fire and PA system ST/US-31: Shall attend the joint testing and validate the results.
inter connection.
ST/US-32: Shall conduct joint load test with suitable loads for temporary ST/US-32: Shall attend the joint tests with Contractor- A.
power supply.
ST/US-33: Shall conduct
Contract joint load &
A(Signalling test with suitable loads for UPS supply.
Telecom) ST/US-33:
MAINTENANCE Shall attend the joint testing and
STAGE validate
Contract the results.
B(UG-Station)
ST/US-34: Finalise the joint maintenance procedures and periodicity of joint ST/US-34: Validate the joint maintenance procedures and test plans prepared
inspection by Contractor-A
a. Between S & T and station maintenance for testing of various
S&T earths
b. Between M & E SCADA and station M & E equipment / power
supply system / lighting system etc., which are parts of building
management functions.
c. Joint maintenance procedures and include the same in the S &
T maintenance manual.

P a g e | 53
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

11. Signalling & Telecommunication and UG Tunnel (UGC-01)

Contract A: Signalling & Telecommunication Contract B : UG Tunnel (UGC-01) Sheet # : 1/2
(Interface Lead) (Interface follower)
Contract A(Signalling & Telecom) DESIGN STAGE Contract B(UG-Tunnel)
ST/UT-01: Shall furnish the detailed drawings with locations and dimensions of ST/UT-01: Shall validate the location of intrusion detection devices, suitably
line side equipment to be installed like signals, ATP / ATO equipment, incorporate the detailed drawings prepared by Contractor-A and integrate
antennas, impedance bonds, location boxes, cable termination, RF amplifiers, the fixing and mounting arrangements with the structural design.
intrusion detection systems, Signs and labels and signal post telephones etc.
ST/UT-02: Shall furnish the details of Signal & Communication cables like ST/UT-02: Shall design the mounting arrangements in the tunnel section to
dimensions, weight, minimum bending radius and supporting &mounting accommodate the cable containments / cable hangers and design the cable
details throughout Tunnel and stations including the track crossings containments / cable hangers including the track crossing cable containments.
ST/UT-03: Shall furnish the detailed drawings with all locations and dimensions ST/UT-03: Shall validate the locations of passenger emergency
of emergency communication equipment including passenger Emergency communication systems and design the fixing arrangements. Shall design and
communication arrangements at cross passages. Shall plan to monitor the install the cross passage doors
status of cross passage doors
Contract A(Signalling & Telecommunication) CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION STAGE
ST/UT-04: Shall install the line side S & T equipment like signals, ATP/ATO ST/UT-04: Shall provide the necessary mounting /fixing arrangements to
equipment, antennas, location boxes, cable termination boxes, RF amplifiers, install line side S & T equipment like signals, ATP / ATO equipment, antennas,
intrusion detection systems, signal post telephones, impedance bonds and location boxes, cable termination boxes, RF amplifiers, intrusion detection
emergency communication equipment. systems, signal post telephones, Impedance bonds and emergency
ST/UT-05: Shall install Signalling & Communication cables in tunnel sections. communication equipment.
ST/UT-06: Shall verify the requirements of statutory signs and labels. ST/UT-05: Shall provide cable containments / cable hanger fixings and track
crossings as per the requirements.
ST/UT-06: Shall install all the statutory signs and labels except those relating
to S & T equipment.

Contract A(Signalling & Telecom) TEST & COMMISIONNING STAGE Contract

ST/UT-07: Shall conduct joint inspection of cable containments/ cable hangers, B(UG-Tunnel)
ST/UT-07: Shall attend the joint inspection of cable ducts / cable hangers
track crossing cable ducts installation. installation.
ST/UT-08: Shall agree and accept. ST/UT-08: Shall stop water leakages & maintain water tight tunnels to the
Contract Specifications.

P a g e | 54
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

12. PSD and UG Stations (UGC-01)

Contract A: PSD Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 1/2

(Interface Lead) follower)
Contract A(PSD) DESIGN STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)
ST/US-01: (a) Shall furnish the specification of Platform Screen Doors (PSD) ST/US-01: (a) Shall validate and find the locations of Platform Screen Doors
like dimensions, weight and supporting & mounting details (PSD) and design space, hanger walls / beams & necessary
throughout stations. supports, structural and platform slab by considering the
(b) Shall furnish the maximum load of PSD on platform edge Dimensions, weight and mounting details of PSD.
(b) Shall collect details from Contractor-A and design the platform to
accommodate PSD load requirement.
ST/US-02: Shall furnish the requirements of passenger emergency escape ST/US-02: Shall validate and find the locations of passenger emergency
doors and track access doors. escape doors and track access doors.
ST/US-03: Shall furnish the installation location and method of Platform ST/US-03: Shall validate and find the locations of Platform screen doors local
Screen Doors Local Control Panel on platform level. control panel.
ST/US-04: Shall furnish the requirement of earthing system including earth ST/US-04: Shall fulfil the requirements of earthing and earth bars.
impedance value and earth bars for the PSD equipment.
ST/US-05: Shall furnish the EMI / EMC levels of PSD equipment to be installed ST/US-05: Shall incorporate in station design and prepare a common EMI /
in stations. EMC plan.

ST/US-06: Shall furnish the details of DG and UPS power supply requirement ST/US-06: Shall design the DG and UPS power supply requirement for PSD
for PSD Operation Operation

ST/US-07:Shall furnish the interfacing details with fire detection and ST/US-07:Shall plan and take signal from PSD and integrate with fire
firefighting systems detection and firefighting systems

ST/US-08: Shall furnish the cable routing plan to Contractor-B ST/US-08: Shall design cable duct/containment for PSD cable routing

Contract A(PSD) CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)

ST/US-09: Shall install the Platform Screen Doors, Emergency Escape Doors, ST/US-09: Shall provide necessary supports to install the platform screen
Track access doors and Platform screen doors local control panels. doors and local control panels.

P a g e | 55
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: PSD Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 2/2

(Interface Lead) follower)

ST/US-10: Shall verify the requirements of earths and earth bars. ST/US-10: Shall install earths and earth bars for Platform screen doors and its
equipment to be installed in Stations.

ST/US-11: Shall install control panel, power and control cable according to ST/US-11: Shall install cable containment/ducts to install control panel, power
plan layout and control cable according to plan layout

Contract A(PSD) TEST & COMMISIONNING STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)

ST/US-12: Shall conduct a joint test with Civil Contractor (Contractor-B) for ST/US-12: Shall attend the joint testing of earth impedance with Contractor-
testing of earth impedance of all earths provided for the PSD A.
Equipment.

ST/US-13: Shall conduct the joint testing and confirm that there are no EMI / ST/US-13: Shall attend the joint testing with S&T (PSD) and OHE contractors.
EMC impacts on PSD equipment installed in stations.
Contract A(PSD-S&T) MAINTENANCE STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)
ST/US-14: Shall conduct the joint testing and confirm that there are no EMI / ST/US-14: Shall attend the joint testing with S & T (PSD) and OHE
EMC impacts on PSD equipment installed in stations. contractors.

P a g e | 56
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

13. AFC and UG Stations (UGC-01)

Contract A: AFC Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 1/4
(Interface Lead) follower)
Contract A(AFC) DESIGN STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)
1. Provision of Rooms and Areas for Equipment Lay-out
AF/US-01: Shall finalise the room schedule and lay-out for AFC at stations AF/US-01: Shall incorporate the space and room requirements in the station
Design
2. Mechanical and Structural Interfaces
AF/US-02: Shall provide details of AFC equipment with specific AF/US-02: Shall incorporate the requirements in the station design for
requirements for installation.
1. Granite Counters for TO 1. Granite counter for TO
2. Cable routing and Fixing arrangements for Cable Trays 2. Provision for Cable routing
3. Gate array cable trench and raise way/raceway 3. Gate array cable trench and raise way/raceway
4. Passenger Windows at TO and EFO 4. Passenger Windows at TO and EFO
5. Wall Opening for TVM at SS 5. Wall Opening for TVM at SS
3. Earthing
AF/US-03: Shall provide design details of earthing requirements
AF/US-03: Shall Incorporate the earthing scheme for AFC system as per
requirement
4. Power supplies
AF/US-04: Provide the DG and UPS Power estimate in the station for AFC AF/US-04: Shall design the DG and UPS power supply with suitable
equipment protection devices for AFC equipment in station

5. Cable Routing, Penetration Installation & Cable containment

AF/US-05: Shall provide the cabling scheme for AFC system and cable AF/US-05: Shall space proof the cable routing requirement of AFC for
routing requirement for Power and Data. Power and Data in the station design. Shall provide cable
Containment
6. Furniture
AF/US-06: Shall provide the details of Granite Counter for TIW at Ticket Office AF/US-06: Shall incorporate Granite Counter for TIW at Ticket office in the
design.
7. Labelling and Statutory Signs
AF/US-07: Equipment related labelling and signage on AFC equipment and AF/US-07: All other signage at stations shall be designed by Station Contractor
cables shall be designed by AFC contractor.

P a g e | 57
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: AFC Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 2/4

(Interface Lead) follower)
8. EMC site Certification
AF/US-08: Shall provide the EMC requirements of AFC AF/US-08: To incorporate the AFC requirement in the design

9. Review of documents & Drawings

AF/US-09: Shall review the drawings and documents for AFC requirements. AF/US-09: Shall incorporate the review comments in the drawings and
e.g. : documents and finalise the station documentation.
1. Room Schedule
2. Station layout
3. Cable routing
4. Gate array etc.
(Not limited to the above drawings and documents)

10. Utilities Required for Site works

AF/US-10: Shall specify the requirement of utilities for site Works
AF/US-10: Shall accommodate the requirements in his design.
[Link] power
[Link]
[Link] at TO and SCR

11. Storage at Site

AF/US-11: Shall specify the temporary storage requirement for AFC AF/US-11: Shall make provision for temporary space at concourse level to
equipment at the stations during installation store AFC equipment on temporary basis during installation

12. Fire alarm interface

AF/US-11A: AF/US-11A:
(a) Shall design the AFC system to interface with fire alarm system. Shall also (a) Shall design the Fire Alarm system to interface with AFC system. Shall
specify the details like type of signal, communication protocol etc. verify and accept mutually the details like type of signal, communication
protocol etc., operation in emergency condition
(b) Shall Design the software according to functional requirements in (b) Shall specify the functional requirements of AFC system
emergency condition

P a g e | 58
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: AFC (Interface Lead) Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) Sheet # : 3/4

(Interface follower)
CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION
Contract A(AFC) Contract B(UG-Station)
STAGE
1. Provision of Rooms and Areas for Equipment Layout AF/US-12: 1. To construct the room and gate area as per the AFC room
AF/US-12: 1. To confirm that the construction is as per the room schedule. Schedule
2. To request access from the station contractor (Contractor-B). 2. To provide access to AFC Contractor for the installation of
equipment
2. Mechanical and Structural Interfaces
AF/US-13: To construct and provide civil and structural facilities required
AF/US-13: [Link] check and confirm t h a t AFC specific requirements for for AFC installation
installation are made available.
[Link] install the electric cabinet and do the cable termination.
[Link] install the switches and do the data cable termination.
4. To do the internal wiring at the AFC rooms.
[Link] fix the AFC equipment at AFC rooms and complete the installation .

3. Earthing
AF/US-14: To confirm that the earthing provided is as per the AF/US-14: To provide earthing as per AFC requirement
requirement and provide earthing for the equipment
4. Power supplies
AF/US-15: Install/Lay the Power cable from UPS panel to AFC room AF/US-15: Provide permanent power from UPS with suitable protection
5. Cable Routing and Penetration Installation devices as per AFC requirement
AF/US-16: To do the cable routing as per the cabling scheme for power AF/US-16: Provide cable containment as per AFC Contractor’s requirements
& data.
6. Furniture
AF/US-17: To check the details of Granite counter for TIW provided by the AF/US-17: To provide Granite Counter for TIW at Ticket office as per
station contractor (Contractor-B). To provide the other furniture as is in the approved design.
scope of AFC Contractor.
7. Labelling and Statutory Signs
AF/US-18: To do the signage under the scope of AFC Contract., specific to AFC AF/US-18: To provide the signage for operational requirements
equipment and cabling.

P a g e | 59
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Contract A: AFC Contract B : UG Stations (UGC-01) (Interface Sheet # : 4/4

(Interface Lead) follower)

8. EMC site Certification

AF/US-19: To check and confirm that the EMC requirements of AFC are met AF/US-19: To meet the EMC requirement of the AFC in the station.

9. Review of documents & Drawings

AF/US-20: To review the as built drawings and documents as per the
AF/US-20: To provide the as built documents as per the documentation plan
documentation plan.

10. Utilities Required for Site works

AF/US-21: To avail for installation of AFC equipment : AF/US-21: To provide the following utilities for installation of AFC equipment,
1. Temporary power 1. Temporary power
2. Lighting 2. Lighting
3. Air-conditioning at TO and SCR 3. Air-conditioning at TO and SCR

11. Storage at Site

AF/US-22: To check the adequacy of the temporary storage space for AFC AF/US-22: To provide temporary storage space for the AFC equipment at
equipment at the concourse level and avail. concourse level.

12. Fire alarm interface

AF/ES-22A: Shall Install and connect the cable from AFC panel to Fire alarm
AF/ES-22A: Provide the interface terminal to AFC contractor.
control panel.
Contract A(AFC) TEST & COMMISIONNING STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)

AF/US-23: Contractor-A shall jointly test the UPS systems AF/US-23: Contractor-B shall jointly test the UPS systems with contractor-A

Contract A(AFC) MAINTENANCE STAGE Contract B(UG-Station)

NIL NIL

P a g e | 60
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Attachment E Indicative Master Interface Matrix

P a g e | 61
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Attachment F Part 1 – Interface Coordination Sheet Form

P a g e | 62
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Attachment F Part 2 - Interface Coordination sheet Format

The following table provides an example of the Interfacing Party Contract codes, which can
be used when preparing / updating the Contractor’s Interface Coordination Sheet, which
should be prepared on the basis of a separate Excel spreadsheet for each Interfacing Party.
These Interfacing Party Contract codes shall be finalised by the Engineer and made available
to the Project Contractors.

Interface Party Codes

CVT Civil Tunnels
CSN Civil Stations
CVD Civil Depot
ARS Architectural Stations
ARD Architectural Depot
BSS Building Service Stations
BSD Building Service Depot
DEE Depot Equipment
AFC Automatic Fare Collection
SGC Signalling and Communications
LEC Lifts and Escalators
VAC Ventilation & Air-Conditioning
TVS Tunnel Ventilation System
PST Traction Power (Includes OCS & SCADA)
RST Rolling Stock
TWK Track work

P a g e | 63
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Attachment F Part 3 - Interface Coordination Sheet Format

The following table describes the Interface Status with codes to be used in preparing /
updating the Interface Coordination sheet.

Interface Status Codes & Meanings

Code
Interface Status Description of Status
for Log
Both Contractors have not agreed the conditions for
To be coordinated TBC
this interface
Both Contractors have agreed that the interface is
Coordinated COR
valid
One Contractor does not agree the conditions for this
Not coordinated NCOR
interface
The Contractor responsible for the
Received REC design/construction element has received the
information/documents required
The Contractor responsible for providing the
information/documents to progress the
Provided PRO
design/construction element has provided the
documents to the Interfacing Party
The Contractor has accepted the proposed Interface
Accepted ACP
Design or Construction element
Either of the Contractors have not accepted the
Not Accepted NACP
proposed Design/Construction element
Both Contractors have accepted the proposed
Interface Design or Construction element and no
Propose closeout PCO other requirements are outstanding.
Both Parties have agreed to sign the Confirmation of
Coordination Form
The final Interface Documentation together with
Confirmation of Coordination Form has been sent to
Closed out CO
the Interface Coordination Manager for closing the
interface
The Interface design or construction element has
Superseded SUP
been superseded

P a g e | 64
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Attachment G – Confirmation of Coordination Form

Pune Metro

Ref No.
CONFIRMATION OF COORDINATION
CONTRACT: TRANSMITTAL No.:
TITLE:
ACTIVITY NO.:
GENERAL DESCRIPTION:

SIGNATURE OF INTERFACING CONTRACTORS:

Interfacing Contractor Authorized Name Signature Date Reviewed Comment

Signatures above confirm that this design document has been reviewed as part of the
coordination process.

NOTE: Where Contractors are not in agreement with the details on this submission, they are to
comment above and advise the interfacing party in question requesting accommodation of the
requirement and advise the Engineer under separate cover and report progress in Monthly
Report / Coordination Meetings.

P a g e | 65
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Attachment H - Guidance Notes for the Preparation of Interface Management Programme

1. The programme shall be prepared and submitted in bar chart format.

2. The bar chart shall be formed by activities grouped by major Zones of Interface.

3. The detail of each bar chart activity shall demonstrate the Contractor’s understanding of
the scope of work of any Interfacing Contractor who is to supply input to the Contractor,
in order for him to achieve an integrated coordinated design.

4. The bars shown on the bar chart shall be annotated with details of the information

expected from the Interfacing Contractors, and highlight any target dates to receive or
produce information.

5. Information relating to contractual milestone dates shall be shown on both the

Contractor’s and Interfacing Contractors’ schedules.

6. The prime purpose of the document is to assist in ensuring that a coordinated design,
construction, testing and commissioning is achieved. This document shall be forwarded
to Interfacing Contractors for comment and agreement on a regular basis.

7. A complementary table of activities and dates should be prepared for ease of reference.

P a g e | 66
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 19 – Design and Construction Interface Management

Attachment I - Guidance Notes for the Preparation of Interface Management Plan

The purpose of this Plan is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to achieve a fully
coordinated design, which is compatible with that design carried out by Interfacing
Contractors.
This document shall describe each of the component parts, within Zones of Interface, of the
design, which require input from Interfacing Contractors. The descriptions should include
details relating to the inputs required from both the Contractor and Interfacing Contractor,
to achieve a fully coordinated design. The document should also be complementary to the
IMPG, which details the proposed schedule and timings of each of the interfacing activities.
This document shall also detail the proposed interfacing requirements to be met by all
Interfacing Contractors. The Contractor shall ensure that this document is acceptable to the
Interfacing Contractors and that they are able to comply with all of its requirements. This is
to be achieved by document exchanges and discussions to achieve agreement of
documents.
The Plan shall therefore:
i) Detail each of the component parts of the Project, which require the input of
Interfacing Contractors to achieve a coordinated design. It shall describe the various
disciplines and detail the technical input from others that will be required to achieve
a coordinated design.
ii) Cover the whole duration of the Works and be complementary to the IMPG, which
details the proposed/agreed schedule and timings.
iii) Be given by the Contractor to other Interfacing Contractors for their information and
agreement.
iv) Be developed in association with the process of increasing knowledge of the design
and shall reflect the agreements reached by the Contractor and the Interfacing
Contractors as the Project progresses. The Plan shall be updated on a quarterly basis
to reflect this developing status.
The Status of any interface at any point in time shall be identified by one of the following
conditions;
 to be coordinated
 coordinated
 not coordinated
 received
 provided
 accepted
 not accepted
 propose close-out
 superseded
 closed out

P a g e | 67
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 20 – Occupational, Health, Safety And
Environmental

May 2018
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

1. Scope
1.1 The Employer’s Requirements OHS&E Volume 1 (Appendix-20) details the
requirements of the Employer for Safety, Health and Environmental control
measures associated with the Contractor and any other agency, to be practiced
on all Pune Metro Rail Limited construction sites or associated premises.
1.2 Application of this document
1.2.1 The Employer’s Requirements, OHS&E Volume 1 applies to all aspects of the
Contractor’s scope of work, including that conducted by their appointed sub-
Contractor and other agencies on their behalf. There shall be no activity
associated with the Pune Metro underground section - Agriculture College to
Swargate which is exempted from the purview of this document. This Volume 1
is supplemented with a further 2 OHS&E Volumes for ease of reference (
Document, Section XIV). Their individual scope and applicability is as follows;
1.2.2 OHS&E Volume 1 is the controlling document for all Contracts and is fixed
throughout the term of the project. Compliance with OHS&E Volume 1 is
mandatory.
1.2.3 OHS&E Volume 2 (Reference Document, Section XIV) provides Safety & Health
guidance that the Contractor may choose to use unless stated as mandatory
within Volume 1. The contents of OHS&E Volume 2 remain subject to revision by
the Engineer in the event of new Legislation or changing circumstances. The
information contained within Volume 2 shall be used by the Engineer in assessing
the sufficiency and suitability of the Contractor’s management systems and
performance.
1.2.4 OHS&E Volume 3 ( Document, Section XIV) provides Environmental guidance and
procedural requirements for the project. Volume 3 remains subject to periodic
revision and updating.
. 1.3 Purpose of this document
The purpose of this document, the Employer’s Requirements, OHS&E Volume 1 is
to provide Contractors and other interested parties with the mandatory
requirements relating to Health, Safety and the Environment practices and
performance expectations on the Pune Metro underground section -
Agriculture College to Swargate .
This document:
a) Describes the OHS&E interfaces between the Employer, Engineer and the
Contractor;
b) Details the processes by which the Contractor shall manage OHS&E issues
while carrying out the works under the contract and;
c) Describes by reference, the practices, procedures and requirements
pertaining to the Pune Metro underground section - Agriculture College to
Swargate.
1.4 Pune Metro Rail Limited OHS&E Objectives
Pune Metro Rail Limited has identified five principle objectives for attainment
during the Pune Metro underground section - Agriculture College to
Swargate . These long term objectives shall be supported with quarterly, short
and medium term objectives to enable structured advancement in overall
performance. Our Short and medium term objectives also aims to facilitate
Pag e |1
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

effective monitoring and measurement to identify where a directional change

may be necessary. Our Long term objectives are:
To eliminate or minimize the unwanted effects of hazards and risks to personnel,
members of the public and other stakeholders who may be exposed to the
undertakings associated with the construction of the Pune Metro underground
section - Agriculture College to Swargate Establish an effective and robust
OHS&E management system that will enable Contractors to achieve
international recognition and registration to the BS EN 18001:2007 Series.
1. Actively contribute to Contractors development through support,
encouragement, determination in control and transfer of knowledge and
skills in order to make the move from traditional compliance driven
management through to risk managed processes.
2. To simplify the risk concept, to ensure a sensible approach to risk
management and simplify hazard awareness training through adoption of the
ALARP (As low as reasonably practicable) principles.
3. To practice ‘Best Practice’ within the construction industry - Establishing a
work environment that conforms to international health & safety standards
and make recommendation to improve effectiveness of regulations both
nationally and locally.
2 Reference publications
BS EN ISO 9000:2005 - Quality management systems — Fundamentals and
vocabulary
BS EN ISO 9001:2008, Quality management systems — Requirements
BSENISO 14001:2004, Environmental management systems — Requirements with
guidance
BS EN ISO 19011:2002, Guidelines for quality and/or environmental management
systems auditing
BS OHSAS 18001:2007, Occupational health and safety management systems
Requirements
BS OHSAS 18002, Occupational health and safety management systems –
Guidelines for the implementation of BS OHSAS 18001
PAS 99, Specification of common management system requirements as a
framework for integration
International Labour Organization: 2001, Guidelines on occupational health and
safety management systems — ILO-OSH 2001
Health & Safety Guidance (HSG) Health and Safety Executive publications United
Kingdom
3 Terms and definitions
Acceptable risk. Risk that has been reduced to a level that can be tolerated by the
organization having regard to its legal obligations and its own OHS&E policy
Accident. Incident giving rise to injury, ill health or fatality
ALARP (As low as reasonably practicable) principles.
Audit. Systematic, independent and documented process for obtaining “audit
evidence” and evaluating it objectively to determine the extent to which “audit
criteria” are fulfilled

Pag e |2
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

BOCWA. Building and Other Construction Workers (Regular Employment and

Conditions of Service) Act, 1996
BOCWR. Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment
and Conditions of Service) Central Rules, 1998
BOCWWCA means Building and Other Construction Workers’ Welfare Cess Act,
1996
BOCWWCR means Building and Other Construction Workers Welfare Cess Rules
1998
MBOCWR means Maharashtra Building and Other Construction Workers
(Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Rules, 2003
Chief Safety Expert. An officer nominated by NMRL who is the overall responsible
for monitoring all OHS&E functions prescribed in this document.
PMRL. Pune Metro Rail Limted
CIIBC means Chief Inspector of Inspection of Building and Other Constructions of
Government of Maharashtra
Competent person. Person with the appropriate combination of skill, knowledge,
qualifications and experianceContinual improvement. Recurring process of
enhancing the OHS&E management system in order to achieve improvements in
overall OHS&E performance consistent with the organization’s OHS&E policy
Corrective action. Action to eliminate the cause of a detected nonconformity or
other undesirable situation
Design Risk Assessments. Used to record the actions of designers when reducing
risks in construction and for future repairs and maintenance issues.
DG means Director General of Ministry of Labour, Govt. of India.
Employer. Pune Metro Rail Limited (PMRL).
Hazard. Source, situation, or act with a potential for harm in terms of human
injury or ill health, or a combination of these
Hazard identification. Process of recognizing that a hazard exists and defining its
characteristics
Health surveillance. Monitoring health of employees to detect signs or symptoms
of work-related ill health so that steps can be taken to eliminate, or reduce the
probability of, further harm
HIRA means Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment
Ill health. Identifiable, adverse physical or mental condition arising from and/or
made worse by a work activity and/or work-related situation
Incident. Work-related event(s) in which an injury or ill health (regardless of
severity) or fatality occurred, or could have occurred. An accident is an incident
which has given rise to injury, ill health or fatality. An incident where no injury, ill
health, or fatality occurs may also be referred to as a “near-miss”, or “dangerous
occurrence”.
Interested party. Person or group, inside or outside the workplace, concerned
with or affected by the OHS&E performance of an organization
Nonconformity. Non-fulfilment of a requirement; A nonconformity can be any
deviation from: relevant work standards, practices, procedures, legal
requirements, etc. or OHS&E management system requirements. Nonconformity
Pag e |3
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

can be any deviation from: — relevant work standards, practices, procedures,

legal requirements, etc. — OHS&E management system criteria.
Notifications (Central and state) – collection of cess.
OHS&E management system. Part of an organization’s management system used
to develop and implement its OHS&E policy and manage its OHS&E risks. A
management system is a set of interrelated elements used to establish policy and
objectives and to achieve those objectives. A management system includes
organizational structure, planning activities (including for example, risk
assessment and the setting of objectives), responsibilities, practices, procedures,
processes and resources.
OHS&E objective. OHS&E goal, in terms of OHS&E performance that an
organization sets itself to achieve.
OHS&E performance. Measurable results of an organization’s management of its
OHS&E risks
OHS&E policy. Overall intentions and direction of an organization related to its
OHS&E performance as formally expressed by top management
Preventive action. Action to eliminate the cause of a potential nonconformity as
explained in this clause 3 – term and definitions or other undesirable potential
situation
Procedure. Specified way to carry out an activity or a process
Record. Document stating results achieved or providing evidence of activities
performed
Risk. Combination of the likelihood of an occurrence of a hazardous event or
exposure(s) and the severity of injury or ill health that can be caused by the event
or exposure(s)
Risk assessment. Process of evaluating the risk(s) arising from a
hazard(s),takinginto account the adequacy of any existing controls, and deciding
whether or not the risk(s) is acceptable
Risk control. Selection and application of suitable measures to reduce risk
Shall. Indicates a mandatory requirement within this document
Stakeholders. Those with a interest in an organization’s achievements that
includes, but is not limited to, internal and “outsourced” employees, customers,
suppliers, partners, employees, distributors, investors, insurers, shareholders,
owners, government and regulators.
Status review. Formal evaluation of the OHS&E management system
Top management. Person or group of people who direct and control an
organization at the highest level
Worker representative. Representative of employee occupational health and
safety

Pag e |4
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

4 SHE management system requirements

4.1 General requirement
4.1.1 The Contractor shall define and document the scope of its Occupational Safety
Health and Environmental (OHS&E) management system to meet legal
requirements and the requirements of Pune Metro Rail Limited as stated within
this document.
4.2 The Contractor’s OHS&E management system shall determine how the
organisation shall document, implement, maintain and continually improve upon
performance in accordance with the requirements of the International OHSAS
Standard to which the Employer is commited

Pag e |5
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

PMRL OHS&E Policy Statement of Intent

Pune Metro Rail Limited consider that health, safety and environmental is of
equal importance in comparison to any other aspect of business management
and as such is committed to promoting high standards of safety, health,
environment and welfare on all of their sites and premises. To achieve this Pune
Metro Rail Limited shall:
 Constantly work towards improving the safety culture at all levels.
 Ensure compliance with all relevant legal duties in respect of health and
safety at work legislation.
 Provide adequate resources for planning and controlling working conditions
and safe systems of work.
 Work with our Contractors and suppliers to improve their safety
performance, by Measuring and monitoring their performance.
Responsibilities and performance requirements for Safety, Health and the
Environment are summarised as follows: -
 All Contractors, employees, sub-Contractors, consultants, suppliers and
visitors have a duty to play an active role in achieving our objectives through
compliance with their legal obligations and this Safety Policy.
 Participation and consultation are vital aspects of this Policy and to the
achievement of our objectives. Contractors and Staff are encouraged and
expected to:
 Discuss safety, health and welfare matters with their managers, and company
Safety, Health & Environmental Representatives who will offer or obtain
further expert advice, where necessary.
 Co-operate at all times; contribute good ideas and improvements; report
defects and short falls.
The correction of any breach of statutory provision or Pune Metro Rail Limited
requirements on health and safety shall take priority. Should appropriate action
not be taken to meet the required standards, this will be taken seriously and may
lead to disciplinary action being taken.
This Policy Statement shall be displayed prominently on all Pune Metro Rail Limited
sites and offices and will be kept under review to ensure its relevance

Managing Director
Pune Metro Rail Limited

Pag e |6
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

4.3 Planning
4.3.1 Hazard identification, risk assessment and determining controls
[Link] The Contractor shall submit a procedure detailing the process in place for the
identification of Hazards and Risks and the determination of control measures
including the relevant standards as per clause [Link] and [Link] of this
controlled document. The Procedure shall incorporate the Employer’s
Requirements within this and other applicable OHS&E Volumes.
[Link] Management of Change
All temporary and permanent changes to organisational, personnel, systems,
procedures, equipment, products, materials or substances shall be evaluated by
the Contractor and managed to ensure that health, safety and environmental
risks arising from these changes remain at an acceptable level. Changes made by
the Contractor are subject to submittal and notice of no objection by the
Engineer prior to adopting change.
[Link] Risk Register & Hazard Log
1) The Contractor’s Construction Health and safety Plan shall contain a
detailed ‘Risk Register’ and ‘Hazard Log’ specific to the project. The register
and log shall be assessed against the NMRL OHS&E requirements Volume 2.
2) The Hazard Log shall identify future method statement, risk assessment and
operational procedures pertaining to specific equipment and operations in
relation risk and local environmental constraints. Construction phase
OHS&E Plans shall not be accepted without a fully completed Hazard Log
and Risk Register.
[Link] Method Statements
1) Method statements are to be submitted to the Engineer a minimum of 21
days prior to task commencement to ensure sufficient time is available for
review and notice of no objection.
2) Method statements shall contain the information requirements as prescript
within the NMRL OHS&E Volume 2.
3) Method statements shall incorporate the control measures within the
process methodology as identified within the risk assessment.
4) A copy of the relevant method statement for the activity being undertaken
shall be available on site for reference by all site management and
supervisors.
[Link] Risk Assessment production & submittal
1) Risk assessments shall contain as a minimum, the information as specified
within the NMRL OHS&E Volume 2. The Contractor may choose to use their
own format however the risk tolerances, probability and consequences
must be included.
2) Risk assessments shall be produced and submitted to the Employer’s a
minimum of 21 days prior to task commencement for notice of no
objection. Risk assessments may be submitted independently or as part of a
Method Statement.
3) Generic risk assessments other than routine activities of low risk shall not
be accepted by the Employer.

Pag e |7
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

Risk assessments shall be regularly reviewed to ensure they remain suitable and
sufficient. Risk assessment reviews shall be undertaken where an incident has
occurred and when a change in location may introduce additional risks from
construction activities.
4) Substances hazardous to health shall be subject to assessment by the
Contractor. Where Hazardous substances are identified for use within a
process the assessment and determining controls shall be included within
the relative method statement.
[Link] Design Risk Assessment
1) Design Risk Assessments shall be submitted to the Engineer for granting of
Notice of no objection. Design risk assessments shall accompany all drawing
submittals for operations involving;
 Temporary works,
 Formwork & false-work
 Heavy lifting equipment.
2) Drawings shall not be accepted by the Engineer without an
accompanying design risk assessment.
4.3.2 Legal and other requirements
[Link] Contractor shall comply with all legal obligations and the requirements of Pune
Metro Rail Limited as contained herein.
a) Contractor shall develop thorough understanding about Building and Other
Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act
1996, Central Rules 1998, The Building & Other Construction Workers Welfare
Cess Act 1996 and Central Welfare Rules 1998, Maharashtra Building and Other
Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service)
Rules, 2003, Building and Other Construction Workers Welfare Cess act 1996
and Central Rules 1998, Notification [Central & State] – Collection of Cess, not
only to satisfy the Inspectors’ perspective but the use of legislation as the strong
tool for effective SHE management at construction worksites. Contractor is
strongly advised to practice the principle of voluntary compliance.
b) In order to facilitate the Contractor for better understanding on the various
provisions of the above Act and Rules, a tabulated information highlighting the
Sections/Rules referring to the corresponding registration of Contractors,
maintenance of registers and records, hours of work and wages, cess & welfare,
medical facilities and safety requirements are given in Appendix No. 1. It is an
indicative one and not a limiting list.
[Link] Indian statutory requirements
The Contractor shall abide by all national, state and local bye-laws. It is the duty of
the Contractor to ensure that all Sub-contractors appointed also comply with
their legal obligations as listed below but not limited to:
i. Indian Electricity Act 2003 and Rules 1956
ii. National Building Code, 2005
iii. Factories Act, 1948,
iv. Motor Vehicles Act as amended in 1994, The Central Motor Vehicles Rules,
1989.

Pag e |8
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

v. Indian Road Congress Code IRC: SP: 55-2001 ‘Guidelines on Safety In Road
Construction Zones.
vi. Indian Road Congress Code IRC: SP: 55-2001 ‘Guidelines on Safety In Road
Construction Zones’
vii. The Petroleum Act, 1934 and Rules 1976
viii. Gas Cylinder Rules, 2003
ix. Indian Explosives Act. 1884, along with the Explosives substance Act 1908
and The explosives Rules 1983
x. The (Indian) Boilers Act, 1923
xi. The Public Liability Insurance Act 1991 and Rules 1991
xii. Minimum Wages Act, 1948 and Rules 1950
xiii. Contract Labour Act, 1970 and Rules 1971
xiv. Child Labour (Prohibitions & Regulations) Act, 1986 and Rules 1950
xv. Environment Protection Act, 1986 and Rules 1986
xvi. Air (Prevention and control of Pollution) Act, 1981
xvii. Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974
xviii. The Noise Pollution (Regulation & Control) Rules, 2000
xix. Notification on Control of Noise from Diesel Generator (DG) sets,2002
xx. Recycled Plastic Usage Rules, 1998
xxi. Notification, Central Ground Water Board, Act January 1997
xxii. Manufacture, Storage & Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989
xxiii. Chemical Accidents (Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response)
Rules, 1996
xxiv. The Hazardous Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 1989
xxv. Hazardous Waste Management Rules 1989 (as amended in 1999)
xxvi. Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules
xxvii. Fly ash utilization notification, Sept 1999 as amended in August 2003
xxviii. Workman Compensation Act, 1923 along with allied Rules
xxix. Guidelines of Pune Urban Development Authority
xxx. Guidelines of Maharashtra Pollution Control Board
[Link] International Standards, Guidelines & ISO Certifications
1) If the requirements stated in this document are in conflict or inconsistent with
the requirements of applicable laws, the more stringent requirements shall
apply.
2) The Contractor complies with norms, standards and discharge limit values
recommended by the specialized international organizations affiliated to the
United Nations, as described in the item 3 below.
3) The specialized international organizations affiliated to the United Nations
referred to in Clause 9.2 include:
- World Bank, including the IFC and its Environmental, Health and Safety
guidelines available from [Link]
For matters not addressed in the IFC above document, the norms, standards and

Pag e |9
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

discharge limit values of the following institutions shall apply:

- World Health Organization (WHO)
- International Labour Organization (ILO) (in particular in pursuance to
Clauses 6.20, 6.21, 6.23 and 6.24 of the GCC)
- International Maritime Organization (IMO)
4) The works shall be undertaken in accordance with the applicable international
guidelines, standards and specifications on OHS&E and every Contractor shall
actively pursue the achievement of:
 BS EN OHSAS 18001:2007 - OHS Management Systems
 ISO 14001-2004: Environmental Management Systems
5) The process of international certification to BS EN 18001:2007 and ISO 14001-
2004 standard shall commence immediately after the award of Contract
through appointment of ISO accrediting body for obtaining the certification.
Should this not be undertaken by the Contractor within 3 months of the
Contract award, the Engineer shall appoint at the Contractor’s cost.
6) Should the Contractor already posses such certification, the scope of the Pune
Metro Project must be included on the Contractor’s certification within 1 year
of Contract commencement and proof of such attainment demonstrated to
Pune Metro Rail Limited.
4.3.3 Objectives and programme(s)
[Link] The Contractor shall maintain procedures to establish detailed OHS&E objectives
and performance criteria. Such objectives and performance criteria shall be
developed to incorporate the Pune Metro Rail Limited policy and strategic
OHS&E objectives. The Contractor’s objectives shall be quantified, wherever
practicable, and identified with defined timescales. The Contractor is required to
submit for notice of no objection their procedure and objectives as per clause
[Link] of this control document.
4.4 Implementation and operation
4.4.1 Resources, roles, responsibility, accountability and authority
[Link] The Contractor shall detail within the Construction Health, Safety and
Environmental Plan the planned roles and resources allocated for the PMRL
project. In addition to the staffing arrangements the Contractor shall prescribe
the responsibilities specific to role, accountability and the authority under which
they operate.
[Link] Safety, health & environmental resources shall be provided by the Contractor as
per the Contract value in table – 1

P a g e | 10
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

Table 1 Mandatory Contractor OHS&E management resource requirement

1 2 3 4 5 6
Contract Chief OHS&E Senior Junior Safety Senior Junior
Value in Manager OHS&E OHS&E Steward Electrical Electrical
(Cr.) Manager Manager Engineer Engineer
Up to 2 - - 1 - 1
Up to 10 - 1 1
Up to 25 1 1
Refer to Refer Refer to
Up to 100 1 Refer to 1
note 1 to note 2
note 1
Up to 250 1 note 1 1

250 or 1 1
Mor
e

7 8 9
Contract *Junior SHE (Fire) Occupational Health Officer with Environmental
Value in Manager/ ** Senior SHE necessary nursing assistants Manager
(Cr.) (Fire) Manager (Refer note 3)
Up to 2 - - -
Up to 10 - 1 (PT) 1
Up to 25 1* 1 (PT) 1
Up to 100 1* Refer to note 1
1 (FT) 1
Up to 250 1** 2 (FT) 1

250 or 2 ** 2 (FT) 1 with support

Mor staff
e
Notes :
1) Qualified and trained OHS&E Professionals as per Table 2 with required support staff to
be deployed at each worksite at each shift. Qualification of appointed OHS&E personnel
shall be in accordance with Section 4.4.2 competence, Awareness and Training within
this document
2) Qualified and trained Electrical Engineers/supervisors to be deployed at each worksite
for each shift.
3) PT means Part Time and FT means Full Time
4) Senior SHE (Traffic) Engineer Post and Barricade Manager (including the staff) Posts are
applicable to contracts where the work has to be executed either below or over the
right-of-way like Viaduct, Tunnel Contracts wherein erection and maintenance of
barricades are paramount important.
5) One Barricade Manager supported by required supervisors and workmen

P a g e | 11
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

6) One Housekeeping Manager supported by required supervisors and workmen.

7) The Contractor appoints a person responsible for relations with external stakeholders
for the site: local communities, administrative authorities, and representatives of
economic activities located within one hour travel from the Worksite. This person will
be based on the Worksite on a permanent basis. Administrations and local authorities
will be informed of the existence of this person as of the start of works and will be
provided with telephone contact details so as to be able to contact this person if a
problem arises during the execution of works or concerning the behavior of the
Contractor’s employees outside the Worksite.
[Link] Responsibility
1) The General Manager of the Contractor is responsible and accountable for
compliance with the conditions and clauses within this document.
2) The General Manager is responsible to ensure that the necessary
resources are allocated and made available to meet the requirements as
laid out within this document and other referenced materials to include
Legal Requirements (as mentioned in clause 4.3.2).
3) For all works carried out by the Contractor and appointed Sub-
contractor’s, the responsibility for ensuring OHS&E resources remains with
the main Contractor. Activities undertaken by the Contractor’s Sub-
contractors shall be monitored by the Contractor at all times to ensure
compliance with agreed safe systems of working.
4) All Contractor’s OHS&E personnel shall report to the Chief OHS&E
Manager who shall report directly to the General Manager or Corporate
Safety Director of the Contractor’s organisation. This shall be reflected in
the Contractor’s organisation charts within the OHS&E plan and Quality
Management Plan.
5) The Employer shall monitor adherence to the provisions of Table 1. Where
deviation is evident this shall be recorded as a non-conformance.
6) The Contractor shall provide all OHS&E personnel with such facilities,
equipment and information that are necessary to enable them to dispatch
their duties effectively.
7) The Contractor’s Safety Managers, Safety Advisors and Officers are
responsible for ensuring that reports on the performance of the OHS&E
management system are presented to top management for review and
used as a basis for improvement of the OHS&E management system.
8) The Contractor’s Safety Managers, Safety Advisors and Officers are
responsible for independently monitoring the operations of the
Contractor, where deficiencies are identified they are responsible to report
their findings immediately to the Site Engineer in charge who then must
take action as directed.
[Link] Accountability
1) In cases where the Contractor fails to provide the minimum required
manpower as illustrated in Table 1, or fails to fill vacancies created within
30 days, the same may be provided by the Engineer at the Contractor’s
cost. Any administrative expenses involved in providing the same for
example, vacancy advertisements or recruitment consultant charges, shall
also be at the cost of Contractor.
P a g e | 12
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

2) No OHS&E personnel shall be permitted to do any work which is

unconnected to, inconsistent with or detrimental to the performance of
the OHS&E duties.
3) Supervisors must ensure that the employees under their direct supervision
are working incompliance with the approved safe systems of working.
[Link] Authority
1) The Contractor’s Safety Managers, Safety Advisors and Officers authority
shall be stated within the Construction Health and Safety Plan and the
authority level must be communicated to all Contractor’s Staff including
Sub-contractors.
2) The Contractor’s Safety Managers, Safety Advisors and Officers shall have
the authority as assigned by the General Manager to suspend works where
deviation from an approved method of working occurs that presents a risk
of injury, equipment or property damage.
3) The Engineer shall have the right to stop the work if in his opinion the work
is being carried out in such a way that a risk of injury, property and or
equipment damage may exist. The Contractor shall not proceed with the
work until remedial works have been complied with under the
direction and satisfaction of the Employer. Should the Contractor continue
to work without implementing the Engineer’s instruction, clause [Link]
shall be applied to the individual responsible for the decision to proceed.
4) The Contractor shall not be entitled to any damages or compensation for
stoppage of work, due to safety reasons. The period of such stoppages of
work shall not be taken as an extension of time for completion of the
facilities and will not be the ground for waiver of levy of liquidated
damages.
4.4.2 Competence, training and awareness
[Link] The Contractor shall ensure that the recruitment, selection and placement
processes shall be in place to ensure that personnel are qualified, competent,
and physically fit for assigned tasks. The Contractor shall produce a procedure
that shall be made available to the Engineer for notice of no objection as per
Clause [Link].2 of this document. The procedure shall define the processes in
place to ensure competence.
[Link] The Contractor’s attention is drawn to Part 3 General Conditions Clause 6.9 (d),
whereby any person employed thereon, who in the opinion of the Engineer,
misconducts himself or is incompetent or negligent or fails to conform with any
particular provisions with regard to safety, health or environment which is set
out in the Contractor’s OHS&E Plan or a requirement of the Contract, or persists
in any conduct which is prejudicial to safety or health, shall be removed from site
immediately, and such persons shall not be employed again upon the Works. The
decision of the Engineer in this regard shall be final.
[Link] Notice of No Objection from the Engineer
1) The name, educational qualifications and work experience for all persons
intended for a Contractor’s OHS&E role shall be submitted to the Engineer
for notice prior to employment. Only upon notice of no objection by the
Engineer shall OHS&E personnel be authorised to work on a PMRC site.
2) No Contractor shall engage SHE manpower from any outsourcing agencies
P a g e | 13
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

in which case the effectiveness would be lost. All SHE manpower shall be on
the payroll of the main Contractor only and not on the payroll of any
subcontractor or outsourcing manpower agencies etc. This condition does
not apply to positions like traffic marshals who are engaged almost on a
daily requirement basis.
3) All SHE personnel are to report to the Chief SHE Manager who shall report
directly to the Chief Project Manager. The Employer shall monitor
adherence to this procedure at all times. In case of non-adherence penalty
shall be levied as indicated in the penalty clause.
4) The minimum Employer’s requirements of such facilities / equipment’s to
be provided for SHE personnel are given in table below.
5) The Contractor shall appoint the required OHS&E personnel in accordance
with the qualifications and experience as listed in table – 2
Table 2 OHS&E Personnel Qualifications & Experience

Item Designation Qualification Experience

(Years)
1 Chief OHS&E The Chief OHS&E Manager shall be qualified in any 15
Manager of the following degrees/diplomas:
Post Graduate Diploma in Industrial Safety &
Environmental Management (PGDISEM)
M.E. in Industrial Safety from NIT,
B.E. in Fire and Safety Engg.
B.E. with advanced Safety Management Diploma
B.E / [Link]., with one year Full Time advanced
Safety diploma
B.E/[Link] full time Degree / Diploma in Safety.
International qualifications, CSP (Certified Safety
Professional), NEBOSH, MIOSH, MSISO etc
2 Senior OHS&E As stated in Sl. No:1 and in addition the 2 years for
Manager following categories: category (i)
i) [Link].(Physics/Chemistry/Maths) with one (ii) and (iii)
year Full Time advanced Safety diploma
ii) [Link]. / Diploma in Engg. with advanced
safety Management Diploma
iii) [Link]. (Physics/Chemistry/Maths) with One
year Full Time diploma in Safety Engineering
iv) Any Graduate or diploma holder with 7
years of work experience in a OHS&E
department upon approval of Engineer.

P a g e | 14
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

3 Junior OHS&E i) Degree in Science / Diploma in Engineering with i) 2 Years

Manager Govt. recognized safety diplomas
ii)Any Graduate or diploma holder with 5 years of
work experience in a OHS&E department with
prior approval of Engineer (on a case to case
basis)

4 Safety Steward Any basic qualification with any OHS&E related 2 Years
certificate courses.
5 Senior Electrical Degree in Electrical Engineering + Govt. Recognized 2 Years
Manager Electrical Licence holder
6 Electrical Diploma in Electrical Engineering + Govt. 1 Year
Manager Recognized Electrical Licence holder
7 Senior SHE i) B.E. (Fire) from National Fire Service College, 2 (for
(Fire) Pune category
Manager ii) B.E (Fire & Safety) from Cochin University (i) and (ii)
Graduate with any Govt. recognized diploma in Fire only)
Safety with 5 years of experience
8 Junior SHE Any Diploma holder with any Govt. recognized 1 Year
(Fire) diploma in Industrial Fire Safety.
Manager
9 Occupational MBBS with Govt. recognized degree/diploma in 1 Year
Health Officer Industrial/ occupational health
10 Environmental Govt. recognized PG Degree / PG Diploma / Degree 2 Years
Manager in Environmental Engineering / Science
11 Senior Traffic Govt. recognized PG Degree / Degree / Diploma in 1 Year
Engineer Traffic/Transportation Engineering or Planning

12 Housekeeping Any Diploma in Engineering 1 Year

Squad
Manager &
Barricade
Manager
13 Labour Welfare Any degree with Govt. recognized Degree / 1 Years
Officer Diploma / P. G. Diploma in labour welfare related
fields like Law, Personnel/Industrial Ralations etc.

6) In case if the Contractor fail to provide the minimum required manpower as

illustrated above or fail to fill up vacancies created within 14 days, the same
shall be provided by the Employer at Contractor’s cost. Any administrative
expenses involved, providing the same like paper advertisement or
manpower consultant charges, etc shall also be at the cost of Contractor.
7) Where a potential candidate has previously worked in a Metro Rail
construction environment and does not possess the qualifications and or
the necessary experience as listed in Table 2 for the particular role, the
Engineer may upon a successful interview of the candidate grant a waiver
P a g e | 15
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

subject to successful completion of a probation period of 3 months.

8) In order to effectively interact on labour welfare matters with the Engineer
and the statutory authorities enforcing the labour welfare legislations every
Contractor shall employ a full time Labour Welfare Officer duly qualified and
experienced as per clause
[Link] OHS&E Induction Training
1) The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel
(Workers/Staff/Employees/Sub- Contractors and their personnel) working
at the site receive an induction OHS&E training of at least 2 weeks (96 hrs)
explaining the nature of the work, reporting & communication routes the
hazards that may be encountered during the site work and the particular
hazards attached to their own function within the operation. The training
shall cover as a minimum the contents as directed within OHS&E Volume 2
(refer – Part 4, Section XIV).
2) Records of all inductions shall be maintained by the Contractor and be
made available for inspection by the Employer upon request.
3) The Contractor shall provide their workforce and management staff with an
OHS&E induction Handbook containing the information as per the induction
training.
4) A condensed induction shall be given by the Contractor to all visitors. The
induction briefing shall include the risk and hazards associated with the
particular site and the operations being conducted.
5) All personnel shall be issued a temporary ID upon the completion of the
Contractor’s’ induction. The temporary ID shall be signed by the Human
Resource Manager or appointed representative and limited to a 2 week
validity period at which time the temporary ID shall be replaced with a
permanent ID including photograph.
6) Individuals found on site by the Engineer without-dated temporary ID cards
shall be removed from site
[Link] OHS&E Training
1) The Contractor shall assess the training requirements for all the employees,
plan and initiate a training program to fulfil the training needs assessment.
The assessment of training needs shall incorporate all levels of staff
including Sub-contractor’s against an individual’s role, responsibility, ability,
language skill and risk.
2) The Contractor shall produce a ‘Training Implementation Plan’ to
incorporate the findings of the needs assessment.
3) The training needs assessment together with Implementation Plan shall be
submitted to the Engineer for notice of no objection within 4 weeks of
commencement. The Engineer shall evaluate the assessment and plan
against the base line training matrix contained within OHS&E Volume 2
(Reference Document, Section XIV).
4) Records of all training conducted shall be maintained and made available
for inspection by the Engineer upon request. Should the Contractor fail to
provide the training identified within the Contractor’s assessment,
implementation plan and the Engineer’s Training matrix within the agreed

P a g e | 16
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

timescales, this shall be reflected in the potential scores awarded within

the monthly audit report.
5) [Link].6 Specific training with regard to the provisions of the Construction
Safety Plan, and associated operational and system procedures shall be
conducted by the Contractor for all persons with supervision
responsibilities. Records of training including duration shall be maintained.
4.4.3 Communication, participation and consultation
[Link] Communication
1) The Contractor shall produce a ‘High Quality’ quarterly newsletter on a
rotational basis with other Contractors. Rotation shall be announced within
the Engineer’s OHS&E Committee meetings.
2) All Contractors including the Engineer shall provide input into the rotational
Contractor for the newsletter content such as details of accidents, incidents
and near misses together with any lessons learned; specific safety
initiatives; internal competitions and workforce awards etc.
3) The Engineer shall be issued the draft newsletter for review prior to the
Contractor’s publishing.
4) The OHS&E Newsletters shall publicize all Contractors OHS&E performances
over the previous 3 months in relation to OHS&E Audits and shall form the
basis for the Engineer’s Awards programme. Results of audits shall be
provided by the Engineer for inclusion.
5) The quarterly newsletters shall be issued to all interested parties and be
promulgated at site level. Where language barriers exists the contents of
the newsletters shall be communicated by the Workforce Representative to
ensure understanding.
6) At site level the Contractor shall erect pertinent awareness signage and
posters. Posters shall be changed on a monthly basis to maintain impact.
7) Poster campaigns shall be discussed and agreed at the Engineer’s
Committee Meeting to maintain a consistent improvement programme
across all NMRL Sites.
8) Informational posters, banners etc shall be provided in Marathi, Hindi and
English.
9) Toolbox talks or team briefings shall be carried out daily by the Contractor
and correspond to the works activities being undertaken or to
communicate a specific awareness initiative. Toolbox talks shall not replace
professional training.
10) Records of all toolbox talks undertaken together with the date, topic,
participant’s names and signatures shall be maintained and made available
for inspection by the Engineer.
11) Method statement and risk assessment briefings shall be carried out prior
to the commencement of a new task and or when a change to the method
of working arises. Records of all such briefings shall be maintained by the
Contractor.
12) Visitor information signage shall be posted at site entrances detailing where
to report and contact information.
Note: visitors shall be accompanied at all times by site security where office
P a g e | 17
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

locations require walking through operational areas.

13) Public Liaison
14) Public informational signage and Contractor contact information shall be
posted externally to the site.
15) The Contractor shall appoint an individual as a Public liaison Officer to
communicate directly with members of the public regarding forthcoming
operations, what to expect, noise expectancy, duration of operations etc.
[Link] Participation and consultation
1) The Contractor shall establish a Safety Committee within 4 weeks of
commencement that shall be chaired by the Contractor’s Project Manager.
2) The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the establishment of the
Committee together with the committee members’ names and
designation. The Contractor’s Chief Safety Manager, Senior Safety Manager,
Plant & procurement Manager and Human Resources Manager shall form
the minimum committee members. Site based personal shall be
represented within the Committee by the attendance of Site Manager(s)
and the Workforce OHS&E Representative.
3) The Engineer shall be invited to attend the Contractor’s Safety Committee
meetings.
4) The Contractor’s OHS&E Committee shall meet on a monthly basis
throughout the duration of the Contract.
5) The Committee shall review the previous month’s performance, to include,
inspections and audits undertaken, accidents and incidents and any
concerns or complaints that have been raised. Short term objectives and
targets for improvement shall be set for completion by the next scheduled
Committee meeting.
6) The Safety committee shall undertake a formal site inspection to be
scheduled on a 2 monthly basis. The inspection shall review progress
regarding the achievement of short term targets. The Committee shall
produce a report stating progress made together with any corrective
actions required and issue to the Engineer within 7 days following the
Inspection.
7) Minutes of the Committee meeting shall be issued within 2 days and
promulgated to all members including the Engineer. The minutes of
meeting shall also be posted on all sites within the workforce area. The
minutes intended for site communication shall be in both Marathi\Hindi
and English.
[Link] Engineer’s OHS&E Committee
1) A Safety Health and Environmental Committee shall be established by the
Engineer and shall sit every 3 months throughout the project period. All
Contractors shall be required to attend the quarterly meetings who shall be
represented by their General Manager and Chief Safety Manager.
2) The Committee shall review previous performances project wide and set
short and medium term objectives and targets for achievement within the
next reporting period.
3) The Engineer reserves the right to call an Emergency Meeting of the
P a g e | 18
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

Committee members in the event of a serious incident that requires

immediate change to the operational methods of working.
4) Minutes of the Engineers OHS&E Committee shall be promulgated to all
Contractor’s within 3 days.
[Link] Workforce Representation
1) All workers shall have access to a Workforce OHS&E Representative who is
responsible to communicate directly with the labour force with regard to
safety and health. The representative’s name and contact number shall be
posted on all sites externally to the site office The Workforce OHS&E
Representative shall be made a member of the OHS&E Committee and
attend all meetings.
2) The OHS&E Representative shall meet the labour force on a monthly basis
to discuss health, welfare, safety initiatives and or concerns the workforce
may have. Minutes are to be produced by the Representative and issued
formally within 2 days after the meeting date to the Contractor’s Project
Manager, General Manager and Engineer
3) A lockable site suggestion box to which only the workforce OHS&E
Representative shall have access shall be installed on all sites and within
any labour accommodation camps. The suggestion box shall be located
independent from any offices, in a public area and protected from bad
weather. The OHS&E Representative shall inform the workforce that the
purpose of the suggestion box is to provide a means of participation,
communicating ideas and initiatives and also for raising concerns without
fear of reprisal.
4) The contents of all suggestion boxes shall be collected and collated on a
weekly basis. Where concerns or complaints regarding the standards of
health, safety or welfare have been reported these shall be immediately
reported to the Chief OHS&E Manager and Project Manager who shall
investigate the concern(s). Records of such investigations and resultant
outcomes shall be maintained.
5) Ideas, suggestions and concerns raised by the workforce during the OHS&E
representative’s on site monthly meetings shall form an agenda item within
the Contractor’s OHS&E Committee meeting.
6) Where an idea or specific suggestion is subsequently adopted for use by the
Contractor’s OHS&E Committee, the individual shall receive an OHS&E
award as determined by the Contractor.
7) Where Employee awards are issued this shall be notified to the Engineer to
ensure inclusion within the Quarterly Newsletter.
[Link] Contractor Awards
The Employer shall recognize the effort, participation and commitment
demonstrated by the Contractor by nominating awards. The award type shall be
at the discretion of the Employer.
4.4.4 Documentation
[Link] Management System procedures
1) The Contractor is required to submit for notice of no objection, the
organisation’s top tier Management System Procedures as listed in Table 3

P a g e | 19
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

that shall be adopted for use on the NMRL project.

2) System procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer within 4 weeks of
commencement.
3) Construction works shall not commence until such time as a notice of no
objection has been received; applicable to all management system
procedures as listed in Table 3. Should the Contractor commence
operations on site without notice, the Engineer shall award a ‘Zero’ audit
score for every month of non-compliance with this clause.
4) The Engineer shall evaluate the suitability of the Contractor’s system
procedures against the BS EN 18001:2007 and ISO 14001:2004 standards
The submitted procedures shall be individually identified with a unique
reference and detail in sequence the scope, purpose, referenced material
and procedure processes.
5) Where such procedures as listed in Table 3 exist within other areas of the
Contractor’s organisational management systems such as quality
management, these shall not be subject to replication if the procedure
makes specific reference to Health, Safety and Environmental control.
6) Compliance standards against the Contractor’s management system
procedures shall be subject to audit by the Engineer.
Table 3 OHS&E Management System Procedures
Hazard identification, Communication, Environmental Objectives and
risk assessment and participation & Impact Aspect programme(s)
determining controls consultation Assessment
Training, awareness Implementation and Accident & Incident Legal requirements
and competence operation Investigation
Documentation Monitoring & Emergency
Measurement Preparedness Change control
Procurement Record keeping Audit Management review

4.4.5 Control of documents

[Link] All plans, procedures and method statements shall be controlled and subject to
review and formal approval by the Contractor’s Project Manager prior to issue to
the Engineer.
[Link] All documents subject to review by the Engineer shall be signed by the
Contractor’s Project Manager and issued formally.
[Link] Documents shall be issued as per the Engineer’s requirements regarding Quality
Management.
[Link] OHS&E Documents shall be issued, maintained, traceable and available for
retrieval pursuant to the Contractor’s ISO accredited Quality Management
System.
4.4.6 Operational control
[Link] Operational control shall be maintained through the implementation of the
provisions stated within the Contractor’s site specific Construction Health Safety
and Environmental Plans, the contents of which are outlined in Safety, Health and
Environmental Volumes 2 and 3 (Reference Document, Section XIV ) to which the
P a g e | 20
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

Contractor shall comply.

[Link] Construction Phase Health & Safety Plan
1) The Contractor shall produce a Contract specific Construction Health &
Safety Plan (CHSP) and submit to the Engineer within 28 days of
commencement.
2) The Construction Health and Safety Plan shall contain the informational
requirements as per the CHSP contents as prescript within the NMRL
OHS&E Volume 2 (Reference Document, Section XIV), Safety Plan contents.
The CHSP shall be assessed by the Engineer against the provisions as stated
within OHS&E Volume 2 (Reference Document,, Section XIV). Where
deficiencies exist to an extent where an objection is raised, construction
activities shall be suspended until such time as the deficiencies are subject to
corrective action, re-submittal and notice of no objection by the Employer.
3) Delays incurred as a result of the Contractor failing to achieve a Notice of
‘No objection’ status from failing to submit within the specified timescale
or non compliance with OHS&E Volume 2 shall be entirely at the
Contractor’s risk and cost.
4) The Contractor shall undertake a monthly review of the CHSP. The review
shall be recorded and the Engineer notified of any updates.
[Link] Construction Phase Site Environmental Plan
1) The Contractor shall produce a Contract specific Site Environmental Plan
(SEP) and submit to the Engineer within 28 days of commencement.
2) The Site Environmental Plan (SEP) shall contain the informational
requirements as per the contents as prescript within the NMRL
Environmental Management Arrangements Volume 3 (Reference
Document,, Section XIV), Environmental Plan contents.
3) The SEP shall be assessed by the Engineer against the provisions as stated
within the Environmental Management Arrangements Volume 3
(Reference Document,, Section XIV). Where deficiencies exist to an extent
where an objection is raised, construction activities shall be suspended
until such time as the deficiencies are subject to corrective action, re-
submittal and notice of no objection by the Engineer.
4) Delays incurred as a result of the Contractor failing to achieve a ‘Notice of
No objection’ status from failing to submit within the specified timescale or
non compliance with Environmental Management Arrangements Volume 3
(Reference Document,, Section XIV) shall be entirely at the Contractor’s risk
and cost.
5) The Contractor shall undertake a monthly review of the SEP. The review
shall be recorded and the Engineer notified of any updates.
[Link] Operational procedures
1) The Contractor shall identify within the Hazard Log and Risk Register the
operational control procedures that shall be applicable for the NMRL
project under their individual scope of works.
2) Operational procedures shall be submitted for review to the Engineer for
notice of no objection together with the Construction Site Safety Plan
within 4 weeks of commencement.
P a g e | 21
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

3) The operational procedures shall be evaluated by the Engineer against the

requirements stated within OHS&E Volume 2 (Reference Document,`,
Section XIV), international safety standards such as the International
Labour Organisation, European Norms and British Standards where an
equivalent Indian Standard does not exist.
4) Construction works shall not commence until such time as a notice of no
objection has been received; applicable to all operational procedures as
identified within Table 4 and the Contractor’s Hazard Log & Risk Register.
Should the Contractor commence operations on site without notice, the
Engineer shall award a ‘Zero’ audit score for every month of non-
compliance with this clause.
5) The submitted procedures shall be individually identified with a unique
reference and detail in sequence the scope, purpose, referenced material
and procedure processes.
6) In the event that the Contractor is unable to comply with the 28 day
timeframe for submittal of the minimum operational procedures as
detailed within Table 4, the Contractor shall assign an individual
identification reference for the outstanding procedure within the
Construction Health, Safety & Environmental Plan together with the
statement ‘Under process’. The ‘Under Process’ procedure shall be
required to be submitted for notice of no objection a minimum of 28 days
prior to commencement of any activity that involves the application of the
procedure.
Table 4 Operational Procedures
Emergency
Lifting Operations Plant & Equipment Occupational Medical Facilities
& Lifting Health provisions & First Aid
Equipment
Personal Protective Permit to Site Electricity Welding &
Equipment Work & Cutting
Systems Distribution operations
Incident Traffic Hazardous
Investigatio Managemen Working at Height Substances
n t
Site Security Fire Safety Manual Handling Site Set-up
Noise and Welfare
Abrasive Wheels Public Interface Vibration Arrangements

7) The Contractor shall adopt the following colour code scheme across all
NMRL Sites to ensure efficient recognition of relevant personnel.

Safety Helmet Colour

with Logo* Designation
White NMRL Staff and Engineer
Violet Contractor’s Engineers & Supervisors
Blue Sub-Contractor’s Engineers & Supervisors

P a g e | 22
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

Red All Electricians

Green Safety personnel
Orange Security Guards & Traffic Marshals
Yellow General Workforce
White (With VISITOR Sticker) Visitors

Note: LOGO*
(i) Logo shall have its outer dimension 2”*2” and shall be conspicuous
(ii) Logo shall be either painted or affixed
(iii) No words shall come either on Top / Bottom of Logo
Logo of the corresponding main contracting company for their employees and
sub-contracting company for their employees shall only be used.
4.4.7 Emergency preparedness and response
[Link] Emergency Response Plan
1) The Contractor shall prepare a project specific Emergency Plan and submit
to the Engineer for notice of no objection. The Emergency Plan shall be
submitted within 4 weeks of contract Commencement.
2) The plan must identify the potential for emergencies and the provisions for
responding to such emergencies, particular to their environment and
location. The Emergency planning arrangements shall be assessed as per
the provisions in OHS&E Volume 2 for suitability.
3) The Contractor shall ensure that all persons including Sub-contractors
on site are aware of the emergency procedure to follow in the event of an
emergency. Awareness training shall commence at induction and
thereafter through refresher training such as toolbox talks and monthly
emergency drills. Records of refresher training and emergency drills shall
be maintained.
4) Site signage shall be erected and detail the emergency process to follow
and include emergency telephone numbers, fire, ambulance, police,
nearest hospital etc.
5) Arrangements shall be made by the Contractor for casualty evacuation and
emergency medical treatment. The Contractor shall enter into an
agreement with a hospital to provide ambulance services. Alternatively the
Contractor shall provide a fully equipped ambulance on-site that shall be
manned by a paramedic. This provision shall be subject to the Engineers
audit.
4.5 Checking
4.5.1 Performance measurement and monitoring

[Link] The Contractor shall submit a Monthly OHS&E Progress Report no later than 7th
of each month to the Engineer. The Report shall contain the minimum
information specified within OHS&E Volume 2 (refer Part 4, Section XIV). The
report shall contain text, tables and colour photographs.
[Link] Site Inspection
1) Independent of the plant and equipment inspection, testing and

P a g e | 23
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

maintenance regimes that shall be stated within the Contractor’s Plant and
Equipment Procedures, the Contractor shall carry out site monitoring
exercises on a daily and weekly basis.
2) The Contractor shall ensure that all monitoring equipment is calibrated as
per the manufactures requirements. The Engineer shall be provided with
test certificates for such equipment
3) Site Engineers shall be required to participate in daily internal OHS&E
inspections to facilitate prompt communication and rectification of minor
deviations. Records of such inspections and rectification needs shall be
maintained at site level and made available for review by the Engineer
other interested parties.
4) Formal site inspection reports shall be produced on a weekly basis by the
Contractor’s OHS&E personnel for each site and submitted to the Project
Director and copied to the Contractor’s General Manager.
5) The Contractor may choose inspection format of his/her choice, however
format shall contain the minimum information as provided within OHS&E
Volume 2 (Reference Document, Section XIV) regarding weekly inspection
form.
6) The Contractor’s OHS&E Personnel shall be accompanied during a formal
site inspection by the Site Manager responsible for the particular site. The
resulting inspection report shall be signed by both the Site Manager and the
OHS&E officer.
7) The Engineer shall formally inspect and report the Contractor’s site
conditions against the compliance criteria set within the Contractor’s
operational procedures and the Engineer’s requirements on a weekly basis.
These inspections shall include batching plant and associated yards.
8) The Contractor shall undertake specific inspections at the Engineer’s
request where concerns have been raised regarding the suitability of
control measures and or plant or equipment condition. Such inspections
shall be carried out with immediate effect. Reference Document, Section
XIV, Clause 24.1.1 regarding the maximum permissible age of the plants
and equipment
4.5.2 Evaluation of compliance
[Link] The information submitted by the Contractor within the OHS&E Monthly
Progress Report together with the Engineer’s Reports shall be evaluated against
the Employer’s compliance requirements and OHS&E objectives.
[Link] Inspection reports shall be evaluated against the Legal Requirements given in
section 4.3.2 to which the Contractor is bound to comply.
[Link] The Contractor’s OHS&E Committee shall formally evaluate reports and results of
accidents and or injury on a monthly basis. The results of this evaluation such as
identified changes to safe systems of working’ shall be included with the
Committee minutes
[Link] The Engineer shall evaluate ‘Accident Injury Rates’ and ‘Frequency Rates’ per
individual Contractor and as a project to determine performance against the
international rates. The international rates used to benchmark performance shall
be promulgated to all Contractor’s and other interested parties.

P a g e | 24
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

[Link] A Project Monthly Progress Report shall be produced by the Engineer. Evaluation
results shall be included within the relevant sections for Health Safety & the
Environment.
[Link] The Contractor’s External OHS&E Audits (Refer section 4.5.5. below) shall be
evaluated by the Engineer against the internal Standards BS EN 18001:2007 AND
ISO 14001:2004.
4.5.3 Incident investigation, nonconformity, corrective action and preventive action
[Link] Incident investigation
1) The Contractor shall undertake accident investigation for all fatal accidents,
major injuries and dangerous occurrences as defined within the OHS&E VOL
2 (Reference Document, Section XIV).
2) In the event of a fatality, major injury or dangerous occurrence, the
Contractor shall not disturb the accident scene or remove equipment
beyond that required to make the area safe and/or for the treatment
and/or removal of casualty(s) to hospital.
3) Should the Engineer find an accident scene disturbed beyond that
reasonably expected with making an area safe, this shall be subject to
thorough investigation by the Engineer
4) The Engineer shall be informed immediately of all fatalities, major injuries or
dangerous occurrences. Any delay in reporting to the Engineer may be
subject to disciplinary action.
5) The Contractor is responsible to report accidents, incidents and dangerous
occurrences to the relevant governing bodies as per their statutory
obligations. The Contractor shall maintain responsibility for ensuring Sub-
contractor’s under their direct control also comply with this requirement.
6) A preliminary accident notification report shall be issued to the Engineer for
all fatal and major injuries and or dangerous occurrences within 12 hours as
per OHS&E Volume 2 (Reference Document, Section XIV). This shall be
followed by the detailed accident report as per OHS&E Volume 2 within 48
hours of the investigation completion.
7) Near misses and minor accidents should also be investigated by the
Contractor as soon as possible as they are signals that there are
inadequacies in the safety management In case of fatal accidents, major
injuries or dangerous occurrences the Engineer shall conduct an
independent investigation. The Contractor and his staff shall extend the
necessary co-operation.
[Link] Nonconformity, corrective action and preventive action
1) The Contractor shall conform to their internal procedures regarding
nonconformity, corrective action and preventive action. The Contractor shall
be audited by the Engineer for compliance with internal procedures.
2) Major and Minor non-conformances shall be raised by the Engineer as per
the Employer’s Quality Management requirements and the OHS&E Audit
criteria as defined within OHS&E Volume 2.
3) Open non-conformances shall be reflected in the Contractor’s Monthly
Audit Report and are subject to verification by the (Reference Document,
Section XIV) as detailed in OHS&E Volume 2. Failure to successfully take

P a g e | 25
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

corrective action and close out non- conformances will impact negatively on
the Contractor’s total quarterly audit score (Refer section 4.5.5 below).
4) Where non-conformances have been raised by an External Auditor against
the BS EN 18001:2007 or ISO 14001 Standard, the Contractor shall produce
and submit for review within 2 weeks, an action plan of how and within
what timescale shall the non- conformance(s) be closed-out.
5) Where the corrective action and preventive action identifies new or
changed hazards or the need for new or changed controls, the proposed
actions shall be taken through the risk assessment process. The associated
method statement and risk assessment shall be amended and re-submitted
to the Engineer for notice of no objection.
6) A change in work methodology shall be communicated to the workforce.
Evidence of such communications shall be made available for inspection by
the Engineer. The Engineer shall also make random enquiries at site level to
establish workforce awareness.
4.5.4 Control of records
[Link] The Contractor shall maintain all OHS&E records in accordance with the
Contactors ISO 9001 Quality Management System.
[Link] Records shall be made available to the Engineer upon request for the purpose of
incident investigation and management review.
4.5.5 Audit
[Link] Monthly Audit Report (MAR)
1) The Contractor shall undertake an internal monthly audit using the process
and audit report form (MAR) as prescribed within OHS&E Volume 2.
2) The Contractor shall submit the completed audit report no later than the
7th of each month within the Contractor’s monthly OHS&E Report. Failure
to submit the monthly audit report within the stipulated timescale shall
result in the Engineer awarding a ‘Zero’ scores for the month.
The audit scores awarded internally by the Contractor shall be subject to
review and verification by the Engineer. The Engineer shall substantiate the
awarded scores through making comparison with the results of a physical
site inspection against the model audit scores criteria as provided within
OHS&E Volume 2
3) The Engineer shall formally verify that the Contractor’s self awarded scores
comply with the audit scoring system and scoring criteria as defined within
OHS&E Volume 2. Where discrepancy exists the Engineer shall provide
supporting evidence (Photographic) and instruct the Contractor to amend
the initial awarded score. Following adjustment, the monthly audit report
shall be re-submitted to the Engineer within 3 days.
4) The Contractor shall be required to achieve a minimum 65% overall audit
score on a monthly basis.
5) Monthly audit scores shall be totalled over a 3 month (3 audit results)
period. Where the average score for three (3) months of audits is below
65%, then the OHS&E lump sum item in the preliminaries section of Section
on Pricing, Part 1 pricing shall be withheld.
6) If non-payment of the lump sum item in preliminaries occurs as a result of
P a g e | 26
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

failing to achieve the required 65% over a single quarterly reporting period,
the Engineer may reinstate the lump sum item at his discretion should the
Contractor achieve above 65% for the following six (6) consecutive monthly
OHS&E audits equating to two (2) quarterly reporting periods. This
repayment of the lump sum item shall not occur if the quarterly aggregate is
less than 50%.
7) In the event the Contractor fails to achieve a minimum of 65% on a monthly
audit, an action plan shall be submitted together with the audit results
detailing the actions that shall be taken within timescales.
8) Monthly audits shall be conducted prior to the sitting of the Contractor’s
Safety Committee and shall form part of the agenda.
9) A copy of each Audit Report will be sent to Employer and to all
subcontractors, with whom it will then be discussed in detail at the Monthly
SHE Committee Meeting in order to ensure that any corrective actions are
agreed upon.
[Link] External OHS&E Audit
1) The Contractor is required to conduct external audits as per the BS EN
18001:2007 & ISO 14001:2004 international standards on a quarterly basis
throughout the Contract period or until the Contractor achieves
accreditation to the standard whereby monitoring timescales shall be
instructed by the ISO accrediting body.
2) External audit and follow up audit reports shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review within 7 days of audit completion.
3) Should the Contractor fail to undertake external audits within the 3 month
period the Engineer shall appoint an ISO accredited 3 rd party agency to
conduct the audit at the Contractor’s cost.
4) Where ‘Major’ non-conformances with international standards are
identified, a follow- up external audit shall be carried out within 28 days for
closing out of the non- conformance(s). Follow-up audits shall continue on a
28 day rotation until such time as Major non-conformances are closed to
the satisfaction of the 3rd Party ISO accredited auditor.
4.6 Management review
4.6.1 Management Reviews shall be undertaken annually by the Engineer in
compliance with ISO 9001:2008.
4.6.2 The Management Review Report shall make recommendations for improvement.
[Link] The Contractor shall carry out a formal Management Review on an annual basis
as a minimum. The Management Review may form part of the review under the
organisations Quality Management System.
The Contractor shall submit Management Review Report to the Engineer within 7
days after meeting completion together with the organisations new objectives

P a g e | 27
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

5. Penalty and Awards

5.1 Charges To Be Recovered From Contractor For Unsafe Act Or Condition
1) MAHA-METRO intends to build an image of safety conscious organisation. Any reportable accident (fatality / injury) results in loss of life
and/or property damage. These accidents not only result in loss of life but also damage the reputation of MAHA-METRO. Most of the
accidents are avoidable and caused preliminarily due to Contractors’ negligence. Hence MAHA-METRO shall recover the cost of damages
from the Contractors for every reportable incident (fatality / injury).
2) In addition every MAHA-METRO work site is exposed to public scrutiny as the work is executed just on the right-of-way. Any unsafe act /
unsafe condition observed by public further damage MAHA-METRO’s reputation. In view of this, MAHA-METRO has decided to establish
safety-enforcing organisation. The cost of establishing such organisation is to be recovered from Contractors for all observed safety violations
at sites.
3) The following table indicates the Safety, Health and Environment violation (unsafe act / unsafe condition) and charges to be recovered from
contractors.

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
1 SHE Policy i) SHE policy. a) non-compliance of clause 6.1 L1→L2 L1- Rs 5,000 per single violation, compounded to a maximum
& Plan Volume 2 of Rs 25,000 at any single instance.
L2- Rs 10000 per single violation, compounded to a maximum
of Rs 50,000 at any single instance.
ii) SHE plan (Clause 6.2, 6.4 & 6.7 – Volume 2) L1→L2 L1- Rs 100000 per single violation, compounded to a maximum
of Rs 200000 at any single instance.
a) Not as per Employers’ content and coverage L2- Rs 200000 per single violation, compounded to a maximum
b) Delay in submission of Rs 400000 at any single instance.
c) Not updated as per Employer’s instruction
d) Copies not provided to all required
supervisors/engineers

P a g e | 28
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
2 SHE Not complying to the minimum manpower L1→L2 L1- Rs100000 per month for first month and Rs 200000 for
Organisatio requirements as mentioned in Table 2 – OSH&E subsequent months.
n Personnel Qualifications & Experience (Clause L2- Rs250000 per month for first month and Rs 500000 for
[Link] – Appendix 20) subsequent months.
Not filling up the vacancies created due to SHE L1- Rs 50000 for first month and Rs 100000 for subsequent
personnel leaving the Contractor within 14 days. months.
(Clause [Link] – Appendix 20) L2- Rs 150000 for first month and Rs 300000 for subsequent
months.
SHE organisation not provided with required L1- Rs 50000 for first violation and Rs 100000 for subsequent
Audiovisual and other equipment’s as per General violations.
Instruction. MAHA-METRO /SHE/GI/006 (Clause L2- Rs 150000 for first violation and Rs 300000 for subsequent
[Link] (item 4) – Appendix 20) violations.
Employing through outsourcing agencies and SHE
personal are not in the payroll of the main (Clause
[Link] (item 2) – Appendix 20)
Disobedience / Improper conduct of any SHE
personnel. (Clause [Link] – Appendix 20)
Reporting of SHE Personnel (Clause [Link] (item 3) –
Appendix 20)
3 SHE Failed to formulate or conduct SHE Committee L1→L2 L1- Rs 100000 for the first violation and Rs 500000 for the
committee meeting for any month (Clause 9.2.4 – Volume 2) subsequent violations.
L2- Rs 200000 for the first violation and Rs 1000000 for the
subsequent violations.

P a g e | 29
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
Contractor and Sub-contractor representatives not L1- Rs 5000 to the contractor of the member who had not
attending SHE Committee meetings (Clause 9.2.6 – attended the meeting for first violation and Rs 25000 for
Volume 2) subsequent violations.
L2- Rs 10000 to the contractor of the member who had not
attended the meeting for first violation and Rs 50000 for
subsequent violations.
Failed to conduct Site inspection before conducting L1-Rs 25000 for first violation and Rs 50000 for subsequent
SHE Committee meeting (Clause 9.2.2 (l) – Volume violations.
2) L2-Rs 50000 for first violation and Rs 100000 for subsequent
Failed to send SHE Committee Meeting minutes or violations.
Agenda to Employer in time (Clause 9.2.4 & 9.2.5 –
Volume 2)
Non-adherence of Clause 9.2.5 – Volume 2
Non-adherence of Clause 7.9 – Volume 2

4 ID card Non-adherence of Clause 7.3.1, 7.3.2 & 7.3.3 – L1→L2 L1- Rs 100000 for first violation and Rs 200000 for subsequent
Volume 2 violations.
L2- Rs 250000 for first violation and Rs 500000 for subsequent
violations.
5 SHE Not complying to the requirements as mentioned
Training in conditions of contract on SHE and project SHE
manual with regard to:
a) Induction training not given (Clause 7.3.1 – L1→L2 L1- Rs 50000 for first violation on and Rs 100000 for
Volume 2) subsequent violations. L2- Rs 150000 for first violation on and

P a g e | 30
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
b) Supervisor / engineer / manager training not Rs 300000 for subsequent violations.
conducted as per Clause 6.1.2 (b) – Volume 2
c) Refresher training as per Clause 6.1.3 & 6.1.9 –
Volume 2 not conducted
d) Tool-box talk not conducted as per Clause 6.1.6
– Volume 2
e) Skill development training not conducted as
Clause 6.1.8 – Volume 2
f) Daily Safety Oath not conducted as per Clause
6.1.1 – Volume 2
g) Top management behavior based SHE training
conducted Clause 6.1.4 – Volume 2
h) underground construction training not given

6 SHE i) Not complying to the requirements as L1→L2 L1- Rs 50000 for first violation on and Rs 100000 for
Inspection mentioned in conditions of contract on SHE and subsequent violations.
project SHE manual as per Clause 8 – Volume 2 L2- Rs 150000 for first violation on and Rs 300000 for
ii) Non compliance of clause 8.1.7 – Volume 2 subsequent violations.

7 SHE audit Internal Audit: MARS L1→L2

i) Not conducted as per SHE Plan (Clause L1- Rs 50000 for first violation on and Rs 100000 for
[Link] ( c) & (i) – Appendix 20) subsequent violations. L2- Rs 150000 for first violation on and
ii) Report not sent to Employer (Clause Rs 300000 for subsequent violations.
[Link] (j) – Appendix 20)

P a g e | 31
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
iii) Action not taken for any month (Clause
[Link] (d) – Appendix 20)

External Audit
Not conducted as per SHE Plan (Clause [Link] (a) – L1-Rs 100000 for first violation and Rs 200000 for subsequent
Appendix 20) violations. L2-Rs 250000 for first violation and Rs 500000
for subsequent violations.
Report not sent to Employer ([Link] (b) & [Link] (b)
– Appendix 20)
Action not taken for any quarter (Clause 8.2 –
Volume 2)
8 SHE Important days to be observed for SHE awareness as L1→L2 L1- Rs 10000 for first violation and Rs 50000 for subsequent
Communica furnished by Employer not observed (Clause 15.1.3 – violations.
tion Volume 2) L2- Rs 20000 for first violation and Rs 100000 for subsequent
violations.
Posters as furnished by Employer not printed and L1- 2,00,000 per contract
displayed (Clause 15.1.3 – Volume 2) L2- 4,00,000 per contract
9 SHE Non compliance of Clause 9.2.2 – Volume 2 L1→L2 L1- Rs 50000 for first violation on and Rs 100000 for
Submittals subsequent violations.
L2- Rs 150000 for first violation on and Rs 300000 for
subsequent violations.
Non compliance of Clause 5.14 & 9.3 L1-Rs 100000 for first violation and Rs 200000 for subsequent
violations.
L2-Rs 250000 for first violation and Rs 500000 for subsequent

P a g e | 32
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
violations.

10 Injury and Fatal accidents L3 L3- Rs 500000 penalty and enforcement of embargo for first
Incidence fatality ,and Rs 1000,000 penalty and enforcement of embargo
reporting for every subsequent fatality.
Injury accident L2→L3 L2- Rs 100000 for first grievously injured person and Rs
200000 for every subsequent grievously injured person
(Grievous Injury as defined by Workmen Compensation Act).
L3- Rs 250000 for first grievously injured person and Rs 500000
for every subsequent grievously injured person
Abnormal delay in reporting accidents or wilful L2→L3 L2-Rs 100000 for first violation and Rs 200000 for subsequent
suppression of information about any accidents / violations.
dangerous occurrence as per Clause 5.3.10 – Volume L3-Rs 250000 for first violation and Rs 500000 for subsequent
2 violations.
11 Emergency Non-compliance of the Clause 14 – Volume 2 L2→L3 L2- Rs 100000 for non-compliance of any of the clauses .
preparedne L3- Rs 200000 for non-compliance of any of the clauses .
ss Plan
12 Housekeepi Clause 10 – Volume 3 : L1→L2 L1- Rs 10000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
ng  Housekeeping maintenance register not of Rs 100000 at any single instance.
properly maintained up to date L2- Rs 20000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
 Surrounding areas of drinking water tanks / of Rs 200000 at any single instance
taps not hygienically cleaned / maintained
 Office, stores, toilet / urinals not properly
cleaned and maintained.
 Required dustbins at appropriate places not

P a g e | 33
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
provided / not cleaned.

Clause 10 – Volume 3
 Stairways, gangways, passageways blocked.
 Lumber with protruding nails left as such
 Openings unprotected
 Excavated earth not removed within a
reasonable time.
 Truck carrying excavated earth not covered /
tyres not cleaned.
 Vehicles / equipment’s parked / placed on
roads obstructing free flow of traffic
 Unused surplus cables / steel scraps lying
scattered
 Wooden scraps, empty wooden cable drums
lying scattered
 Water stagnation leading to mosquito
breeding
13 Working at Clause 17.4 – Volume 2 : L2→L3 L1-Rs 10000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
Height /  Not using or anchoring Safety Belt of Rs 100000 at any single instance.
Ladders and L2-Rs 20000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
 Not using Safety Net
Scaffolds of Rs 200000 at any single instance.
 Absence of life line or anchorage point to
anchor safety belt (clause 17 – Volume 2) L3-Rs 30000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum

P a g e | 34
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
Non-compliance of Clause 17.2 – Volume 2 of Rs 300000 at any single instance.

Clause 17.3 – Volume 2 : L1→L2

 Improper usage (less than 1m extension
above landing point, not maintaining 1:4
ratio)
 Aluminium ladders without base rubber bush
 Usage of broken / week ladders
 Usage of re-bar welded ladders
Clause 17.3 – Volume 2 L1→L2
 Painting of ladders
 Using Bamboo ladders
Improper guardrail, toe board, barriers and other L2→L3
means of collective protection – Clause 17.1.3 –
Volume 2
Improper working platform Clause 17.2 – Volume 2
Working at unprotected fragile surface (Clause 17 –
Volume 2)
14 Lifting Clause 19 – Volume 2 : L2→L3 L2-Rs 50000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
appliances  Non-compliance of clause 19 of Rs 500000 at any single instance.
and gear L3-Rs 100000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
 Non availability of fitness certificate
of Rs 1000000 at any single instance.
 Documents not displayed on the machine or
not available with the operator
 Maximum Safe Working Load not written on

P a g e | 35
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
the machine
 Automatic safe load indicator not provided or
not in working condition
 Age of the operator less than 21 years or
without any licence and non-compliance of
other item
 Non-compliance of any of the items
mentioned regarding rigging requirements
 Failure to submit method statement in case
of all critical lifting
 Person riding on crane.
Creating more noise and smoke (Clause 17 – Volume
2)
Absence of portable fire extinguisher in driver cabin
(Clause 31.5)
Fail to guard hoist platform (Clause 24.0)

No fencing of hoist rope movement area (Clause

24.0)
Hoist platform not in the horizontal position (Clause
19 – Volume 2)
15 Site Non-compliance of Clause [Link] - Appendix 20 L2→L3 L2-Rs 10000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
Electrical of Rs 100000 at any single instance.
Non-compliance of Clause 21.1.3 – Volume 3

P a g e | 36
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
safety Non-compliance of Clause 21.3, 21.4 and 21.1.5 – L3-Rs 20000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
Volume 2 of Rs 200000 at any single instance

Non-compliance of Clause 26.10 and 26.13

Inserting of wires directly into the socket
Improper grounding for the electrical appliances
Clause 21.3 – volume 2)
Electrical cables running on the ground (clause 21.4
– Volume 2)
Non-compliance Clause 26.3 – Volume 2
16 Gas Cutting Clause 21.1, 22.2 and 22.3 - Volume 3 L2→L3 L2-Rs 10000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
 Wrong colour coding of cylinder. of Rs 50000 at any single instance.
 Cylinders not stored in upright position L3-Rs 20000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
of Rs 100000 at any single instance.
 Flash back arrester, non-return valve and
regulator not present or not in working
condition.
 Fail to put cylinders in a cylinder trolley.
 Damaged hose and fail to use hose clamps
 Using domestic LPG cylinders
 Fail to store cylinder 6.6m away from fire
prone materials
 Fire extinguisher not placed in the vicinity
during operation

P a g e | 37
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
17 Welding Clause 21.1, 22.2 and 22.3 - Volume 3 L2→L3 L2-Rs 10000 per first violation and Rs 50000 for subsequent
 Voltmeter and Ammeter not working violations.
 Non-availability of separate switch in the L3-Rs 100000 per first violation and Rs 500000 for subsequent
transformer violations.
 Improper grounding and return path.
 Damaged and bare openings in the welding
cable.
 Damaged holder
 Fire extinguisher not placed in the vicinity
during operation
18 Compresse Storage of compressed gases clause 23.1.4, 23.1.6 L2→L3 L2-Rs 10000 per first violation and Rs 50000 for subsequent
d gases and 23.1.7 – Volume 2 violations.
L3-Rs 100000 per first violation and Rs 500000 for subsequent
violations.
19 Blasting Authorization and Risk assessment of blasting L2→L3 L2-Rs 10000 per first violation and Rs 50000 for subsequent
violations.
L3-Rs 100000 per first violation and Rs 500000 for subsequent
violations.
20 Fire Smoking and open flames in fire prone area (Clause L2→L3 L2-Rs 5000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum of
precaution 36.1.5 – Volume 2) Rs 25000 at any single instance.
Absence of fire extinguishers (Clause 36.2.1 – L3-Rs 10000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
Volume 2) of Rs 500000 at any single instance.

Fire extinguishers not refilled once in a year. (Clause

36.2.2 – Volume 2)

P a g e | 38
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
Fire extinguisher placed in a not easily accessible
location
21 Excavation, Non-compliance of Clause 26 L2→L3 L2-Rs 10000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
Tunnelling of Rs 50000 at any single instance.
and L3-Rs 20000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
confined of Rs 100000 at any single instance.
space Not following the entry procedure for work in
confined spaces Clause 20.3 – Volume 2
L2-Rs 10000 per first violation and Rs 50000 for subsequent
violations.
L3-Rs 100000 per first violation and Rs 500000 for subsequent
violations.
22 Work Non-compliance of Clause 13.3 – Volume 2 L2→L3 L2- Rs 50000 per first violation and Rs 100000 for subsequent
permit violations.
system L3- Rs 100000 per first violation and Rs 200000 for subsequent
violations.
23 Traffic Non-compliance of Clause 38.1 – Volume 2 L2→L3 L2-Rs 100000 per first violation and Rs 200000 for subsequent
Manageme violations.
Non-compliance of Clause 39.1 – Volume 2
nt L3-Rs 250000 per first violation and Rs 500000 for subsequent
Non-compliance of Clause 38.4 violations.
Non-compliance of Clause 38.5
Barricades (Clause 37.1 – Volume 2) L2 Rs 25000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum of Rs
 Not Cleaned 100000 at any single instance
 Not in alignment
 Not numbered

P a g e | 39
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
 Not painted
 Red lights /reflectors not working
 Damages not repaired
 Not secured properly
 Barricade inspector not employed
 Protruding parts / portions repaired
 Barricades maintaining register not properly
maintained up to date
Contractor Vehicles L2 Rs 25000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum of Rs
 Over loading of vehicles 100000 at any single instance
 Unfit drivers or operators
 Unlicensed vehicles
 Absence of traffic marshals
 Absence of reversing alarm
 Absence of fog light (at winter) vii) Power /
hand brakes not in working condition.
Splashing of slurry/muck on roads / non-cleaning L2 a) Rs 100000 on first observation.
of tyres of dumpers and transit mixers (Clause 10.8, b) Rs 200000 on second observation.
item (i) & (k) – Volume 3)
c) Rs 300000 on third and subsequent observations
 Mishandling of bentonite like splashing of
bentonite outside specified width of
barricading
 Non-cleaning of tyres of dumpers and transit
mixers before leaving the site and thereby

P a g e | 40
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
creating a traffic safety hazard to road users.

24 PPE Not having PPE (Clause 34.1 – Volume 2) L2→L3 L2-Rs 200 per single violation.
(Personal L3-Rs 400 per single violation.
Not wearing (or) using and kept it elsewhere (Clause L2→L3
Protective
34.1 – Volume 2)
Equipment)
Using damaged one (Clause 34.2 – Volume 2) L2→L3
Using wrong colour helmet or helmet without logo L1→L2
(Clause [Link], item (g) – Appendix 20)
Not conforming to BIS standard (Clause 34.2 – L2→L3 L2-Rs 10000 for first violation and Rs 50000 for subsequent
Volume 2 ) violations .
L3-Rs 100000 for first violation and Rs 200000 for subsequent
violations .

Non-compliance of Clause 34.1.4, 34.1.5 and 34.1.2 L2→L3 L2-Rs 50000 for first violation and Rs 100000 for subsequent
– Volume 2 violations.
L3-Rs 100000 for first violation and Rs 200000 for subsequent
violations.
25 Occupation Fail to conduct Medical examination to workers L1→L2 L1-Rs 10000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
al Health (Clause 35.2 – Volume 2) of Rs 100000 at any single instance.
L2-Rs 20000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
Absence of ambulance van & room (Clause 35.3 – of Rs 200000 at any single instance.
Volume 2)
L3-Rs 30000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
Workers not having ID card (Clause 7.3.2 – Volume of Rs 300000 at any single instance.
2)

P a g e | 41
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
Clause 35.1 and 35.4 – Volume 2 L2→L3
 Absence of first-aid person in work site
 Absence or inadequacy of first-aid box

Clause 35.1 and 35.4 – Volume 2 L1→L2

 Misuse of first-aid box
 First-aid box not satisfy the minimum Indian

Smoking inside the construction site (Clause 35.3 (b)

– Volume 2)
Drink and drive or work (Clause 35.5 (a) – Volume 2)
Fumigation / insecticides not sprayed to prevent
Mosquito breeding (Clause 10.9 – Volume 3)
Non-compliance of Clause 16.4 – Volume 2
26 Labour Clause 16.5 – Volume 2: L1→L2 L1-Rs 10000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
Welfare  Inadequate number of toilets of Rs 50000 at any single instance.
measures L2-Rs 20000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
 Toilets not cleaned properly
of Rs 100000 at any single instance.
 Toilet placed more than 500m from the work
site
 Absence of water facilities for toilets and
washing places
Absence of drinking water (Clause 16.6 - Volume 2)

P a g e | 42
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
Excessive noise and vibration (Clause 17 – Volume 3)
Canteen not provided (Clause 46.2)
Food stuff not served on no loss no profit basis
(Clause 16.8 (a)– Volume 2)
Clause [Link] (b) – Appendix 20 :
 Non adherence of Labour welfare provisions
of BOCWA
 Fail to register establishment and display the
registration certificate at workplace
 Absence of workers register and records
 Absence of muster roll and wages register
 Fail to display an abstract of BOCWA and
BOCWR
27 Ventilation in Shaft L2→L3 L2-Rs 10000 for first violation and Rs 50000 for subsequent
violations .
L3-Rs 100000 for first violation and Rs 200000 for subsequent
violations .
26 Environmen Tyre wash facility not provided (Section D2 – L1→L2 L1-Rs 10000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
tal Employer’s Requirement) of Rs 50000 at any single instance.
Manageme L2-Rs 20000 per single violation Compounded to a maximum
 Dust control measures at sites not practiced
nt of Rs 100000 at any single instance.
 Improper disposal of debris / residues
 Spillage from vehicles not arrest
Air monitoring not practiced (Clause 15.4.3 –

P a g e | 43
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

SN Topic Unsafe Act/Unsafe condition Range of Deductible Amount

Levels
Volume 2)
The values of air monitoring not within acceptable
limits (Clause 15.4.3 – Volume 2)
Non compliance of Clause 9.4 & 9.4 (g)

P a g e | 44
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

4) Without limiting to the unsafe acts and or conditions mentioned above in Clause 56.3
the Employer shall have the right to deduct charges for any other unsafe act and or
condition depending upon the gravity of the situation on a case-to-case basis. The
charges shall be in comparison with that of the similar offence indicated in Clause 56.3.
5) Non-conformities detected during inspections carried out by the Engineer are subject to
a process adapted to the severity of the situation. Non-conformities are divided into 4
categories as follows:
A. Notification of observation of minor non-conformities. The non-conformity
results in a notification to the on-site Contractor’s representative, followed-
up by a signed notification of observation prepared by the Engineer. The
multiplication of notifications of observation at the Worksite, or absence of
corrective actions by the Contractor, can result in the severity of the non-
conformity being raised to that of level 1.
B. Level 1 non conformity: Non-conformities that do not represent a serious
immediate risk for health and environment. The non-conformity is the
subject of a report addressed to the Contractor and which shall be resolved
within five (5) days. The Contractor addresses to the Engineer a report
explaining how the non-conformity has been corrected. Further to an
inspection and a favourable evaluation of effectiveness of the corrective
action, the Engineer signs a close-out report for the non-conformity. In all
cases where a non-conformity of level 1 is not resolved within one (1)
month, the severity of the non-conformity is raised to level 2.
C. Level 2 non-conformities: applies to all non-conformities that have resulted
in damage to health or the environment or which represent a high risk to
health and the environment. The same procedure as for level 1 non-
conformities is applied. Corrective action shall be taken by the Contractor
within three (3) days. The Contractor addresses a report explaining the
corrective actions implemented. All level 2 non-conformities which are not
resolved within one (1) month, are raised to level 3.
D. Level 3 non-conformities: applies to all non-conformities that represent a
risk with major consequences to health and the environment. The highest
levels of the Contractor’s and Engineer’s hierarchies present in the
Employer’s country are informed immediately and the Contractor has
twenty-four (24) hours to bring the situation under control. Clause 14.7 of
the Particular Conditions of Contract (PC), a level 3 non-conformity results in
the suspension of interim payments until the non-conformity has been
resolved. If the situation requires, and in pursuance to Clause 8.8 of the PC,
the Engineer can order the suspension of work until the resolution of the
non-conformity.

2.0 STOPPAGE OF WORK

1) The Employer shall have the right to stop the work at his sole discretion, if in his opinion
the work is being carried out in such a way that it may cause accidents and endanger
the safety of the persons and / or property, and / or equipments. In such cases, the

Pag e |0
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

Contractor shall be informed in writing about the nature of hazards and possible injury /
accident.

2) The Contractor shall not proceed with the work until he has complied with each
direction to the satisfaction of Employer.

3) The Contractor shall not be entitled for any damages / compensation for stoppage of
work, due to safety reasons and the period of such stoppage of work shall not be taken
as an extension of time for Completion of the Facilities and will not be the ground for
waiver of levy of liquidated damages.

3.0 AWARDS

The following categories will be considered for awards as per the scheme in practice of
Employer:

(i) For every safe million man hour working without any reportable incidents
(ii) Zero fatality contracts
(iii) 100% adherence to voluntary reporting of all accidents throughout the currency
of contract
(iv) Safest project team of the year.
(v) Best SHE team of the year.
(vi) Safest Contractor of the year.

Pag e |1
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

PUNE METRO RAIL CORPORATION LIMITED

ANNEXURE NO.: 1
Memorandum of Understanding between MAHA-METRO and the Contractor for safe
execution of contract work

This Memorandum of Understanding is made and executed by and between Pune Metro Rail
Corporation Limited (MAHA-METRO)., a Company registered under the Companies Act 1956
and having its registered office at Koregaon Park or their authorized representative(s),
hereinafter referred to as “EMPLOYER” (which expression shall wherever the context so
requires or admits be deemed to mean and include its successors in business and assigns) of
the one party

AND

M/s __________________________________________________________________ having

its registered office at
______________________________________________________________ hereinafter
referred to as the “CONTRACTOR” (which expression shall wherever the context so requires or
admits be deemed to mean and include its successors in business and assigns) of the other
party

WITNESSETH THAT

WHEREAS the EMPLOYER gives highest importance to the occupational safety, health and
environment during execution of work, seeks cooperation from the CONTRACTOR in this
endeavour.

Thus, this Memorandum of Understanding is for promoting the safety, health and environment
aspects required to be followed at workplace/site and will be applicable to any site job to be
done by the CONTRACTOR

AND

WHEREAS the CONTRACTOR has read all the terms and conditions of the EMPLOYER and
whereas the CONTRACTOR has studied the following documents:

(i) Tender Documents, including Notice Inviting Tender, General Conditions, Special
Conditions;
(ii) Conditions of Contract on Safety, Health and Environment and Project Safety, Health
and Environment Manual;
(iii) Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulations of Employment and Conditions
of Service) Act 1996, Central Rules 1998 and subsequent MaharashtraBOCW Rules
2003, Building and Other Construction Workers Welfare Cess Act 1996 and Rules 1998
and notification [Central & State] Collection of cess.
(iv) Indian Electricity Act 2003 and Rules 1956;
(v) Corresponding International / Bureau of Indian Standard Codes.

Pag e |2
 Section VI – Employers Requirement
Appendix 20 – Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental

Including the amendments to any of the above rules and any other rules & regulations or
procedures, circulars, notices & advices laid down by the EMPLOYER from time to time.

Now it is hereby AGREED AND DECLARED by and between the EMPLOYER and the
CONTRACTOR as follows:

Clause - I The CONTRACTOR shall abide by the terms and conditions stipulated in
Condition of Contract on Safety, Health & Environment and Project
Safety, Health & Environment Manual.
Clause - II The CONTRACTOR shall undertake full responsibility for safe execution
of job at work place/site and safety of his personnel and adjoining road
users during work.
Clause - III Without giving any prior notice, the EMPLOYER shall from time to time
be entitled to add/or amend any or all terms and conditions with a view
to improving safety and occupational health of personnel and safety of
work, with immediate effect and the same shall be binding on the
CONTRACTOR. The Contractor agrees to implement all such
amendments, which shall be laid down by the EMPLOYER.
Clause - IV Besides following the guidelines, safety rules and regulations, safety
codes given in various safety procedures/documents mentioned above,
the CONTRACTOR shall also prepare detailed method statement which
includes job safety analysis wherever there are complicated and
hazardous/high risk working involved and get it approved from
Employer before execution of work.
Clause - V Any negligence or violation in implementing any of the provision of the
conditions of contract on Safety, Health & Environment and MAHA-
METRO project Safety, Health & Environment Manual shall be viewed
seriously and the Contractor is liable to compensate the Employer for
the loss of reputation. The cost of damage shall be fixed on case-to-case
basis.

In witness thereof the Parties hereto by representatives duly authorised have executed this
Memorandum of Understanding on ____________________ day of ________________
20____.

Signed on Signed on
For and on behalf of MAHA-METRO For and on behalf of (Contractor)

__________________________ __________________________

Signature: Signature:

Name: Name:

Title: Title:

Pag e |3
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS

Section VI – Employer’s Requirements

Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

May 2018
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE
1. General........................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Document objectives – staged Revenue Service ........................................... 1
1.2 Pune Metro Project Process........................................................................... 1
1.3 Pune Metro Project sequences and associated responsibilities .................... 2
2. Testing and Commissioning (T&C) process .................................................... 2
2.1 Definitions ...................................................................................................... 2
2.2 Abbreviations / definition ............................................................................. 3
2.3 Specification – Validation process (V-cycle) .................................................. 4
2.4 Test typology.................................................................................................. 5
2.5 Sequences of tests and validation steps ........................................................ 6
2.6 Tests at factory (applicable to equipment) .................................................... 7
2.7 Tests on site ................................................................................................... 8
2.8 Blank operation ........................................................................................... 13
2.9 Revenue service ........................................................................................... 13
3. Sub - system (functional unit) ...................................................................... 13
4. Strategy of the tests ..................................................................................... 13
4.1 Testing area.................................................................................................. 13
4.2 Overall integration testing on site ............................................................... 14
5. Commissioning stages (multi stages ) .......................................................... 16
6. Operator involvement during T&C .............................................................. 16

TOC
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

1. General

1.1 Document objectives – staged Revenue Service

The objective of this document is to define the scheduling of the tasks of test,
commissioning and blank operation as well as the Contractor’s responsibilities.
It describes the phases of the tests & commissioning process of the Transit System as a
whole (Clause 2 below).
This document presents a typical sequence of tests to perform during overall tests and
commissioning phase (Clause 4 below).
As Pune Metro will be put in revenue service in stages (see Clause 5), each stage will
require the exact same below process (with the exception that part of service trial and
blank operation for later stages will involve a bigger corridor length).
Important note: Several design requirements regarding the infrastructure (stations,
tunnel…) and several safety criteria will be checked, demonstrated or validated through
Working notes or Calculation notes. Although part of the overall system acceptance
process is not dealt in this document, that is only limited to testing in a general and
extended sense.

1.2 Pune Metro Project Process

« Technical » tasks « Operation » tasks

Design Operation Design
Civil works, Manufacturing, Operator organization
Installation Test Operator’s procedures
System acceptance Teams Training
Transport System Tunnel, Operator Drivers,
stations, system, rolling OCC operator,
stock… maintenance team…

Final objective:
Transportation of passengers with the attended performances
(PPHD, commercial speed, passenger comfort)

The global project objective is the transportation of passengers with the attended
performances. For that, it is necessary:
 to design and build all the necessary elements of the transport system,
 to check and validate the function units (test and commissioning)
 to put in place an operation team able to operate and maintain the metro system
and ensure the forecasted transportation of passengers.

Pag e |1
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

1.3 Pune Metro Project sequences and associated responsibilities

Conceptual design, incl. the system specification

Achieved by the Engineer

Preliminary Sub system requirements

Sub system N
Achieved by the Contractors
/ / Sub system design
(Contractors) Monitored by the Engineer
S S
y y Manufacturing
s s
t t
e e Factory tests*

Installation

Site tests*

Managed by the Engineer on

Service trial behalf of the Employer with the
operator staff attendance

Blank operation Managed by the Operator

Assistance by the contractors
Revenue service Achieved by the operator

*Including liaising with Interfacing Contractors

2. Testing and Commissioning (T&C) process

The following chapters only provide a brief description in order to allow an easier
understanding of the overall test and commissioning process.
For tests and commissioning detailed requirements refer to complete Contract
Documents

2.1 Definitions
The tests and inspections are the final step in order to prove the quality control process
of each project actor (Contractors, Employer, Engineer).
The tests objectives are to check that the design requirements (functional,
performance, operational and technical) of the sub system and of the global transport
system are achieved and respected.
Thus:
Each contractor shall prove that his sub-system is compliant with his contractual
requirements and specifications, including interfacing with other subsystems.
The Employer (assisted by the Engineer) shall check that the global transport system is

Pag e |2
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

compliant with the overall system and performances objectives and requirements.
The operator shall prove that his organisation fits in the need and that its procedures
are efficient and adequate for a safe operation of the Transit system as a whole.
The test process will lead to the overall transport system acceptance and to its full
commissioning.
Prior to the overall full system tests on site, inspections, tests and checks after
manufacturing and assembly will be made either in the factory and / or on site upon
delivery of sub-systems or components.
In the Test and Commissioning process, the term « System » means all the sub-systems
working together.
A sub-system is a functional unit; it could be any type of subsystem, whether part of
system contracts or part of civil contract.
A contractor can be in charge of one or several sub-systems.

2.2 Abbreviations / definition

The Employer = Maha Metro (Pune Metro)
T&C : Testing and Commissioning
CRS : Commissioner for Railway Safety
Tests definition
Contractual
Reference in
Test phases Definition designation according
this document
to FIDIC
Factory (or tests achieved
Clause 2.6.2
manufacturing) tests in factory
Installation tests Clause 2.7.1
Sub –
systems Partial and system Clause 2.7.1
acceptance tests Tests on completion
Integration testing and
interfaces tests Clause 2.7.1
commissioning
global tests of
Service trial (or overall
the transport Clause 2.7.2
system tests)
system
Issue of Taking Over Taking Over
certificate certificate
Warranty Start of Defect
Defects liability period Clause [Link]
period liability
Operation
without
Tests after
Blank operation passenger Clause 2.8
completion
(operator’s
training)

Pag e |3
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

Period to verify
Regular Service
the RAM Clause [Link]
Verification
performances
Issue of
Performance
Certificate

2.3 Specification – Validation process (V-cycle)

Specification Test / commissioning

Performance certificate
System specification
Performances
Revenue
service

pl
Maintenance and
operation program Blank operation
Performances
verification and
Operational trial

Taking Over Certificate

Maintenance and Service trial including

operational requirements performances and
operational tests

Sub system requirements Notice of no objection

on
(Tenders documents)
pl

Sub system tests including interfaces tests

Sub system specifications
including interface requirements factory tests (applicable to equipment)
and specifications site tests

Notice of no objection

Sub system achievement

(Hardware /
software)

Pag e |4
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

2.4 Test typology

The system validation consists on a pyramid-shaped process composed of a logical series
of complementary test.
This process starts by tests and checks in factory (factory tests), continues by on-site
tests and finished in operation phase (performances checking)
The list below gives the tests « typology » leading to the Transit System acceptance of
the works:

1. Factory tests
Unit tests
Type tests
Routine tests
Functional and operational tests
Integration tests
Platform tests
Test on test track (rolling stock…)
2. Site test
Sub system tests
Installation tests
Sub system tests static and dynamic (partial and system acceptance tests)
Integration Testing and Commissioning (interfacing tests)
Service trial (Overall system tests)
3. Blank operation
4. Regular Service verification (Performances checking)

Pag e |5
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

2.5 Sequences of tests and validation steps

Factory tests
Internal contractors’ tests

Factory tests (applicable to equipment)

Validation of test reports

Preliminary equipment tests

Sub systems tests

(Including interfaces tests)

Site tests
Validation of test reports

Sub systems ready for

Service Trials

Service Trial
Validation of test
Taking over of
reports the system
Start of DLP
Tests after completion

Blank operation

CRS certification

Achieved by Contractors
Achieved by Contractors Revenue Service
End of Defect
Monitored by Engineer
Managed by Engineer Liability Period
Assistance by contractors Issue of
Achieved by operator and Engineer Performance
Certificate
Achieved by operator

Pag e |6
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

2.6 Tests at factory (applicable to equipment)

2.6.1 Internal contractor’s tests
Before factory acceptance tests, the contractors shall test their sub-systems in order to
guaranty the success of the factory acceptance tests.
Each contractor shall keep the results of such tests which can be audited by the Engineer
at any time.
2.6.2 Factory tests
The objective of such tests is to check the compliance of the manufactured equipment
with the technical and functional specifications and with the standards.
Test procedures
 The test procedures shall be written by the Contractor.
 These procedures are checked with notice of no objection by the Engineer
Tests execution
The factory tests shall be achieved by the Contractor and monitored by the Engineer.
At the end, an acceptance report shall be signed by the Contractor and notice of no
objection will be issued by the Engineer, that will enable the equipment to be delivered
to the site.
Factory tests consist of:
The type tests
The objectives are to check that the design of equipment is in compliance to technical
and functional specifications (Contract Stipulations).
Routine tests
Tests of each train or equipment at the end of manufacture phase.
(Type tests applied to the first equipment, routine tests applied to the others)
Functional and operational tests
Test of functional and operational requirements
Factory integration tests
Some interfaces between subsystems need to be tested in factory (signalling and
telecommunication, rolling stock and on-board signalling equipment…).
During this phase the different sub-systems will be connected together in order to test
the functions achieved by the group of equipment.
This platform (group of equipment) will enable notably to test the compliance with
operational criteria, ergonomic criteria of the man machine interfaces.
Those tests are essential as they shall prove the capacity of the subsystems to operate as
an integrated system prior to be delivered to the site, and shall prevent each contractor
to spend unnecessary time and resources on site to correct design/manufacturing based
defects.

Pag e |7
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

2.7 Tests on site

The objectives of such tests are to prove that:
The equipment was not damaged by the transportation, delivery process
The installation of the equipment is in compliance with specifications and drawings.
System and equipment operate properly in site environmental and operational
conditions, according to the functional, technical and operational specifications.
The following issues shall be covered:
The installation
The sub-system tests (for each sub-system) including the interfaces tests.
The service trial (overall system tests).
2.7.1 Installation and site Sub-system tests
The objective of such test is to check the compliance of the subsystem with the technical
and functional specifications and with the standards. Additionally the Contractor shall
test the interfaces with others sub-systems in order to check the interface specifications,
like forecasted in the Contract.
Test procedures
The test procedures shall be written by the contractor. These procedures are checked by
the Engineer
Tests execution
The sub-system tests shall be achieved by the Contractor and reviewed without
objection by Engineer
At the end an acceptance report shall be signed by the Contractor and the notice of no-
objection issued by the Engineer
When all the sub-system tests will be performed successfully, the system test will be
able to start
This test phase includes (see Employer’s Requirements, Section VI and other Contract
Documents”)
 Installation tests
 Partial acceptance tests
 System acceptance tests
 Integration testing and commissioning
2.7.2 Service Trial (overall System tests)
[Link] Presentation
When all the sub-systems will be tested with success it will be possible to start the
service trial tests.
The trial service objectives are to:
1. Prove the Overall System (all the sub-systems working together) operation is correct
in normal mode, and degraded modes.
This part is the “cross functions tests” of the system
2. Prove that the system is fully operational: easy to operate for the operator staff,: OCC
operators, driver, … and easy to maintain.

Pag e |8
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

This part is the “tests of ability to operate” of the system

3. Check also several Overall System performances such as commercial speed, minimal
headway…. At this time , the first RAMS assessment will be done
This part is the “performance tests” of the System. To achieve these System tests the
Contractors shall:
- Ensure the availability and readiness of each sub-system (but at this moment the
sub-systems continue to be under the Contractors responsibility).
- Provide technical assistance to the Engineer in order to enable the Engineer to
manage and complete the system tests.
Test procedures
The test procedures shall be agreed by the employer.
Tests execution
The service trial shall be achieved by the Engineer with the assistance of the
contractors. The contractors shall foresee adequate staff to cover these services within
the Contract obligations.
[Link] Cross functions
The main cross functions to be tested are the following;
These functions involve several sub-systems; they will be tested in normal and degraded
mode.
N° Cross function Sub cross functions
1 Passengers - Train movement (automatic route control, train
movements mission, traffic regulation…)
between stations - Boarding passengers
- Train / passengers movement in case of emergency
(tunnel evacuation…)
- Etc.
2 Passenger - Entry / Exit of the station
movements in - Access and exit of the platform
station - Movement in case of emergency evacuation
- Etc.
3 Energy - Management of general power supply of the lines
management - Management of the traction current
- Management of station power supply
4 Communication and - Communication in the stations (video, public address…)
passengers services - Communication in the trains (video, public address…)
- Ticketing
- Access to people with restricted mobility
- Etc.

Pag e |9
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

5 Operation - Management of OCC equipment

management - Management of station equipment
- Service start up for the line (train preparation, line
preparation, energy reconfiguration, first train of
operation in the morning…)
- End of service for the line (train stabling, station
closing,…)
6 Maintenance -- Timetable
Management compilation and daily
of maintenance operation
tasks records
along the line
management -- Etc.
Management of maintenance tasks in the stations
- Management of maintenance tasks in the depot
- Management of maintenance tasks of trains (tow /
push procedure for a train…)
- Management of maintenance tasks of sub-stations
- Etc.
[Link] “Ability to Operate”
In order to prove this all the system functions (cross function) will be operated and it will
be achieved by checking the system at the operator disposition whether it is easy to
operate.

Agent in Operation criteria Tests

interface
OCC Organization of the Test of these
operator OCC Workstation criteria during
normal and
ergonomics degraded mode
by
checking the
Man machine interface ergonomics: facility to
o Information readability operate
and measuring
some time to
o Alarm display and priority do
some operation
o System control when dealing with alarms
o Control panel : visibility and completeness of the
information Simulate an OCC
failure and
o Etc. check
the
according situatio
to the
- In case of OCC failures n
criteria
o Capability to continue to operate (how long to transfer
to back up OCC/station controls)
o How difficult is it to stop the traffic
o Difficulty and time to restart the system
o Etc.
- Capability to manage important incidents (passengers
evacuation in tunnel, train failure in the tunnel, energy
failure etc)

P a g e | 10
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

Driver - Driver desk ergonomics in all modes

o In ATO mode
o In ATP mode
o In manual mode
o Etc.
- Easiness to shift from a mode to another and control of
mode
- Visibility of the way side signalisation
- Quality of the communication with the OCC
- Possibility for immediate onboard diagnostic of a
Staff in  malfunction
Quality the communicatio wit the OCC , multipl call
station - Etc.
of n h e
situation
Maintenance - sQuality of the computer Aided maintenance System etc.
staff  Etc.
Other In a general way, the system capability to deal with Simulate an
important incident will be tested incident in an
o Evacuation in line operation
o Evacuation in station
configuration
as close as
o Tow of a failed rake
possible from
o Failure of OCC
actual revenue
o Energy power failure service
o Etc.

[Link] Performance tests

 Speed performances:
o Commercial speed for normal service and partial services
o Commercial speed of a train set under load
o Run time of a manual driving train set
o Time of turn back for the terminus and for the partial terminus
o Etc.
 Headway:
o test of the minimal headway it may be not possible to perform this test
because the number of the train will not be sufficient. However this test
will be performed on partial section of the network considered as critical
 Energy :
o test under load : it may not be possible to do this test for all the line because
the number of the trains set will not be sufficient. In this case this
performance test will be done by electrical section.
o test of the traffic behaviour when suppressing one sub-station
 Remote control and remote indication:
Under load (all sub system and many trains in operation), measure the time of
taking into account of remote controls and the time of transmission of remote
indications
P a g e | 11
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

 RAM performances:
During the test phase all the failures and malfunction will be noted in order to
have a first overview of the RAM performances, in particular the duration of
some maintenance intervention will be measured.
2.7.3 Takeover of the system
Only when all the sub system tests, all interfaces, integration tests and all the overall
system tests are completed successfully will the service trial end. Then it will be possible
to issue:
 The Taking Over Certificate (TOC) of each sub-system or contract, then the formal
transfer of the system from the contractor to the Employer will be possible:
 The taking over from Contractors to the Employer (and from Employer to Operator).
This will allow the Employer to run the blank operation and then to open the system
for revenue Service. The release of the TOC will also allow the start of the Defect
Liability Period.
 The Performance Certificate will be granted only at the end of Defect Liability Period
(see below clause 2.7.4).
2.7.4 Performances checking – Tests after completion
[Link] Introduction
Performance checking period – Tests after completion / Defects liability period

This is only a principle sketch.

The duration of the Defects Liability Period (DLP) will be as precisely defined in each
contract.
[Link] Tests after completion
During DLP, the operational performances will be observed in order to check if they are
compliant to the Contract. These performances are depending on each contract, these
are mainly:
- RAM performances
- Operation performances (whenever relevant )
During this period the global performances have to be met in order to comply with the
Contract.
A group composed of the operator, the Engineer and the contractors insure the follow-
up of these performances.
If necessary, special test or controls will be made to perform this follow-up. At the end of
this period, a Performance Certificate is issued.
In case of failure of Tests after completion, see GCC clause 9.4.
2.7.5 Resolution of non-performance or poor performance level discovered during T&C.
While the construction is reaching its completion the correction of the as built
equipment may become impossible besides it may be required to recheck the full

P a g e | 12
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

equipment interface when a non-performance is detected in order to appraise the

effective impact of the poor performance as revealed through the T&C process.
The resolution is no different from the non-compliance process applicable to the
Contract, except that the planning does not allow the redesign. Thus the Engineer may
propose to the Employer to keep the project running on schedule provided that a safe
level of operation can be achieved and propose a contingency plan in order to perform
outstanding tasks and correct at a later stage through retrofit and retest of the defective
equipment or item.

2.8 Blank operation

During blank operation the Operation and Maintenance staff will operate the line in an
exact same way they will operate it during the revenue service except that there is no
passengers. This period will allow the O&M staff to:
 Check that its organisation is fit for purpose and make necessary adjustments:
 Confirm that the system is able to operate and propose necessary adjustments,
 Train itself to implement O&M procedures under various circumstances including
interfaces with external bodies (emergency services, fire brigade, public utilities
services...)

2.9 Revenue service

The passenger transportation shall start after the end of the blank operation and after
delivering of the CRS certificate.
This certificate relies on the safety case provided by each Contractor:
3. Sub - system (functional unit)
The sub-system included in each of the contract will be tested individually as a functional
unit.
Contracts may include more than one sub system. For example the station contracts
featuring the station construction include as well the provision for the building services
to provide lighting, low voltage distribution and water related services etc..
Within each contract, each sub system function shall be tested individually (subsystem)
to demonstrate the work completion and the compliance to the performance criteria.
Within each contract each sub system function shall also be tested in relation to other
interfacing subsystems (whether internal or external to each contract) to demonstrate
the capacity of the said subsystem to operate in its environment (integrated tests and
commissioning).
Main functional units within each contract are defined in Contract Documents .
4. Strategy of the tests
The T&C strategy for the Project will be based on progressive (i.e. increasing level of
complexity and/or size) commissioning of testing package and/or area as mentioned and
defined below.

4.1 Testing area

A Testing area/Commissioning area is defined as a basic geographical section of a system
which constitutes an independent, consistent, functional and isolated assembly.
Examples of Testing area:
 All signalling equipment and material which are held in one signalling room or all
trackside equipment which are monitored or controlled by one signalling room.

P a g e | 13
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

 All Catenary materials and equipment between two kilometric points.

 One rake unit
 Etc.
The division of a system or sub-system into testing area will allow using this splitting of
the system for the Site acceptance test at subsystem level as soon as the installation is
completed for the related equipment.
It is important that the testing areas are independent from each other and when added
all together will constitute the whole system. Thus the test can run independently at first
level then progressively progress through the integration to the final full System level.
The splitting of the System / Subsystem into testing area will be proposed and agreed
into the System and Subsystem Test and Commissioning Plans.
Testing area will be proposed by contractors for Engineer notice of no objection together
with the T&C Plan for each contract.

4.2 Overall integration testing on site

The generic sequence of testing is described hereafter as to how the integration should
progress among all different construction contracts. As a principle the integration is to
be achieved progressively through the system level in order to reach the full system.
At the initial construction stage these test packages are to be divided through the type of
work and through the contractual construction contracts (Civil, track, systems…) and the
location along the line (equipment at one stop or from one place to another).
The principle that is to be followed for the integration at the T&C is to progress with the
integration by testing the portion of line in between two stops and the facilities available
at the stop. Thus gradually the full line will be integrated.
The table here below illustrates a typical indicative sequence of event (for information
only) and shows the progression of the integration of all systems for a section of track.
from one stop to the next.

P a g e | 14
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

Indicative Overall Integration Sequence

Once the line/part of it (section), is fully tested, overall system tests (service trial) will
demonstrate the full section performances (trip time, headway, energy consumption…)

P a g e | 15
 Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
Appendix 21 – Transit System Test and Commissioning

5. Commissioning stages (multi stages )

The Pune Metro construction may allow opening of line in stages.

So the tests & commissioning shall be achieved without any metro traffic perturbation
and Safeguarding the operation safety of the section(s) already operational.
The contractors shall identify (according to the operator) all the critical points and take
any measures to be compliant to these requirements; in particular many tests will have
to be performed at night. The control command of these tests will be achieved in the
test and commissioning room set up for this purpose.

6. Operator involvement during T&C

The operator will be involved progressively from the site acceptance test until the
revenue service. The basic concept is that the operator staff is first involved as a witness
during the site acceptance test of all equipment; this will help the effective training of
the operator staff. During this stage the operator staff will only be present as a witness
to the test carried out by the Contractor, all equipment are operated by the contractor
staff.
During the integration test all work position of the operator will be handled by the
operator to the extent decided by the Employer. The contractors will however supervise
the operator staff. This means that rakes are driven by the operator drivers and that
Control rooms are in effect operated by the operator, to the extent decided by the
Employer. The contractor staff may attend and witness any of these tasks.
During the blank operation the operator staff will be working as for the revenue service.
The contractor’s

P a g e | 16
 Maha Metro

Tender Documents
UGC-01: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND STATIONS AT
SHIVAJI NAGAR AND CIVIL COURT AND ASSOCIATED TUNNELS

PART II – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT

Section VI – Employers Requirement

Appendix 22 –BIM Execution Plan and Employers Information
Requirements (5D BIM)

May 2018
 MMRCL EIR
(Employers Information Requirements)

1|Page
Document Status

Document Title MMRCL Employers Information Requirements

Document Number MMRCL-Pune Metro-EIR V1.0

Publication Date 20-April-2017

Issue Status For MMRCL acceptance

Prepared by

Reviewed by

Approved by

Revision Status

Date Revision Made Revision by Approved by

2|Page
References

No Title Version Date

1 MMRCL EIR Standards, Methods and Procedures 20-April-

2017

2 BS1192:2007+A2:2016 2007+A2 2016

Collaborative production of architectural,
engineering and construction information. Code of
practice

3 PAS 1192-2:2013 2013

Specification for information management for the
capital/delivery phase of construction projects using
building information modelling

4 MMRCL CAD Standard V1.0 20-April-

2017

5 MMRCL - Engineering Assurance File Naming V1.0 20-April-

Convention 2017

6 MMRCL Design Review and Acceptance Procedure

7 MMRCL Master Information Delivery Plan Template V1.0 20-April-

(MIDPT) 2017

8 MMRCL Master Delivery List V1.0 20-April-

2017

9 MMRCL Master Production Delivery Table V1.0 20-April-

2017

10 MMRCL Level 2 BIM E2E Workflow Process V1.0 20-April-

2017

11 MMRCL Level 3 Drawing Process V1.0 20-April-

2017

12 MMRCL Level 3 Model Process V1.0 20-April-

2017

3|Page
Table of Contents
1. PURPOSE ......................................................................................................................................... 6
2. THE EMPLOYERS 5D BIM OBJECTIVES ............................................................................................. 7
2.1 The Employer’s Objectives ...................................................................................................... 7
2.2 Project Objectives ................................................................................................................... 8
3. INFORMATION UTILISATION AND PLANNING................................................................................. 9
3.1 Primary Uses of Data and Information ................................................................................... 9
3.2 Stage Gate Digital Assurance .................................................................................................. 9
3.3 Technical and Design Reviews .............................................................................................. 11
3.4 LOD (Level of Definition) - Principles and Requirements...................................................... 12
3.4.1 Purpose and Scope........................................................................................................ 12
3.4.2 LOD Principles ............................................................................................................... 12
3.5 Master Production and Delivery Table (MPDT): The Employers Requirement .................... 18
3.6 Value Engineering ................................................................................................................. 18
3.7 Health and Safety and Construction Design Management (CDM) ....................................... 18
3.8 Asset Information ................................................................................................................. 19
3.9 Training Arrangements ......................................................................................................... 19
4. STANDARDS, METHODS AND PROCEDURES ................................................................................. 19
4.1 Standards .............................................................................................................................. 19
4.2 Security ................................................................................................................................. 20
4.3 Roles and Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 20
4.4 Naming Conventions ............................................................................................................. 22
4.5 Classification ......................................................................................................................... 22
5. INFORMATION MANAGEMENT..................................................................................................... 22
5.1 System Performance and Constraints................................................................................... 22
5.2 Planning and Work Segregation............................................................................................ 22
5.3 Common Data Environment (CDE)........................................................................................ 24
5.3.1 Task WIP (Work in Progress) Team Data Environment................................................. 25
5.4 Collaboration Process ........................................................................................................... 25
5.5 Compliance Plan.................................................................................................................... 25
6. DIGITAL ENGINEERING .................................................................................................................. 26
6.1 Software Platforms ............................................................................................................... 26
6.1.1 Collaboration Platforms ................................................................................................ 26
6.1.2 Content Development and Analysis Platforms ............................................................. 26
6.2 Information Exchange Formats ............................................................................................. 26
6.3 Coordinates ........................................................................................................................... 27

4|Page
7. COMMERCIAL REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................... 27
8. DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................. 28

5|Page
1. PURPOSE
The purpose of this Employer Information Requirements (EIR) document (as a part of
“Business Requirement Document”) is to provide specific details and instructions relating to
Production Information and Handover Information [Information Artefacts] about the
engineering solution of the MMRCL (Maha Metro Rail Corporation Ltd) asset and how these
shall be captured, authored, managed and submitted to MMRCL or its agent [the Employer]
by the Supplier / Detailed Design Consultant / Contractor [the Supplier] .

The EIR sets out MMRCLs EIR standards, methods and procedures to be used for producing
and managing Information Artefacts during each project phase, to make sure that the
developed engineering solution meets project objectives and desired outcomes and benefits.

As such, it is incumbent on the Supplier to explain:

Pre-contract (if applicable):

As part of the Supplier tender submission and scope of services, and specifically within the
pre-contract BEP (BIM Execution Plan):

 how the Supplier intends complying with the MMRCL Design, Review and Acceptance
procedure
 how the Supplier intends complying with MMRCL EIR SMP (Standards, Methods and
Procedures)
 how the Supplier will help MMRCL achieve its BIM objectives in a manner which helps
eliminate risk from the project and which promotes collaboration, innovation and
right first time design
 how the Supplier intends producing and delivering Information Artefacts in
compliance with MMRCL standards

Post Contract:

As part of the Supplier post-contract BEP (BIM Execution Plan) and in addition to the pre-
contract points listed above:

 how the Supplier intends developing the scope and delivery schedule for the MIDP
(Master Information Delivery Plan) for agreement with MMRCL
 how the supplier intends to make sure that Information Artefacts are submitted in
accordance with the MIDP, to the required schedule, LOD and quality
 how the Supplier intends publishing Drawing information to support Design Reviews,
costing or any other identified purpose
 how the Supplier intends sharing and publishing Modelling information for
Coordination and Collaboration purposes
 how the Supplier intends working collaboratively with interfacing disciplines and
contracts in order to eliminate coordination issues, design clashes and constructability
issues
 how the Supplier intends satisfying the Level of Definition (LOD) requirements

6|Page
 The EIR sets out Level of Definition requirements. This is a collective term used to describe
both the ‘Level of Model Detail’ and the ‘Level of Information Detail‘ to be authored and
issued to the Employer by the Supplier.

The ‘Level of Model Detail’ is the description of graphical content of models which is required
during each (applicable) project phase (for example during CONCEPT DESIGN, PRELIMINARY
DESIGN, DETAILED DESIGN etc)

The ‘Level of Model Information’ is the description of non-graphical content of models which
is required during each project phase.

The LOD principles and requirements are set out in sections 3.4 and 3.5 respectively.

Note that this EIR document has been produced in alignment with BS1192 [Ref 2] and PAS
1192:2-2013 [Ref 3] and uses terminology consistent with this standard including:

 Task Team
 Master Information Delivery Plan (MIDP)
 Master Production Delivery Table (MPDT)
 BIM Execution Plan (BEP)

A glossary of key terms used in this EIR can be found in section 8 Definitions.

The following sections of this EIR document describe the Employers Objectives, the EIR
Standards Methods and Protocols and Supplier obligations in more detail.

2. THE EMPLOYERS 5D BIM OBJECTIVES

It is MMRCL’s objective to have a common strategy for the adoption of 5D BIM. The strategy
includes an approach to describing information requirements across all aspects of the asset
lifecycle with the Information Requirements (EIR) for such, being described in this document.

2.1 The Employer’s Objectives

 To achieve a world-class quality of service, achieve efficiency and practice better

control over the financial transactions and project activities

 Establish uniform standards for excellence in operations, project management, human

resource management, financial management and performance reporting

 To drive efficiencies in the production, modification, operation and decommissioning

of its engineered assets through data driven information, improving decision making
and delivering best value to its stakeholders

 To institutionalise the use of the 5D BIM processes and solutions with the expectation
that the solutions to become the backbone of the project during the design and build
phase and subsequently for operations upon go-live of the project; with no change in
the platforms envisaged unless the technology solution is declared obsolete and out
of support

7|Page
  To make sure that project execution stays within the defined timelines and budgets
with the best of quality resulting from world-class practices on scheduling, estimation
and engineering

 To institute good practise, collaborative techniques and behaviours which results in

on-time and within budget project execution as follows:

o A focus on design beyond 2D drafting and 3D modelling

o Early visualisation and comprehension by MMRCL – enabling faster approval
cycles
o Ease of coordination between construction documents
o Spatial Coordination between disciplines
o Clash detection and conflict resolution limiting issues on-site and during
construction.
o Extraction of intelligent data and automated schedules
o Ability to take-off materials and quantities
o Ability to link Models, Projects Schedules and Construction Sequencing
o Projecting future construction sequence conflicts
o Tracking and identifying location of material and pieces on-site in a simulated
environment
o Transparent and realistic picture of the actual activities in the Project
o Visualisation of construction-sites for contractors, sub-contractors and clients
onsite
o Integration of BIM with mobile-devices for managing construction and
commissioning / hand-over.
o View the current cost and compare it to the estimated total target cost of
projects as well as interim costs against design during design phases
o Effective strategic and operational setup right from the beginning of the
Project
o Implementation of an effective Operational Excellence in Initialisation &
Execution
o True and fair view on financials, reliable forecast and what-if-scenarios
o Cost and Time optimised Program Management with early warning system in
place for on-time management action

 To procure / produce, manage and maintain data and information about the MMRCL
engineered assets that is complete, consistent and can be trusted and re-used for
operational purposes and for future business intelligence

2.2 Project Objectives

The Employer’s 5D BIM objectives for the Pune Metro Project / Contracts are to:

 achieve target capital delivery cost

 deliver best value through innovation
 obtain digital assurance and evidence, through the use of Information Artefacts,
verifying the integrity and completeness of the design of the engineered solution at
each stage of the Project / Contract
 obtain digital assurance and evidence, through the use of Information Artefacts,
validating the buildability of the engineered solution

8|Page
  obtain digital assurance and evidence, through the use of Information Artefacts,
verifying that (and how) the asset(s) can be efficiently constructed / installed
 obtain digital assurance and evidence, through the use of Information Artefacts that
health and safety and CDM requirements have been identified and met
 obtain digital assurance and evidence, validating the integrity and completeness of
the (Handover) Information Artefacts
 obtain structured (Asset) data to populate Asset Management Information Systems

3. INFORMATION UTILISATION AND PLANNING

3.1 Primary Uses of Data and Information

The Employer’s primary uses for the Information Artefacts, throughout the lifecycle of the
asset(s), are as detailed in Table 3-1.

Table 3.1 – Primary Use

Reference Description
PU01 Assurance

To verify that MMRCL assurance requirements are satisfied and evidenced

PU02 Project Coordination

To verify coordination and integration between disciplines and with adjacent

works / contracts
PU03 Business Case and Whole Life Cost

To validate the business case and whole life cost forecasts, making sure they
are robust and outcomes and benefits can be / will be achieved.
PU04 Cost

Facilitate the population of the cost and estimating systems

PU05 Operations and Maintenance

To validate that the assets will meet the operational and maintenance
requirements as set out in the (Asset sections of the) Model Production and
Delivery Table (MPDT)
PU06 Asset Registration

To facilitate the asset registration process and subsequently populate the

Asset Management Information Systems
PU07 Benefits Management

To help verify that the project outcomes and benefits have been achieved

3.2 Stage Gate Digital Assurance

All Information Artefacts, as explicitly defined in the MIDP, shall be submitted to MMRCL
using the MMRCL Common Data Environment (CDE), in order to:

9|Page
 provide the requisite level of assurances in accordance with the Employers
Requirements
 inform stage gate decisions, as defined below to enable Stage Gate sign-off:
o Stage 1: INITIATION

Have business outcomes and benefits (that the projects must deliver) been
established?
o Stage 2: CONCEPT DESIGN

Are the business outcomes and benefits achievable?

Is there an option that delivers optimum value?

o Stage 3: PRELIMINARY DESIGN

Have the design principles been defined?

Can the scope of the project be frozen?

o Stage 4: DETAILED DESIGN

Will the designed solution deliver the required outcomes?

Can the detailed design be used for contracting delivery of the works?

o Stage 5: CONSTRUCTION (INSTALLATION)

Have all (Production) Information Artefacts been provided and verified?

o Stage 6: HANDOVER

Have all (Handover) Information Artefacts been provided and verified?

Have the assets been accepted by the end user?

o Stage 6: OPERATIONS

10 | P a g e
 Note: the table below provides a cross-reference between the generic project stages listed
above and contract specific project stages

Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5 Stage 6 Stage 7

CONCEPT PRELIMINARY DETAILED CONSTRUCTION
INITIATION HANDOVER OPERATIONS
DESIGN DESIGN DESIGN (INSTALLATION)
Concept Preliminary Detailed Commissioning & Operation &
Viaduct Initiation Construction
Design Design Design Handover Mantenance
Concept Preliminary Detailed Commissioning & Operation &
Station Initiation Construction
Design Design Design Handover Mantenance
Material/ Equipment
Operations &
Traction Initiation Preliminary Detailing Procurement Commission
Maintenance
Installation & Testing
Procurement
Testing &
(Manufacturing &
Commissioning
Electrical & Inspection) Operations &
Initiation Preliminary Detailed
Mechanical Maintenance
Supply Integrated Testing
Installation Handing Over
Delivery
Interface test &
Installation Test
Configuration
Procedures
Revenue
Own Commissioning &
Telecom Initiation Concept Preliminary Detailed ITC Operations
Configuration
(Final Testing) Date
Partial Acceptance
System Configuration
Trail Runs
System Acceptance Test
Mock Integrated Testing
Rolling Production & Commissioning
Initiation Preliminary Pre-final Detail Operations
Stocks
Testing & Commissioning Trail Run

FAT Testing &

Signalling Initiation Preliminary Detail Delivery Commissiong Operations
Installation As-Built
Depot
Track

 facilitate the primary uses as set out in Table 3-1

 deliver the required types of documentation as part of the (Handover) Information
Artefacts, as defined in the MIDP (Master Information Delivery Plan).

NOTE: The Supplier shall identify and capture within the MIDP, the Information Artefacts that
will be delivered to support and inform the stage decisions and assurances, as set out within
the MMRCL Design Review and Acceptance Procedure [Ref 6].

For details of the required types of documents to be delivered as part of the Handover
Information, refer to the Operations and Maintenance section of the MIDP.

3.3 Technical and Design Reviews

All Technical and Design Reviews are to be undertaken in accordance with the MMRCL
Design, Review and Acceptance procedure [Ref 6]. This procedure specifically identifies the
types, frequency and events at which reviews will be undertaken.

The MMRCL Design, Review and Acceptance procedure [Ref 6] provides a comprehensive list
of questions which are be answered at each Design Review. The Supplier shall provide the
agreed Information Artefacts needed to adequately answer all design review questions and
provide the requisite evidence of assurance.

11 | P a g e
 All Information Artefacts for Technical and Design Reviews shall be submitted by the Supplier
through the CDE in accordance with the relevant MMRCL EIR Standards, Methods and
Procedures [Ref 1]

3.4 LOD (Level of Definition) - Principles and Requirements

3.4.1 Purpose and Scope

The purpose of this section is to define the LOD principles and requirements for each of the
primary systems and components within each Discipline for each project stage.

The Employer’s LOD requirements are specified in the Employer’s MDPT (Master Delivery Plan
Table) – which is provided as a referenced document to this EIR document. The Employers
MDPT declares:

 The list of systems for which models are required

 The project stage or stages (eg DETAILED DESIGN) at which models are to be
developed by the Supplier

NOTE: see section 3.5 Master Production and Delivery Table (MPDT): The Employers
Requirement, for the stages at which models are to be developed by the Supplier

 the required LOD for each of the systems models

 the intended purpose of the models
 the native and deliverable formats in which the models are to be issued to the CDE

NOTE: The Supplier shall develop the MIDP and BEP to provide assurances and evidence as
to how the points above will be addressed

3.4.2 LOD Principles

The Level of Definition is a collective term used to describe both the ‘Level of Model Detail’
[LOD] and the ‘Level of Information Detail‘ [LOI] to be authored and issued to the Employer
by the Supplier.

The ‘Level of Model Detail’ is the description of graphical content of models which is required
during each (applicable) project stage (for example during DETAILED DESIGN etc)

The ‘Level of Model Information’ is the description of non-graphical content of

models which is required during each project phase.

These principles are based on PAS1192-2 [Ref 3] as illustrated below:

12 | P a g e
In principle, the LOD and LOI and matures progressively throughout the project lifecycle as
illustrated in the diagram below.

Figure 1. Plan of Work and the progressive Level of Definition.

Table 3.4.1 below declares MMRCL’s overall vision and principles for modelling, LOD and LOI
across the project lifecycle.

13 | P a g e
 Table 3.4.1 - Generic principles of Levels of Model definition for building and infrastructure projects
Stage Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Model Number INITIATION CONCEPT DESIGN PRELIMINARY DESIGN DETAIL DESIGN CONSTRUCTION HANDOVER OPERATIONS
Systems to be N/A As per MPDT As per MPDT As per MPDT As per MPDT As per MPDT As per MPDT
covered requirements requirements requirements requirements requirements requirements
Graphical
Illustration
(Building Project)

Graphical
Illustration
(Infrastructure
Project)

What the model Model information Models which A dimensionally correct A dimensionally correct An accurate model of the asset An accurate record of the An updated record of the
communicating the communicate the initial and coordinated model and model that can be before and during construction asset as a constructed at asset at a fixed point in
can be relied
brief, performance response to the brief, which communicates the used to verify compliance incorporating coordinated handover, including all time incorporating any
upon for requirements, aesthetic intent and response to the brief, with regulatory specialist subcontract design information required for major changes made since
performance outline performance aesthetic intent and some requirements. The model models and associated model operation and maintenance. handover, including
benchmarks and site requirements. The performance information can be used as the start attributes. The model can be performance and condition
constraints model can be used for that can be used for point for the incorporation used for sequencing of data and all information
early design analysis, design of specialist contractor installation and capture of as required for operation and
development, analysis development and early design models and can installed information maintenance.
and co-ordination. contractor engagement. include information that
Model content is not The model can be used for can be used for
fixed and may be co-ordination, sequencing fabrication, co-ordination,
subject to further and estimating purposes sequencing and estimating
design development. including the agreement of purposes, including the
The model can be used a first stage target price agreement of a target
for co-ordination, price/guaranteed
sequencing and maximum price.
estimating purposes.

Output Project brief and Refined project brief Approval of coordinated Integrated production As constructed systems, Agreed final account. In
procurement strategy and concept approval developed design information. Complete operation and maintenance use performance
fabrication and manufacturing information. Agreed final compared against Project
details, system and element account Building Log Book Brief. Project process
verification, operation and Information gathered as key feedback: risk;
maintenance information elements are completed to procurement information
Modify to represent as feed installation management, soft landings
installed model with all information for the later
associated references. packages.

14 | P a g e
Stage Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Model Number INITIATION CONCEPT DESIGN PRELIMINARY DESIGN DETAIL DESIGN CONSTRUCTION HANDOVER OPERATIONS
Parametric Project needs update: Sufficient date to Co-ordinated Developed Production information for Production record for the Updated: Geometry and Revisions for modifications
definition of function(s), estimate per square Design for the project the project: Specific project: Specific systems, installed product to the facility during its life.
Information
operation, quality and metre rates and other setting: generic systems, systems, objects and objects and assemblies information, "as
time. similar metrics. objects, or assemblies assemblies accurate in accurate in terms of constructed"
Benchmarking updated: Wireframe for represented with, detailed terms of specification, size, specification, size, form, Accuracy/resolution of
capital cost, surfaces/solids. form, function, cost, form, function and function and location with information. Commissioned
maintenance cost, time, Concepts, site context defining all components in location. Critical interfaces detailing, fabrication, performance for: OPEX,
health & safety, risk placeholder/ volumes/ terms of overall size, flagged Fixing assembly, and installation energy, and carbon Detailed
procurement contract. package volumes, typical detail, performance Methodology Confirmed information Detailed routing of maintenance methodology.
Performance system routings, site and outline specification, clash free detailed system Fixings and interfaces Snagging action status.
requirements: Priorities selection, datum points primary geometry frozen, production program details to be used. Updated:
and aspirations for: & levels. Integrated integration of standard sequence. Updated: energy use and embodied and
function, mix of uses, concept for the project designs and systems, energy use and embodied in use carbon, detailed design
scale, location, quality, setting scope, scale, builders work strategy for and in use carbon, detailed and construction program.
performance in use, form and primary significant interfaces, design and construction
cost (CAPEX & OPEX), design criteria: energy use, embodied and program
value, time, health & architectural form and in use carbon.
safety, embodied and in spatial arrangements, Maintenance plan Detailed
use carbon, energy and services philosophy and design and construction
resources needs, special arrangements program.
standard designs. Site preliminary assessment
constraints: geo-spatial, of energy use and
available site embodied/in-use
information. carbon, incorporation
of standard systems

Employer
activities

15 | P a g e
Stage Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Model Number INITIATION CONCEPT DESIGN PRELIMINARY DESIGN DETAIL DESIGN CONSTRUCTION HANDOVER OPERATIONS
Critical N/A Environmental control Assumed procurement Allocated procurement Progressive capture of actual As constructed 3D scan As modified survey data.
philosophy and special package performance ad package relationships, dimensional data for critical Element performance test
Interfaces and
allocations for spatial boundaries; Other performance and special interface dimensions. results. System
logic ventilation; Availability relationships between boundaries; Actual Progressive capture of Commissioning status.
of the site and outline procurement packages; dimensional interface information for calculating
construction Assumed design codes requirements; Records of material requirements for
methodology regarding dimensional any derogations approved; follow on packages. Capture of
assumptions; Services tolerances of related Actual on-site to offsite object status for progress
capacity for the site systems; Foundation interface specifications. reporting and collaborative
Permitted working tolerances for use of off- planning.
hours on site site modular system;
Assessment of predicted
movements (thermal,
loading, creep, shrinkage
etc.)

Construction N/A Crane use zones; Traffic Confirmed crane (or other Actual crane (or other Status of construction Confirmed status that the Design of any construction
diversions lifting system) zones lifting system) zones and requirements. Safety briefing construction aids have been requirements, eg:
requirements
framework details. Traffic movement sequences. information. Construction removed. temporary safety supports
(Examples) diversion details. Construction methodology, sequence and or restraint supports or
methodology, sequence movements, critical to restraint systems if
and movements, critical to installation. Formwork details structural defects have
how the production design including install and removal been discovered.
is developed. sequence. Actual traffic
diversion details.
Project Costs Initial project budget. Feasibility cost plan. Commitment Cost Plan. Contract Sum/Target Contract Sum/ Target Price/ Final account. Actual in-use costs. Asset
Order of cost estimate. Feasibility life cost plan. Contractor's first stage bid price/ Agreed Maximum Agreed Maximum Price. Pre- replacement sinking fund.
submission. Detailed Price. Pre-construction construction whole life cost
whole life cost plan. whole life cost plan plan.

Project Logistics Client requirements, eg Assumed access and A feasible logistics Finalised logistics Object status progress Remote monitoring systems Remote monitoring
to avoid impact on egress points; Potential sequence for the sequences. Details of recording to initiate demand status. systems status.
and off site
other operations. delivery and lay down construction sequence; actual off-site system to be pull signals for deliveries.
activities zones. Confirmed modular used.
(examples) strategy (volumetric,
panelised, hybrid or other)

16 | P a g e
Stage Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Model Number INITIATION CONCEPT DESIGN PRELIMINARY DESIGN DETAIL DESIGN CONSTRUCTION HANDOVER OPERATIONS
Project facilities Collaboration tools; Assumed access and Confirmed access zones Finalized, costed plan, Recording status of security Security system operational, Security system
Data standards welfare zones; Design and design team Critical lead times critical areas (EG unchecked, potentially using model operational. Facilities
(Welfare, IT
team collocation. collocation. confirmed. Off-site sweep in progress, screened information for lines of sight management systems
Infrastructure, manufacturing capacity and secured) from cameras, PAVA zone running on model
security etc) reserved. controls, etc. generated information
onsite and Geometry for letting
activities accessed from "as
offsite
constructed" model
(examples)

Notes and Management systems Technical strategy Provides the basis for Updated: maintenance Detailed construction Approximate final account N/A (project closed)
for information and studies. Commissioning Integrated Production plan, risk management methodology, Updated health Maintenance procurement
associated
decision making philosophy NRM1 Information to be plan, detailed construction and safety risk management pricing Remedial works,
project Approval policies. capital cost plan NRM3 produced on a package methodology, NRM2 plan NRM3 maintenance cost handover and maintenance
documents, maintenance cost plan basis with limited risk of procurement pricing plan program.
based on model changes to primary schedule, NRM3
coordination Room maintenance cost an,
information
Information sheets, health and safety risk
Detailed construction management plan, risk
methodology NRM2 and management plan.
NRM3 cost plans Health
and safety risk
management Risk
Management plan.

17 | P a g e
3.5 Master Production and Delivery Table (MPDT): The Employers Requirement

The Employers MPDT Requirements define the minimum LOD and LOI required for each
System. These are explicitly defined in the Employers MDPT, which are referenced by to this
EIR document.

NOTE: It is MMRCL’s requirement that model Information Artefacts should be developed from
the start of DETAILED DESIGN stage of the project. 2D drawings approved at the end of the
preliminary stage should be used for developing the 3D Model which is only to be submitted
for Review. On Final approval (Level A or Level B) of the 3D Model, 2D drawings are extracted
and submitted for review with 3D drawings for Construction certification.

The Supplier shall develop the MIDP and BEP to provide assurances and evidence as to how
the points below will be addressed:

 How models shall be developed to the required LOD/LOI.

 How models (and 2D drawings) shall be developed and issued to the CDE in the
identified native and deliverable formats

 How the Supplier intends working collaboratively with interfacing disciplines and
contracts in order to eliminate coordination issues, interface and design clashes and
constructability and construction sequencing issues
 How all information artefacts (both models and drawings) shall comply with the
MMRCL - Engineering Assurance File Naming Convention [Ref 5]
 How all information artefacts (both models and drawings) shall comply with the
MMRCL CAD Standard [Ref 4]

3.6 Value Engineering

NOTE: The Supplier shall provide details of how Information Artefacts will be used to show the
effectiveness (and provide assurance and evidence) of value engineering.

Value engineering must be integrated into the Design Review procedure. An MMRCL
Operations Representative must have access to all relevant Information Artefacts and attend
all value engineering reviews.

NOTE: The Supplier shall provide details of how Information Artefacts will be presented and
approved during the review process.

3.7 Health and Safety and Construction Design Management (CDM)

NOTE: The Supplier shall provide details of how Information Artefacts will be utilised to
support health and safety and CDM obligations; identifying, eliminating and reducing hazards
and risks and providing better safety management.

Where the Supplier is contracted to carry out Detailed Design they shall provide details of
process for integrating the construction plan with other components of the Production
Information. Details shall include how safety measurements will be validated and how
compliance with safety regulations will be checked.

18
3.8 Asset Information

Table 3-5 provides details of the Employer’s corporate solutions for the management of Asset
Information and the vehicle for delivery of the required information.

Table 3.5 – Asset Information

Description
System Data / Information Information Exchange Format
Bentley AssetWise Documentation Word/Excel/PDF
Bentley ProjectWise Graphical Data Refer to Table 6.2
Non-Graphical Data Excel

Note: Where the MMRCL MPDT Requirements extend to the CONSTRUCTION, HANDOVER or
OPERATIONs phases, the Supplier shall develop and include a MDPT response within the
Suppliers BEP providing assurances and evidence as to how the points below will be
addressed:

 How Asset Information Artefacts shall be developed to the required LOD/LOI for each
of the listed systems and project stages
 How Asset Information Artefacts (and 2D drawings) shall be developed and issued to
the CDE in the identified native and deliverable formats
 How Asset Information Artefacts shall comply with the MMRCL - Engineering
Assurance File Naming Convention [Ref 5]
 How Asset Information Artefacts (drawings) shall comply with the MMRCL CAD
Standard [Ref 4]

3.9 Training Arrangements

The Supplier is responsible for making sure that their staff (and that of their Sub-contractors
of any tier) are adequately briefed and trained to undertake the Information Management
and Information Modelling aspects of the project.

The Supplier shall provide details of how they will make sure (and manage and maintain) their
staff (and that of their Sub-contractors) have the capability and competency to provide
verified and coordinated Information Artefacts in accordance with these EIRs.

4. STANDARDS, METHODS AND PROCEDURES

4.1 Standards

All Information Artefacts, as specified in the MPDT and as defined and agreed in the MIDP,
shall be produced, managed and submitted into the CDE in accordance with the standards and
procedures listed below and in any case in compliance with the MMRCL EIR Standards,
Methods and Procedures [Ref 1].

Table 4.1 – Industry Standards

Standard Ref Title Revision

19
 BS 1192:2007+A2:2016 Collaborative production of architectural, N/A
engineering and construction information. Code of
practice
BIP2207 Standard Framework and Guide to BS1192:2007
PAS 1192-2:2013 Specification for information management for the
capital/delivery phase of construction projects using
building information modelling
Digital Plan of Work (NBS [Link]
Toolkit)
CIC BIM Protocol 2013

Table 4.1 – Project Standards & Procedures

Standard Ref Title Revision
MMRCL CAD Standard MMRCL CAD Standard V1.0

4.2 Security

NOTE: The Supplier shall provide details and assurances within the BEP of how the following
potential security concerns will be addressed:

Note: that the scope and context of these security concerns relates to the Suppliers
production and management of Information Artefacts, in particular when working outside of
the MMRCL CDE

 How the Supplier will comply with all relevant MMRCL security policies
 How the Supplier will protect MMRCL IP (Intellectual Property)
 How the Supplier will make sure that access to Information Artefacts will be restricted
only to the relevant, authorised personnel
 How the Supplier will protect Information Artefacts against malicious attach

4.3 Roles and Responsibilities

The role of a Project Information Manager shall be appointed by the Supplier.

The responsibilities of the Project Information Manager include:

 making sure that the BEP has been completed and agreed with the Employer and
(where appropriate) briefed to Sub-contractors or suppliers of the Supplier and the
relevant the Project / Task Team members
 making sure that the BEP is updated as works progress, in compliance with project
change control procedures
 making sure that all Employer standards, methods and procedures are fully complied
with
 promoting collaborative behaviours
 providing the focal point for all Information Artefact management issues on the
project

20
  making sure that all Information Artefacts are compliant with the requirements of the
contract and all relevant Employer standards
 making sure that all Information Artefacts are managed and submitted through the
CDE and that all mandatory meta-data has been populated
 making sure that the Supplier, Sub-contractors or suppliers of the Contractor /
Consultant, and the relevant the Project / Task Team members (as applicable) have
continued and appropriate access to the Project Data Environment
 providing clear instructions, including on the following areas:
o which Information Artefacts are required, by whom and for what purpose;
o who will generate the Information Artefacts and maintain them;
o how Information Artefacts will be sorted and distributed;
o how frequently Information Artefacts will be shared (for example for inter-
disciplinary coordination purpose); and
o what actions should be taken on receipt of Information Artefacts
The Roles and Responsibilities relating to the authoring, checking, sharing, publishing and
management of the Information Artefacts can be found in the MMRCL EIR Standards,
Methods and Procedures [Ref 1].
The Supplier shall assure MMRCL that that responsibilities have been adequately allocated
and that a contact list of those assigned to the project, including Curriculum Vitaes (CV) is
maintained for assurance purposes.

21
4.4 Naming Conventions

The Supplier shall make sure that a single File Naming convention is used for all Information
Artefacts and that File Names are unique across the Project.

The File Naming Convention is defined in MMRCL EIR Standards, Methods and Procedures
document [Ref 1].

4.5 Classification

The Supplier shall structure all Information Artefacts; categorising the functional and physical
characteristics of the assets such that they can be efficiently identified, grouped and utilised

5. INFORMATION MANAGEMENT
5.1 System Performance and Constraints

The Supplier shall provide details of any limitations / restrictions of all IT systems; this should
as a minimum determine limitations on files size and any restrictions on the use of the
MMRCL recommended software platforms.

The Supplier is responsible for procuring, testing and implementing any required IT
infrastructure, hardware and software in advance of project mobilisation and on-boarding.

5.2 Planning and Work Segregation

Zoning and Volume Strategy

The Contractor / Consultant shall provide details of their massing strategy in accordance with
Section 3.4 Level of Definition – Principles and Requirements which shall define the extents
of the proposed design, including:

 shape
 general size
 location
 orientation.

Modelling Strategy

The Supplier shall provide details of their modelling strategy, which must explicitly define how
Information Artefacts will be developed to allow;

 parallel working across discipline / Task Teams

 coordination within (and across) interfacing disciplines / Task Teams and all adjacent
works /contracts
 efficient Information Artefact exchange through the CDE
 delivery of graphical information in accordance with the MMRCL CAD Standard [Ref
4]

22
23
 Volume Strategy

The Supplier shall provide details of their volume strategy, which must explicitly define how
the extents of the massing strategy are sub-divided into spaces within which discipline / Task
Teams can effectively coordinate their designs (i.e. rooms, horizontal and vertical circulation,
structures, service routes).

The Supplier shall provide details of their processes for utilising the volume strategy to:

 federate models
 provide assurances and evidence of coordination between interfacing disciplines /
Task Teams and all adjacent works / contracts
 design within each volume
 provide assurances and evidence of the coordination and integration between the
volumes

Please refer to Section 3.4 Level of Definition – Principles and Requirements for more details.

5.3 Common Data Environment (CDE)

All Information Artefacts shall be authored, checked, shared, published and managed through
the CDE, in accordance with MMRCL EIR Standards, Methods and Procedures [Ref 1] – but
see qualifying notes below with respect to authoring and checking.

The CDE comprises:

 A Project Data Environment

MMRCL will provide a designated system accessible to all Task Teams and other
relevant stakeholders (as authorised by MMRCL), which shall be used as a managed
‘single source of truth’ for all Information Artefacts shared for (non-contractual)
coordination and collaboration purposes and for all Information Artefacts published
for (contractual) MMRCL Design Review and Acceptance purposes

 Task Team Data Environment(s)

MMRCL will provide each Task Team with a dedicated, secure working area (the Task
Team Data Environment) where Information Artefacts shall be Shared and Published,
in accordance with the Master Information Delivery Plan (MIDP).

All Shared and Published Information Artefacts shall first be approved by the Task
Team Manager before issue to the relevant Shared or Published Area of the Project
Data Environment

All Shared and Published Information Artefacts shall first be approved by the Task Team
Manager before issue to the relevant Shared or Published Area of the Project Data
Environment

MMRCL shall provide the Project Data Environment as described in MMRCL EIR Standards,
Methods and Procedures [Ref 1]. All other details relating to the Collaboration Tools used to
support the CDE are documented below.

24
 The Employer Collaboration tool is declared in Table 6.1a. Details of how the Supplier (and
their Sub-contractors) shall access and interact with the system, including the security model,
access rights and training and support to be provided is documented in the MMRCL EIR
Standards, Methods and Procedures [Ref 1].

5.3.1 Task WIP (Work in Progress) Team Data Environment

Note that Suppliers may optionally choose to develop WIP Information Artefacts within the
MMRCL Task Team Data Environment.

On request, MMRCL shall provide each Task Team with a secure WIP (Work in Progress)
working area, where the Supplier can author and check Information Artefacts in advance of
issuing to the relevant Shared or Published Area of the Project Data Environment should the
Supplier choose to work this way – the Supplier shall notify and document this intent within
the Suppliers BEP response

5.4 Collaboration Process

The Supplier shall make sure that all Information Artefacts are checked, approved and verified
as Information Artefacts are issued to or are passed through the CDE.

The types of checks and approvals shall be determined by the purpose for which the
Information Artefacts is being shared (refer to Section 8 of the SMP for further details).

The Supplier shall provide the following details:

 processes for checking, approving and verifying Information Artefacts within the CDE
 triggers for sharing / exchanging Information Artefacts
 purposes of sharing / exchanging Information Artefacts
 assurances of compliance against the prescribed information exchange format
 frequency and purpose of each design review / coordination workshop

5.5 Compliance Plan

The Supplier shall provide details and evidence of how Information Artefacts, delivered
through the CDE, are:

 verified against Project Requirements (including the EIR)

 compliant with the standards set out in section 4.1,
 progressed to the agreed LOD as set out in the MIDPs and BEP
 spatially coordinated in relation to the assets physical space, operational space and
maintenance space
 useable by the software platforms identified in Table 6-1
 in the information exchange formats identified in Table 6-2; and
 checked and approved for technical content, in accordance with the MMRCL Design,
Review and Acceptance Procedure [Ref 6]

25
6. DIGITAL ENGINEERING
6.1 Software Platforms

6.1.1 Collaboration Platforms

The Employers Collaboration Platforms are listed in Table 6-1.

Table 6.1 – Employer Collaboration Platforms

Use Platform Version
CDE: Project Data Environment –
Bentley ProjectWise
Collaboration Tool
CDE: Project Data Environment – DMS
Bentley AssetWise
(Document Management System)
3D/4D/5D integration RIBiTwo
Project Scheduling Primavera
Enterprise Reporting SAP

6.1.2 Content Development and Analysis Platforms

The Employer shall not place any restrictions on the content development or analysis tools to
be used by the Supplier.

However, in order to minimise compatibility and interoperability issues, the Employers

mandates that any DWG format which is issued to the CDE is published using AutoCAD version
14 or higher.

The Supplier shall document assurances to this affect through the BEP response.

6.2 Information Exchange Formats

The Supplier shall deliver Information Artefacts (issued through the CDE), in accordance with
the MIDP and in the exchange formats declared in Table 6-2 and where appropriate in
accordance with NRMCL CAD Standard [Ref 4].

Data/Information Exchange Format

Documentation PDF, DOC, XLS
2D Drawings (Design & Construction) DGN, PDF
2D Drawings (As Built & Operations & Maintenance) DGN, PDF

Native 3D discipline based models (Graphical Data) DGN

Deliverable 3D models (Graphical Data) iModel
4D Simulation (Graphical Data and Non-Graphical Data) iModel, DGN

Survey data (for Design & Engineering context) 3MX, CSV, SHP
Cost Data (Non-Graphical Data) XLS
Programs XER, PLF, MPP, PDF, XLS

26
 If necessary, the Supplier shall provide details of how interoperability issues will be addressed
to make sure that Information Artefacts are delivered in the formats prescribed above.

6.3 Coordinates

All geographical Information Artefacts shall be exchanged, through the CDE, in compliance
with the MMRCL Project Grid:

 Survey information, including mapping

 All Information Artefacts which represent the fixed geographical location of an asset
or assets.

Details relating to the MMRCL Project Grid are listed below:

Details relating to the dimensional consistency / units of measure are found in the MMRCL
CAD Standard [Ref 4].

7. COMMERCIAL REQUIREMENTS

27
 The Supplier shall respond to this EIR in the form of a BIM Execution Plan (BEP); the template
for which shall be provided by MMRCL.

8. DEFINITIONS
Table 8 – Definitions
Term Definition
Asset Management Systems used to store and manage data about assets.
Information System
BEP (BIM Execution Plan) A document within which the proposed approach, capability,
capacity and competencies of the prospective or selected
Contractor / Consultant sets out the response to the EIRs
CDE (Common Data The agreed solution for the production, use and management of
Environment) Model File(s), Composite Model(s), Non-Graphical Data,
Document Definition(s) and Document Rendition(s), as set out in
the SMP, BEP and MIDP(s)
Composite Model Computer Aided Design (CAD) file(s) displaying one or more
Model Files (attached as references), for the purpose of
performing coordination activities and / or compiling Document
Definitions.
Data Authoring Creation of Production Information and Handover Information
Data Capture Collecting, from various sources, Graphical Data and Non-
Graphical Data relating to asset(s)
Data Coordination Use of Graphical Data and Non-Graphical Data, about the
asset(s), to virtually assure and evidence coordination across all
task teams, existing infrastructure and adjacent works
Data Simulation Use of Graphical Data and Non-Graphical Data to virtually test
the design, construction, operation and maintenance of the
asset(s)
Data Validation Rule based tools used to validate and check all Production
Information and Handover Information against the EIR and
Standards
Data Visualisation Visually representing Graphical Data and Non-Graphical Data to
support decision making.
Document Definition Data file produced, containing a view of the Non-Graphical Data
and / or Model File(s) and / or Composite Model(s), to derive
meaning for a specific purpose
Document Rendition A data file in an immutable format, derived from a Document
Definition
Handover Information Model File(s), Composite Model(s), Non-Graphical Data,
Document Definition(s) and Document Rendition(s) which have
been agreed between the Parties to be produced, updated,
maintained and delivered as set out in the Master Information
Delivery Plan(s) in accordance with the Employers requirements
Information Artefacts The collective term for Production Information, Handover
Information and any other model or drawing deliverables
identified in the within the MIDP and MPDT – all Information
Artefacts shall be authored, shared, published and archived
within the CDE

28
MIDP (Master Information A forward looking schedule of the Model File(s), Composite
Delivery Plan) Model(s), Non-Graphical Data, Document Definition(s) and
Document Rendition(s) which are to be produced, maintained
and delivered as Information Artefacts
Model File Computer Aided Design (CAD) file(s) containing shape(s) with
defined origin, orientation and dimensions, communicating the
physical characteristic of the assets. A Model File may also
include Non-Graphical Data, associate to the CAD file(s) and / or
shape(s), identifying the functional characteristics of the asset(s)
Non-Graphical Data Data file containing alphanumeric characters, communicating the
physical and functional characteristics of the asset(s)
Primavera MMRCL Project Planning Tool

Production Information The Model File(s), Composite Model(s), Non-Graphical Data,

Document Definition(s) and Document Rendition(s), including
Engineering Information which have been agreed between the
Parties to be produced, updated and maintained in order to
provide the Works and be delivered during the design and
construction stages of the Project, as set out in the MIDP(s).

Referred to within PAS1192-2 as the PIM (Project Information

Model).

29
MMRCL EIR Standards, Methods and Procedures

1|Page
Document Status

Document Title MMRCL EIR Standards, Methods and Procedures

Document Number MMRCL-Pune Metro-SMP V1.0

Publication Date 20-April-2017

Issue Status For MMRCL acceptance

Prepared by

Reviewed by

Approved by

Revision Status

Date Revision Made Revision by Approved by

2|Page
References

No Title Version Date

1 MMRCL-Pune Metro-EIR V1.0 2007 + 20-April-

A2 2017

2 BS1192:2007+A2:2016 2016
Collaborative production of architectural,
engineering and construction information. Code of
practice

3 PAS 1192-2:2013 2013

Specification for information management for the
capital/delivery phase of construction projects using
building information modelling

4 MMRCL CAD Standard V1.0 20-April-

2017

5 MMRCL - Engineering Assurance File Naming V1.0 20-April-

Convention 2017

6 MMRCL Design Review and Acceptance Procedure 20-April-

2017

7 MMRCL Master Information Delivery Plan Template V1.0 20-April-

(MIDP) 2017

8 MMRCL Master Delivery List (MDL) V1.0 20-April-

2017

9 MMRCL Master Production Delivery Table (MPDT) V1.0 20-April-

2017

10 MMRCL Level 2 BIM E2E Workflow Process V1.0 20-April-

2017

11 MMRCL Level 3 Drawing Process V1.0 20-April-

2017

12 MMRCL Level 3 Model Process V1.0 20-April-

2017

3|Page
Table of Contents
1. PURPOSE ......................................................................................................................................... 6
2. SCOPE .............................................................................................................................................. 6
3. PROJECT DOCUMENTS .................................................................................................................... 6
4. MASTER INFORMATON DELIVERY PLAN ......................................................................................... 6
5. COMMON DATA ENVIRONMENT (CDE) PROCEDURES ................................................................... 6
5.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 6
5.2 CDE Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 9
5.2.1 Task Team WIP (Work in Progress) Area (Optional) ....................................................... 9
5.2.2 Project Shared Area ........................................................................................................ 9
5.2.3 Project Published Area .................................................................................................. 10
5.2.4 Archive .......................................................................................................................... 11
5.3 Information Security and Access........................................................................................... 11
5.3.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 11
5.3.2 CDE Roles and CDE Competencies ................................................................................ 11
6. INFORMATION EXCHANGES .......................................................................................................... 11
6.1 Task Team Data Environment ............................................................................................... 11
6.2 Project Data Environment..................................................................................................... 12
6.3 Supplier Responsibility .......................................................................................................... 12
6.4 Site Information (including Survey) ...................................................................................... 13
6.4.1 Site Information ............................................................................................................ 13
6.5 Employer Document Control (Employer use only) ............................................................... 13
7. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES (for Information Artefacts)........................................................... 13
7.1 Design Coordination Manager (appointed by the Supplier) ................................................. 13
7.2 Lead Designer (appointed by the Supplier) .......................................................................... 14
7.3 Task Team Managers (appointed by the Supplier) ............................................................... 14
7.4 Interface Manager (appointed by the Supplier) ................................................................... 14
7.5 Project Information Manager (appointed by the Supplier) .................................................. 15
7.6 CAD Coordinator (appointed by the Supplier) ...................................................................... 15
7.7 CAD Manager (appointed by the Supplier) ........................................................................... 15
7.8 Project Manager (appointed by the Employer) .................................................................... 16
7.9 Designated Technical Lead / Manager (appointed by the Employer) .................................. 16
7.10 Lead Reviewer (appointed by the Employer) ....................................................................... 16
7.11 Employer Information Manager (appointed by the Employer) ............................................ 16
7.12 Document Controller (appointed by the Employer) ............................................................. 17
8. INFORMATION ARTEFACTS: CHECKS, APPROVALS & ACCEPTANCE ............................................. 17

4|Page
 8.1 Checks and Approvals ........................................................................................................... 17
8.2 Employer Acceptance ........................................................................................................... 19
9. UNIQUE FILE IDENTIFICATION....................................................................................................... 19
10. METADATA ................................................................................................................................ 19
11. DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................................. 20
APPENDIX A: DOCUMENT MAP ............................................................................................................ 22
APPENDIX B: CDE (COMMON DATA ENVIRONMENT) .......................................................................... 23
APPENDIX C: INFORMATION ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................ 24
APPENDIX D: CDE – HIGH LEVEL WORKFLOW ...................................................................................... 25

5|Page
1. PURPOSE
The purpose of this document is to set out the MMRCL SMP (Standards, Methods and
Procedures), for the Pune Metro Project, including those relating to the MMRCL CDE
(Common Data Environment), the means by which Information Artefacts, as set out in the
MIDPs (Master Information Delivery Plans), are to be produced, used and managed.

The intent is to provide a common set of processes (including those in relation to the
Common Data Environment) for the production, use and management of the Model Files,
Composite Models, Non-Graphical Data and Document / Drawing Renditions.

This document shall be read in conjunction with MMRCL-Pune Metro-EIR V1.0 [Ref 1],
BS1192:2007+A2:2016 [Ref 2] and PAS 1192-2:2013 [Ref 3].

2. SCOPE
This SMP applies to all parties (including the Employer) involved in the Pune Metro Project,
who are engaged in the production, use and management of Information Artefacts as set out
and agreed in the MIDP(s).

3. PROJECT DOCUMENTS
See Appendix A: Document Map for the relationship between this and other EIR related
documentation.

4. MASTER INFORMATON DELIVERY PLAN

The Supplier / Detailed Design Consultant / Contractor [the Supplier] shall provide one MIDP
per organisation, per organisational role (as applicable).

The MIDP shall be populated and agreed and included as part of the Suppliers BEP response,
during the mobilisation period, prior to commencement of any production information.

Note that all updates to the MIDP shall follow project change control procedures.

5. COMMON DATA ENVIRONMENT (CDE) PROCEDURES

5.1 General

The Supplier shall produce, use and manage all Information Artefacts in accordance with the
procedures set out in Section 5.2 below.

The CDE comprises:

6|Page
  A Project Data Environment

MMRCL will provide a designated system accessible to all Task Teams and other
relevant stakeholders (as authorised by MMRCL), which shall be used as a managed
‘single source of truth’ for all Information Artefacts shared for (non-contractual)
coordination and collaboration purposes and for all Information Artefacts published
for (contractual) MMRCL Design Review and Acceptance purposes

 Task Team Data Environment(s)

MMRCL will provide each Task Team with a dedicated, secure working area (the Task
Team Data Environment) where Information Artefacts shall be Shared and Published,
in accordance with the Master Information Delivery Plan (MIDP).

All Shared and Published Information Artefacts shall first be approved by the Task
Team Manager before issue to the relevant Shared or Published Area of the Project
Data Environment

Note that on request, MMRCL will provide each Task Team with a secure WIP (Work in
Progress) working area, where the Supplier can author and check Information
Artefacts in advance of issuing to the relevant Shared or Published Area of the Project
Data Environment should the Supplier choose to work this way – the Supplier shall
notify and document this intent within the Suppliers BEP response.

Employers
Employers Information
Information Requirements
Requirements

Scope of
EIR IM Protocol Contract
Services

Project
Project Information
Information Requirements
Requirements Handover
Handover
Requirements
Requirements

Design,
EIR Standards, Document BIM Execution
Review &
Methods & Control Plan
Acceptance
Procedures Procedure (Template)
Procedure

Master
Information TBD
Delivery Plan

Commercial Employer Supplier

Document Document Document

Please refer to

7|Page
 Appendix B: CDE (Common DATA ENVIRONMENT)

5.2 CDE Procedure

5.2.1 Task Team WIP (Work in Progress) Area (Optional)

Note that Suppliers may optionally choose to develop WIP Information Artefacts within the
MMRCL Task Team Data Environment.

On request, MMRCL shall provide each Task Team with a secure WIP (Work in Progress)
working area, where the Supplier can author and check Information Artefacts in advance of
issuing to the relevant Shared or Published Area of the Project Data Environment should the
Supplier choose to work this way

The Task Team WIP Area of the CDE is where a Task Team can develop content using their
organisations systems and tools. This is the only area of the CDE where Information Artefacts
are to be produced and / or edited.

Access to each Task Team’s WIP Area shall be restricted to those Task Team members who are
authorised (by the Task Team Manager) to author Information Artefacts. Information
Artefacts within this area of the CDE are not to be disseminated or used by other Task Teams,
or the Employer, for any purpose.

All WIP Information Artefacts shall carry a preliminary revision that includes the major
revision and minor version and the suitability ‘S0 – Non Verified Data’ (refer to Appendix D:
CDE – High Level Workflow).

Before Information Artefacts are shared with other Task Teams and other parties including
the Employer, the Task Team Manager shall make sure that all checks and reviews, as
applicable for the purpose for which the Information Artefact is being shared (as set out in
Section 8), have been carried out. The Task Team Manager shall then approve the Information
Artefacts for issuing to the Project Shared Area (forming part of the Project Data
Environment).

Before issuing Information Artefacts to the Project Shared Area, the Task Team Manager shall
make sure that the applicable suitability code and revision have been designated (refer to
Section 8).

5.2.2 Project Shared Area

The purpose of the Project Shared Area (of the Project Data Environment), is to serve as a
‘single source of truth’ for each Task Team’s issued Information Artefacts. Only Information
Artefacts within this area of the CDE are to be referenced by other Task Teams and other
parties including the Employer. The Information Artefacts are to be used in accordance with
assigned suitability codes. Refer to MMRCL CAD Standard [Ref 4] for a list of suitability codes.

Only Information Artefacts with applicable suitability code and revision, refer to MMRCL CAD
Standard [Ref 4], that have been approved by the applicable Task Team Manager are to be
held within the Project Shared Area of the CDE.

8|Page
 All Information Artefacts in the Project Shared Area of the CDE shall be read-only and shall not
to be edited by any Task Team or any other party (including the Employer).

Where changes to the Information Artefacts are required, a new version shall be created and
the revision incremented, ‘+1’ and the minor version reinstated. Refer to MMRCL CAD
Standard [Ref 4]. The new version shall be placed in the Task Team WIP Area and the old
version retained in the Project Archive Area of the CDE.

Before accepting the Information Artefacts and issuing to the Project Published Area, the
Project Manager shall make sure that:

 all relevant approvals are in place and the acceptance criteria have been met
 the applicable suitability code and revision have been assigned

5.2.3 Project Published Area

As part of the Project Data Environment, the Project Published Area of the CDE holds all the
Information Artefacts which have been accepted by the Project Manager.

Only Information Artefacts that have been accepted, meet the acceptance criteria and have
been assigned an applicable suitability code and revision (refer to MMRCL CAD Standard
[Ref4]) are to be held within the Project Published Area.

All Information Artefacts in this area of the CDE shall be read-only and shall not to be edited
by any Task Team, or any other party (including the Employer).

Where changes to the Information Artefacts are required a new version of the file shall be:

 created, its revision incremented, ‘+1’ from its previous revision and the minor version
reinstated (refer to MMRCL CAD Standard [Ref 4])
 placed in the WIP Area and the old version retained in the Archive area of the CDE

9|Page
5.2.4 Archive

The Archive area of the CDE (within both the Task Team Data Environment and Project Data
Environment) shall hold inactive and / or superseded Information Artefacts.

Information Artefacts in the Archive area are not to be amended or updated.

5.3 Information Security and Access

5.3.1 General

Security and access to the data and information held in each area of the CDE shall be assigned
according to CDE Roles and Competencies.

5.3.2 CDE Roles and CDE Competencies

All Task Team members and other parties including the Employer’s team shall be assigned to a
CDE Role as defined in Section 7. Access to the Area(s) of the CDE shall be determined by
these Roles.

Persons who are required to perform specific tasks (create, edit, approve, or accept) in a given
area of the CDE shall be assigned the appropriate CDE Role.

Note: Although a project team member can be assigned one or more Competency, they
shall not approve Information Artefacts that they have authored.

6. INFORMATION EXCHANGES
6.1 Task Team Data Environment

When Information Artefacts to be shared with others shall be:

 approved by the Task Team Manager

 issued to the Project Data Environment and a version retained in the Task Team
Shared Area

10 | P a g e
6.2 Project Data Environment

Information Artefacts shall only to be shared with other Task Teams or other parties include
the Employer, through the Project Data Environment.

Information Artefacts to be shared, can be copied from the Project Data Environment to the
Task Team’s Shared Area for (read-only) use, in accordance with the assigned suitability.

The MMRCL CDE is to be used as the Project Data Environment. The Project Data Environment
has been configured to allow all Task Team Managers and the Employer to issue Information
Artefacts, approved by the Task Team Manager, to the Project Shared Area; all other Task
Team members have read-only access to the Project Shared Area.

Information Artefacts shall be shared, as a minimum:

 when a change to the design occurs which may impact another Task Team
 when a Task Team needs more space than that which has been allocated in order to
meet design requirements and / or connection points / location of integration
changes
 for design review meetings
 at each of the agreed project stages (in line with the Accepted Programme), at which
time the Production Information and / or Handover Information shall be in
accordance with MMRCL Standards (see Section 12.1).

Details of information exchanges between the Supplier and Sub-contractor(s) are to be

included within the BIM Execution Plan, to be provided by the Supplier.

6.3 Supplier Responsibility

Before publishing Information Artefacts to the Project Shared Area Task Team Managers shall:

 make sure that Information Artefacts are review and checked in accordance with the
suitability code for which Artefact is being shared
 make sure that the appropriate suitability code is assigned
 make sure that the appropriate revision code is assigned
 make sure that all mandatory metadata is assigned

In addition to the above, the Supplier shall make sure that all Information Artefacts, to be
shared for Employer review and acceptance are:

 developed to a level of detail, as agreed within the MDPT and in accordance with
agreed acceptance criteria
 checked, reviewed and approved in accordance with all relevant standards
 delivered in accordance with agreed project dates, the MIDP(s), MDPT, SMP and BEP

11 | P a g e
6.4 Site Information (including Survey)

6.4.1 Site Information

If Site Information is to be provided to the Supplier then this shall be documented within the
MIDP and issued as part of the tender documents.

A list of the available Site Information to be provided by the Employer, along with its
suitability for purpose, shall be documented in the MIDP by the Employer.

All Site Information shall be distributed through the Employer’s Project Data Environment.

6.5 Employer Document Control (Employer use only)

The following systems are the Employer’s internal solutions for the management of
Information Artefacts.

Table 6.1 – Data / Information Systems

System Data Contact
Bentley AssetWise Non-Graphical Data and OSO
Document renditions
Bentley ProjectWise CAD data OSO
CMS (TBD) Non-Graphical Data OSO

All Information Artefacts, as per the agreed MIDP shall be distributed, by the Employer’s
Document Controller, through the applicable system (as per Table 6-1).

7. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES (for Information Artefacts)

The purpose of this section is to define the roles and responsibilities anticipated to be
required in order to produce and manage Information Artefacts. The emphasis is on
ownership, responsibility and authority. These are in addition to roles and responsibilities
already defined within the contract.

The Supplier shall maintain a list of persons assigned to each of these roles. It should be noted
that project team members can be allocated one or more of these responsibilities as
necessary.

7.1 Design Coordination Manager (appointed by the Supplier)

The Design Coordination Manager (also known as the Design Manager on some contracts)
responsibilities include:

 providing the single point of contact for all communications between the design and
construction teams
 making sure that all design deliverables, including that of sub-contractors, designers
and specialist designers are integrate with the construction programme

12 | P a g e
  making sure that that design deliverables are delivered in accordance with the agreed
programme and MIDP(s).

7.2 Lead Designer (appointed by the Supplier)

The Lead Designer responsibilities include:

 making sure that all Information Artefacts have been listed in the MIDP(s) and agreed
by all parties
 making sure that the project Zones (used to segment the project into manageable
subdivisions) are defined and maintained for the duration of the works (it is
anticipated that a shared Zone Model File shall be maintained for this purpose)
 managing coordination and integration of the design, including the development and
approvals of the Information Artefacts
 making sure the design is fully co-ordinated and integrated across all disciplines,
existing infrastructure and any adjacent works
 Make sure all Information Artefacts are strictly controlled and shared through the
Project Data Environment

7.3 Task Team Managers (appointed by the Supplier)

The Task Team Manager responsibilities include:

 the production of the design output for a particular task, or set of tasks allocated to
the Task Team
 making sure that all checks and reviews, as applicable for the purpose for which the
Information Artefact is to be shared (refer to Section 8), have been carried out
 approving of the Task Team Information Artefacts for issuing to the Project Shared
Area
 providing authorisation for access to the Task Team WIP Area

7.4 Interface Manager (appointed by the Supplier)

The Interface Manager responsibilities include:

 as part of the Task Team, managing the spatial interface with other Tasks (the volume
strategy determines the spatial allocation for each Task Team)
 proactively proposing resolutions to co-ordination clashes

For example: If a task requires additional space (i.e. the mechanical task team need to
increase the area required for ventilation units) the interface manager for that task will
discuss the impact of making additional space available with interface managers whose tasks
are/or maybe affected

13 | P a g e
7.5 Project Information Manager (appointed by the Supplier)

The Project Information Manager responsibilities include:

 making sure that the BEP:

o has been completed
o is agreed with the Employer
o is briefed to all Task Teams and other Parties including the Employer
o is managed through the project change control procedures
 making sure that project processes are fully complied with and that collaborative
behaviours pervade across the project
 providing the focal point for all Information Artefacts management issues on the
project
 making sure that all Information Artefacts are compliant with the requirements of the
contract and all applicable MMRCL Standards
 making sure that all Information Artefacts are managed through the CDE including
that all mandatory meta-data have been captured and populated
 making sure that the Supplier, sub-contractors or supplier of the Supplier and others
(as applicable) have continued and appropriate access to the Project Data
Environment
 providing clear instructions to the Project Team including on the following areas:
o what Information Artefacts are required, by whom and for what purpose
o who will generate the Information Artefacts and maintain then
o how it will be sorted and distributed
o how frequently it is shared
o what actions should be taken on receipt of the Information Artefacts

7.6 CAD Coordinator (appointed by the Supplier)

The CAD Coordinator responsibilities include:

 making sure that there is a consistent approach to modelling assets physical and
functional characteristics across the project
 coordinating the project needs for IT solutions
 responsibility to the Task Team Managers and the Project Information Manager

7.7 CAD Manager (appointed by the Supplier)

CAD Manager responsibilities include:

 making sure that CAD Information Artefacts are compliant with agreed standards
 making sure that all CAD files are shared using the agreed IT solutions

14 | P a g e
7.8 Project Manager (appointed by the Employer)

The Project Manager responsibilities include:

 Making sure that that only compliant Information Artefacts are accepted and if
applicable, making sure that any concessions required are in place before hand

7.9 Designated Technical Lead / Manager (appointed by the Employer)

The Designated Technical Lead / Manager responsibilities include:

 Registration of notifications and submittals

 Making sure that the Information Delivery Plan (comprising the Task Information
Delivery Plan and Modelling Information Delivery Plan) covering submittals from the
Supplier has been prepared
 Distributing within GC and MMRCL as appropriate
 Distributing to internal parties including Operations and Maintenance and external
parties through MMRCL as required
 Collating comments and responses and convening working group meetings with the
Supplier to resolve issues in presence of MMRCL representatives wherever required
and receive resubmissions as required
 Convening technical, cost, value management and programming meetings within GC
and MMRCL to properly review the content of deliverables
 Preparing reports on submissions, summarizing key issues, cost variations and
programming impacts with associated recommendations

7.10 Lead Reviewer (appointed by the Employer)

The Lead Reviewer responsibilities include:

 Preparing a check list of reviewable data and inputs required by/from other disciplines
 Responding to the deliverables by the stipulated deadlines, and signing off as
acceptable or otherwise each aspect of the design submission
 Delegating responsibility for acceptance and sign-off in cases of leave or other
absence
 Identifying other parties or reviewers that require to have input into the review
 Reviewing comments provided by reviewers before issuing to back to the Supplier

7.11 Employer Information Manager (appointed by the Employer)

The Employer Information Manager responsibilities include:

 Completing, maintaining and implementing this document and making sure that it is
available to all Task Teams and other Parties including the Employer
 managing the processes for information exchanges between the Supplier and
Employer
 making sure that project processes are being followed by all Task Teams and other
Parties, including the Employer
 providing the focal point for Information Modelling and Management issues

15 | P a g e
  making sure that collaborative behaviours are embraced

7.12 Document Controller (appointed by the Employer)

The Document Controller responsibilities include:

 making sure that project document control procedures are being followed by all Task
Teams members and any other relevant Parties
 making sure that all Information Artefacts are delivered using the agreed IT solutions
 making sure that only Information Artefacts listed and agreed to be delivered in the
MIDP(s), are delivered and accepted
 making sure all Information Artefacts, accepted by, or on behalf of the Project
Manager, are distributed to the applicable MMRCL system (refer to Section 6.5)

8. INFORMATION ARTEFACTS: CHECKS, APPROVALS & ACCEPTANCE

8.1 Checks and Approvals

Before any Information Artefact is issued to the Project Shared Area, it shall first be checked
and approved by the Task Team Manager. The level of checking and approval required will
depend on the purpose for which the Information Artefact is being shared.

See Appendix D: High Level Workflow

 Sharing for Coordination

Information Artefacts shall be shared for coordination purposes (with the suitability,
S1 – Issued for Coordination) in accordance with the MIDPs.

Before being issued to the Project Shared Area, all Information Artefacts to be shared
for coordination purposes shall be:

o checked and verified against all applicable data and information standards
(including the SMP and BEP)
o checked for technical content (in accordance with the Design Management Plan)
o approved for issue by the Task Team Manager
Information Artefacts, which have been shared for coordination, shall be used by other
Task Teams and / or stakeholders to coordinate their design

 Sharing for Review and Comment

Information Artefacts shall be shared for review and comment purposes (with the
suitability ‘S3 - For Review and Comment’) in accordance with the MIDPs.

The Circumstances under which Information Artefacts are issued for review and
comments shall be specifically identified within the MIDPs but these may include:

16 | P a g e
 o If there is a change to a Task Team’s design which potentially impacts on other
Task Teams and / or stakeholders
o the Task Team requires additional space than that already allocated and / or
connection points
o The Task Team requires location integration changes
Where Information Artefacts are to be used, for example in Design Reviews,
Coordination meetings, Inter-Disciplinary Design Review, Inter-Disciplinary Design
Checks, they shall be shared for comment.

Before being issued to the Project Shared Area, all Information Artefacts to be
shared for review and comment purposes shall be:
o checked and verified against all applicable data and information standards
(including the SMP and BEP)
o checked for technical content (in accordance with the Design Management Plan)
o approved for issue by the Task Team Manager

Task Teams and / or other Parties, including the Employer, shall comment as
applicable to make sure issues are identified and resolved.

Note that, Task Teams and / or other Parties, including the Employer, shall not
change or coordinate their design based on Information Artefacts which have been
issued for Review and Comment.

 Sharing for Employer Review and Acceptance

Information Artefacts shall be shared for Employer Review and Approval (S4 – Issued
for Approval) in accordance with the MIDPs.

At the agreed project stages, as captured in the MIDP(s) and aligned with the
accepted programme, Information Artefacts shall be shared using the suitability, S4 –
Issued for Approval.

Before being approved, by the Task Team Manager and published to the Project
Shared Area for Employer Review and Acceptance, the Supplier shall make sure that
all Information Artefacts:

o are checked and verified against all applicable data and information standards
(including the SMP and BEP)
o have the technical content checked (in accordance with the agreed DMP)
o meet design requirements (appropriate for the stage of the project at which it is
being accepted)
o comply with all applicable MMRCL Standards
o are developed to the Level of Development, agreed within the MIDP(s)
o are approved by the Lead Designer as a coordinated and complete dataset; CAD
files, Non-Graphical Data and Documentation cross-referenced and aligned
o all Model File content is approved by the Lead Designer as being spatially
coordinated

17 | P a g e
8.2 Employer Acceptance

Prior to Information Artefacts being accepted by the Project Manager and moved to the
Project Published Area (of the Project Data Environment), all acceptance criteria shall be in
place; and any comments returned to the Supplier for incorporation prior to acceptance.

When accepted, the Employer shall move the Information Artefacts to the Project Published
Area, in accordance with the Document Control procedure.

Document Renditions are NOT to be accepted until the Model File(s), Composite Model(s),
Non-Graphical Data and Document Definition(s) used to produce them have first been
accepted.

9. UNIQUE FILE IDENTIFICATION

All Information Artefacts shall be allocated a unique file identifier (file ID).

The file ID shall be composed of joining the fields (metadata) as defined in compliance with
the MMRCL - Engineering Assurance File Naming Convention [Ref 5]

10. METADATA
In addition to the metadata required for the unique file ID, all Information Artefacts shall be
attributed the metadata shown in Table 10-1.

Table 10.1 – Mandatory Metadata

Field Example
Unique File See Section 9 Unique File Identification
Identification

Revision P04

Suitability S3 (For Comment)

Title Station Lift Shaft 1

Created (Author)

Approved

Authorised

Grid Reference MMRCL Project Grid

System

Security MMRCL Restricted

Classification

18 | P a g e
 Lifecycle Stage Detailed Design

Project / Contract

11. DEFINITIONS

Table 12.1 – Definitions

Term Definition
BIM Execution Plan A document within which the proposed approach, capability, capacity
(BEP) and competencies of the prospective or selected Supplier sets out the
response to the EIRs
CAD (Computer Electronic file produced using a CAD application (such as MicroStation or
Aided Design) File AutoCAD)
CDE (Common Data The environment, which encapsulates the processes set out in SMP and
Environment) BIM Execution Plan, for the production, use and management of Model
File(s), Composite Model(s), Non-Graphical Data, Document Definition(s)
and Document Rendition(s) as agreed between the Parties and set out in
the MIDP(s)
Composite Model Computer Aided Design (CAD) file(s) displaying one or more Model Files
(attached as references), for the purpose of performing coordination
activities and / or compiling Document Definitions
Documentation A collection of Document Renditions
Document Data File produced, containing a view of the Non-Graphical Data and / or
Definition Model File(s) and / or Composite Model(s), to derive meaning for a
specific purpose
Document A data file in an immutable format, derived from a Document Definition
Rendition
Handover Model File(s), Composite Model(s), Non-Graphical Data, Document
Information Definition(s) and Document Rendition(s) which have been agreed
between the Parties to be produced, updated, maintained and delivered
as set out in the MIDP(s)
until the Defects Certificate has been issued
Information The collective term for Production Information, Handover Information
Artefacts and any other model or drawing deliverables identified in the within the
MIDP and IMPDT – all Information Artefacts shall be authored, shared,
published and archived within the CDE
MIDP (Master A forward looking schedule of the Model File(s), Composite Model(s),
Information Non-Graphical Data, Document Definition(s) and Document Rendition(s)
Delivery Plan) which are to be produced, updated, maintained and delivered as
Information Artefacts by the Supplier
Model File Computer Aided Design (CAD) file(s) containing shape(s) with defined
origin, orientation and dimensions, communicating the physical
characteristics of the works. A Model File may also include Non-Graphical
Data, associated to the CAD file(s) and / or shape(s), identifying the
functional characteristics of the works
Non-Graphical Data file containing alphanumeric characters, communicating the
Data physical and functional characteristics of the works

19 | P a g e
Production The Model File(s), Composite Model(s), Non-Graphical Data, Document
Information Definition(s) and Document Rendition(s) which have been agreed
between the Parties to be produced, updated and maintained in order to
provide the Works and be delivered, during the design and construction
stages of the Project, as set out in the MIDP(s).

Referred to within PAS1192-2 as the PIM (Project Information Model).

Task Team Any team assembled to complete a task, which is typically discipline
based (e.g. architectural task team, structural task team, bridge task
team, track task team etc.)

20 | P a g e
APPENDIX A: DOCUMENT MAP

Employers
Employers Information
Information Requirements
Requirements

Scope of
EIR IM Protocol Contract
Services

Project
Project Information
Information Requirements
Requirements Handover
Handover
Requirements
Requirements

Design,
EIR Standards, Document BIM Execution
Review &
Methods & Control Plan
Acceptance
Procedures Procedure (Template)
Procedure

Master
Information TBD
Delivery Plan

Commercial Employer Supplier

Document Document Document

21 | P a g e
APPENDIX B: CDE (COMMON DATA ENVIRONMENT)
For the CDE End to End Process please refer to the following procedure:
 MMRCL Level 2 BIM E2E Workflow Process [Ref 10]

22 | P a g e
APPENDIX C: INFORMATION ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

NMRCL/GC
NMRCL/GC Consultant
Consultant // Contractor
Contractor

Project Manager Project Manager

Designated Project Information

Information Manager Lead Designer,
Technical Lead Manager
Design Coordination Manager

Document Task Team Document

Lead Reviewer
Controller Manager(s) Controller

CAD Coordinator Interface Manager

CAD Manager

Task Team Roles

Notes:
Notes:

The
The purpose
purpose of
of this
this diagram
diagram isis only
only to
to illustrate
illustrate the
the primary
primary information
information management
management roles
roles
Lines
Lines of
of authority
authority may
may vary
vary
An
An individual
individual may
may undertake
undertake oneone or
or more
more roles
roles

23 | P a g e
APPENDIX D: CDE – HIGH LEVEL WORKFLOW
For the CDE High Level Workflows please refer to the following procedures:
 Drawing Information Artefacts: MMRCL Level 3 Drawing Process [Ref 11]
 Model Information Artefacts: MMRCL Level 3 Model Process [Ref 13)

24 | P a g e
 BIM CDE End to End Deliverables Workflow Process
Key/Legend DDC Contractor GC/MMRCL CDE Custom eB-PW Connector

1. Create Drawing
Deliverable(s) as [Link] Add Doc 8. Non CAD 15. Create
per agreed Task Wizard for single Placeholder container Transmittal for [Link]
Information placeholders created in MDL 14. Prepare Package(s) for Package Receipt of GC
Document Controller

A Deliverables or Bulk Import Utility CAD? No Structure Submission in accordance submission(s) Transmittal
Plan(s) and Scope for multiples 9. Notify responsible C Level A? Yes End
with Task Information 16. Send containing DRCF
of Services under 3. Structure MDL Task Team of Delivery Plan Transmittal 24. Notify Task Team
DDC

Conditions of deliverables Yes deliverables Notification to GC of review results

Contract DC
4. Drawing No
MMRCL Placeholders Created
CDE Doc in PWDI Contract
Creation Work Package Folders
Wizard

10. Produce non

B 5. WIP CAD
deliverable(s)
11. Hold internal
reviews where
relevant
Task Team(s)

12. Upload non

CAD deliverable
DDC

6. Shared to CDE when 13. Files &

ready for Metadata
submission published into
Level B; C; D CAD deliverable
dgn
Non CAD placeholders
imodel Level B; C; D
7. Published
pdf

19. GC Lead Reviewer create

Employers Rep

Deliverables Review Comment

22. GC DC update Review
17. GC DC Acknowledge Receipt Form(DRCF) and attach to review
Outcomes on CDE
of DCC Transmittal/Submission workflow
deliverables
D & notify GC Manager 20. Assign Reviewers including
20. Issue completed
18. GC Manager Initiate Review MMRCL where relevant
DRCSF via Transmittal to
Process & Assign Lead Reviewer 21. Consolidate Review Comments
DDC DC.
& prepare final DRCSF including
markups
 Management of Drawing Data
Task
CAD Senior PDF Drawings Suitability
Activities Revision Action Designer
Check Designer
Design
Rendition
GC MMRCL
Workflow Code
Manager
Task Initiation

1 – Design Task assignment

Inputs: Programme Requirement
Outputs: eB Placeholder document &
automatically created WIP Model R C
placeholder in ProjectWise

2 - Create eB Placeholder (Deliverable)

Inputs: Allocated design task
Assetwise

Outputs: eB Placeholder document and

automatically created WIP Model (i) R
or Drawing (ii) placeholder in
ProjectWise

3 – Produce CAD Drawing from Approved

Models
From 7,
Inputs: - eB Created Placeholder
8, or 10
- Models Approved for
Publication
References: CAD Standards Work in
Outputs: Referenced WIP CAD Drawings Progress

Supersede R

4 – Automated CAD Compliance Check

Inputs: Referenced WIP CAD Drawings

Increase Major Revision (e.g. P01.1 to P02.1)

Increase Minor Version (e.g. P01.1 to P01.2)

References: CAD Standards R

Work in Progress (WIP) Drawings

CAD QA
Outputs: Passed: WIP CAD Drawings
Failed: Non-compliant Drawingl S0
returned to WIP

5a – CAD Design Content Check

Inputs: CAD Compliant WIP Drawings
References: Design Requirements; Standards;
Legislation; Interfacing Data R
Outputs: Design Compliant CAD Drawings

Technical
5b – CAD Drawing Approval Check
Inputs: CAD Compliant WIP Drawings
References: Design Requirements; Output
Purpose R
Outputs: Drawings Approved for
Authorisation (S4)

6 – Authorise CAD Drawings for Publication

Inputs: Drawings Approved for
Authorisation (S4)
Authorise for
Outputs: Drawings Authorised for R S4
Shared

Publication Publication

7 – Publish Authorised CAD Drawings

Inputs: Authorised CAD Drawings
Outputs: Published Authorised CAD R
Drawings ready for PDF Rendition
& import to AssetWise (eb)
A or B
Authorised S2 or S3
To eB for D1 to D4
8 – Revise Authorised CAD Drawings Publication As Per
Inputs: Authorised CAD Drawings BS1192
Published

Outputs: Published Authorised CAD

Drawings ready for PDF Rendition R
& import to AssetWise (eb)
 Management of Model Data
Task
CAD Senior Models Suitability
Activities Revision Action Designer
Check Designer
Design GC MMRCL
Workflow Code
Manager
Task Initiation

1 – Design Task assignment

Inputs: Programme Requirement
Outputs: eB Placeholder document &
automatically created WIP Model
R C
placeholder in ProjectWise

2 - Create eB Placeholder
Inputs: Allocated design task
Outputs: eB Placeholder document and
automatically created WIP Model (i) R
or Drawing (ii) placeholder in
ProjectWise
eB

3 – Edit Model
Inputs: - eB Created Placeholder From 7,
- Allocated Design Task 8, or 10
References: - Design Requirements
- Standards
- Legislation Work in
- Interfacing Models approved for Progress
Coordination
Outputs: WIP Model in ProjectWise Supersede R

4 – Automated CAD Compliance Check

Inputs: WIP Model
References: CAD Standards
Increase Major Revision (e.g. P01.1 to P02.1)

Increase Minor Version (e.g. P01.1 to P01.2)

Outputs: Passed: CAD Compliant WIP Model R CAD QA

Failed: Non-compliant Model
returned to WIP

5a – CAD Technical Check

Inputs: CAD Compliant WIP Model
References: CAD Standards
Outputs: Passed: CAD Compliant WIP Model R
Failed: Non-compliant Model
returned to WIP as new minor S0
version
Technical
5b – CAD Technical Check Check
Inputs: CAD Compliant WIP Model
References: CAD Standards
Outputs: Passed: CAD Compliant WIP Model R
Failed: Non-compliant Model
Work in Progress (WIP) Models

returned to WIP as new minor

version

6a – Engineering Content Check

Inputs: CAD Compliant WIP Model
References: Design Requirements; Standards;
Legislation; Interfacing Models R
approved for Coordination
Outputs: Checked WIP Model
Engineering
6b – Engineering Content Check Check
Inputs: Checked WIP Model
References: Design Requirements; Output
Purpose R
Outputs: Model Approved for Coordination
(Shared)

7a – Manage Task Coordination / Review

Inputs: Model Approved for Task

Coordination R Reference
Outputs: Task Coordinated Models

Task
To 3
7b – Approve Task Coordinated Models Coordination

Inputs: Task Coordinated Models

Outputs: Models Approved for Group R
Coordination

8a – Manage Group Coordination / Review S1

Inputs: Model Approved for Group
Coordination R Reference
Outputs: Group Coordinated Models

To 3
8b – Approve Group Coordinated Models Group
Shared Models

Coordination
Inputs: Group Coordinated Models
Outputs: Models coordinated, approved, and
fit for Authorisation (S4) R

From
9&10
 Management of ProjectWise Model Data
Task
CAD Senior Models Suitability
Activities Revision Action Designer
Check Designer
Design GC NMRCL
Workflow Code
Manager
9 – Authorise CAD Drawings for Publication
Mod
Inputs: Models Approved for
Rev
Authorisation (S4)
Authorise for
Outputs: Drawings Authorised for R S4
Shared

Publication Publication

10a – Publish Authorised CAD Drawings

Inputs: Authorised CAD Drawings
Outputs: Published Authorised CAD R
Drawings ready for PDF Rendition
& import to AssetWise (eb)
A or B
Authorised S2 or S3
To eB for D1 to D4
10b – Revise Authorised CAD Drawings
Inputs: Authorised CAD Drawings Publication As Per
Outputs: Published Authorised CAD BS1192
Published

Drawings ready for PDF Rendition R

& import to AssetWise (eb)